ABB RobotStudio Operating manual
Below you will find brief information for RobotStudio. RobotStudio is a PC application for modeling, offline programming, and simulation of robot cells. The manual describes how to create, program and simulate robot cells and stations using RobotStudio. This manual also explains the terms and concepts related to both offline and online programming.
Advertisement
Advertisement
ABB Robotics
Operating manual
RobotStudio
Trace back information:
Workspace R13-2 version a2
Checked in 2013-09-30
Skribenta version 4.0.378
Operating manual
RobotStudio
5.60
Document ID: 3HAC032104-001
Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damages to persons or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written permission.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB.
The original language for this publication is English. Any other languages that are supplied have been translated from English.
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
ABB AB
Robotics Products
Se-721 68 Västerås
Sweden
Table of contents
Table of contents
Hardware concepts ..................................................................................
RobotWare concepts ...............................................................................
Concepts of programming .........................................................................
Coordinate systems .................................................................................
Robot axis configurations .........................................................................
Libraries, geometries and CAD files ............................................................
Ribbon, tabs and groups ...........................................................................
The Paths & Targets browser ....................................................................
The Modeling browser ..............................................................................
The Controller browser .............................................................................
The Output window ..................................................................................
The Controller Status window ....................................................................
Two robot systems in same task frame position ............................................
Two robot systems in different task frame positions .......................................
Creating a system with external axes automatically ................................................
Track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 ........................................................
Track motion of type IRBTx004 ..................................................................
Importing a station component ..................................................................
Converting CAD formats ...........................................................................
Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries .................................................
Setting the local origin of an object .............................................................
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
5
Table of contents
About programming MultiMove ..................................................................
Setting up the MultiMove ..........................................................................
Testing the MultiMove ..............................................................................
Tuning the motion behavior .......................................................................
5 Deploying and distributing 147
System Builder Overview ..........................................................................
Viewing system properties ........................................................................
Building a new system .............................................................................
Creating a system from backup ..................................................................
Downloading a system to a controller ..........................................................
Creating boot media ................................................................................
Examples using the System Builder when offline ...........................................
6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots ..............................
6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis ....
6.4.9.3 Options settings for systems with positioners ...................................
6
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Table of contents
Unpack and Work ....................................................................................
Frame from Three Points ..........................................................................
Create Targets on Edge ............................................................................
Smart Component ...................................................................................
Smart Component Editor ..........................................................................
The Compose tab ....................................................................................
The Properties and Bindings tab ................................................................
The Signals and Connections tab ...............................................................
Basic Smart Components .........................................................................
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
7
Table of contents
The Simulation Watch window ...................................................................
8
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Table of contents
12.10.1 Commands for testing and debugging .........................................................
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
9
Table of contents
10
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Overview of this manual
Overview of this manual
About this manual
RobotStudio is a PC application for modeling, offline programming, and simulation of robot cells. This manual describes how to create, program and simulate robot cells and stations using RobotStudio. This manual also explains the terms and concepts related to both offline and online programming.
Usage
Who should read this manual?
This manual is intended for RobotStudio users, proposal engineers, mechanical designers, offline programmers, robot technicians, service technicians, PLC programmers, Robot programmers, and Robot System integrators.
Prerequisites
This manual should be used when working with the offline or online functions of
RobotStudio.
The reader should have basic knowledge of:
• Robot programming
• Generic Windows handling
• 3D CAD programs
Organization of chapters
The operating manual is structured in the following chapters:
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
Contents
Contains installation instructions, basic explanations of the terms and concepts related to robotics and programming, and a description of the GUI.
Describes how to build stations in RobotStudio.
This includes importing and configuring the equipment to be simulated, as well as testing the reachability for finding the optimal station layout.
Programming robots on page 105
Describes how to create robot movements, I/O signals, process instructions and logics in a RAPID program for the robots. It also describes how to run and test the program.
Simulating programs on page 137
Describes how to simulate and validate robot programs.
Deploying and distributing on page 147
Describes how to transfer systems between Robot-
Studio’s virtual controllers and real IRC5 controllers, how to copy programs, how to package an active station for moving between RobotStudio
PCs, and how to capture a screen.
Covers the functionality of the Minimal Installation, describing such online functions as building systems (with offline examples), handling I/O and events, and configuring systems.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
11
Overview of this manual
Continued
Chapter
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Contents
Describes the options to create new station, create new robot system, connect to a controller, save station as viewer, and RobotStudio options.
Describes the controls required for building stations, creating systems, programming paths and placing items.
Describes the controls for creating and grouping components, creating bodies, measurements and
CAD operations.
Describes the controls for setting up, configuring, controlling, monitoring, and recording simulations.
Describes the controls for managing a real controller and also the controls for synchronization, configuration and tasks assigned to the virtual controller (VC).
Describes the features of the RAPID editor, management of RAPID files and other controls for
RAPID programming.
Describes the control for PowerPacs .
Describes the options available from the context menus.
Describes the ScreenMaker development tool, how to manage projects in ScreenMaker and the various menus and commands used in the application.
References
Reference
Product manual - IRC5
IRC5 of design M2004
Product manual - IRC5
IRC5 of design 14
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant
Technical reference manual - RAPID overview
Technical reference manual - System parameters
Application manual - MultiMove
Application manual - Conveyor tracking
Application manual - SafeMove
Application manual - Electronic Position Switches
Application manual - Integrated Vision
Document Id
3HAC021313-001
3HAC047136-001
3HAC16590-1
3HAC16580-1
3HAC17076-1
3HAC021272-001
3HAC16587-1
3HAC030053-001
3HAC027709-001
3HAC044251-001
Revisions
Revision
A
Description
First revision, called RobotStudio 2008, released for Partner Days. The entire manual has been adapted to the new GUI, in which RobotStudio line has been integrated.
On-
Continues on next page
12
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Overview of this manual
Continued
Revision
B
C
D
E
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Description
Released with RobotStudio 5.12.
The following updates were made in the manual:
•
•
Create Conveyor mechanism on page 319
•
Conveyor Simulation on page 357
•
Two robot systems in same task frame position on page 79
•
Two robot systems in different task frame positions on page 81
•
Creating a system with external axes automatically on page 83
•
Track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 on page 85
•
Track motion of type IRBTx004 on page 86
•
The Operator Window on page 61
•
•
Recording the simulation on page 355
• Viewpoint
•
Released with RobotStudio 5.13.
• Merged chapters The Offline tab and The Online tab
• Added the missing information from RobotStudio Online manual.
• Integrated ScreenMaker. See
.
Added the following new contents:
•
•
The Simulation Watch window on page 296
•
The Documents window on page 63
•
•
Updated the changes related to handling Task Frames.
• Updated
Modifying Task frame on page 409
.
• Added
• Updated
Creating a system from layout on page 208 .
Released with RobotStudio 5.13.02.
The ScreenMaker tutorial was updated. See
.
Released with RobotStudio 5.14.
• Added
The Controller Status window on page 59
.
• Updated the sections
and
.
• Moved
RAPID Watch window on page 439
to the chapter Common features in Online and Offline tabs.
• Updated
The Documents window on page 63
(added Station mode).
• Updated
Creating and loading a Station Viewer on page 195
(Record to Viewer)
• Added
• Added The 3D View group.
• Updated
(added Export to XML and updated Base Component menu).
• Updated
(improved task frame description).
• Updated
Supported 3D formats on page 38
(information on CAD
Converters)
Added the following new contents:
•
Continues on next page
13
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued
Revision
F
G
H
Description
•
•
•
Using the RAPID Profiler on page 437
• Markup
•
•
External Axis Interpolation on page 460
•
Auto Configuration on page 451
•
The following are the ScreenMaker updates:
• Added
ScreenMaker Doctor on page 526 .
• Added new controls
and
.
• Updated
Creating a new project on page 507
(added pre-defined templates).
• Updated
Controller object data binding on page 524
(added information on shared data).
Released with RobotStudio 5.14.02.
Added the following new contents:
• Gearbox Heat Prediction
•
External Axis Wizard on page 211
Added the following new contents in Settings tab:
•
•
Selecting a Workobject on page 244
•
Updated
Creating boot media on page 174
(added information on creating a new system)
Added information on Logic Expression in
Signals and Properties on page 278
Added a Note for Call .Net Method in
of the ScreenMaker tab
Added information on I-start in
for the Modifying a system section
Added information on Offs in the Note for
in
Using Adjust Robtargets
Added a Note for the Execute button in
Using Adjust Robtargets on page 431
Added information on Always on top in Create Markup of the Markup section
Updated Note for Using ScreenMaker Doctor in
ScreenMaker Doctor on page 526
Released with RobotStudio 5.14.02.01.
Added
How to activate RobotStudio - Network License on page 43
Released with RobotStudio 5.14.03.
Added a note regarding the usage of .NET DLLs under
Added scenarios in
Errors fixed by ScreenMaker Doctor on page 526
Updated the procedure in Creating Markup
Updated the note in
for Adjust Robtargets
Updated the procedure for
Using Adjust Robtargets on page 431
Updated the table under LogicExpression for
Signals and Properties on page 278
Continues on next page
14
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Overview of this manual
Continued
Revision
J
K
L
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Description
Added a procedure for adding events to a menu item under
Updated the details for Creating autopath under
Updated the table showing the
Supported 3D formats on page 38
Released with RobotStudio 5.15.
In addition to the following important updates, numerous minor improvements and corrections have been made throughout the document.
Introduced the following new chapters containing both new features and also updated features;
•
, which contain features related to real and virtual controllers.
•
, which contains features related to RAPID programming.
Added the following new content:
•
•
•
•
Go to Visualization and Go to Declaration on page 463
•
•
Protected Smart Component on page 486
Updated, reworked the following sections:
•
•
RAPID Watch window on page 439
•
Installing and licensing RobotStudio on page 40
, and in particular
How to activate RobotStudio - Network License on page 43
•
•
•
and
Released with RobotStudio 5.15.01.
• Added section
What is RAPID array on page 530
.
• Added a sample code snippet to the advanced option Call .Net
Method. See
Advanced Actions on page 514 .
• Added an advanced option Call FP Standard View. See
• Added a note in the section
Controller object data binding on page 524 .
• Renamed the section ScreenMaker Doctor scenarios as Errors fixed by ScreenMaker Doctor and made some updates. See
Errors fixed by ScreenMaker Doctor on page 526
.
Released with RobotStudio 5.60.
• Removed all instances of VSTA, Import of S4 stations and Defeaturing and updated the ScreenRecorder section.
• Updated the information on Backup and save in
.
• Updated the section
with information on the new main computer DSQC1000.
• Updated the section
.
• Updated the section
.
• Added a new section
Visualizing Safety Zones in Online Monitor on page 394
in Online Monitor.
• Updated the section
• Added a new section
Migrate backup feature on page 446 .
Continues on next page
15
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued
Revision Description
• Added a new section
• Added a new section
.
16
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Product documentation, IRC5
Product documentation, IRC5
Categories for manipulator documentation
The manipulator documentation is divided into a number of categories. This listing is based on the type of information in the documents, regardless of whether the products are standard or optional.
All documents listed can be ordered from ABB on a DVD. The documents listed are valid for IRC5 manipulator systems.
Product manuals
Manipulators, controllers, DressPack/SpotPack, and most other hardware will be delivered with a Product manual that generally contains:
• Safety information.
• Installation and commissioning (descriptions of mechanical installation or electrical connections).
• Maintenance (descriptions of all required preventive maintenance procedures including intervals and expected life time of parts).
• Repair (descriptions of all recommended repair procedures including spare parts).
• Calibration.
• Decommissioning.
• Reference information (safety standards, unit conversions, screw joints, lists of tools ).
• Spare parts list with exploded views (or references to separate spare parts lists).
• Circuit diagrams (or references to circuit diagrams).
Technical reference manuals
The technical reference manuals describe reference information for robotics products.
• Technical reference manual - Lubrication in gearboxes: Description of types and volumes of lubrication for the manipulator gearboxes.
• Technical reference manual - RAPID overview: An overview of the RAPID programming language.
• Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types:
Description and syntax for all RAPID instructions, functions, and data types.
• Technical reference manual - RAPID kernel: A formal description of the
RAPID programming language.
• Technical reference manual - System parameters: Description of system parameters and configuration workflows.
Application manuals
Specific applications (for example software or hardware options) are described in
Application manuals. An application manual can describe one or several applications.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
17
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product documentation, IRC5
Continued
An application manual generally contains information about:
• The purpose of the application (what it does and when it is useful).
• What is included (for example cables, I/O boards, RAPID instructions, system parameters, DVD with PC software).
• How to install included or required hardware.
• How to use the application.
• Examples of how to use the application.
Operating manuals
The operating manuals describe hands-on handling of the products. The manuals are aimed at those having first-hand operational contact with the product, that is production cell operators, programmers, and trouble shooters.
The group of manuals includes (among others):
• Operating manual - Emergency safety information
• Operating manual - General safety information
• Operating manual - Getting started, IRC5 and RobotStudio
• Operating manual - Introduction to RAPID
• Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant
• Operating manual - RobotStudio
• Operating manual - Trouble shooting IRC5, for the controller and manipulator.
18
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Safety
Safety
Safety of personnel
A robot is heavy and extremely powerful regardless of its speed. A pause or long stop in movement can be followed by a fast hazardous movement. Even if a pattern of movement is predicted, a change in operation can be triggered by an external signal resulting in an unexpected movement.
Therefore, it is important that all safety regulations are followed when entering safeguarded space.
Safety regulations
Before beginning work with the robot, make sure you are familiar with the safety regulations described in the manual Operating manual - General safety information.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
19
This page is intentionally left blank
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.1 What is RobotStudio
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.1 What is RobotStudio
RobotStudio is a PC application for modeling, offline programming, and simulation of robot cells.
RobotStudio allows you to work with an off-line controller, which is a virtual IRC5 controller running locally on your PC. This offline controller is also referred to as the virtual controller (VC). RobotStudio also allows you to work with the real physical
IRC5 controller, which is simply referred to as the real controller.
When RobotStudio is used with real controllers, it is referred to as the online mode.
When working without being connected to a real controller, or while being connected to a virtual controller, RobotStudio is said to be in offline mode.
RobotStudio offers the following installation options:
• Complete
• Custom, allowing user-customized contents and paths
• Minimal, allowing you to run RobotStudio in online mode only.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
21
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.1 Hardware concepts
1.2 Terms and concepts
1.2.1 Hardware concepts
Overview
This section introduces the hardware in a typical IRC5 robot cell. For detailed explanations, see the manuals related to IRC5 robots specified in
Standard hardware
The table below describes the standard hardware in an IRC5 robot cell.
Hardware
Robot manipulator
Control module
Drive module
FlexController
FlexPendant
Tool
Explanation
An ABB industrial robot.
Contains the main computer that controls the motion of the manipulator. This includes RAPID execution and signal handling. One control module can be connected to 1 – 4 drive modules.
A module containing the electronics that power the motors of a manipulator. The drive module can contain up to nine drive units, each controlling one manipulator joint. Since the standard robot manipulators have six joints, you usually use one drive module per robot manipulator.
The controller cabinet for the IRC5 robots. It consists of one control module and one drive module for each robot manipulator in the system.
The programming pendant, connected to the control module.
Programming on the FlexPendant is referred to as “online programming”.
A device usually mounted on the robot manipulator to allow it to perform specific tasks, such as gripping, cutting or welding.
The tool can also be stationary, see below for more information.
Optional hardware
The table below describes the optional hardware for an IRC5 robot cell.
Hardware
Track manipulator
Positioner manipulator
FlexPositioner
Stationary tool
Work piece
Explanation
A moving stand holding the robot manipulator to give it a larger work space. When the control module controls the motion of a track manipulator, it is referred to as a “Track External Axis”.
A moving stand normally holding a work piece or a fixture.
When the control module controls the motion of a positioner manipulator, it is referred to as an “External Axis”.
A second robot manipulator acting as a positioner manipulator.
It is controlled by the same control module as the positioner manipulator.
A device that stands in a fixed location. The robot manipulator picks up the work piece and brings it to the device to perform specific tasks, such as gluing, grinding or welding.
The product being worked on.
Continues on next page
22
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Hardware
Fixture
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.1 Hardware concepts
Continued
Explanation
A construction holding the work piece in a specific position so that the repeatability of the production can be maintained.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
23
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.2 RobotWare concepts
1.2.2 RobotWare concepts
Overview
This section introduces terminology regarding RobotWare. For detailed explanations, see the manuals related to IRC5 robots specified in
RobotWare
The table below describes the RobotWare terminology and concepts that can be useful when working with RobotStudio.
Concept
RobotWare
RobotWare DVD
RobotWare installation
RobotWare Key
RobotWare system
RobotWare version
Explanation
As a concept, refers to both the software used to create a RobotWare System and the RobotWare systems themselves.
Delivered with each control module. On the DVD you will find the RobotWare installation and some other useful software.
Check the Release Notes on your DVD for specifications.
When installing RobotWare on a PC, you install into the mediapool the specific versions of the files from which RobotStudio uses to create the RobotWare system.
When installing RobotStudio, only one version of RobotWare will be installed. To simulate a specific RobotWare system, the
RobotWare version used for this particular RobotWare system must be installed on your PC.
Used when you create a new RobotWare system or upgrade an existing system. The RobotWare keys unlock the RobotWare options included in the system, and determine the RobotWare version from which the RobotWare system will be built.
For IRC5 systems there are three types of RobotWare keys:
• The controller key, which specifies the controller and software options.
• The drive keys, which specify the robots in the system.
The system has one drive key for each robot it uses.
• Additional option keys, which specify additional options, like positioner external axes.
A virtual key allows you to select any RobotWare options you wish, but a RobotWare system created from a virtual key can only be used in a virtual environment such as RobotStudio.
A set of software files that, when loaded into a controller, enables all functions, configurations, data and programs controlling the robot system.
RobotWare systems are created in the RobotStudio software.
The systems can be stored and saved on a PC, as well as on the control module.
RobotWare systems can be edited by RobotStudio or the
FlexPendant.
Each RobotWare is released with a major and a minor version number, separated by a dot. The RobotWare version for IRC5 is 5.xx, where xx identifies the minor version.
When ABB releases a new robot model, a new RobotWare version will be released with support for the new robot.
Continues on next page
24
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Concept
Mediapool
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.2 RobotWare concepts
Continued
Explanation
The mediapool is a folder on the PC in which each RobotWare version is stored in a folder of its own.
The files of the mediapool are used to create and implement all the different RobotWare options. Therefore, the correct
RobotWare version must be installed in the mediapool when creating RobotWare systems or running them on virtual controllers.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
25
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.3 RAPID concepts
1.2.3 RAPID concepts
Overview
This section introduces the basic terminology of RAPID. The manuals related to
RAPID and programming are listed in
.
Terminology of the RAPID structure
The table below describes the RAPID terminology that you may come across when working with RobotStudio. The concepts are listed by size, from most basic to increasingly large.
Concept
Data declaration
Instruction
Move instructions
Action instruction
Routine
Procedure
Function
Trap
Module
Program module (.mod)
System module (.sys)
Program files (.pgf)
Explanation
Used to create instances of variables or data types, like num or tooldata.
The actual code commands that make something happen, for example, setting data to a specific value or a robot motion. Instructions can only be created inside a routine.
Create the robot motions. They consist of a reference to a target specified in a data declaration along with parameters that set motion and process behavior. If inline targets are used, the position is declared in the move instructions.
Instructions that perform other actions than moving the robot, such as setting data or sync properties.
Usually a set of data declarations followed by a set of instructions implementing a task. Routines can be divided into three categories: procedures, functions and trap routines.
A set of instructions that does not return a value.
A set of instructions that returns a value.
A set of instructions that is triggered by an interrupt.
A set of data declarations followed by a set of routines. Modules can be saved, loaded and copied as files. Modules are divided into program modules and system modules.
Can be loaded and unloaded during execution.
Used mainly for common system-specific data and routines, for example, an arcware system module that is common for all arc robots.
In IRC5 a RAPID program is a collection of module files (.mod) and the program file (.pgf.) that references all the module files.
When loading a program file, all old program modules are replaced by those referenced in the .pgf file. System modules are unaffected by program load.
26
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.4 Concepts of programming
1.2.4 Concepts of programming
Overview
This section introduces the terminology regarding programming. The manuals related to programming and IRC5 Robots are listed in
.
Programming concepts
The table below describes the terminology and concepts that are used in robot programming.
Concept
Online programming
Offline programming
Explanation
Programming when connected to a real controller. This expression also implies using the robot to create positions and motion.
Programming without being connected to the robot or the real controller.
True offline programming
Refers to the ABB Robotics concept of connecting a simulation environment to a virtual controller. This enables not only program creation, but also program testing and optimizing offline.
Virtual controller
A software that emulates a FlexController to allow the same software (the RobotWare system) that is controlling the robots to run on a PC. This gives the same behavior of the robots offline as you get online.
MultiMove
Coordinate systems
Frame
Workobject calibration
Running multiple robot manipulators with the same control module.
Used to define positions and orientations. When programming a robot, you can take advantage of using different coordinate systems to more easily position objects relative to each other.
A synonym for coordinate system.
If all your targets refer to workobjects, you only need to calibrate the workobjects when deploying offline programs.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
27
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.5 Targets and paths
1.2.5 Targets and paths
Overview
Targets (positions) and paths (sequences of move instructions to targets) are used when programming robot motions in RobotStudio.
When you synchronize the RobotStudio station to the virtual controller, RAPID programs are created from the paths.
Targets
A target is a coordinate that the robot shall reach. It contains the following information:
Information
Position
Orientation
Configuration
Description
The position of the target, defined in a workobject coordinate system, see
.
The orientation of the target, relative to the orientation of the workobject. When the robot reaches the target, it will align the
TCP’s orientation with the target’s orientation, see
.
Configuration values that specify how the robot shall reach the target. For more information, see
Robot axis configurations on page 35
.
Targets are converted to instances of the data type robtarget when synchronized to the virtual controller.
Paths
A sequence of move instructions, paths are used to make the robot move along a sequence of targets.
Paths are converted to procedures when synchronized to the virtual controller.
Move instructions
A move instruction consists of:
• a reference to a target
• motion data, such as motion type, speed and zone
• a reference to a tooldata
• a workobject reference
Action instructions
An action instruction is a RAPID string that can be used for setting and changing parameters. Action instructions can be inserted before, after or between instruction targets in paths.
28
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.6 Coordinate systems
1.2.6 Coordinate systems
Overview
This section provides an introduction to the coordinate systems used mostly for offline programming. In RobotStudio, you can either use the coordinate systems
(that are explained below) or the user-defined coordinated systems for co-relating elements and objects.
Hierarchy
The coordinate systems are co-related hierarchically. The origin of each coordinate system is defined as a position in one of its ancestries. The following are the descriptions of the commonly used coordinate systems.
Tool Center Point Coordinate system
The tool center point coordinate system, also called TCP, is the center point of the tool. You can define different TCPs for one robot. All robots have one predefined
TCP at the robot’s tool mounting point, called tool0.
When a program runs, the robot moves the TCP to the programmed position.
RobotStudio World Coordinate system
The RobotStudio world coordinate system represents the entire station or robot cell. This is the top of the hierarchy to which all other coordinate systems are related
(when using RobotStudio).
Base Frame (BF)
The base coordinate system is called the Base Frame (BF). Each robot in the station, both in RobotStudio and the real world has a base coordinate system which is always located at the base of the robot.
Task Frame (TF)
The Task Frame represents the origin of the robot controller world coordinate system in RobotStudio.
The following picture illustrates the difference between the base frame and the task frame.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
29
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.6 Coordinate systems
Continued
In the picture to the left, the task frame is located at the same position as the robot base frame. In the picture to the right, the taskframe has been moved to another position.
en1000001303
The following picture illustrates how a task frame in RobotStudio is mapped to the robot controller coordinate system in the real world. For example, on the shop floor.
BF
TCP
P
TF
Wobj en1000001304
RS-WCS
RC-WCS
World coordinate system in RobotStudio
World coordinate system as defined in the robot controller.
It corresponds to the task frame of RobotStudio.
Robot Base Frame
Tool Center Point
Robot target
Task Frame
Workobject
Continues on next page
30
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.6 Coordinate systems
Continued
Stations with multiple robot systems
For a single robot system, RobotStudio’s task frame corresponds to the robot controller world coordinate system. When several controllers are present in the station, the task frame allows the connected robots to work in different coordinate systems. That is, the robots can be located independent of each other by defining different task frames for each robot.
en1000001442
RS-WCS
TCP(R1)
TCP(R2)
BF(R1)
BF(R2)
P1
P2
TF1
TF2
Wobj
World coordinate system in RobotStudio
Tool Center Point of robot 1
Tool Center Point of robot 2
Base Frame of robot system 1
Base Frame of robot system 2
Robot target 1
Robot target 2
Task Frame of robot system 1
Task Frame of robot system 2
Workobject
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
31
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.6 Coordinate systems
Continued
MultiMove Coordinated systems
The MultiMove functions helps you create and optimize programs for MultiMove systems where one robot or positioner holds the work piece and other robots operate on it.
When using a robot system with the RobotWare option MultiMove Coordinated, it is important that the robots are working in the same coordinate system. As such,
RobotStudio do not allow task frames of the controller to be separated.
en1000001305 en1000001306
RS-WCS
TCP(R1)
TCP(R2)
Continues on next page
32
World coordinate system in RobotStudio
Tool Center Point of robot 1
Tool Center Point of robot 2
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.6 Coordinate systems
Continued
BF(R1)
BF(R2)
BF(R3)
P1
TF
Wobj
Base Frame of robot 1
Base Frame of robot 2
Base Frame of robot 3
Robot target 1
Task Frame
Workobject
MultiMove Independent systems
For a robot system with the RobotWare option MultiMove Independent, robots operate simultaneously and independently while being controlled by one controller.
Even though there is only one robot controller world coordinate system, robots often work in separate coordinate systems. To allow this setup in RobotStudio, the task frames for the robots can be separated and positioned independent of each other.
en1000001308
RS-WCS
TCP(R1)
TCP(R2)
BF(R1)
BF(R2)
P1
P2
TF1
TF2
Wobj
World coordinate system in RobotStudio
Tool Center Point of robot 1
Tool Center Point of robot 2
Base Frame of robot 1
Base Frame of robot 2
Robot target 1
Robot target 2
Task Frame 1
Task Frame 2
Workobject
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
33
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.6 Coordinate systems
Continued
Workobject coordinate system
The workobject normally represents the physical work piece. It is composed of two coordinate systems: the User frame and the Object frame, where the latter is a child to the former. When programming a robot, all targets (positions) are related to the object frame of a workobject. If no other workobject is specified, the targets will be related to the default Wobj0, which always coincides with the base frame of the robot.
Using workobjects provides the chance to easily adjust robot programs with an offset, if the location of the work piece has been changed. Thus, workobjects can be used for calibrating offline programs. If the placement of the fixture or work piece relative to the robot in the real station does not completely match the placement in the offline station, you simply adjust the position of the workobject.
Workobjects are also used for coordinated motion. If a workobject is attached to a mechanical unit (and the system uses the option for coordinated motion), the robot will find the targets in the workobject even when the mechanical unit moves the workobject.
In the picture below the grey coordinate system is the world coordinate system, and the black ones are the object frame and the user frame of the workobject. Here the user frame is positioned at the table or fixture and the object frame at the workpiece.
xx0500001519
User coordinate systems
User coordinate systems are used for creating reference points of your choice.
For example, you can create user coordinate systems at strategic points in the work piece to simplify programming.
34
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.7 Robot axis configurations
1.2.7 Robot axis configurations
Axis configurations
Targets are defined and stored as coordinates in a WorkObject coordinate system.
When the controller calculates the position of the robot axes for reaching the target, it will often find more than one possible solution to configuring the robot axes.
configur
To distinguish between the different configurations, all targets have a configuration value that specifies the quadrant in which each axis shall be located.
Storing axis configurations in targets
For targets that are taught after jogging the robot to the position, the used configuration will be stored in the target.
Targets created by specifying or calculating positions and orientations get a default configuration value (0,0,0,0), which might not be valid for reaching the target.
Common problems related to robot axis configurations
It is most likely that targets created by other ways than jogging cannot be reached at their default configuration.
Even if all targets in a path have validated configurations, you might encounter problems when running the path if the robot cannot move from one configuration to the other. This is likely to occur where an axis shifts greater than 90 degrees during linear movements.
Repositioned targets keep their configuration, but the configurations are no longer validated. As a result, the problems described above might occur when moving targets.
Common solutions for configuration problems
To resolve the problems described above, you can assign a valid configuration to each target and verify that the robot can move along each path. You can also turn configuration monitoring off, which means that you ignore the stored configurations and let the robot find working configurations at runtime. If this is not done the proper way, you might get unexpected results.
In some cases there might not be any working configurations. Possible solutions might then be to reposition the work piece, reorient targets (if acceptable for the process) or add an external axis that either moves the work piece or the robot for increasing reachability.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
35
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.7 Robot axis configurations
Continued
How configurations are denoted
The robot’s axis configurations are denoted by a series of four integers, specifying in which quadrant of a full revolution significant axes are located. The quadrants are numbered from zero for positive (counterclockwise) rotation and from -1 for negative (clockwise) rotation.
For a linear axis, the integer specifies the range (in meters) from the neutral position in which the axis is located.
A configuration for a six-axis industrial robot (like IRB 140) may look like:
[0-121]
The first integer (0) specifies the position of axis 1: somewhere in the first positive quadrant (between 0 and 90 degrees rotation).
The second integer (-1) specifies the position of axis 4: somewhere in the first negative quadrant (between 0 and -90 degrees rotation).
The third integer (2) specifies the position of axis 6: somewhere in the third positive quadrant (between 180 and 270 degrees rotation).
The fourth integer (1) specifies the position of axis x, a virtual axis used for specifying the wrist center in relation to other axes.
Configuration monitoring
When executing a robot program, you can choose whether to monitor configuration values. If configuration monitoring is turned off, configuration values stored with the targets are ignored, and the robot will use the configuration closest its current configuration for reaching the target. If turned on, it will only use the specified configuration for reaching the targets.
Configuration monitoring can be turned off and on for joint and linear movements independently and is controlled by the ConfJ and ConfL action instructions.
Turning configuration monitoring off
Running a program without configuration monitoring may result in different configurations each time a cycle is executed: When the robot returns to the start position after completing a cycle, it may choose a different configuration then the original.
For programs with linear move instructions this might cause a situation where the robot gets closer and closer its joint limits and eventually will not be able to reach the target.
For programs with joint move instructions this might cause sweeping, unpredictable movements.
Turning configuration monitoring on
Running a program with configuration monitoring forces the robot to use the configurations stored with the targets. This results in predictable cycles and predictable motions. In some situations, however, like when the robot moves to a target from an unknown position, using configuration monitoring may limit the robot’s reachability.
When programming offline, you must assign a configuration to each target if the program shall be executed with configuration monitoring.
36
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files
1.2.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files
Overview
For programming or simulating in RobotStudio, you need models of your work pieces and equipment. Models for some standard equipment are installed as libraries or geometries with RobotStudio. If you have CAD models of your work pieces and custom equipment, these can be imported as geometries to RobotStudio.
If you do not have CAD models, you can create them in RobotStudio.
Difference between geometries and libraries
The objects you import to a station can be either geometries or libraries.
Geometries are basically CAD files, which, when imported, are copied to the
RobotStudio station.
Libraries are objects that have been saved in RobotStudio as external files. When you import a library, a link from the station to the library file is created. Accordingly, the station file does not grow in the same way as when importing geometries.
Furthermore, besides the geometrical data, library files can contain
RobotStudio-specific data. For example, if a tool is saved as a library, the tool data is saved together with the CAD data.
How geometries are constructed
An imported geometry is displayed as one part in the Objects browser. From
RobotStudio’s Modeling tab, you can see the components of the geometry.
The top node of the geometry is called a Part. The part contains Bodies, which can be of the types solid, surface or curve.
Solid bodies are 3D objects, made up of Faces. You recognize a true 3D solid by this one body containing multiple faces.
Surface bodies are 2D objects of just one face. A part that contains several bodies with one face each that together constitute a 3D object is created from 2D surfaces, and is therefore not a true 3D solid. If these parts are not created correctly, they might cause problems both in their display and graphical programming. see
Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries on page 92
.
Curved bodies, represented by the body node alone in the Modeling browser, do not contain any child nodes.
From the Modeling tab, you can edit the parts by adding, moving, rearranging or deleting bodies. Thus, you can optimize existing parts by removing unnecessary bodies, as well as create new parts by grouping bodies.
Importing and converting CAD files
For importing geometries from single CAD files, you use RobotStudio’s import function, see
Importing a station component on page 89 .
If you need to convert CAD files to other formats or want to change the default settings for the conversion before making the import, you can use the CAD converter installed with RobotStudio before making the import, see
Converting CAD formats on page 91 .
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
37
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files
Continued
Supported 3D formats
The native 3D format of RobotStudio is ACIS. RobotStudio contains ACIS R24 which supports later versions of its supported CAD formats.
RobotStudio also supports other formats for which you need an option. The following table shows the supported formats and the corresponding options:
Format File extensions Option required Default target formats
IGES, STEP, VDA-FS ACIS, reads versions
R1 - R24, writes versions R18 - R24 sat
IGES, reads up to version 5.3, writes version 5.3
igs, iges
STEP, reads versions
AP203 and AP214
(geometry only), writes version AP214 stp, step, p21
-
IGES
STEP
VDA-FS, reads 1.0
and 2.0, writes 2.0
vda, vdafs
CATIA V4, reads versions 4.1.9 to 4.2.4
model, exp
VDA-FS
CATIA V4
CATIA V5, reads versions R6 – R23 (V5-6
R2013)
CATPart, CATProduct CATIA V5 prt, asm Pro/ENGINEER Pro/ENGINEER, reads versions 16 –
Creo 2.0
Inventor, reads V6 –
V2013 ipt Inventor
VRML
Jupiter, up to 6.4
STL
PLY
3DStudio
COLLADA 1.4.1
wrl, vrml,vrml1, vrml2 jt stl -
ply
3ds dae
-
-
-
ACIS, STEP, VDA-FS
ACIS, IGES, VDA-FS
ACIS, IGES, STEP
ACIS, IGES, STEP,
VDA-FS
ACIS, IGES, STEP,
VDA-FS
ACIS, IGES, STEP,
VDA-FS
ACIS, IGES, STEP,
VDA-FS
RsGfx, obj, dae
RsGfx, obj, dae
RsGfx, obj, dae
RsGfx, obj, dae
RsGfx, obj, dae
RsGfx, obj, dae
To import these files into RobotStudio, use the Import Geometry function.
To convert files to VDA-FS, STEP and IGES, use the standalone CAD Converter tool. For converting to other formats, use the Export Geometry function in
RobotStudio. You need the option for both the target and the source formats when converting files.
Mathematical versus graphical geometries
A geometry in a CAD file always has an underlying mathematical representation.
Its graphical representation, displayed in the graphics window, is generated from the mathematical representation when the geometry is imported to RobotStudio, after which the geometry is referred to as a part.
Continues on next page
38
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.2.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files
Continued
For this kind of geometry, you can set the detail level of the graphical representation, thus reducing the file size and rendering time for large models and improving the visual display for small models you might want to zoom in on. The detail level only affects the visual display; paths and curves created from the model will be accurate both with coarse and fine settings.
A part can also be imported from a file that simply defines its graphical representation; in this case, there is no underlying mathematical representation.
Some of the functions in RobotStudio,such as snap mode and creation of curves from the geometry, will not work with this kind of part.
To customize the detail level settings, see
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
39
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Installation options and prerequisites
Note
You should have administrator privileges on the PC before installing RobotStudio.
RobotStudio is categorized into the following two feature levels:
• Basic - Offers selected RobotStudio functionality to configure, program, and run a virtual controller. It also includes online features for programming, configuring, and monitoring a real controller connected over Ethernet.
• Premium - Offers full RobotStudio functionality for offline programming and simulation of multiple robots. The Premium level includes the features of the
Basic level and requires activation.
In addition to the Premium functionality, there are add-ins like PowerPacs and options for CAD converters available.
• PowerPacs provides enhanced features for selected applications.
• Options for CAD converters allows import of different CAD formats.
RobotStudio offers the following installation options:
• Minimal - Installs only the features required to program, configure, and monitor a real controller connected over Ethernet.
• Complete - Installs all the features required to run the complete RobotStudio.
If installed with this option, additional features of Basic and Premium functionality are available.
• Custom - Installs user-customized features. This option allows excluding unwanted robot libraries and CAD converters.
Note
RobotStudio 5.15 64-bit edition is installed for the Complete installation option on computers that have a 64-bit operating system. The 64-bit edition allows large
CAD-models to be imported as it can address more memory than the 32-bit version. However, the 64-bit edition has the following limitations:
• PowerPacs, Visual Studio Tools for Applications, and any customized add-ins that use PC-SDK are not supported
• ScreenMaker, SafeMove Configurator, and EPS Wizard are not supported.
• Jupiter import is not supported
• Add-ins will be loaded from the following folder
C:\Program Files (x86)\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics
IT\RobotStudio 5.15\Bin64\Addins
Continues on next page
40
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued
How to install RobotStudio on a PC
2
3
6
7
4
5
1
8
9
Action
Insert the RobotWare and RobotStudio DVD in the PC.
• If a menu for the DVD is opened automatically, continue with step 5.
• If no menu for the DVD is opened, continue with step 2.
On the Start menu, click Run.
In the Open box, type the drive letter for your DVD drive followed by:
:\launch.exe
If your DVD drive has the letter D, then type:
D:\launch.exe
.
Click OK.
Select the language for the DVD menu.
On the DVD menu, click Install Products.
On the Install Products menu, click RobotStudio. This opens the installation wizard, which guides you through the rest of the software installation.
After installing RobotStudio, you can proceed with installing RobotWare.
Go to the Install Products menu, and click RobotWare. This opens this installation wizard, which guides you through the rest of the RobotWare installation.
This step is optional, and is for installing the Track mediapool.
On the Install Products menu, click Additional Options. This opens a file browser that displays the Track mediapool installation and other available options.
Double-click the TrackMotion folder and then the file setup.exe to start the installation wizard and proceed.
After installing RobotStudio, proceed with activating your RobotStudio installation.
Knowing which RobotStudio version is installed
The version number of your RobotStudio installation is displayed on the RobotStudio title bar.
Activation of RobotStudio license
When you start RobotStudio for the first time after installation, you are prompted to enter your 25-digit Activation Key (xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx). The software performs in the Basic Functionality mode if you do not use a valid Activation Key.
After the installation is activated, you will have valid licenses for the features covered by your subscription.
Note
Activation is not required for Minimal installation, or for Basic Functionality mode of the Complete or Custom installation.
What is Basic Functionality mode
In Basic Functionality mode, which is a reduced functionality mode, RobotStudio allows only the use of the basic features for the real and the virtual controller. No existing files or stations are harmed in this mode. After activating your software, you will have full functionality for the features you have purchased.
A real controller can be programmed, configured and monitored over Ethernet without activating your installation of RobotStudio. Activation, however, will provide
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
41
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued access to the Premium productivity features that will make your engineering work more efficient.
How to activate RobotStudio - Standalone license
Use the Activation Wizard to activate your RobotStudio installation. When you start
RobotStudio for the first time after installation, the wizard starts automatically and prompts you for the Activation Key. If you do not want to activate your copy of
RobotStudio at installation, you can do so later using the Activation Wizard.
Note
1
2
If you have a problem with your activation, contact your local ABB customer support representative at the e-mail address or telephone number provided at www.abb.com/contacts.
Alternatively, with your activation key attached, send an e-mail to [email protected].
For using the Activation Wizard, follow this procedure.
3
Action
On the File tab, click Options and go to General:Licensing.
On the Licensing page to the right, click Activation wizard to launch the Activation
Wizard.
In the Activation Wizard, on the Activate RobotStudio page, indicate whether you have a Standalone License or a Network License, and then click Next.
If you have chosen Standalone License, you will proceed to the Activate a Standalone
License page. See
Activate automatically over the Internet or manually on page 42
for further steps.
If you have chosen Network License, you will proceed to the Network License page.
See
How to activate RobotStudio - Network License on page 43
for further steps.
Activate automatically over the Internet or manually
The Activation Wizard gives you two choices on how to proceed. You can choose either automatic activation over the Internet or manual activation. These are explained in the following section.
Automatic Activation (recommended)
In automatic activation, the Activation Wizard automatically contacts and sends your activation request to the ABB licensing servers over your Internet connection.
Your license will then be automatically installed and your product will be ready for use.
For automatic activation you need an Internet connection and also a valid activation key that has not exceeded the number of installations allowed.
RobotStudio must be restarted after the activation has been successfully completed.
Note
If you choose to activate over the Internet but are not currently connected to the
Internet, then the wizard alerts you that there is no connection.
Continues on next page
42
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued
Manual Activation
If the computer does not have an Internet connection, you must proceed with manual activation.
1 Create a license request file by selecting the option Step 1:Create a license
request file.
Proceed through the wizard, enter your activation key and save the license request file to your computer.
2 Use removable storage, such as a USB stick, to transfer the file to a computer with an Internet connection. On that computer, open a web browser, go to http://www101.abb.com/manualactivation/ and follow the instructions given.
The result will be a license key file that should be saved and transferred back to the computer having the installation awaiting activation.
3 Relaunch the activation wizard and go through the steps until you reach the
Activate a Standalone License page.
4 Under Manual Activation, select the option Step 3:Install a license file.
Proceed through the wizard, selecting the license key file when requested.
Upon completion, RobotStudio is activated and ready for use.
RobotStudio must be restarted after the activation has been successfully completed.
How to activate RobotStudio - Network License
Network licensing allows you to centralize license management by installing licenses on a single server rather than on each individual client machine. The server administers the licenses to the clients as required. A single network license allows several clients to use the software.
Network Licensing is set up in the following stages:
1 Install the server for network licensing (See
Installing the Network Licensing
2 Activate the licenses for network licensing (See
3 Set up the client for network licensing (See
Setting up Network Licensing in the client on page 46
)
Tip
Network licenses are displayed as Network in the View Installed Licenses link of the Licensing page.
Installing the Network Licensing Server
Network licensing in RobotStudio uses the SLP Distributor server as the network licensing server. It manages the allocation of network licenses to the clients.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
43
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued
You can install the SLP Distributor server from the Utilities\SLP Distributor directory of the RobotStudio distribution.
Note
You require administrative privileges for installing and configuring the SLP
Distribution server.
The installer requires the following:
• Windows Server 2008, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista
• 32-bit or 64-bit version of Windows
• .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
The SLP Distributor server is installed as a service that starts automatically with
Windows. It requires two open TCP ports, by default 2468 (for the web interface) and 8731 (for licensing). The installer opens these ports in the standard Windows
Firewall, but any third-party firewall must be configured manually by the system administrator.
Using the SLP Server Web Interface
Once the SLP server is online, you can access its web interface on the address http://<server>:2468/web.
The following table shows how to use the server's web interface.
To...
Use...
Activate a network license automatically
(for PCs with Internet connection)
The Activation tab.
Type in the Activation Key provided by ABB, and then click Submit.
The number of network licenses activated depends on the activation key provided.
xx1300000052
Figure 1.1:
Continues on next page
44
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued
To...
Use...
Activate a network license manually
(for PCs without Internet connection)
The Activation tab.
1 Click Manual Activation.
2 Type in your activation key, provided by ABB, and then click Submit.
3 Copy and send the Request Data which appears, by mail to [email protected].
The license file will be mailed to you.
4 Once you recieve the license file, click Browse to upload and install the license file.
Your network license is now activated.
xx1300000051
View the installed licenses
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
The Home tab. Under Dashboard, click Details.
Alternatively, click the Products tab.
Both these open the Product details for RobotStudio page, where details about the installed licenses are displayed.
Continues on next page
45
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued
To...
View the usage of licenses
Use...
The Home tab. Under Dashboard, click Usage.
Alternatively, click the Usage tab.
Both these open the Current usage of RobotStudio page, which lists the following in a table:
• Licenses which are currently allocated
• Client to which each license is allocated to
• Number of remaining licenses available for use
Each table row corresponds to one client system.
Note
Certain proxy issues upon activation in the SLP server's web interface may produce a messages which only states Activation failed. Such a case may happen when the system account that the SLP-Distributor-service is executed in, does not have the rights to read the user profile. As a workaround, follow this procedure:
1 Open the Services control panel (services.msc)
2 Open properties for Software Potential Distributor
3 Change Log on as to an actual named user, preferably the currently logged on user
4 Restart the service and re-attempt an activation.
5 After your re-attempt, change Log on as back to Local System account and restart the service.
Setting up Network Licensing in the client
Note
You require Administrative privileges to store this configuration.
You need to use the RobotStudio Activation Wizard in the client system for setting up Network Licensing.
Use this procedure to set up Network Licensing for a client system.
Action
1 On the File tab, click Options and go to General:Licensing.
2 On the Licensing page to the right, click Activation wizard to launch the Activation
Wizard.
3 In the Activation Wizard, on the Activate RobotStudio page, choose the option I want to
specify a network license server and manage server license, and then click Next.
You will proceed to the License Server page.
4 Specify the name or IP address of the License Server, and then click Finish.
If Windows UAC is enabled, a confirmation dialog appears. This prompts you to restart
RobotStudio in order to start using the specified server.
To go to the SLP Distributor server web interface, click the Open the server dashboard link. For information about using the server dashboard, see
Note that the changes made are not applied until RobotStudio is restarted.
Continues on next page
46
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued
Note
For Network Licensing to work, the client system should be online with the server.
For information about enabling licensing while working offline, see
.
Using Commuter Licenses
Commuter licenses allow a client system to work offline from the license server.
You can check out a license from the server for a specified number of days. During this period the checked out license is unavailable to other users. The commuter license is made available for other clients only when it is manually checked in back to the server.
The commuter license in the client system expires when the check out time expires.
In this case, on starting RobotStudio in the client system, the Network License dialog opens automatically and prompts you to check in the license back to the server.
Note
It is not possible to check out specific features in the license. All features in a license are included when it is checked out.
To check in/check out a commuter license, you need to use the Activation Wizard.
Use this procedure to check in/check out a commuter license.
Action
1 On the File menu, click Options and select General: Licensing
2 On the Licensing page to the right, click Activation wizard to launch the Activation
Wizard.
3 In the Activation Wizard, on the Activate RobotStudio page, choose I want to check out
or check in a commuter license and click Next.
You will proceed to the Commuter License page.
4 Under Commuter License, you will be presented one of the following options as per your requirement:
• Check out a commuter license - In the Check out days box specify the specify the number of days for which you wish to keep the license.
This option is disabled if you already have a commuter license checked out.
• Check in a commuter license - Choose this option to return the currently checked out license to the server.
This option is enabled only if a commuter license is already checked out. If so, the expiration date and time of the license is also displayed.
5 Click Finish to complete the check in/check out.
Tip
Network licenses checked-out as commuter licenses are displayed as Floating
(checked out) in the View Installed Licenses link of the Licensing page.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
47
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.3 Installing and licensing RobotStudio
Continued
Knowing whether your RobotStudio installation is activated
1
2
Action
On the File tab, click Options and then go to General:Licensing.
On the Licensing page to the right, select View Installed Licenses to see the status of your current license.
The Licenses opens, where you can view all the valid licenses for the features covered by your subscription.
48
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.1 Ribbon, tabs and groups
1.4 User interface
1.4.1 Ribbon, tabs and groups
The following figure shows the ribbon, tabs and groups of the Graphical User
Interface.
en0900000215
1
Tab
File
2 Home
3 Modeling
4 Simulation
5 Controller
6 RAPID
7 Add-Ins
Description
Contains the options to create new station, create new robot system, connect to a controller, save station as viewer, and
RobotStudio options. For more information, see
Contains the controls required for building stations, creating systems, programming paths and placing items. For more information, see
Contains the controls for creating and grouping components, creating bodies, measurements and CAD operations. For more information, see
Contains the controls for setting up, configuring, controlling, monitoring and recording simulations. For more information, see
.
Contains the controls for synchronization, configuration and tasks assigned to the Virtual Controller (VC). It also contains the controls for managing the real controller.
For more information, see
Contains the integrated RAPID editor, used for editing all robot tasks other than robot motion.
For more information, see
.
Contains the control for PowerPacs . For more information, see
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
49
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.2 Layout browser
1.4.2 Layout browser
Overview
The layout browser is a hierarchical display of physical items, such as robots and tools.
Icons
Icon
xx050000
Node
Robot
Description
The robot in the station.
Tool
A tool.
xx050001
Link collection
Contains all the links of the objects.
xx050002 xx050003
Link
Frames
A physical object in a joint connection. Each link is made up of one or several parts.
Contains all the frames for an object.
xx050004 xx050005 xx050006 xx050007 xx050008
Component group
Part
Collision set
A grouping of parts or other assemblies, carrying its own coordinate systems. It is used to structure a station.
A physical object in RobotStudio. Parts with geometric information are made up of one or more 2D or 3D entities. Parts without geometric information (such as imported .jt files) are empty.
Contains all collision sets. Each collision set includes two groups of objects.
Objects group
Contains references to the objects that are subject to collision detection.
Collision set mechanisms
The objects in the collision set.
xx050009
Frame
The frames in the station.
xx050010
50
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.3 The Paths & Targets browser
1.4.3 The Paths & Targets browser
Overview
The paths & targets browser is a hierarchical display of non-physical items.
Icons
Icon Node
Station
Description
Your station in RobotStudio.
xx050011
Virtual Controller
The system for controlling the robots, just like a real IRC5 controller.
xx050012 xx050013
Task
Tooldata Collection
Contains all logical elements in the station, such as targets, paths, workobjects, tooldata and instructions.
Contains all tooldata.
xx0500001376
Tooldata
A tooldata for a robot or a task.
xx050014
Workobjects & Targets
Contains all workobjects and targets for the task or robot.
xx050015
Jointtarget Collection and
Jointtarget
A specified position of the robot axes.
xx050016
Workobject Collection and
Workobject
The workobject collection node and the workobjects it contains.
xx050017
Target
A defined position and rotation for a robot. A target equals a RobTarget in a RAPID program.
xx050018 xx050019
Target without assigned configuration
A target for which no axis configuration has been assigned, for example, a repositioned target or a new target created by means other than teaching.
Target without found configuration
An unreachable target, that is, for which no axis configuration has been found.
xx050020
Path Collection
Contains all paths in the station.
xx050021
Path
Contains the instructions for the robot movements.
xx050022 xx050023
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Linear Move Instruction
A linear TCP motion to a target. If the target has no valid configuration assigned, the move instruction gets the same warning symbols as the target.
Continues on next page
51
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.3 The Paths & Targets browser
Continued
Icon
xx050024
Node
Joint Move Instruction
Action Instruction
Description
A joint motion to a target. If the target has no valid configuration assigned, the move instruction gets the same warning symbols as the target.
Defines an action for the robot to perform at a specified location in a path.
xx050025
52
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.4 The Modeling browser
1.4.4 The Modeling browser
Overview
The modeling browser is a display of editable objects and their building blocks.
Icons
Icon
modeling modelin0
Node
Part
Body
Face
Description
Geometric items corresponding to the objects in the Layout browser.
Geometric building blocks that comprise the parts. 3D bodies contain several faces, 2D bodies one face, and curves no faces.
The faces of the bodies.
modelin1
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
53
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.5 The Controller browser
1.4.5 The Controller browser
Overview
The Controller browser is a hierarchical display of controller and configuration elements found in the Controller tab view.
Icons
Icon
controll control0 control1 control2 control3
Node
Controllers
Description
Contains the controllers that are connected to the Robot View.
Connected Controller
Connecting Controller
Represents a controller with a working connection.
Represents a controller which is currently being connected.
Disconnected Controller
Represents a controller that has lost its connection. It might have been turned off or disconnected from the network.
Denied login
Configuration
Represents a controller that denies you access to login. Possible reasons for denied access are:
• User lacks necessary access privileges
• Too many clients connected to the controller
• The RobotWare version of the system running on the controller is newer than the
RobotStudio version
Contains the configuration topics.
configu0 configu1
Topic
Event Log
Each parameter topic is represented by a node:
• Communication
• Controller
• I/O
• Man-machine communication
• Motion
With the Event Log you can view and save controller events.
eventrec
I/O System
Represents the controller I/O system. The I/O system consists of I/O buses and units.
io
I/O Bus
An I/O bus is a connector for one or several I/O units.
io-node
Continues on next page
54
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.5 The Controller browser
Continued
I/O Unit
An I/O Unit is a board, panel or any other device with ports through which the I/O signals are sent.
io-devic
RAPID Tasks
Contains the active tasks (programs) of the controller.
rapid16t prgintas
Program
Modules
System Modules nostepin
Task
Program Modules
System Modules
Nostepin Module
A task is a robot program, which executes alone or together with other programs. A program is composed of a set of modules.
Program modules contain a set of data declarations and routines for a specific task. Program modules contains data specific for this program.
System modules contain a set of type definitions, data declarations and routines. System modules contains data that applies to the robot system, regardless which program modules that are loaded.
A module that cannot be entered during step-bystep execution. That is all instructions in the module are treated as one if the program is executed step-by-step.
View-only and Read-only
Program Modules
A icon for program modules that are either viewonly or read-only.
modules
View-only and Read-only
System Modules
A icon for system modules that are either viewonly or read-only.
module_e procedur
Procedure
A routine that does not return any value. Procedures are used as subprograms.
Function
A routine that returns a value of a specific type.
function trap16tr
Trap
A routine that provides a means of responding to interrupts.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
55
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.6 Files browser
1.4.6 Files browser
Overview
The Files browser in the RAPID tab allows you to manage RAPID files and system backups. Using the Files browser you can access and then edit standalone RAPID modules and system parameter files that are not residing in the controller memory.
Icons
Icon Node
Files
Description
See
Managing RAPID files on page 426 .
xx1200000824
Backups
See
Managing system backups on page 426
.
xx1200000825
56
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.7 Add-Ins browser
1.4.7 Add-Ins browser
Overview
The Add-Ins browser shows the installed PowerPacs, General add-ins , if available, under their respective nodes.
Icons
Icon
xx1200000826 xx1200000827
Disabled Add-In
Unloaded Add-In
xx1200000828
Node
Add-In
Description
Indicates an available add-in loaded into the system
Indicates a disabled add-in
Indicates an add-in un-loaded from the system
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
57
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.8 The Output window
1.4.8 The Output window
Overview
Layout of the Output tab
The Output tab contains two columns: the first states the event, the second the time the message was generated. Each row is a message.
Event types
The output window displays information about events that occur in the station, such as when simulations are started or stopped. This information is useful when troubleshooting stations.
The three event types indicate the severity of the event:
Event type
Information
Warning
Error
Description
An information message is a normal system event, for example, starting and stopping programs, changing the operational mode, and turning motors on and off.
Information messages never require an action from you. They can be useful for tracking errors, collecting statistics or monitoring user-triggered event routines.
A warning is an event of which you should be aware, but it is not so severe that the process or RAPID program needs to be stopped.
Warnings must occasionally be acknowledged. Warnings often indicate underlying problems that at some point will need to be resolved.
An error is an event that prevents the robot system from proceeding. The running process or RAPID program cannot continue and will be stopped.
An error must occasionally be acknowledged. Some errors require some immediate action from you in order to be resolved.
Double-click an error to display a detailed information box.
Some of the events are active. These are linked to an action for resolving the problem that generated the event. To activate the linked action, double-click the message.
Handling messages in the Output window
Goal
To filter messages...
Procedure
Right-click in the Output window and then click Show messages. From the options All Errors, Information, Warnings and Warnings and Errors, select the type of messages you want to display.
To save a message to file...
Select it, right-click and then click Save to file. Choose a name and location in the dialog box. Multiple messages can be selected by pressing SHIFT while clicking each.
To clear the Output window...
Right-click in the Output window and then click Clear.
58
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.9 The Controller Status window
1.4.9 The Controller Status window
Overview
The Controller Status window shows the operational status of the controllers in your robot view.
Layout of the Controller Status window
The Controller Status window has the following columns:
1 System Name : Displays the name of the system running on the controller.
2 Controller Name : Displays the name of the controller.
3 Controller State : Displays the state of the controller.
When the controller is in state...
the robot is...
Initializing
Motors off starting up. It will shift to state motors off when it has started.
in a standby state where there is no power to the robot's motors. The state has to be shifted to motors on before the robot can move.
Motors on
Guard Stop ready to move, either by jogging or by running programs.
stopped because the safety runchain is opened. For instance, a door to the robot's cell might be open.
stopped because emergency stop was activated.
Emergency Stop
Waiting for motors on after e-stop
System Failure ready to leave emergency stop state. The emergency stop is no longer activated, but the state transition isn't yet confirmed.
in a system failure state. A warm start is required.
4 Program Execution State : Displays if the robot is running any program or not.
When the controller is in state...
the robot...
Running
Ready is running a program.
has a program loaded and is ready to run it when a PP
(starting point in the program) has been set.
Stopped
Uninitialized has a program loaded, with a PP, and is ready to run it.
has not initialized the program memory. This indicates an error condition.
5 Operating Mode : Displays the operating mode of the controller.
When the controller is in mode...
the robot is...
Initializing
Auto starting up. It will shift to the mode selected on the controllers cabinet when it has started.
ready to run programs in production.
In Auto mode it is possible to get remote Write access to the controller, which is necessary for editing programs, configurations and other things when connected to a real controller.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
59
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.9 The Controller Status window
Continued
When the controller is in mode...
the robot is...
Manual
Manual full speed
Waiting for acknowledge only able to move if the enabling device on the FlexPendant is activated. Furthermore, the robot can only moved with reduced speed in manual mode.
In manual mode it is not possible to get remote Write access to the controller, unless it is configured for this and the remote Write access granted on the FlexPendant.
only able to move if the enabling device on the FlexPendant is activated.
In manual mode it is not possible to get remote Write access to the controller, unless it is configured for this and the remote Write access granted on the FlexPendant.
about to enter Auto mode, but the mode transition has not yet been acknowledged.
6 Logged on as: Displays the user name the PC is logged on to the controller with.
7 Access : Displays the users having write access to the controller, or if it is available.
60
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.10 The Operator Window
1.4.10 The Operator Window
Overview
Operator Window is an alternative to the corresponding feature in the Virtual
FlexPendant for communicating with the user during RAPID program execution.
It displays the same output as displayed on the Virtual FlexPendant Operator
Window.
When running in a Virtual Controller, the RAPID program communicates with the operator via messages on the FlexPendant screen. The Operator Window integrates this functionality and allows the user to run interactive RAPID programs without starting the Virtual FlexPendant.
Enabling Operator Window
To enable an operator window:
1 On the File menu, click Options.
2 On the Navigation pane to the left, select Robotics:Virtual Controller.
3 On the Virtual Controller page to the right, select Automatically open virtual
Operator Window .
4 Click Apply.
Note
When the Show virtual Operator Window feature is enabled, an Operator Window is automatically created for each controller in the station. By default, the window is located in the tab area below the graphics window.
RAPID Instructions
The following are the RAPID instructions supported by the Operator Window. When these instructions are executed, the behavior is similar to that of Virtual
FlexPendant:
• TPErase
• TPReadFK
• TPReadNum
• TPWrite
• UIAlphaEntry
• UIMsgBox
• UINumEntry
The following are the RAPID instructions not supported by the Operator Window.
When these instructions are executed, an error message is displayed in the Operator
Window prompting you to use the Virtual Flexpendant instead:
• TPShow
• UIShow
• UINumTune
• UIListView
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
61
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.10 The Operator Window
Continued
Note
You should not run both the Virtual Flexpendant and Operator Window simultaneously.
62
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.11 The Documents window
1.4.11 The Documents window
Overview
The Documents window allows you to search and browse the RobotStudio documents like libraries, geometry and so on in large numbers and from different locations. You can also add associate documents with a station, either as a link or by embedding a file in the station.
Opening a Documents window
1 On the Home tab, click Import Library and select Documents from the dropdown menu.
The Documents window appears.
Layout of the Documents window
The Documents window is a docked area that by default takes the right-hand corner.
The upper part of the window contains controls for searching and browsing the document locations. The lower part consists of a list view that displays the documents and folders and a status area.
Control
Station
Search
Browse
Location
Description
Allows to add documents associated with the station, either by adding the file/folder as a reference (link) or by embedding the file in the station. See
Using the Station mode on page 63 .
Allows to search for keywords or query. See
Using the Search mode on page 64 .
Displays a folder structure of the document locations. See
Using the Browse mode on page 66
.
Allows to configure the document location. See
.
Using the Station mode
Use this procedure to add documents associated with the current station:
1 Click Station from the Document Manager.
2 Click Add button and select what to add to the current station:
• File Reference
• Folder Reference
• Embedded File
• New Text Document
Note
• The referenced file/folder is displayed with an arrow icon
• The embedded file and new text document are displayed with a diskette icon
3 In the Documents window, right-click the document.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
63
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.11 The Documents window
Continued
The following context menu items appears depending on the document type selected:
Item
Open
Description
Opens the document in the program associated with its file type. For example, a .docx file is opened in Microsoft Word.
An embedded file is saved to a temporary location before opening. If RobotStudio detects that the temporary file has changed, you will be asked to update the embedded file.
Open containing folder Opens the folder containing the file in Windows Explorer.
This option is not available in embedded files.
Copy to Station Converts a referenced file to an embedded file.
Save as Saves an embedded file to disk.
Include in Pack and Go Specifies if a referenced file/folder should be included when a Pack and Go file is created.
For a referenced folder, all files in the folder will be included.
To use this option, the file must be located in the parent folder of the station file. For example, if the station file is
D:\Documents\Stations\My.rsstn, the reference must be located in D:\Documents to be included in Pack and Go.
Embedded files are always included when a Pack and Go file is created, since they are part of the station file.
Include Subfolders
Remove
Specifies that subfolders of a referenced folder should be included in Pack and Go.
Removes the selected document.
Note
Some context menu items can be disabled and the document marked as
Locked in the API.
Using the Search mode
1 Click the option Search and enter a query or syntax in the text box.
For more information about the available syntaxes, see
.
Note
The drop-down list contains the search history of the previous ten queries between sessions.
2 Click the Expand button to access additional controls.
This allows you to specify if the search should cover all the enabled locations or one specific location.
Continues on next page
64
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Search syntax
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.11 The Documents window
Continued
3 Select Search in results check box to search for the resulting documents of the previous search.
Note
The search is performed automatically, after you stop typing in the text box or manually, by clicking the glass icon. During the search, this icon is changed to a cross and clicking this cancels the search operation.
The search field supports certain keywords and operators which allows you to specify an advanced search query.
Note
Keywords are not localised.
The following table displays the keywords that specifies an advanced search query:
Keywords Description
filename title type matches the filename of the documents.
matches the title field of the document metadata.
matches the type field of the document metadata.
For library (.rslib) files, this is a user-defined string. For example, Robot.
For other files, this is the Windows description of the file type.
For example, Text Document.
matches the author field of the document metadata.
matches the comment field of the document metadata.
author comments revision date size matches the revision field of the document metadata.
matches the last time the file was modified.
For the colon operator, the match is done against a string representation of the modified date.
For other operators, the search string should interpret as a date according to .NET standards.
matches the file size (in KB).
and, or, parentheses (), not used to group or invert queries.
The following table displays the operators that specifies an advanced search query
=
<
>
:
Operator Description
matches if the field contains the search string.
matches if the field equals the search string.
matches if the field is smaller than the search string.
matches if the field is greater than the search string.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
65
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.11 The Documents window
Continued
Note
• Quotation marks can be used to specify a string with whitespace. An empty string is specified by "".
• All search strings are case insensitive.
• Text without a preceding keyword is matched against the filename and all metadata.
• If queries are specified without a grouping keyword, "and" is implied.
• Some metadata (title, author, comments and revision) is not available for all file types.
Examples
• 1400 - Matches documents with the string 1400 in the filename or any metadata.
• not author:ABB - Matches documents where the author field does not contain the string ABB.
• size>1000 and date<1/2009 - Matches documents larger than 1000KB and modified before 1/1/2009.
• IRBP comments="ABB Internal" - Matches documents with the string IRBP in the filename or any metadata, and where the comment field equals ABB
Internal.
Using the Browse mode
1 Click the option Browse from the Document Manager.
A folder structure of the document location is displayed.
Note
The top level of the folder structure lists the configured locations. If a location is unavailable (for example, an offline network path) it is marked as Unavailable and cannot be opened. The text box displays the path of the current folder relative to the location root.
2 You can open a folder in either of the two ways:
• Double-click the document location.
• Right-click the document location and select Open from the context menu.
3 You can navigate through the folders in either of the two ways:
• Click the folder icon at the top-right corner.
• Select the parent folder from the dropdown list.
Note
You can browse and add component xml files (*.rsxml) to your station.
Continues on next page
66
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.11 The Documents window
Continued
4 Click Refresh icon in the text box to manually refresh the contents of the folder.
Note
The refresh operation can be time consuming, if a folder resides in a network location or contains many documents. During this time, the refresh icon changes to a cross icon allowing you to cancel the operation.
Results view
In the Browse mode, items are grouped into folders and documents. The resulting folders and documents are displayed in a list view.
The search result appears in the status bar at the bottom, displaying the number of items found, and progress made during the search. The Search results are grouped beneath headers according to their location.
Each document is represented by an image, the document title or filename in black text, and the metadata and file information in grey text. For library files, the image can be a screenshot or other custom image. For other document types, the image is the icon associated with the file type.
Using the Context menu
In the results view, right-click a document or folder. The following context menu items appears:
Item
Open
Open containing folder
Properties
Description
This command opens the selected folder, library or geometry files, station files, and document.
• For folders, browses into the selected folder.
• For library or geometry files, imports the file into the station. (If no station is open ,a new empty station is first created.)
• For station files, opens the station.
• For other documents, attempts to open the selected document according to its file association. For example,
Microsoft Word starts when a .doc file is opened.
This command opens the folder containing the document or the folder in the Windows Explorer.
This command is disabled for folders.
This command opens a dialog that displays complete metadata and file information about the selected document.
Tip
Double-click an item to import the library and geometry files and open the other documents.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
67
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.11 The Documents window
Continued
In the results view, right-click an empty area. The following context menu appears that controls how the documents are grouped and sorted:
Items
Group by:
Sort by:
Description
Controls how the documents are arranged in groups.
The following options are available:
• Location
• Folder
• Type
Controls how the documents are sorted within the group.
The following options are available:
• Name
• Date
• Size
Ascending and Descending Items are sorted in the ascending and descending order.
Using the drag and drop feature
You can import a library or a geometry file into the station by dragging it from the results view into either the graphics window, or onto a object node in the Layout browser.
• When dragging into the Layout browser, the component will be placed as a child object under the station, component group or smart component.
• When dragging into the graphics window, the component will be positioned at the point on the station floor where you drop it. You can snap the point to the UCS grid by enabling the Snap Grid or by holding down the ALT key while dragging.
Document Locations window
You can launch the Document Locations window in any one of the following ways:
1 Select Locations from the Documents window.
2 On the File menu, click Options and select Files & Folders in the navigation pane. Click Document Locations on the right side.
3 On the Home tab, click Import Library and select Locations from the dropdown menu.
Layout of the Document Locations window
It consists of a menu bar and a list displaying the configured locations. The list displays general information about the locations. The menu bar contains the following controls:
Controls
Locations
Description
The following options are available from the dropdown menu:
• Import : Opens a dialog box to import document locations from an xml file. If a location with the same URL already exists, you have the option to retain or delete the existing location.
• Export : Opens a dialog box to export all the configured locations to an xml file.
• Reset to Default : Loads the default locations (ABB
Library, User Library, and User Geometry).
Continues on next page
68 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.11 The Documents window
Continued
Controls
Add Location
Remove
Edit
Description
Opens a dialog box to add a document location. By default, there is one location type available.
For more information, see
File System location on page 69 .
Deletes the selected location.
Opens a dialog box to modify the selected location. For more information, see
File System location on page 69
.
File System location
1 Click Add Locations and select File System from the dropdown menu. The
File System dialog box appears.
The File System dialog box contains the following controls:
Control
Location Name
Path
Filter
Description
Specifies a name associated with the location.
Specifies the file system directory that corresponds to the root folder of the location. This can be on a local or network disk.
Specifies a filename filter to include only certain files when searching and browsing. Multiple filters are separated by a semicolon. If the filter is empty all files are included.
Cache files from network
Directory
Specifies that the library and geometry files from a network location should be copied to a local directory and imported from there, rather than directly from the network path.
This will ensure that a station containing such files can be opened even if the network location is unavailable. This option is only available for network locations.
Specifies the directory where to store the local copies. This must be on a local disk.
Show as gallery
Style
Specifies that the contents of the location should be displayed as a gallery in the specified ribbon menu.
• Flat - Specifies that all documents are displayed in a single gallery with subfolder names as headers.
• Recursive - Specifies that the documents are displayed in submenus corresponding to the folder structure.
Include when searching all locations
Specifies if the search should cover all the enabled locations.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
69
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.12 Using a mouse
1.4.12 Using a mouse
Navigating the graphics window using the mouse
The table below shows how to navigate the graphics window using the mouse:
To Use the keyboard
/mouse combination
Description
Select items Just click the item to select. To select multiple items, press CTRL key while clicking new items.
left-cli selectio
Rotate the station CTRL + SHIFT + rotate
Pan the station left-cli
CTRL +
Press CTRL + SHIFT + the left mouse button while dragging the mouse to rotate the station.
With a 3-button mouse you can use the middle and right buttons, instead of the keyboard combination.
Press CTRL + the left mouse button while dragging the mouse to pan the station.
pan
Zoom the station left-cli
CTRL + zoom right-cl
Zoom using window SHIFT +
Press CTRL + the right mouse button while dragging the mouse to the left to zoom out.
Dragging to the right zooms in.
With a 3-button mouse you can also use the middle button, instead of the keyboard combination.
Press SHIFT + the right mouse button while dragging the mouse across the area to zoom into.
right-cl window_z
Select using window SHIFT + Press SHIFT + the left mouse button while dragging the mouse across the area to select all items that match the current selection level.
left-cli window_s
70
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.13 Selecting an item
1.4.13 Selecting an item
Overview
Each item in a station can be moved to achieve the required layout, so you first have to determine its selection level. The selection level makes it possible to select only specific types of items, or specified parts of objects.
The selection levels are curve, surface, entity, part, mechanism, group, target/frame and path. The target/frame and path selection can be combined with any of the other selection levels.
Objects may also be grouped together as component groups, see
.
Selecting an item in the graphics window
To select items in the graphics window, follow these steps:
1 At the top of the graphics window, click the desired selection level icon.
2 Optionally, click the desired snap mode icon for the part of the item you wish to select.
3 In the graphics window, click the item. The selected item will be highlighted.
Multiple selection of items in the graphics window
To select multiple items in the graphics window, do the following:
1 Press the SHIFT key, and in the graphics window drag the mouse diagonally over the objects to select.
Selecting an item in the browsers
To select items in a browser, do the following:
1 Click the item. The selected item will be highlighted in the browser.
Multiple selection of items in the browsers
To select multiple items in a browser, follow these steps:
1 Make sure that all the items to be selected are of the same type and located in the same branch of the hierarchical structure; otherwise, the items will not be operable.
2 Do one of the following:
• To select adjacent items: In the browser, hold down the SHIFT key and click the first and then the last item. The list of items will be highlighted.
• To select separate items: In the browser, hold down the CTRL key and click the items you want to select. The items will be highlighted.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
71
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.14 Attaching and detaching objects
1.4.14 Attaching and detaching objects
Overview
You can attach an object (child) to another object (parent). Attachments can be created on part level and on mechanism level. When an object has been attached to a parent, moving the parent also moves the child.
One of the most common attachments is to attach a tool to a robot. For procedures, see
and
.
72
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.15 Keyboard shortcuts
1.4.15 Keyboard shortcuts
General keyboard shortcuts
The following table lists general keyboard shortcuts in RobotStudio.
Command
Activate menu bar
Open API Help
Open Help
Open Virtual FlexPendant
Switch between windows
Copy
Cut
Paste
Delete
Redo
Refresh
Rename
Select All
Undo
Add Controller System
Open Station
Take Screenshot
Teach Move Instruction
Teach Target
Import Geometry
Import Library
New Empty Station
Save Station
Key Combination
General Shortcuts
F10
ALT + F1
F1
CTRL + F5
CTRL + TAB
General Commands
F4
CTRL + O
CTRL + B
CTRL + SHIFT + R
CTRL + R
CTRL + G
CTRL + J
CTRL + N
CTRL + S
General Editing Commands
CTRL + C
CTRL + X
CTRL + V
DELETE
CTRL + Y
F5
F2
CTRL + A
CTRL + Z
RAPID Editor shortcuts
The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts specific to the RAPID Editor.
Command
Complete Word
Parameter Info
Auto Complete
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Key Combination
RAPID Editor Intellisense
CTRL + SPACEBAR
CTRL + SHIFT + SPACEBAR
TAB (when the cursor located at the end of an identifier)
Continues on next page
73
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.15 Keyboard shortcuts
Continued
Command
Start Program Execution
Step In
Step Out
Step Over
Stop
Toggle Breakpoint
Apply Changes
Copy
Cut
Cut line
Delete line
Delete to beginning of word
Delete to end of word
Find next occurance
Indent
Make the selected text lowercase
Make the selected text uppercase
Move to beginning of document
Move to beginning of line
Move to end of document
Move to end of line
Move to next word
Move to previous word
Move to visible bottom
Move to visible top
Open line above
Open line below
Outdent
Paste
Key Combination
General RAPID Editor Commands
F8
F11
SHIFT + F11
F12
SHIFT + F8
F9
CTRL + SHIFT + S
CTRL + P
RAPID Editor Text Commands
CTRL + Insert or, CTRL + C
SHIFT + Delete or, CTRL + X
Redo
Scroll down
Scroll up
CTRL + L
CTRL + SHIFT + L
CTRL + BACKSPACE
CTRL + Delete
F3
Tab
CTRL + U
CTRL + SHIFT + U
CTRL + Home
Home
CTRL + End
End
CTRL + Right
CTRL + Left
CTRL + Page Down
CTRL + Page Up
CTRL + Enter
CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
SHIFT + TAB
SHIFT + Insert or, CTRL + V
CTRL + SHIFT + Z or, CTRL + Y
CTRL + Down
CTRL + Up
Continues on next page
74 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Command
Select block down
Select block left
Select block right
Select block up
Select down
Select left
Select page down
Select page up
Select right
Select to beginning of document
Select to beginning of line
Select to end of document
Select to end of line
Select to next word
Select to previous word
Select to visible bottom
Select to visible top
Select up
Select word
Toggle overwrite mode
Transpose characters
Transpose lines
Transpose words
1 Introduction to RobotStudio
1.4.15 Keyboard shortcuts
Continued
Key Combination
ALT + SHIFT + Down
ALT + SHIFT + Left
ALT + SHIFT + Right
ALT + SHIFT + Up
SHIFT + Down
SHIFT + Left
SHIFT + Page Down
SHIFT + Page Up
SHIFT + Right
CTRL + SHIFT + Home
SHIFT + Home
CTRL + SHIFT + End
SHIFT + End
CTRL + SHIFT + Right
CTRL + SHIFT + Left
CTRL + SHIFT + Page Down
CTRL + SHIFT + Page Up
SHIFT + Up
CTRL + SHIFT + W
Insert
CTRL + T
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + T
CTRL + SHIFT + T
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
75
This page is intentionally left blank
2 Building stations
2.1 Workflow of building a station
2 Building stations
2.1 Workflow of building a station
Overview
The follow sections outline the workflow for building a new station. It also includes the prerequisites for creating and simulating robot programs. The workflow includes:
• Options for creating a station with a system.
• Importing or creating the objects to work with
• Optimizing the station layout by finding the best placement of robots and other equipment.
Note
For most scenarios, you are recommended to follow the workflows from start to finish, even though other sequences maybe possible.
Creating a station with a system
The table below shows the options for creating a station with a system.
For the exact procedures, see
.
Activity
Create a station with a template system
Create a station with an existing system
Create a station with no system
Description
This is the simplest way to create a new station containing a robot and a link to a rudimentary system template.
This creates a new station containing one or more robots in accordance with an existing, built system.
An advanced user can build a station from scratch and then add a new or existing system to it.
Manually starting the VC
The table below shows the alternatives for manually starting with a system. Perform only those steps applicable to your station.
Activity
Manually connecting a library to the VC
Restarting the VC
Description
See
See
.
Importing station components
The table below shows the workflow for importing station components. Perform only those steps applicable to your station.
For procedures, see
Importing a station component on page 89 .
Activity
Import a robot model
Import a tool
Import a positioner
Description
See
See
.
See
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
77
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Building stations
2.1 Workflow of building a station
Continued
Activity
Import a track
Import other equipment
Add work piece
Description
See
.
If you have CAD models of the equipment, you can import them, see
Import Library on page 207 . Otherwise, you can create
models in RobotStudio, see
.
If you have CAD models of the work piece, you can import them, see
Workobject on page 218 . Otherwise, you can create
models in RobotStudio, see
Placing objects and mechanisms
The table below shows the workflow for placing the objects in the station.
Activity
Place objects
Attach tools
Attach robots to tracks
Description
If you are building a model of a real station, start by placing all objects with known positions. For objects without known positions, find a suitable placement, see
and
Placing external axes on page 100
.
Attach the tools to the robot, see
.
If track external axes are used, attach the robots to the tracks, see
Attach work pieces to positioners
If positioner external axes are used, attach the work pieces to the positioners, see
Test reachability
Test if the robot can reach critical positions on the work piece.
If you are satisfied with how the robot reaches the positions, your station is ready for programming. Otherwise, continue adjusting the placement or trying other equipment as described below, see
Testing positions and motions on page 124 .
78
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.2.1 Two robot systems in same task frame position
2.2 Conveyor tracking station with two robots
2.2.1 Two robot systems in same task frame position
Overview
This section describes what happens when both the robot systems share the same task frame position. The baseframes of the mechanical units in both the robot systems have the same task frame position.
Prerequisites
• Two robot systems with conveyor tracking option (system 1 and system 2)
• A conveyor mechanism saved as library
See
Create Conveyor mechanism on page 319
to create conveyor tracking systems.
Setting up the conveyor tracking station
1 Add the existing system (system 1) to the station. See
Note
After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the already saved conveyor mechanism library.
2 Modify the baseframe positions of conveyor and robot.
a Move the mechanical unit (conveyor/robot) to its new location.
b See
Updating the baseframe position on page 410
to update the baseframe position of the conveyor/robot.
c Repeat steps 1 and 2to modify the baseframe position of the robot.
d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System
Configuration window.
3 Add the existing system (system 2) to the station. See
Note
After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the same library as the one selected for system 1 or any other library.
Later, this conveyor library will be removed from the station since system
2 shall use the same conveyor library as system 1.
4 Refer both systems (system 1 and system 2) to the same conveyor library.
a On the Controller tab, in the Virtual Controller group, click Edit System.
This opens the System Configuration dialog for system 2.
b Select the library node in the hierarchical tree.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
79
2 Building stations
2.2.1 Two robot systems in same task frame position
Continued c Select the option Select from Station. Click Change. The Select Library dialog box appears.
d Select the same conveyor library as the one selected for system 1.
Click OK.
Note
Now both systems (system 1 and system 2) use the same conveyor library and the library previously referenced by system 2 is removed from the station.
5 Modify the baseframe positions of robot (system 2).
a Move the mechanical unit (robot) to its new location.
b See
Updating the baseframe position on page 410 to update the
baseframe position of the robot.
c Repeat steps 1 and 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot.
d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System
Configuration window.
80
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.2.2 Two robot systems in different task frame positions
2.2.2 Two robot systems in different task frame positions
Overview
This section describes what happens when two robot systems have different task frame positions but uses the same sync switch. This means the Baseframes of the conveyor mechanical units in both the robot systems have different values.
Prerequisites
Two robot systems with conveyor tracking option (system 1 and system 2)
See
Create Conveyor mechanism on page 319
to create conveyor tracking systems.
Setting up the conveyor tracking station
1 Add the existing system (system 1) to the station. See
Note
After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the already saved conveyor mechanism library.
2 Modify the baseframe positions of conveyor and robot.
a Move the mechanical unit (conveyor/robot) to its new location.
b See
Updating the baseframe position on page 410
to update the baseframe position of the conveyor/robot.
c Repeat steps 1 and 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot.
d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System
Configuration window.
3 Add the existing system (system 2) to the station. See
Note
After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the same library as the one selected for system 1 or any other library.
Later, this conveyor library will be removed from the station since system
2 shall use the same conveyor library as system 1.
4 Update both systems (system 1 and system 2) to use the same conveyor library.
a On the Controller tab, in the Virtual Controller group, click Edit System.
This opens the System Configuration dialog for system 2.
b Select the library node in the hierarchical tree.
c Select the option Select from Station. Click Change. The Select Library dialog box appears.
d Select the same conveyor library as the one selected for system 1.
Click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
81
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Building stations
2.2.2 Two robot systems in different task frame positions
Continued
Note
Now both systems (system 1 and system 2) use the same conveyor library and the library previously referenced by system 2 is removed from the station.
5 Modify the task frame position of the conveyor mechanism. See
Note
Before modifying the task frame, make a note of the current conveyor position in world coordinates. After modifying the task frame, move the conveyor back to the position it was before modifying the task frame.
6 Modify the baseframe positions of robot (system 2).
Repeat step 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot (system 2) a Move the mechanical unit (robot) to its new location.
b See
Updating the baseframe position on page 410
to update the baseframe position of the robot.
c Repeat steps 1 and 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot.
d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System
Configuration window.
7 Modify the baseframe position of the conveyor (system 2).
a On the Controller tab, in the Virtual Controller group, click Edit System.
This opens the System Configuration dialog for system 2.
b Select the conveyor in the hierarchical tree. The BaseFrame property list for the conveyor is now displayed.
c Select the option Use Current Station Values to update the baseframe value of the robot in the controller.
d Deselect the option Check BaseFrame on Startup.
e In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.
Note
By deselecting the option Check BaseFrame on Startup, RobotStudio will not compare the BaseFrame values in the station and the controller every time the controller is started. This avoids repositioning the conveyor library.
If the two robot systems use the same part on the conveyor, the relation between the part and the two conveyor workobjects should be the same.
82
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.3 Creating a system with external axes automatically
2.3 Creating a system with external axes automatically
Automatically create a system with external axes
1 Import the desired robots, positioners, and track libraries into the RobotStudio station. See
.
If a robot and track are selected, attach the robot to the track. See
.
Note
Robot system supports the following tracks with lengths 1.7 m to 19.7 m in a separate task or same robot task. Depending on the manipulator type, the system allows one to three tracks per task. However with IRBTx004, only one track of this type can be used per system.
• IRBT4003
• IRBT4004
• IRBT6003
• IRBT6004
• IRBT7003
• IRBT7004
• RTT_Bobin
• RTT_Marathon
• Paint Rail
2 Create a robot system from layout. See
.
Note
To create a robot system with IRBT4004, IRBT6004, or IRBT7004, the
TrackMotion mediapool must be installed. For more information, see
Installing and licensing RobotStudio on page 40 .
Supported external axes configuration
The following table shows a combination of different external axes configurations:
Combination
A
One IRB (Positioner in same task)
Y
Positioner type
B
Y
C
Y
Y Y One IRB (Positioner in separate task)
Y
Two IRB (Positioner in separate task)
Y
One IRB on Track Motion
(Positioner in same task)
Y
One IRB on Track Motion
(Positioner in separate task)
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
D
Y
Y
Y
N
N
K
Y
Y
Y
YX
YX
L
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2xL
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
R
Y
Y
Y
N
N
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
83
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Building stations
2.3 Creating a system with external axes automatically
Continued
Combination
A
Two IRB on Track Motion
(Positioner in separate task)
Y
Positioner type
B
N
C
N
D
N
K
YX
L
Y
2xL
N
R
N
• Y - Combination is supported
• N - Combination is not supported
• YX - Combination is supported and manual mapping of mechanical units and joints required
Note
Creating a system from layout only supports tracks of type RTT and IRBTx003 in combination with positioners. i.e. IRBTx004 is not supported in combination with the positioners.
Manual mapping of mechanical units and joints
If the system contains more than one mechanical unit, the number of tasks and base frame positions of the mechanism should be verified in the System
Configuration.
1 On the Controller tab, in the Virtual Controller group, click Edit System.
This opens the System Configuration dialog.
2 Select the robot from the node in the hierarchical tree.
The property page of this node contains controls for mapping and setting axes and joints.
3 Click Change to open a dialog box.
4 Manually map the mechanical unit and mechanism joints. Click Apply.
5 Modify the baseframe positions of the mechanical unit. See
Updating the baseframe position on page 410 .
84
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.4.1 Track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003
2.4 Manually setting up system with track motion
2.4.1 Track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003
Manually setting up a system with track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003
Use this procedure to manually set up a system with track motion type RTT Bobin,
RTT Marathon or IRBT4003, IRBT6003, or IRBT7003.
1 Build and start a new system. See
Building a new system on page 163
.
1
2
3
Action Description
Select the desired robot variant
(IRB6600).
In the New Controller System wizard of the
System Builder, naviagte to Modify Options page and scroll down to Drive Module 1 >
Drive module application group and expand
ABB Standard manipulator option and select
Manipulator type (IRB6600).
Select the Additional axes configuration.
Click Finish.
In the New Controller System wizard of the
System Builder, naviagte to Modify Options page of the System Builder, scroll down to
Drive Module 1> Additional axes configura-
tion group and expand the Add axes IRB/drive
module 6600 option and select the 770-4 Drive
W in pos Y2 option.
The option 770-4 Drive W in pos Y2, the Drive
module, and the Position varies depending on the Additional axes configuration selected.
Make sure to select at least one drive in any position.
Close the Modify Options page.
2 Add the system to the station. See
3 Add the corresponding track configuration file of the desired robot variant
(IRB 6600) and the desired track model to the station. See
Adding the track to the system on page 89
.
Note
In the Select Library group, select either the existing track or import a different track.
The system may fail unless the correct additional axes configuration is selected.
4 Specify whether the baseframe is moved by another mechanism.
a On the Controller tab, in the Virtual Controller group, click Edit System.
This opens the System Configuration dialog.
b Select ROB_1 node from the hierarchical tree.
c Select the option Track from the BaseFrame moved by list.
d Click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.
Close the System Configuration window.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
85
2 Building stations
2.4.2 Track motion of type IRBTx004
2.4.2 Track motion of type IRBTx004
Overview
For configuration of tracks of type IRBT4004, IRBT6004, or IRBT7004, the
TrackMotion mediapool must be installed. For more information, see
Installing and licensing RobotStudio on page 40 .
Manually setting up a system with track motion of type IRBTx004
1 Build and start a new system. See
Building a new system on page 163
.
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Add additional options for IRB-
Tx004.
Description
See
Adding additional options on page 164 .
Browse and select the key file (.kxt) located in the mediapool Track 5.XX.YYYY where 5.XX indicates the latest RobotWare version being used.
Select the desired robot variant
(IRB6600).
On the Modify Options page of the System
Builder, scroll down to Drive Module 1 > Drive
module application group and expand ABB
Standard manipulator option and select Ma-
nipulator type (IRB6600).
Select Additional axes configur-
ation.
On the Modify Options page of the System
Builder, scroll down to Drive Module 1> Addi-
tional axes configuratin group and expand the Add axes IRB/drive module 6600 option and select the 770-4 Drive W in pos Y2 option.
The option 770-4 Drive W in pos Y2, the Drive
module, and the Position varies depending on the Additional axes configuration selected. Make sure to select at least one drive in any position.
Select the desired track motion
(IRBT 6004).
Click Finish.
On the Modify Options page of the System
Builder, scroll down to the TRACK and expand the Drive module for Track motion group. Select Drive Module 1 >Track Motion
type >IRBT 6004 > Irb Orientation on Track
> Standard carriage In Line > Select Track
Motion Length > 1.7m (or any other variant).
Close the Modify Options page.
2 Add the system to the station. See
3 Add the desired track model to the station using the following procedure.
See
Adding the track to the system on page 89 .
a In the Select Library group, click Other to import a different track motion library.
b Click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.
Close the System Configuration window.
86
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.5.1 Starting a VC
2.5 Virtual Controller
2.5.1 Starting a VC
Overview
RobotStudio uses virtual controllers for running the robots. Virtual controllers can run both systems for real robots and specific virtual systems for testing and evaluation purposes. A virtual controller uses the same software as the controller to execute the RAPID program, to calculate robot motions and to handle I/O signals.
When starting a virtual controller, point out which system to run on it. Since the system contains information about the robots to use and important data such as robot programs and configurations, it is important to select the right system for the station.
Note
You can start and stop a virtual controller, using a given system path and without needing a station. For more information, see
Start Virtual Controller on page 361
.
Starting a VC
The table below describes the different ways a virtual controller may start:
Startup
Automatic, when creating a station
Description
In most cases, a VC is automatically started when you create a new station. Library files for the robots used by the system are then imported to the station.
Automatic, when adding a system to an existing station
If your station uses several systems or if you started with an empty station, you can add systems to an open station. Library files for the robots used by the the systems are then imported to the station.
Manually, when connecting to an imported library
If you have manually imported a robot library you want to use with a system, instead of importing a new library at startup, you can connect this library to a controller.
If you have manually imported a robot library you want to use with a system, instead of importing a new library at startup, you can connect this library to a controller.
A library may only be connected to a single-robot system and may not be already connected to another VC.
Manually, when starting a controller from the Controller tab.
The Start Virtual Controller commands allows you start and stop a virtual controller, using a given system path and without needing a station.
Adding a system
To add a system to a new station, see
To add a system to an existing station, see
For information how to create a system with specific options, see
.
To start or add a virtual controller which is not part of a station, see
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
87
2 Building stations
2.5.2 Restarting a VC
2.5.2 Restarting a VC
For information on when and how to restart a VC in RobotStudio, see
Restart a controller on page 367
.
88
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.6.1 Importing a station component
2.6 Station components
2.6.1 Importing a station component
Importing a robot model
This is how to import a robot model without a controller to your station.
A robot which is not connected to a controller cannot be programed. To import a robot connected to a virtual controller, configure a system for the robot and start it in a virtual controller, see
Building a new system on page 163
and
Starting a VC on page 87 , respectively.
To import a robot model, in the Home tab, click Robot System and then select a robot model from the gallery.
Importing a tool
A tool is a special object, for example, an arc weld gun or a gripper, that operates on the work piece. For achieving correct motions in robot programs, the parameters of the tool have to be specified in the tool data. The most essential part of the tool data is the TCP, which is the position of the tool center point relative to the wrist of the robot (which is the same as the default tool, tool0).
When imported, the tool will not be related to the robot. So in order for the tool to move with the robot, you must attach it to the robot.
To import a tool, in the Home tab, click Tool and then select a tool from the gallery.
Importing a positioner
To import a tool, in the Home tab, click Positioner and then select a positioner from the gallery.
Adding the track to the system
To select the model of the external axis to use, follow these steps:
Note
This procedure is not applicable for a robot system with track motions IRBT4004,
IRBT6004, or IRBT7004. They are configured by the TrackMotion mediapool and not by adding separate configuration files. For information on installation instructions, see
Installing and licensing RobotStudio on page 40
.
1 Start the system in a virtual controller, either in a new empty station or in an existing station, see
2 In the Layout browser, select the system to add the track to.
3 On the Controller tab, click System Configuration.
4 Click Add to add parameters for the track to the system. Browse to the parameter file (.cfg) for the track to add and click Open.
If you have a specific parameter file for you track, use that one. Otherwise, parameter files for some standard tracks are delivered with the RobotStudio installation. These can be found in the folder ABB Library/ Tracks in
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
89
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Building stations
2.6.1 Importing a station component
Continued
RobotStudio’s installation folder. The ABB Library folder can also be opened from the Quick access pane at the left of the Open dialog box used for adding parameter files.
The file name of each parameter file tells which tracks it supports. The first part tells the length of the track and the second the number of tasks.
For example, the file TRACK_1_7.cfg supports all tracks with the length 1.7
meters in systems with one single task. For Multimove systems or other systems with several tasks, use the configuration file with the matching number of tasks.
For example, if the track length is 19.9 m and the robot attached to the track is connected to task 4 of the MultiMove system, then select
TRACK_19_9_Task4.cfg file.
5 In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.
6 During the restart a list of all tracks compatible with the configuration file is displayed. Select the one to use and click OK.
After the restart the track appears in the station. Continue with attaching the robot to the track.
Importing a library, geometry or piece of equipment
A library component is a RobotStudio object that has been saved separately.
Normally, components in a library are locked for editing.
A geometry is CAD data which you can import to use in RobotStudio. For a list of importable CAD formats, see
Libraries, geometries and CAD files on page 37
.
To import a library, geometry or piece of equipment, see
90
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.6.2 Converting CAD formats
2.6.2 Converting CAD formats
Overview
A CAD converter is installed together with RobotStudio by default. In most cases you do not have to convert CAD files before importing them to RobotStudio, but the CAD converter might be useful for converting several files at once, or for converting with custom settings.
Prerequisites
Most of the file formats require separate licenses, see
for more information.
Starting the CAD converter
Click Start menu, point to Programs, ABB Industrial IT, Robotics IT, RobotStudio
5.xx and click CAD Converter.
Converting CAD files
To convert CAD files, follow these steps:
1 Click Add files and select the files to convert. Optionally, click Add files, again to add more files from another location.
Each file is now added to a row in the grid.
2 Optionally, change the suggested file name or target format by clicking that column for the file to change.
3 In the Target directory box, specify the folder in which to save the new files.
4 Optionally, click Settings and change the settings for the conversion. For details about the conversion settings, see
Conversion settings on page 91
.
5 Click Convert Files.
Conversion settings
The table below describes the settings for the conversion:
Setting
Acis save file format
Enable Healing
Description
Select which version of ACIS to save to when using ACIS as target format.
Controls whether the conversion engine attempts to heal geometric entities. Only supported for specified formats.
Translate hidden/no-show entities
Controls whether the hidden entities are translated or discarded. Only supported for specified formats.
VRML/STL Scale factors
VRML and STL are often created in units that RobotStudio does not expect; they thus need to be resized.
Delete all generated log files on exit
Makes the CAD converter delete log files when exiting.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
91
2 Building stations
2.6.3 Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries
2.6.3 Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries
Overview
The characteristics of the geometries and CAD models in the station may have great effect on your work in RobotStudio, both in aspects of making the objects easier to program as well as enhancing simulation performance.
Below are some guidelines for troubleshooting geometries.
Trouble Information
The pointer snaps to the wrong parts of the objects when selecting in the graphics window
This problem might be caused by wrong snap mode settings, imprecise selecting, hidden or lack of geometrical information.
To resolve these problems, do the following:
• Check the selection level and snap mode settings. For more information, see
.
• When making the selection, zoom and rotate the object so that you are sure to click inside the object.
• Check if the object has hidden details that might affect the snapping. Remove details that are not necessary for your programming or simulation. For more information, see
.
• Some file formats only contain a graphical representation and no geometrical data. Import the geometry from a file format that also contains geometrical data. For more information, see
Libraries, geometries and CAD files on page 37 .
The graphics window redraws or updates slowly
This might be due to the performance of your computer not being high enough for the size of the geometry files in your station.
To reduce the size of the geometry files, do any of the following:
• Use a lower detail level for rendering the geometry. For more information, see
Graphic Appearance on page 461 .
• Check if the object has unnecessary details. Remove details that are not necessary for your programming or simulation. For more information, see
.
Continues on next page
92
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.6.3 Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries
Continued
Trouble
Parts of the geometry are not visible
Information
If parts of the geometry are not visible from some views, a probable cause is that the object is made up of 2D surfaces and the option Backface culling is on.
Backface culling means that the faces of the object are only visible from the front, and if the object (or any of its faces) is oriented differently, they will not be visible.
To correct the problem, do one of the following:
• Switch to modeling mode and invert the direction of the face that is not displayed correctly. This not only corrects the display, it also decreases the chance of faulty orientations during graphical programming. For more information, see
or
To invert the direction of all faces of a part on page 93 .
• Turn backface culling off for the specific object. This makes the object display correctly, but does not affect the direction of the face, which might cause problems if the face will be used for graphical programming. For more information, see
To deactivate backface culling for a single object on page 93 .
• Turn backface culling off for all objects in the station.
This makes the objects display correctly, but does not affect the direction of the face, which might cause problems if the face will be used for graphical programming. It also decreases the performance of the graphic handling. For more information, see
To change the generic setting for backface culling on page 93 .
To invert the direction of all faces of a part
To invert the direction of all faces of a part, follow these steps:
1 Select the part on which faces you want to invert the directions.
2 On the Modify menu, click Graphic Appearance.
3 On the Rendering tab, click Flip normals and then click OK.
To deactivate backface culling for a single object
To change the backface culling setting for a single object, follow these steps:
1 Select the part for which you want to change the backface culling setting.
2 On the Modify menu, click Graphic Appearance.
3 On the Rendering tab, clear the Backface culling check box and then click
OK. The faces of the object will now be displayed even if the generic setting for backface culling is on.
To change the generic setting for backface culling
The generic setting for backface culling affects all new objects and existing objects that do not have backface culling specifically deactivated.
1 On the File menu, click Options.
2 On the Navigation pane .to the left, select Graphics: Performance.
3 On the Performance page to the right, select or clear the Cull back-facing
triangles check box and then click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
93
2 Building stations
2.7.1 Objects
2.7 Modeling
2.7.1 Objects
Overview
This section describes how to create or modify geometrical objects.
Creating a frame
A frame is a generic coordinate system that you can use as reference when positioning objects. Generic frames can also be converted to special kinds of coordinate systesm, like workobjects or tool center points.
For procedures, see
and
Frame from Three Points on page 216 .
Creating a solid
With the create solids commands you can create and build models of objects you do not have CAD files or libraries for. With the create solids commands you create primitve solid bodies; these can later be combined to more complex bodies.
For procedures, see
.
Creating a surface
For procedures, see
Creating a curve
When creating paths with targets based on the object geometries, curves are the geometrical objects that RobotStudio uses. For example, if you want the robot to run along the edge of an object, you can first create a curve along the border and then generate a complete path along that curve, instead of manually finding and creating the necessary targets.
If the CAD model/geometry of the work piece does not already contain curves, you can create the curves i RobotStudio.
For procedures, see
Modifying a curve
When creating paths with targets based on the objects geometries, curves are the geometrical objects that RobotStudio uses. By optimizing the curves before starting programming, you reduce the touch-up of the generated paths.
For procedures, see
.
Creating a border
For procedures, see
.
Creating a line from normal
A line can be created as a new part and body perpendicular to a surface.
For a procedure, see
.
Continues on next page
94
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.7.1 Objects
Continued
Extruding a surface or curve
Curves and surfaces and curves can also be extruded to 3D objects, which may then be converted to solids. You can extrude along either a vector or a curve.
For procedures, see
Extrude Surface or Curve on page 315
.
Modifying a part
When you import a geometry or create an object, it will be one part. A part can, however, contain several bodies. In RobotStudio’s modeling mode you can modify the parts by adding, moving and deleting the bodies.
To modify a part, follow this step:
1 In the Modeling browser, expand the node for the part to modify. Then modify the part by doing any of the following:
To
Delete a body
Move a body from one part to another
Move one body relative to the others
Do this
Select the body and press the DEL key.
Drag the body or use the Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu.
Select the body and then move it using any of the ordinary commands for moving objects, see
.
Modifying a library component
As external files, libraries are merely linked from a station. Therefore, to modify an imported library component, the link must first be broken and later reestablished.
For procedures, see
Modify Library Component on page 468 .
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
95
2 Building stations
2.7.2 Mechanisms
2.7.2 Mechanisms
Workflow
This information topic describes how to create a new mechanism, that is, a graphical representation of a robot, tool, external axis or device. The various parts of a mechanism move along or around axes.
Creating a mechanism is dependent upon skillful construction of the main nodes of the tree structure. Four of these—links, joints, frames/tools and calibration—are initially marked red. As each node is configured with enough subnodes to make it valid, the marking turns to green. As soon as all nodes have become valid, the mechanism will be considered compilable and can be created. For additional validity criteria, see the table below.
Node
Links
Joints
Frame/tool Data
Calibration
Validity critera
• It contains more than one subnode.
• The BaseLink is set.
• All link parts are still in the station.
• At least one joint must be active and valid.
• At least one frame/tool data exists.
• For a device, no frames are needed.
• For a robot, exactly one calibration is required.
• For an external axis, one calibration is required for each joint.
• For a tool or device, calibrations are accepted, but not required.
• None.
Dependencies
The modify mode of the Mechanism Modeler has two purposes: to enable modification of an editable mechanism in its tree structure, and to complete the modeling of a new or modified mechanism.
It is recommended to configure each main node in the tree structure from the top down. Depending on its current status, right-click or double-click a node or subnode to add, edit or remove it.
For procedures, see
Create Mechanism on page 319 .
96
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.7.3 Tools and tooldata
2.7.3 Tools and tooldata
Overview
To simulate the robot tool, you need tooldata for the tool. If you import a predefined tool or if you create a tool using the Create Tool Wizard, the tooldata is automatically created; otherwise, you have to create the tooldata yourself.
The tooldata simplifies the programming work with respect to the different tools that may come in use. Defining separate sets of tooldata for different tools makes it possible to run the same robot program with different tools: only the new tooldata has to be defined. The tooldata contains the information required for moving and simulating the tool.
Two methods for manipulating tooldata in RobotStudio are as follows:
• Create or modify tooldata, see
and
, respectively. This will create all data necessary for programming, but there will be no visual tool during the simulation.
• Create tooldata for an existing geometry,
Creating and setting up a stationary tool
This information topic describes how to create a stationary tool. For information about creating a robot hold tool, see
Using a stationary tool, the robot holds and moves the work piece in relation to the tool. Thus, both the tooldata and the workobject must be set up correctly.
To create the tooldata for a stationary tool, follow these steps:
1 Import the geometry or library that represents the tool, see
.
If you do not have the geometry or library at hand but know the position, you can skip this step. The tool will be programable, but not visible in the station.
2 Create the tooldata for the tool, see
Make sure to set the Robot holds tool option to false.
3 Create a workobject that is moved by the robot. see
Make sure to set the Robot holds workobject option to true.
4 If you have a geometry or library component for the work piece, attach it to the robot, see
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
97
2 Building stations
2.7.4 Setting the local origin of an object
2.7.4 Setting the local origin of an object
Overview
Each object has a coordinate system of its own called local coordinate system in which the object dimensions are defined. When the object’s position is referred from other coordinate system, it is the origin of this coordinate system that is used.
With the Set Local Origin command you reposition the object’s local coordinate system, not the object itself.
For a procedure, see
.
98
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.8.1 Placing objects
2.8 Placement
2.8.1 Placing objects
Overview
To achieve the required layout of your station, you need to import or create objects, place them accordingly and, if applicable, attach them to other objects.
Placing objects means setting their position and rotation. If the objects are to be attached to robots or other mechanisms, they will be placed at their attachment point automatically.
The following table describes the actions relating to placement:
Actions
Placing an object
Rotating an object
Description
To place an object is to put the object in the required position in the station, see
and
The objects in the station can be rotated to achieve the required layout, see
.
Measuring distance or amgles
The measurement functions calculates distances, angles and diameters between points you select from the graphics window.
When using measurements, results and instructions on how to proceed are displayed in the Output window, see
Creating a component group
A component group groups related object in the browser, see
.
Attaching or detaching an object
Objects that are to be used by the robots in any way, such as tools, need to be attached to the robot, see
and
.
Jogging a robot
Robots can be placed by jogging. The robot axes can also be postioned by jogging, see
Jogging mechanisms on page 107
.
Modifying the task frame
Modifying the task frame repositions a controller and all its robots and equipment in the station.
By default the controller world and the station world coordinate system coincide. This is convenient when building a station with one single controller. For a procedure, see
.
However, when you have several controllers in one station, or need to reposition a controller in an existing station, you need to modify the
Modifying the baseframe position
Modifying the baseframe position sets an offset between the controller’s world coordinate system and the baseframe of the mechanical unit.This is necessary when having several mechanical units belonging to one controller, for example, several robots in MultiMove systems or when using positioner external axes. For a procedure, see
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
99
2 Building stations
2.8.2 Placing external axes
2.8.2 Placing external axes
Overview
When starting a system with a track or positioner external axis in a RobotStudio station, you have to set up the system to load a model for the track or positioner and get the motions to work properly.
Prerequisites
The system shall be created with support for track or positioner external axes, see
A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis on page 177 .
Attaching the robot to the track
To attach the robot to the track, follow these steps:
1 In the Layout browser, drag the robot icon and drop it on the track icon.
2 To the question Should the robot be coordinated with the track?, answer
Yes to be able to coordinate the track’s position with that of the robot in robot programs.
To program the track and the robot independently, answer No.
3 When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.
The track is now added to the system and ready to be programmed, see
Programming external axes on page 133
for more information on how to program the track.
CAUTION
If the system is I-started , the setup is deleted and the procedures described here must be performed again.
Placing the positioner in the station
To place the positioner in the station, follow these steps:
1 Move the positioner to the desired position using any of the ordinary functions for placing and moving objects, see
2 Modify the baseframe position of each mechanical unit of the positioner except the INTERCH unit, if it exists. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.
After the restart the system is updated with the positioner’s new location.
Continue attaching fixtures and workobjects to the positioner.
Attaching objects to the positioner
To program robot motions on an object that is held by the positioner, the targets must be created in a workobject that is attached to the positioner. For a complete visual simulation, CAD models that are moved by the positioner should also be attached. To attach the objects, follow these steps:
1 Import the models of the fixture and the work piece if you do not have them in the station already, see
Importing a station component on page 89 .
Continues on next page
100
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.8.2 Placing external axes
Continued
2 Attach the fixture to the positioner, see
Attaching and detaching objects on page 72
. When asked whether to keep the current position, answer No.
If the positioner has several stations, you will be asked which one to attach the object to.
3 Attach the work piece to the fixture. When asked whether to keep the current position, answer No.
4 Attach the workobject in which you will program the work piece to either the fixture, the work piece or the positioner. If you have defined calibration positions on either the work piece or the fixture, it is a good practice to use that object. When asked whether to keep the current position, answer No.
The positioner is now set up and ready to be programed, see
Programming external axes on page 133
for more information.
Tip
If the positioner is of an interchangeable type with several stations, you can either attach individual fixtures, work pieces and workobjects to each station flange, or you can use one set of objects that you attach and detach to the different flanges by events.
CAUTION
If the system is I-started, the setup is deleted and the procedures described here must be performed again.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
101
2 Building stations
2.8.3 Placing robots
2.8.3 Placing robots
Overview
When modifying the position of a robot connected to a VC there is a possibility to modify the related task frame or any stationary RAPID objects (tooldata, workobjects) connected to the robot.
Prerequisites
A robot library must be present in the station and connected to a VC, see
Creating a station with a system on page 77 .
Modifying the robot position using a positioning tool
1 Modify the baseframe position of a robot connected to a VC using any of the following options:
• Set Position. See
Positioning an item on page 494
.
• Place object by One Point, Two Points, Three Points, Frame, and Two
Frames. See
• Rotate. See
Rotating an item on page 490 .
2 Click Apply.
To the question, Do you also want to move the Task Frame?. Click Yes or
No.
• Click Yes to move the task frame, but the base frame keeps its relative placement to the task frame.
• Click No to move the base frame and the placement relative to the task frame will change.
Note
If there are any stationary RAPID objects (tooldata, workobjects) in the corresponding task, the following question appears Do you want to keep the
positioning of all stationary RAPID objects?
• Click Yes to keep all the stationary RAPID objects in their global coordinates.
• Click No to move all the stationary RAPID objects along with the base frame
(same coordinates relative to base frame). Workobjects attached to any other object in the station will not be affected. Workobjects attached to any other object in the station will not be affected.
If the base frame configuration of the VC is updated, the VC has to be restarted for the changes to take effect. i.e. if the base frame changes its placement relative to task frame, the following question appears Do you want to update the
controller configuration and restart?
• Click Yes to restart the controller and update the base frame configuration of the connected VC.
• Click No if the base frame is not in accordance with the controller.
Continues on next page
102
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
2 Building stations
2.8.3 Placing robots
Continued
Modifying the robot position using Freehand move or rotate
1 Modify the baseframe position of a robot connected to a VC using the following Freehand options:
• Move. See
The Freehand Group on page 246 .
• Rotate. See
Rotating an item on page 247 .
For information on updating the robot baseframe, see
Updating the baseframe position on page 410
.
2 A warning message is displayed in the Output window.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
103
This page is intentionally left blank
3 Programming robots
3.1 Workflow for programming a robot
3 Programming robots
3.1 Workflow for programming a robot
Overview
In most cases, going through the workflow from start to finish is recommended, even if it possible to work in other sequences as well.
Synchronizing will save and load text files containing RAPID modules, and create
RAPID programs from your station.
Prerequisites
Before creating a program for your robot, you should set up the station, including robots, work pieces and fixtures, in which your robot will work.
Programming a robot
The table below describes the workflow for programming a robot to perform the task you require.
Task
Create targets and paths
Description
Create the targets and paths the robot requires to perform the work tasks.
To create targets and paths, do one of the following:
• Create a curve to match your required shape. Then use the Create path from curve command to generate a path, complete with targets, along the shape you have created. See
and
.
• Create targets at the requested positions, then create a path and insert the created targets into it. See
,
and
.
Check the target orientations
Check reachability
Make sure that the targets are oriented in the most efficient way for the tasks to be performed. If not, reorient the targets until you are satisfied. See
Check that the robot and tool reach all targets in the path. See
Testing positions and motions on page 124
.
Synchronize the program to the virtual controller
Generates RAPID code from the RobotStudio items and enables the program to be simulated.
Perform text-based editing
If you need to edit the instructions or data created by RobotStudio, you can start the RAPID Editor. See
Examples of using the RAPID editor on page 440 .
Collision detection
Check that the robot or tool does not collide with the surrounding equipment or the fixtures. If it does, adjust the placements or orientations until no collisions occur. See
Detecting collisions on page 139
.
Test the program
Test the program by moving along the paths. See
Testing positions and motions on page 124
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
105
3 Programming robots
3.2 Workobjects
3.2 Workobjects
Creating a workobject
A workobject is a coordinate system used to describe the position of a work piece.
The workobject consists of two frames: a user frame and an object frame. All programed positions will be related to the object frame, which is related to the user frame, which is related to the world coordinate system.
xx050000
For creating a workobject, see
.
Modifying a workobject
For a procedure, see
Modify Workobject on page 480 .
Converting a frame to a workobject
You can create a new workobject from an existing frame. The converted workobject gets the same name and position as the selected frame.
For a procedure, see
Convert Frame to Workobject on page 455 .
Creating a frame by points
You can create a frame by specfiying points on the axes of the coordinate system and letting RobotStudio calulate the placement and orientation of the frame’s origin.
For a procedure, see
Frame from Three Points on page 216
.
106
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.3 Jogging mechanisms
3.3 Jogging mechanisms
Jogging a robot
To check if the robot can reach all positions on the work piece, you can jog the
TCP or the joints of the robot, either with the freehand commands of through dialog boxes. Jogging the robot close to its boudaries is best done with the latter method.
To
Jog the joints of a robot
Jog the TCP of a robot
Procedure
For freehand, see
. For a dialog box, see
Mechanism Joint Jog on page 469
.
For freehand, see
. For a dialog box, see
Mechanism Linear Jog on page 471 .
Prerequisites
To jog the TCP of a robot, the robot’s VC must be running.
Jogging several mechanisms
Function
Mutlirobot jog
Jogging with locked TCP
Description
When using multirobot jog, all selected mechanisms will follow the TCP of the one being jogged.
Multirobot jog is available for all kinds of jogging.
See
.
When jogging a mechanism that moves a robot (like a track external axis) with locked TCP, the robot will reposition so that the position of the TCP does not change, even though its baseframe is moved.
When jogging an external axis that moves the work object with locked TCP, the robot will reposition so that its TCP follows the work object in the same way as when using multirobot jog.
Locked TCP is available when jogging a mechanism that belongs to the same task as a robot.
See
Mechanism Joint Jog on page 469
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
107
3 Programming robots
3.4 Targets
3.4 Targets
Creating a target
You can create a new target manually either by entering the position for the target in the Create Target dialog box or by clicking in the graphics window.
The target will be created in the active workobject.
For a procedure, see
Creating a jointtarget
A jointtarget is a specification of the position for the robot axes.
For a procedure, see
Create Jointtarget on page 223 .
Teaching targets
You can create a new target by jogging the robot and teaching a target at the active
TCP. Taught targets will be created with the axis configuration used when jogged to the target.
The target will be created in the active workobject.
For a procedure, see
.
Modifying a target position
By using the modify position command you can modify the position and rotation of a target.
For procedures, see
and
Rotate on page 490 , respectively.
Modifying a target with ModPos
The position of an existing target can be modified by jogging the robot to a new, preferred position. By selecting a move instruction for the target in a path, the
ModPos command can be used to move the target to the TCP of the active tool.
When ModPos is executed, the target, referenced to by the move instruction, will be updated with the following information:
• position and orientation corresponding to the TCP of the active tool
• the current configuration of the active robot
• the current position and orientation values of all active external axes for the active robot
Note
To jog a robot linearly, a virtual controller must be running for that robot. For detailed information, see
Renaming targets
With this command you can change the name of several targets at once. You can either rename targets individually, or you can rename all targets in one or several paths at once.
Continues on next page
108
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.4 Targets
Continued
The new target names will consist of an optional prefix, an incremental number and an optional suffix.
For a precedure, see
When renaming targets, make sure that the new targets conform to the naming rules. The target names must:
• start with an alphabetical character in the ISO 8859-1 encoding (that is, an ordinary letter from the English alphabet)
• be shorter than 16 characters
• not be empty strings
• not contain any characters illegal in RAPID. See RAPID reference manual for details.
Removing unused targets
If deleting or changing paths or move instructions during programming, you might end up with large numbers of targets that are no longer used in any instructions.
To make the workobjects and their targets easier to grasp, you can delete all unused targets.
For a procedure, see
Remove Unused Targets on page 487
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
109
3 Programming robots
3.5 Paths
3.5 Paths
Creating an empty path
A path is a sequence of targets with move instructions that the robot follows. An empty path will be created in the active task.
For a procedure, see
Creating a path from curve
If the work piece has curves or contours that correspond to the path to be created, you can create the paths automatically. The create path from curve command generates paths, complete with targets and instructions along existing curves.
The path will be created in the active task.
The orientation of the targets that will be created will be according to the settings of the approach/travel vectors in the Options dialog box.
To create a path from a curve, the curve must have first been created in the station.
See
.
Setting robot axis configuration for paths
The robot axis configuration specifies the position of the axes as the robot moves from target to target, when multiple solutions are possible. This is necessary for executing move instructions using configuration monitoring.
Taught targets have validated configurations, but targets created in any other way do not. Also, targets that are repositioned lose their configuration. In RobotStudio, targets without a valid configuration are marked with a yellow warning symbol. See
Robot axis configurations on page 35
for more information about configurations.
To set a configuration for all targets in a path, see
To set a configuration for a single target, see
.
Reversing paths
The reverse path commands change the sequence of targets in the path so that the robot moves from the last target to the first. When reversing paths, you can reverse either the target sequence alone or the entire motion process.
For procedures, see
.
Note
When reversing paths, the original paths are deleted. If you want to keep them, make copies before reversal.
Note
When reversing paths, only move instructions are handled. Action instructions, if any exist, have to be inserted manually after the reversal.
Continues on next page
110
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.5 Paths
Continued
Rotating paths
With the rotate path command you can rotate complete paths and move the targets used by the paths accordingly. When rotating paths, the included targets will lose their axis configurations, if any have been assigned.
A frame or target must exist at the position to rotate around before starting the rotate path command.
For a procedure, see
.
Translating a path
The translate path function moves a path and all included targets.
For a procedure, see
.
Compensating paths for tool radius
You can offset a path so that it compensates for the radius of a rotating tool. Since the targets in the path are moved, they will lose their axis configurations, if any have been assigned.
For a procedure, see
Tool Compensation on page 495 .
Interpolating a path
The interpolate functions reorient the targets in a path so that the difference in orientation between the start and end targets is distributed evenly among the targets in between. The interpolation can be either linear or absolute.
Linear interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets’ positions along the length of the path.
Absolute interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets’ sequence in the path.
Below are examples of the difference bewteen linear and absolute interpolation.
The interpolate functions reorient the targets in a path so that the difference in orientation between the start and end targets is distributed evenly among the targets in between. The interpolation can be either linear or absolute.
For a procedure, see
Interpolate Path on page 464 .
No interpolation
This is the path before any interpolation. Note that the last target is oriented differently than the others.
xx050026
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
111
3 Programming robots
3.5 Paths
Continued
Linear interpolation
This is the same path after linear interpolation.
xx050027
Note that the targets are oriented based on their placement relative to the start and end targets.
If a target were moved and you reran the linear interpolation, it would be reoriented according to its new position.
If new targets were inserted between the existing ones and you reran the linear interpolation, it would not affect the orientation of the existing targets.
Absolute interpolation
This is the same path after absolute interpolation xx050028
Note that the targets are orientated based on their sequence in the path: each target has been reoriented equally, regardless of its place.
If a target were moved and you reran the absolute interpolation, it would not affect the orientation.
If new targets were inserted between the existing ones and you reran the absolute interpolation, it would change the orientation of all targets.
Mirroring a path
The mirror path function mirrors all motions instructions and their targets to a new path.
For a procedure, see
112
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.6 Orientations
3.6 Orientations
Overview
This is an overview of the tools for automating the modification of target orientations.
When creating paths from curves in RobotStudio, the orientation of the targets depends on the characteristics of the curves and the surrounding surfaces. Below is an example of a path with unordered target orientations and examples of how the different tools have affected the targets.
Unordered orientations
In the path below, the target orientations are unordered. The function View tool at target has been used for illustrating how the targets point in different directions.
xx050029
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
113
3 Programming robots
3.6 Orientations
Continued
Effect of target normal to surface
In the picture below, the targets, which previously were orientated randomly, have been set normal to the flat round surface at the right side of the path. Note how the targets’ Z axis has been orientated normal to the surface; the targets have not been rotated in the other directions.
xx050030
Setting a target normal to surface
To set a target orientation normal to a surface is to make it perpendicular to the surface. The target can be oriented normal to the surface in two different ways:
• The entire surface can be used as a reference for the normal. The target will be oriented as the normal to the closest point at the surface. The entire surface is the default surface reference.
• A specific point on the surface can be used as the reference for the normal.
The target will be orientated as the normal to this point, regardless of whether the normal to the closest point at the surface has another orientation.
Objects imported without geometry (for example, .jt files) can only refer to specific points on the surface.
For a procedure, see
Set Normal to Surface on page 493
.
Continues on next page
114
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.6 Orientations
Continued
Effect of align target orientation
In the picture below, the targets, which were previously orientated with the Z axis normal to the surface but with the X and Y axes orientated randomly, have been organized by aligning the targets’ orientation around the X axis with the Z axis locked. One of the targets in the path has been used as reference.
xx050031
Aligning a target orientation
With the align target orientation command you align the rotation of selected targets around one axis without changing the rotation around the others.
For a procedure, see
Align Target Orientation on page 449 .
Tip
You can also align ordinary frames in the same way.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
115
3 Programming robots
3.6 Orientations
Continued
Effects of copy and apply orientation
In the picture below, the targets, which were previously oriented randomly, have been organized by copying the exact orientation of one target to all the others.
This is a quick way to fix workable orientations for processes where variations in approach, travel, or spin directions either do not matter or are not affected, due to the shape of the work piece.
xx050032
Copying and applying an orientation for objects
To transfer an orientation from one object to another is an easy way to align different frames for simplifying the programming of the robot. Target orientations may also be copied.
For procedures, see
Copy / Apply Orientation on page 457
.
116
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.7 RAPID Instructions
3.7 RAPID Instructions
Note
For information on the RAPID Editor, which is used for creating and modifying
RAPID program code, see
.
Move and action instructions
For RAPID programming, RobotStudio’s main advantage is in the area of motion programming.
A move instruction is an instruction for the robot to move to a specified target in a specified manner. With RobotStudio, you can create move instructions in three ways:
Method Description
Create a move instruction based on an existing target
Creates move instructions based on one or several targets selected in the Paths&Targets browser. For a procedure, see
Create a move instruction and a corresponding target
Creates a move instruction and a corresponding target at once. The position of the target can either be selected from the graphics window or typed numerically. For a procedure, see
.
Teach a move instruction Teaching a move instruction creates a move instruction and a corresponding target at the robot’s current position.
Teaching a move instruction also stores the current configuration with the target. For a procedure, see
Teach Instruction on page 237 .
In addition to move instructions, you can also create and insert action instructions from RobotStudio. An action instruction is an instruction other than a move instruction that can, for example, set parameters, or activate or deactivate equipment and functions. The action instructions available in RobotStudio are limited to those commonly used for affecting the robot’s motions. For inserting other action instructions or another kind of RAPID code in the program, use the
RAPID Editor. For a procedure, see
Action Instruction on page 239 .
The table below lists the action instructions that can be created. For details, see the RAPID Reference Manual.
Action instruction
ConfL On/Off
ConfJ On/Off
Actunit UnitName
DeactUnit UnitName
Description
ConfL specifies whether to monitor the robot’s configurations during linear movements. When ConfL is set to Off, the robot may use another configuration than the programed one for reaching the target during program execution.
ConfJ specifies whether to monitor the robot’s configurations during joint movements. When ConfJ is set to Off, the robot may use another configuration than the programed one for reaching the target during program execution.
Actunit activates the mechanical unit specified by UnitName.
Deactunit deactivates the mechanical unit specified by Unit-
Name.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
117
3 Programming robots
3.7 RAPID Instructions
Continued
Action instruction
ConfJ On/Off
Actunit UnitName
DeactUnit UnitName
Description
ConfJ specifies whether to monitor the robot’s configurations during joint movements. When ConfJ is set to Off, the robot may use another configuration than the programed one for reaching the target during program execution.
Actunit activates the mechanical unit specified by UnitName.
Deactunit deactivates the mechanical unit specified by Unit-
Name.
Modifying an instruction
Most instructions have arguments that specify how the instruction shall be carried out. For example, the MoveL instruction has arguments that specify the speed and accuracy with which the robot moves to the target.
For a procedure, see
Modify Instruction on page 477 .
Note
Some arguments are read from the virtual controller. If the virtual controller has not been started, only the arguments stored in the station can be modified.
Converting to move circular
To create a circular motion to an instruction target, you must convert the motion type to circular motion (that is, MoveC in RAPID).
A circular motion is defined by two motion instructions, where the first is the via-point and the second contains the end point of the circular motion.
The circular motion can only be used for open circular arcs, not for closed circles.
To create a path for a closed circle, use two circular motions.
For a procedure, see
Convert to Move Circular on page 456
.
Creating RAPID instructions for setting I/O signals
For controlling I/O signals in the robot program, you use RAPID commands that set the signals. These require that you first create instruction templates for the instructions that set the signals. See RAPID reference manual for details about the instructions that control I/O signals.
To add RAPID instructions that set I/O signals, follow these steps:
1 Synchronize the system in which you want to add the instructions to the virtual controller, see
.
2 In programming mode, select the module for editing, right-click it and then click Edit program.
3 In the RAPID editor, add the instructions for setting the signals.
4 When you are done adding instructions, synchronize the task and paths from the Virtual Controller back to the station.
Continues on next page
118
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.7 RAPID Instructions
Continued
Using cross-connections and groups for setting I/O signals
You can also create cross-connections and signal groups, which make one signal set the value of several other signals. See System parameters reference manual for details about cross-connections and groups.
To make one signal set several others, follow these steps:
1 Request write access, and then open the configuration topic I/O in the configuration editor. Add configure instances for the cross-connections and groups to create.
Instruction templates
Instruction templates contain predefined sets of argument values that are applied to the instructions you create using the template. You can create templates for all instructions in the system running on the virtual controller. To see which instructions are available and what their arguments do, see the RAPID reference manual for your RobotWare version and the reference sections in manuals for software options, if you have any installed on the system.
Move instruction templates are always part of process templates. The process templates contain one instruction template for each type of move instruction that might be used by the process.
The process templates are instances of process definitions, which define the types of move instructions (move instruction definitions) that might be used by the process.
To create new move instruction templates, start by creating a new process template for a process that uses the type move instructions you want to create templates for. If such a process does not exist, you first have to create a new process definition.
If no move instruction definition for the type of instruction you want to create a template for exists, you must create it first.
When creating instruction descriptions, the virtual controller must be running, since the available instruction types are read from the system.
Templates can be imported and exported on four levels: tasks, move instruction descriptions, action instruction descriptions and process definitions. The default directory for imported and exported template files is My Documents/RobotStudio.
Simply choosing another directory will then make that directory default. As a default
.xml is the file format.
The validation procedure checks for duplicate names, incomplete process definitions and virtual controller equality. It is performed automatically, after a template file has been imported or a node renamed or deleted.
For procedures, see
Instruction Template Manager on page 240
.
Instruction Template Manager
The Instruction Template Manager is used to add support for instructions other than the default set that comes with the RobotStudio.
For example, a robot controller system with the RobotWare Dispense option has specialized move instructions related to glueing like DispL and DispC. You can
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
119
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Programming robots
3.7 RAPID Instructions
Continued manually define the instruction templates for these using the Instruction Template
Manager. The instruction templates are exported to XML format and reused later.
The instruction template supports the following Robotware options:
• Cap (Continuous Application Process)
• Disp (Dispense)
• Trigg (Fixed Position Events)
• Spot Pneumatic
• Spot Servo
• Spot Servo Equalizing
• Paint
RobotStudio has pre-defined XML files that are imported and used for robot controller systems with the appropriate RobotWare options.These XML files has both the Move and Action instructions.
Note
Use RobotStudio ArcWelding PowerPac while using RobotWare Arc.
Creating a process template with move instruction templates
Note
Move instructions are always related to processes.
1 On the Home tab, from the active Task list, select the task for the robot for which you want to create the instruction template.
2 On the Create menu, click Instruction Template Manager. This opens the
Instruction templates page in the work space.
3 In the Instruction Templates tree to the left, make sure there are move instruction definitions for the types of move instructions you want to create templates for. If not, follow the procedure in
Creating a move instruction description on page 121
for creating them.
4 Make sure there is a process definition that uses the types of move instructions you want to create templates for. If not, follow the procedure in
Creating a process definition on page 121
for creating it.
5 Right-click the process definition for which you want to create a new templates and click Create Process Definition.
6 In the Create Process Definition dialog box, enter a name, with characters from ASCII set, for the new template and click Create. A new process template node with a set of move instruction templates is now created.
7 Select each new template one at a time, and in the arguments grid to the right of the tree view, set the argument values that shall be applied when you create new instructions based on the template. Finish for each template by clicking Apply changes at the bottom of the grid.
Continues on next page
120
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.7 RAPID Instructions
Continued
For details about available arguments and what they do, see the RAPID reference manual for ordinary RAPID instructions and the option manual for software option instructions.
Creating a move instruction description
To create templates for other instructions than the one that already exists in the tree view, you first have to create an instruction description that defines the arguments that belong to the instruction. To create the instruction description, follow these steps:
1 Right-click the Move Instructions node and click Create Move Instruction
Description. This opens the Create Move Instruction Description dialog box.
2 In the Controller Description list, select the instruction you want to make a description for. All action instructions installed on the controller, both through
RobotWare and software options, are available.
3 In the Motion type list, select the motion type for the instruction.
4 Optionally, in the Information text box, enter a comment to the instruction.
5 Click Create. The instruction description appears in the tree view and its settings are displayed in the grid.
6 In the instruction grid, set the point type values. If necessary, also change the other settings.
7 After changing the settings, click Apply Changes in the bottom of the grid view.
Editing an instruction template
To edit an instruction template, follow these steps:
1 In the active task list, select the task for the robot for which you want to edit the instruction template.
2 On the Create menu, click Instruction Template Manager. This opens the
Instruction templates page in the work space.
3 In the Instruction Templates tree to the left, browse to and select the template to edit.
4 In the arguments grid to the right of the tree view, set the argument values that shall be applied when you create new instructions based on the template.
Finish by clicking Apply changes at the bottom of the grid.
For details about available arguments and what they do, see the RAPID reference manual for ordinary RAPID instructions and the option manual for software option instructions.
Creating a process definition
To create a process definition, follow these steps:
1 Make sure there are move instruction definitions for the types of move instructions you want to create templates for. If not, follow the procedure above for creating them.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
121
3 Programming robots
3.7 RAPID Instructions
Continued
2 Right-click the Process definitions node and click Create Process Definition.
This opens the Create Process Description dialog box.
3 In the Create Process Definitions dialog box, enter a name for the process definition, a name for its first process template and then select the move instruction types to use. Finish by clicking Create.
Creating an action instruction template
To create a template for an action instruction, follow these steps:
1 In the active task list, select the task for the robot for which you want to create the instruction template.
2 On the Home menu, click Instruction Template Manager.
3 In the Instruction Templates tree to the left, right-click the instruction description (corresponding to the instructions as described in the RAPID reference manual) for which you want to create a new template and click
Create Action instruction Template.
If the instruction description does not exist in the tree, create it by following the procedure described in
Creating an action instruction description on page 122 .
4 In the Create Action Instruction Template dialog box, enter a name for the new template and click Create. The new template is now created under the instruction description node it belongs to.
5 Select the new template and in the arguments grid to the right of the tree view, set the argument values that shall be applied when you create new instructions based on the template. Finish by clicking Apply changes at the bottom of the grid.
For details about available arguments and what they do, see the RAPID reference manual for ordinary RAPID instructions and the option manual for software option instructions.
Creating an action instruction description
To create templates for other instructions than the one that already exists in the tree view, you first have to create an instruction description that defines the arguments that belong to the instruction.
To create the instruction description, follow these steps:
1 Right-click the Action Instructions node and click Create Action Instruction
Description. This opens the Create Instruction Description dialog box.
2 In the Controller Description list, select the instruction you want to make a description for. All action instructions installed on the controller, both through
RobotWare and software options, are available.
3 Optionally, in the Information text box, enter a comment to the instruction.
4 Click Create. The instruction description appears in the tree view, and its settings are displayed in the grid.
After changing the settings (if necessary), click Apply Changes in the bottom of the grid view.
Continues on next page
122
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.7 RAPID Instructions
Continued
5 Continue with creating templates for the instruction description, as described in
Creating an action instruction template on page 122
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
123
3 Programming robots
3.8 Testing positions and motions
3.8 Testing positions and motions
Overview
Checking reachability
The check reachability function displays whether the robot can reach selected targets and motion instructions by changing the frames’ colors in the graphic view.
Reachable frames are colored green, unreachable red, and frames with reachable positions but not with current orientation are colored yellow.
The reachability check is useful when building the station, since the reachability of several targets are displayed at once. For a procedure, see
Check Reachability on page 453 .
Jumping to target
RobotStudio has several functions for testing how robots reach and move to targets.
They are useful both for finding the optimal layout when building a station and during programming.
Below are brief descriptions of the functions for testing reachability and motions.
Jump to target tests whether the robot can reach a specific position. This is useful when building the station: by creating targets at critical positions on the work piece and jumping the robot to them, you get an early indication of whether the items are positioned correctly or not. For a procedure, see
Viewing a robot at target
When View robot at target is activated, the robot is automatically positioned with the tool at the target when one is selected. If several robot axis configurations are possible for reaching the target, the robot will use the one nearest the configuration it had before jumping to the target. For a procedure, see
View Robot at Target on page 497
.
Viewing tool at target
View tool at target displays the tool at target, without checking that the robot can reach it. This test is useful both when building the station and when programming the robot, since the orientation of targets both affects the reachability and the process performance. For a procedure, see
View Tool at Target on page 498 .
Executing move instructions
Execute move instruction tests if the robot can reach a specific position with the programed motion properties. This is useful for testing motions during programming.
For detailed information, see
Execute Move Instruction on page 459
.
Moving along path
Move along path executes all move instructions in a path. It is thereby a more complete test than Execute move instructions, but not as complete as a full simulation, since it ignores RAPID code that is not move instructions. For a procedure, see
Continues on next page
124 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Programming robots
3.8 Testing positions and motions
Continued
Moving to a pose
Moving to a pose moves a mechanism to a predefined joint value at a predefined time without using the Virtual Controller. This is useful when movement of the external equipment (such as a clamp or conveyer) must be simulated. For a procedure, see
.
Simulating programs
Simulating programs involves running a program on the virtual controller as it is run on a real controller. It is the most complete test whereby you can see how the robot interacts with external equipment through events and I/O signals. For a procedure, see
Simulation Setup on page 331 .
Improving the reachability
If the robot cannot reach the target, or if you are not satisfied with the motions, try the following for improving the reachability:
1 Set ConfL or ConfJ to Off for enabling the robot to use new configurations for reaching the target.
2 Change the orientation of the target.
3 Change the position of either the robot or the work piece.
4 Use a system with a track external axis for increasing the robot’s range.
5 Use a system with a positioner external axis for enabling different work piece positions for different targets.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
125
3 Programming robots
3.9.1 About programming MultiMove
3.9 Programming MultiMove systems
3.9.1 About programming MultiMove
About MultiMove
The MultiMove functions helps you create and optimize programs for MultiMove systems where one robot or positioner holds the work piece and other robots operate on it. Below is an outline of the main workflow for programming MultiMove systems with RobotStudio, with references to detailed instructions further down in the section.
Prerequisites
For using the MultiMove functions you must first have the following:
• A virtual controller running a MultiMove system started in RobotStudio, see
A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots on page 175
for an example.
• All coordinate systems and tools used by the system.
• The paths along which the tool shall move. The paths must be created in a workobject that belongs to a tool robot and is attached to the work piece robot. A wizard will guide you through attaching the workobjects if this has not been done before starting the MultiMove functions.
For detailed information about MultiMove in RobotWare systems and RAPID programs, see MultiMove application manual.
Normal workflow
This is the typical workflow for creating MutliMove programs using the MultiMove function:
Action
Setting up the MultiMove
Testing the MultiMove
Tuning the motion behavior
Creating the program
Description
Select the robots and paths to use in the program, see
Setting up the MultiMove on page 128
.
Execute the motion instructions along the paths, see
Testing the MultiMove on page 129
.
Tune motion behavior, such as tolerances and constraints for TCP motions, see
Tuning the motion behavior on page 130 .
Generate the tasks for the robots, see
Continues on next page
126
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.9.1 About programming MultiMove
Continued
Additional actions
In addition to using the functions that calculate and create optimized MulitMove paths, you can program MulitMove manaully using a combination of the ordinary programming tools in RobotStudio and a set of tools specific for MultiMove programming.
The main actions for programming MulitMove manually are outlined below. Not all actions might be necessary, but the order in which they shall be carried out depends on the contents of the station and your goals.
Action
Creating Tasklists and Syncidents
Description
This data specifies the tasks and paths that shall be synchronized with each other. See
The Create Tasklist tool on page 236
and
The Create Syncident tool on page 236 , respectively.
Adding and updating ID arguments to the instructions to synchronize
To add IDs to the intructions, you can use one of the following methods:
Using
The Recalculate ID tool on page 235
to add and update IDs for instructions in paths that already are synchronized.
Using
The Convert path to MultiMove path tool on page 236
to add IDs to instructions in paths that have not yet been synchronized.
Adding and adjusting Sync instructions to the paths.
Add
SyncMoveon/Off or
WaitSyncTask instructions to the paths to synchronize and set their tasklist and
Syncident parameters. See
Creating an action instruction on page 239
.
Teaching MultiMove instructions It is also possible to jog all robots to the desired positions and then teach instructions to new synchronized paths.
See
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
127
3 Programming robots
3.9.2 Setting up the MultiMove
3.9.2 Setting up the MultiMove
Selecting robots and paths
This procedure is for selecting the robots and paths in the station that shall be used for the MutliMove program. All robots for the MultiMove program must belong to the same system.
1 On the Home tab, click MultiMove. Click the Setup tab below the MutliMove work area.
2 In the work area, click the System config bar for expanding the system config section.
3 In the Select System box, select the system that contains the robots to program.
The robots of the selected system are now displayed in the System grid below the Select system box.
4 For each robot that shall be used in the program, select the check box in the
Enable column.
5 For each robot that shall be used in the program, specify whether it carries the tool or the work piece using the options in the Carrier column.
6 In the work area, click the Path config bar for expanding the path config section.
7 Select the Enable check box for the tool robot and click the expand button.
This displays the paths of the robot.
8 Select the order of the paths to execute by specifying them in right order using Path name column.
9 For each path that shall be included in the program, select the check box in the Enable column.
10 When you have set up the robots and paths, continue testing the Multimove and then tune the motion properties, if necessary.
128
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.9.3 Testing the MultiMove
3.9.3 Testing the MultiMove
Overview
Testing the MultiMove executes the motion instructions along the paths according to the current settings on the setup and motions properties pages.
Testing Paths
This procedure is for setting the robots start position and testing the resulting movements along the path sequence.
1 Jog the robots to what seems to be a good start position.
2 On the Home tab, click MultiMove. Click the Test tab at the bottom of the
MultiMove work area for displaying the test area.
3 Optionally, select the Stop at end check box to make the simulation stop after moving along the paths. Clearing this check box makes the simulation continue in a loop until you click Pause.
4 Click Play to simulate the motions along the paths based on the current start position.
If you are satisfied with the motions, continue generating multimove paths.
If the simulation cannot complete or if you are not satisfied with the motions, pause the simulation and perform any of the actions below to adjust the motions:
Action
Examine the robots’ positions for critical targets.
Description
Click Pause and then use the arrow buttons to move to one target a time.
Jog the robots to new start positions.
New start positions might result in changed motions, since the robots will use different configurations. In most cases, positions near the robots’ joint limits shall be avoided.
Go to the Motion Behavior tab and remove constraints.
The default setting for the motion properties is no constraints. If this has been changed, constraints might exist that limit motions more than necessary.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
129
3 Programming robots
3.9.4 Tuning the motion behavior
3.9.4 Tuning the motion behavior
Overview
Tuning the motion behavior means to set up rules for the robot’s motions, for example, constraints on the position or orientation of the tool. Generally, the
MultiMove program will obtain the smoothest motions with the fastest cycle and process times with as few constraints as possible.
For procedures, see
Motion Behavior tab on page 229 .
Modifying the joint influences
The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.
Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.
1 On the Home tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.
2 Expand the Joint Influence group by clicking its title bar.
3 In the Select Robot box, select the robot whose joint influence you want to modify.
The weight values for the robot axes are now displayed in the grid.
4 For each axis whose motion you want to restric or promote, adjust the Weight value. A lower value restricts, and a higher value promotes, motions on that axis.
Modifying the TCP constraints
The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.
Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.
1 On the Simulation tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.
2 Expand the TCP Constraints group by clicking its title bar.
The directions and rotations in which you can constrain the TCP’s motion are now displayed in the grid
3 For each pose you want to constrain, select the Enable check box and specify the constraint values (location in the TCP coordinate system). To use the values from the current TCP position, click Pick from TCP.
4 Optionally, adjust the Weight value for the constraint. A low value results in a harder constraint, while a high value allows a larger deviation.
Modifying the tool tolerance
The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.
Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.
1 On the Simulation tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.
2 Expand the Tool Tolerance group by clicking its title bar.
The directions and rotations in which you can enable tolerances are now displayed in the grid
Continues on next page
130
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.9.4 Tuning the motion behavior
Continued
3 For each offset you want to set, select the Enable check box.
4 In the Value column, specify the allowed deviation.
5 Optionally, adjust the Weight value for the tolerance. A low value increases the use of the tolerance, while a high value promotes motions that do not use the tolerance.
Modifying the tool offset
The tool offset sets a fixed distance between the tool and the paths.
1 On the Simulation tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.
2 Expand the Tool Offset group by clicking its title bar.
The directions and rotations in which you can set offsets are now displayed in the grid.
3 For each offset you want to set, select the Enable check box.
4 In the Offset column, specify the offset distance.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
131
3 Programming robots
3.9.5 Creating paths
3.9.5 Creating paths
Overview
When you are satisfied with the motions displayed when testing the Multimove program, the next step is to convert the temporary move instructions used by the
MultiMove function to ordinary paths in RobotStudio.
Creating the paths
To create paths for the MultiMove program in RobotStudio, follow these steps:
1 On the Home tab, click Create Paths tab.
2 Expand the Settings group by clicking on the its title bar.
3 Optionally, change the naming settings in the following boxes:
Box
Start ID
ID step index
Sync ident prefix
Task list prefix
Description
Specify the first ID number for the synchronization of the instructions for the robots.
Specify the increment between ID numbers.
Specify a prefix for the syncident variable, which connects the sync instructions in the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot with each other.
Specify a prefix for the tasklist variable, which identifies the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot to synchronize.
4 Expand the WP Robot Settings group by clicking on its title bar and then check the settings in the following boxes:
Box
WP Workobject
WP TCP
Path prefix
Target prefix
Description
Specify the workobject to which the targets generated for the workpiece robot shall belong.
Specify which tooldata the workpiece shall use when reaching its targets.
Specify a prefix for the generated paths.
Specify a prefix for the generated targets.
5 Expand the Generate path group by clicking on its title bar and then click
Create Paths.
132
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.10 Programming external axes
3.10 Programming external axes
Overview
This is a brief overview of the functions and commands for programming external axes in RobotStudio. For a more detailed description of external axes and how to program them, see the product manual for the external axis to use and the RAPID reference manual.
Coordinated motions
Normally, external axes are used to move the workpiece, the robot or any other mechanism. The motions of an external axis can be coordinated with those of a robot in two ways, depending on the task in which the external axis is defined.
Task for external axis
Same task as the robot´s
Coordination method
If the external axis is in the same task as the robot, the current position of active external axes is stored with each target that is created. When the robot then moves to the target, the external axis will move to the stored position as well.
Modifying and optimizing the position of positioner external axes can be automated using the MultiMove function, or be performed manually for selected targets. Positions of track external axes can only be modifed manually.
For information about using the MultiMove function, see
About programming MultiMove on page 126
. For information about how to modify the position of external axes manually, see below.
Other task than the robot’s If the external axis is in another task than that of the robot it shall be coordinated with, the motions of the external axis are created by MoveExt instructions, and the coordination is made by sync instructions.
For positioner external axes creating or optimizing MoveExt and sync instructions can be automated way using the MultiMove function, or be performed manually by creating a path with MoveExt instructions for the positioner and then adding sync instructions to the path for the robot and the external axis.
Track external axes can only be programed manually.
For information about using the MultiMove function see
About programming MultiMove on page 126
. For information about how to use the sync instructions, see RAPID reference manual and MultiMove application manual.
Modifying positions of external axes
When programming external axes, you often need to adjust the position of the external axis for some targets. For example, if you create a path from curves on a work piece that is attached to a positioner, the positioner will initially have the same position for all targets. By repositioning the work piece for some of the targets you might improve process time and reachability.
When targets are created in stations with a coordinated external axis, the position values of the external axis are stored in the target. With the Modify External Axis function you can reposition the external axis, thus making it possible for the robot to reach the target in new ways. For a procedure, see
Modify External Axis on page 476
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
133
3 Programming robots
3.10 Programming external axes
Continued
To modify the external axis values for a target, the following conditions must be met:
• The external axis must be added to the system and set up correctly. For examples of how to add support for an external axis to a system, see
station, see
Placing external axes on page 100 .
• The external axis must be defined in the same task as the robot.
• The external axis must be activated.
Activation and deactivation
Activating a mechanical unit makes it controlled and monitored by the controller.
Consequently, the mechanical unit must be activated before programming or running programs. If a system uses several external axes or interchangeable models with several work stations, several mechanical units might share common drive units. If this is the case, you must make sure to set the mechanical unit as active.
For more information about activating and deactivating mechanical units, see
RAPID reference manual on the instructions ActUnit and DeactUnit.
Activating and deactivating mechanical units can be done either manually, see
Activate Mechanical Units on page 341 , or programmatically by RAPID instructions,
see below.
To activate or deactivate mechanical units programmatically
To set the mechanical units to be active programmatically by RAPID instructions, follow these steps:
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, browse down to the path in which you want to insert the activation or deactivation instruction. To insert it as the first instruction in the path, select the path node and to insert it between existing instructions, select the instruction before the intended insertion point.
2 On the Home tab, click Action Instruction to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Instruction Templates list, select one of the ActUnit or DeactUnit instructions.
4 In the Instruction Arguments grid and the MechUnit list, select the unit to activate or deactivate.
5 Click Create. When the path is executed either through the Move along path command, or running the RAPID program, the instruction will be carried out.
134
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
3 Programming robots
3.11 Loading and saving programs and modules
3.11 Loading and saving programs and modules
Overview
RAPID programs and modules are normally stored in the RobotWare systems, as they are created. You can also save the programs to files on the PC, which makes it possible to load them to other controllers, either other virtual controllers or real
IRC5 controllers.
Programs are saved from the VC
When saving a program to files on the PC from RobotStudio, it is the RAPID program stored in the system of the VC that is saved. This program is created and updated by synchronizing the station to the VC, see
Synchronize to VC on page 415 .
Procedures
To create or load a module or load a program, see:
•
Creating a new RAPID module on page 423
•
Loading a RAPID module on page 423
•
Loading a RAPID program on page 427
To save a module or program, see:
•
Saving a RAPID module as another on page 423
•
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
135
3 Programming robots
3.12 Synchronization
3.12 Synchronization
Overview
To synchronize is to make sure that the RAPID program in the system running on the virtual controller corresponds to the programs in RobotStudio. You can synchronize both from RobotStudio to the virtual controller and from the virtual controller to RobotStudio.
In a RobotStudio station, robot positions and movements are defined by targets and move instructions in paths. These correspond to data declarations and RAPID instructions in the modules of the RAPID program. By synchronizing the station to the virtual controller, you create RAPID code out of the data in the station. By synchronizing the virtual controller to the station, you create paths and targets out of the RAPID program in the system running on the virtual controller.
When to synchronize the station to the VC
Synchronizing the station to the VC updates the RAPID program of the virtual controller with the latest changes in the station. This is useful to do before:
• Performing a simulation.
• Saving a program to files on the PC.
• Copying or loading RobotWare systems.
To synchronize a station to the VC, see
Synchronize to VC on page 415 .
When to synchronize the VC to the station
Synchronizing the VC to the station creates paths, targets and instructions that correspond to the RAPID program in the system running on the virtual controller.
This is useful to do when you have:
• Started a new virtual controller which system contains existing programs.
• Loaded a program from a file.
• Text-edited the program.
To synchronize the VC to a station, see
Synchronize to Station on page 414 .
136
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
4 Simulating programs
4.1 Simulation Overview
4 Simulating programs
4.1 Simulation Overview
About this chapter
This chapter describes how to simulate and validate robot programs. Below are short introductions to the simulation functions in RobotStudio.
Function
Play simulations
Collision detection
Description
Simulations run entire robot programs on a virtual controller.
Before you run a simulation you need to decide which paths are to be simulated. To set up a simulation, see
. To run a simulation, see
Simulation Control on page 342
.
Collision detection displays and logs collisions and near-misses for specified objects in the station. Normally used during simulation of robot programs, it can also be used when building the station.
For more information, see
Detecting collisions on page 139
.
Event handling
I/O Simulation
Simulation Monitoring
Events can be used to connect an action to a trigger. For example, you can attach one object to another when they collide or a signal is set. For more information, see
.
In simulations I/O signals are normally set either by the robot program or by events. With the I/O simulator you can set signals manually, which provides a quick test of specific conditions.
For more information, see
Simulating I/O signals on page 143 .
With the simulation monitoring functions you enhance the simulation by adding traces along the TCP movements or alerts triggered by defined speeds or motions. For more information, see
Enabling simulation monitoring on page 144
.
Process time measurement With the process timer you measure the time for a process to complete. For more information, see
Measuring simulation time on page 145
.
Time handling during simulation
When simulating stations with events or several controllers, or other time managing equipment, time can be managed in two modes: either as free runtime or as time slices. RobotStudio uses time slice mode by default, but you can switch to free runtime, if required.
Free runtime
Since all controllers use the same computer resources, their synchronization might not be exactly as in the real world if they run independently of each other (called free run mode). The cycle time will be correct, but the timing for setting signals and triggering events might be inaccurate.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
137
4 Simulating programs
4.1 Simulation Overview
Continued
Time Slice
Time slices can be used to ensure that the timing for signals and other interaction between controllers is accurate. In this mode, RobotStudio synchronizes the controllers by dividing a time segment into small slices and waiting for all controllers to complete a current time slice before any controller can start anew. Thus, the controllers are synchronized, and the cycle time will be calculated correctly. The drawbacks are that the virtual FlexPendant cannot be open, and that the simulation might be somewhat slow and jerky, depending on the complexity of the simulation and the performance of the computer.
Note
If the simulation uses events or involves several different controllers, the virtual time mode Time Slice shall be used to make sure that the timing between the controllers is correctly simulated.
138
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
4 Simulating programs
4.2 Detecting collisions
4.2 Detecting collisions
Overview
With RobotStudio you can detect and log collisions between objects in the station.
The basic concepts of collision detection are explained below.
Collision sets
A collision set contains two groups, Objects A and Objects B, in which you place the objects to detect any collisions between them. When any object in Objects A collides with any object in Objects B, the collision is displayed in the graphical view and logged in the output window. You can have several collision sets in the station, but each collision set can only contain two groups.
A common use of collision sets is to create one collision set for each robot in the station. For each collision set you then put the robot and its tool in one group and all objects you do not want it to collide with in the other. If a robot has several tools, or holds other objects, you can either add these to the robot’s group as well or create specific collision sets for these setups.
Each collision set can be activated and deactivated separately.
Collisions and near-misses
In addition to collisions, the collision detection can also watch for near-misses, which is when an object in Objects A comes within a specified distance from an object in Objects B.
Recommendations for collision detection
In general, the following principles are recommended to facilitate collision detection:
• Use as small collision sets as possible, splitting large parts and collecting in the collision sets only relevant parts.
• Enable coarse detail level when importing geometry.
• Limit the use of near-miss.
• Enable last collision detection, if the results are acceptable.
Results of creating a collision set
After you have created a collision set, see
Create Collision Set on page 330 ,
RobotStudio will check the positions of all objects and detect when any object in
ObjectsA collides with any object in ObjectsB.
Activation of detection and displayal of collisions depend on how the collision detection is set up.
If the collision set is active, RobotStudio will check the positions of the objects in the groups, and indicate any collision between them according to the current color settings.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
139
4 Simulating programs
4.2 Detecting collisions
Continued
Collision detection
Collision detection checks whether robots or other moving parts collide with equipment in the station. In complex stations, you can use several collision sets for detecting collisions between several groups of objects.
After collision detection has been set up, it does not need to be started, but automatically detects collisions according to the setup.
Setting when to check for collisions
To set whether to detect collisions always or only during simulation, follow these steps:
1 On the File menu, click Options.
2 On the Navigation pane to the left, select Simulation: Collision.
3 On the Collision page to the right, select one of the following options from the Perform collision detection:
Option
During simulation
Always
Description
Collision detection is active only during simulation (when running RAPID programs in the virtual controller).
Collision detection is always active, even when moving objects manually or testing reachability.
Setting the objects for collision detection
To set the objects for collision detection, follow these steps:
1 Make sure that the objects for collision detection are placed correctly in collision sets.
2 Make sure that the collision set for the objects is activated, which is indicated by an icon in the Layout browser:
Icon Description
Active. Collisions between objects in this set will be detected.
xx050033
Not active. Collisions between objects in this set will not be detected.
xx050007
To activate or deactivate collision sets, continue with the following steps:
3 Right-click the collision set to change and then click Modify Collision set to bring up a dialog box.
4 Select or clear the Active check box and then click Apply.
Setting near-miss detection
Near-misses occur when objects in collision sets are close to colliding. Each collision set has its own near-miss settings. For setting near-miss detection, follow these steps:
1 In the Layout browser, right-click the collision set to change and then click
Modify Collision set to bring up a dialog box.
Continues on next page
140 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Simulating programs
4.2 Detecting collisions
Continued
2 In the Near miss box, specify the maximum distance between the objects to be considered a near-miss and then click Apply.
Setting logging options
In addition to the graphical display of collisions, you can also log the collisions to the output window or a separate log file:
1 On the File menu, click Options.and under Simulation, click Collision.
2 On the Navigation pane to the left, select Simulation: Collision.
3 On the Collision page to the right, select Log collisions to Output window check box.
The collision log is displayed in the output window.
4 On the Collision page to the right, select Log collisions to file check box and enter the name and path to the log file in the box.
A separate file for logging collisions is created below the check box.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
141
4 Simulating programs
4.3 Creating an event
4.3 Creating an event
Overview
Events enhance your simulations by defining actions that are carried out when specific trigger conditions are fulfilled. You can use events to:
• Attach one object to another, for example, a work piece to a gripper when simulating material handling, see
Attaching and detaching objects on page 72 .
• Set signals, for example, when simulating signals set by equipment other than the controller, see
Simulating I/O signals on page 143
.
• Start or stop the process timer, see
Measuring simulation time on page 145 .
Used for creating new events, the Create New Event Wizard is launched from the
Event manager, see
.
Prerequisites
Before creating the event, make sure that the station contains all signals and objects that are planned to be used as triggers or affected by the action.
142
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
4 Simulating programs
4.4 Simulating I/O signals
4.4 Simulating I/O signals
Procedures
When simulating I/O signals you can either create events that set signal values when specified trigger conditions are fulfilled, or you can set signal values manually.
For procedures using the event manager, see
For procedures using the I/O simulator, see
.
Related information
For information about controlling I/O signals from the RAPID program, see
RAPID instructions for setting I/O signals on page 118 .
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
143
4 Simulating programs
4.5 Enabling simulation monitoring
4.5 Enabling simulation monitoring
Overview
The simulation monitor commands are used to visually detect critical robot movements during simulation by drawing a colored line that follows the TCP.
To enable TCP tracing
To enable TCP tracing, follow these steps:
1 On the Simulation tab, click Monitor to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the left pane, select the appropriate robot.
3 On the TCP Trace tab, select the Enable TCP Trace check box. This activates
TCP tracing for the selected robot.
4 Optionally, change the length and color of the trace. For detailed information, see
To enable simulation alerts
To enable simulation alerts, follow these steps:
1 On the Simulation menu, click Monitor to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the left pane, select the appropriate robot.
3 On the Alerts tab, select the Enable Simulation Alerts check box. This activates simulation alerts for the selected robot.
4 In the threshold value boxes, specify the threshold for the alerts. Setting the threshold to 0 is equivalent to disabling the alert. For detailed information, see
144
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
4 Simulating programs
4.6 Measuring simulation time
4.6 Measuring simulation time
Stopwatch feature for measuring simulation time
The Simulation tab's Stopwatch feature is used for measuring the time taken between two trigger points in a simulation, and also for the simulation as a whole.
The two trigger points are called the Start Trigger and the End Trigger.
When a stopwatch is setup, the timer starts when the Start Trigger occurs, and stops when the End Trigger occurs. The kinds of triggers you can specify are:
• Simulation Start
• Simulation Stop
• Target Changed
Additionally, specify the mechanical Unit and the target.
• I/O Value
Additionally, specify the source mechanical unit from where the signal comes, the type of I/O signal and the value of the signal.
You can several stopwatches setup for a simulation. You can also specify a different name for each stopwatch.
For information on how to use the Stopwatch feature, see
Tip
While you are on the Simulation tab, you can check the RobotStudio status bar for the Simulation Time, that is, from simulation start to simulation stop.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
145
This page is intentionally left blank
5 Deploying and distributing
5.1 Copying programs
5 Deploying and distributing
5.1 Copying programs
Overview
RAPID programs are normally stored in the systems that run on the virtual controllers of your station. To copy programs to systems on other controllers, save the programs to file on the PC and then load these files to the destination controllers. You can save either entire programs or specific modules.
Copying a program
To copy a program from one controller to another, follow these steps:
1 In the Controller browser, select the controller that contains the program to copy.
2 Save the program to file on the disc. For details, see
Saving a program on page 427 .
3 If necessary, copy the files to a location that is accessible to the other controller.
4 For instructions on loading the program to a system on a virtual controller, a FlexController or a non-running system, see the table below.
System location Do this
Virtual controller, running in RobotStudio
See
Loading a RAPID program on page 427
.
FlexController
A non-running system stored on the PC
Connect to the FlexController and load the program.
Start the system in a virtual controller, then load the program, see
and
Loading a RAPID program on page 427
, respectively.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
147
5 Deploying and distributing
5.2 Pack & Go / Unpack & Work
5.2 Pack & Go / Unpack & Work
Overview
The Pack & Go / Unpack & Work feature makes it possible to create a package
(zip file) of an active station that can be unpacked on another computer. The package contains all necessary files, except media pools, but additional, option-based media pools are included.
For procedures, see
and
148
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
5 Deploying and distributing
5.3 Screen Capture
5.3 Screen Capture
Overview
Screen capture entails two functions useful for demonstrations and training purposes:
• The Screenshot function which allows you to capture an image of the application.
• The Record Movie function which allows you to make a recording of your work in RobotStudio, either of the entire GUI or just the graphics window.
Taking screenshots
The Screenshot function allows you to capture an image of the entire application or an active document window such as the graphics window.
Note
The Screenshot feature is available only for RobotStudio Premium users.
Configure the options for the screenshot function as per your requirement under
Options:General:Screenshot in the File tab. For more information, see
Options:General:Screenshot on page 198 .
You can take screenshots using the keyboard shortcut CTRL + B. Alternatively, you can use the Screenshot button on the Quick Access Toolbar, but you must enable it first.
To enable the screenshot command button:
1 Click the Quick Access Toolbar’s down arrow. The Customize Quick Access
Toolbar menu is displayed.
2 Click Screenshot to add the check mark to the command. This adds the screenshot button to the Quick Access Toolbar.
Recording movies
You can record your activities in the RobotStudio application as a video. You can also record videos of simulations. For information on how to record videos in
RobotStudio, see
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
149
This page is intentionally left blank
6 Working online
6.1 Connecting a PC to the controller
6 Working online
6.1 Connecting a PC to the controller
General
In general there are two ways of physically connecting a PC to the controller, to the service port or to the factory network port.
The service port
The service port is intended for service engineers and programmers connecting directly to the controller with a PC.
The service port is configured with a fixed IP-address, which is the same for all controllers and cannot be changed, and has a DHCP server that automatically assigns an IP-address to the connected PC.
The factory network port
The factory network port is intended for connecting the controller to a network.
The network settings can be configured with any IP-address, typically provided by the network administrator.
Limitations
Note
The maximum number of connected network clients using Robot Communication
Runtime (RobAPI) is:
• WAN: 3 (LAN for DSQC 639)
• Service: 1
• FlexPendant: 1
The maximum number of applications using RobAPI running on the same PC connected to one controller has no built-in maximum. However, UAS limits the number of logged-on users to 50.
The maximum number of concurrently connected FTP clients is 4.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
151
6 Working online
6.1 Connecting a PC to the controller
Continued
Ports on the computer unit DSQC 639
The illustration below shows the two main ports on the computer unit DSQC 639, the service port and the LAN port.
connecti
A
B
Service port on the computer unit (connected to the service port on the controller front through a cable).
LAN port on the computer unit (connects to factory network).
Note
The LAN port is the only public network interface to the controller, typically connected to the factory network with a public IP-address provided by the network administrator.
Continues on next page
152
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.1 Connecting a PC to the controller
Continued
Ports on the computer unit DSQC1000
The illustration below shows the two main ports on the computer unit DSQC1000, the service port and the WAN port.
A
B xx1300000609
A
B
Service port on the computer unit (connected to the service port on the controller front through a cable).
WAN port on the computer unit (connects to factory network).
Note
The WAN port is the only public network interface to the controller, typically connected to the factory network with a public IP-address provided by the network administrator.
LAN1, LAN2, and LAN3 can only be configured as private networks to the IRC5 controller.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
153
6 Working online
6.1 Connecting a PC to the controller
Continued
Connecting a PC to the controller
1
2
3
Action Note
Make sure that the network setting on the
PC to be connected is correct.
When connecting to the service port:
• The PC must be set to “Obtain an
IP address automatically” or set as described in Service PC Informa-
tion in the Boot Application on the
FlexPendant.
When connecting to the factory network port:
• The network settings for the PC depend on the network configuration setup by the network administrator.
Refer to the system documentation for your
PC, depending on the operative system you are running.
For more information, see
.
Connect a network cable to the network port of your PC.
When connecting to the service port:
• Connect the network cable to the service port on the controller, or to the service port on the computer unit.
When connecting to the factory network port:
• Connect the network cable to the factory network port on the computer unit.
connectb
A Service port on the controller
154
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.2 Network settings
6.2 Network settings
Overview
This topic describes the network settings for a PC connected to a controller, which is a prerequisite for working online.
You can connect the PC to the controller through an Ethernet network in the following ways:
• Local network connection
• Service port connection
• Remote network connection
Local network connection
You can connect your PC to the same Ethernet network that the controller is connected to. When the PC and the controller are connected correctly and to the same subnet, the controller will be automatically detected by RobotStudio.
The network settings for the PC depend on the network configuration. For setting up the PC, contact the network administrator.
Service port connection
When connecting to the controller's service port, you can either obtain an IP address for the PC automatically, or you can specify a fixed IP address.
If you are not sure how to set up the service port connection, contact the network administrator.
Automatic IP address
The controller's service port has a DHCP server that will automatically give your
PC an IP address if it is configured for this. For detailed information see Windows help on configuring TCP/IP.
Fixed IP address
Instead of obtaining an IP address automatically, you can also specify a fixed IP address on the PC you connect to the controller.
Use the following settings for a fixed IP address:
Property
IP address
Subnet mask
Value
192.168.125.2
255.255.255.0
For detailed information about how to set up the PC network connection, see
Windows help on configuring TCP/IP.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
155
6 Working online
6.2 Network settings
Continued
Note
Obtaining an IP address automatically might fail if the PC already has an IP address from another controller or Ethernet device.
To ensure that you get a correct IP address if the PC was previously connected to an Ethernet device, do one of the following:
• Restart the PC before connecting to the controller.
• Run the command ipconfig /renew from the command prompt after connecting the PC to the controller.
Remote network connection
To enable a connection to a controller on a remote subnet or over the local network, the relevant network traffic must be allowed through any firewalls between the PC and the controller.
The firewalls must be configured to accept the following TCP/IP traffic from the PC to the controller:
• UDP port 5514 (unicast)
• TCP port 5515
• Passive FTP
All TCP and UPD connections to remote controllers are initiated by the PC, that is the controller only responds on the given source port and address.
Firewall settings
The firewall settings are applicable irrespective of whether you are connected to a real controller or a virtual controller.
The following table describes the necessary firewall configurations:
Status Name Action Direction
Protocol Remote
Address
Local
Service
Remote
Service
Out UDP/IP Any Any RobNetscan-
Host
Allow
IRS5Controller
Allow In UDP/IP Any 5513
Application
5512,5514 robnetscanhost.exe
Any robnetscanhost.exe
RobComCtrlServer
RobotFTP
Allow
Allow
Out
Out
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
Any
Any
Any
Any
5515
FTP(21) robcomctrlserver.exe
Any
In addition, the following table describes the necessary firewall configurations for the RobotWare option, Integrated Vision:
Status Name
Telnet
In-Sight Protocol
Action Direction
Allow
Allow
Out
Out
Protocol Remote
Address
Local
Service
Remote
Service
Application
TCP/IP Any Any 23
TCP/IP Any Any 1069
RobotStudio.exe
RobotStudio.exe
Continues on next page
156 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Working online
6.2 Network settings
Continued
Status Name Action Direction
In-Sight Discovery
Allow
Upgrade port
(PC only)
Allow
DataChannel Allow
In/Out
Out
Out
Protocol Remote
Address
Local
Service
Remote
Service
Application
UDP/IP Any 1069 1069
TCP/IP Any Any 1212
RobotStudio.exe
RobotStudio.exe
TCP/IP Any Any 50000 RobotStudio.exe
Note
RobotStudio uses the current Internet Options, HTTP, and proxy settings to get the latest RobotStudio news. To view the latest RobotStudio news, go to the File tab and then the Help sub-tab.
Connecting to the controller
1 Make sure the PC is connected to the controller's service port and that the controller is running.
2 On the File menu, click Online and then select One Click Connect.
This takes you to the Controller tab.
3 Click Add Controller
4 Click Request Write access.
If the controller is in mode
Auto
Manual
Then
You will now get Write Access if it is available.
A message box on the FlexPendant will allow you to grant remote Write Access to RobotStudio.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
157
6 Working online
6.3 User Authorization
6.3 User Authorization
Overview
This section describes the controller's User Authorization System (UAS), which restricts what different users are allowed to do with the robot. This is for protecting data and functionality from unauthorized use.
The user authorization is managed by the controller, which means that the UAS settings remain for the controller regardless of which system it is running. It also means that the UAS settings apply to all tools for communicating with the controller, like RobotStudio or the FlexPendant. The UAS settings defines the users and groups that can access the controller, and what actions they are granted access to.
For procedures, see
Users
UAS users are accounts with which persons log on to the controller. Furthermore, the users are added to groups to which access grants are given.
The users are defined in the controller by a user name and a password. For logging on to a controller, the user must type in a defined user name with a correct password.
A user can either have the state activated or deactivated in the UAS. When a user is deactivated it is not possible to log on to the controller using that account. It is the UAS administrator that activates and deactivates the users.
The Default user
All controllers have a default user named Default User with a publicly known password robotics. The Default User cannot be removed and the password cannot be changed. However, the user having the grant Manage UAS settings can modify the controller grants and application grants of the Default User.
Groups
In UAS, groups are defined sets of grants for accessing the controller. To the groups you then add the users who shall have the grants defined by the group.
A good practice is to create groups that resembles the professions that work with the robots in your organization. For example, you can create groups for administrators, programmers and operators.
The Default group
All controllers have a default group named Default Group, to which all grants are given and to which the default user belongs. This group cannot be removed, but it can be changed by the user having the grant Manage UAS settings.
Continues on next page
158
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.3 User Authorization
Continued
Note
There is a risk changing the group membership of the default user. If you by mistake clear the Default User check box or any Default Group grant, you will get a warning. Make sure that there is at least one user defined that has the grant
Manage UAS settings. If the Default group and no other group have the grant
Manage UAS settings, you may lose your ability to manage users and groups.
Grants
Grants are permissions to perform actions or access data on the controller. You use the grants by giving them to groups, to which you then add the users who shall have the grants.
Grants may be either controller grants or application grants. Depending on the actions that you will perform, you may need several grants. For procedures, see
UAS Grant Viewer on page 401 .
Controller grants
Controller grants are validated by the robot controller and apply to all tools and devices accessing the controller.
Application grants
Application grants are used by a specific application, for example the FlexPendant, and will only be valid using that application. Application grants can be added by additional options and used in customer applications.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
159
6 Working online
6.4.1 System Builder Overview
6.4 The System Builder
6.4.1 System Builder Overview
Overview
This section describes how you create, build, modify and copy systems to run on virtual and real controllers. These systems may even be converted to boot media and downloaded to a real controller.
The system points out the robot models and options to use; it also stores configurations and programs for the robots. Therefore, it is good practice to use a unique system for each station even if the stations use the same basic setup.
Otherwise, changes in one station may accidently overwrite data used in another station.
About virtual and real systems
The system you run on virtual controllers can either be a real system built on real
RobotWare keys or a virtual system built on virtual keys.
When using real systems, the RobotWare keys define which options and robot models shall be used, thus helping you to configure the system correctly. Real systems can be run both on virtual controllers and real IRC5 controllers.
When using virtual keys, all options and robot models are available, which is useful for evaluation purposes, but requires more configuration when creating the system.
Systems built on virtual keys can only be run on virtual controllers.
Prerequisites
Creating a system entails applying a predefined template to a station, reusing an existing system or letting RobotStudio propose a system based on a layout.
To create a system, the following conditions must be met:
• The RobotWare media pool must be installed on your PC.
• You must have a RobotWare key for the system, if creating a system to run on a real controller. The RobotWare key is a license key that determines which robot models to use and which RobotWare options to run on the controller. The license key is delivered with the controller.
• If you want to create a system for virtual use only, you can use a virtual key instead. Virtual keys are generated by the wizard. When using virtual keys, you select the robot models and options to use in the Modify Options section of the wizard.
• Downloading to the real controller requires a direct connection from your computer to the service or Ethernet port of the controller.
Administering systems
Systems can be administered from the System Builder dialog box in the following ways:
• View system properties, see
Viewing system properties on page 162
.
• Build a system, see
Building a new system on page 163 .
Continues on next page
160 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Working online
6.4.1 System Builder Overview
Continued
• Modify or delete a system, see
Modifying a system on page 167
.
• Copy a system, see
.
• Create a system from backup, see
Creating a system from backup on page 172 .
• Download a system to a controller, see
Downloading a system to a controller on page 173
.
• Create boot media, see
Creating boot media on page 174
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
161
6 Working online
6.4.2 Viewing system properties
6.4.2 Viewing system properties
Overview
All systems you create with the System Builder are stored locally on your computer.
It is recommended that you store them in one or more dedicated system directories.
Viewing system properties
To view system properties and add comments, follow these steps:
1 In the System Builder dialog box, select a system from the Systems box.
If necessary, in the System directory list, you can navigate to the folder in which your systems are stored
2 The system properties are then displayed in the System Properties box.
Optionally, type a comment in the Comments box, and click Save.
162
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.3 Building a new system
6.4.3 Building a new system
Overview
The New Controller System Wizard, used for building a new system, is launched from the System Builder.
Starting the wizard
To start the wizard, follow these steps:
1 Click System Builder to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the Actions group, click Create New. This starts the wizard.
3 Read the information on the welcome page and click Next.
Specifying the name and location
To determine where on your computer to store the system you are creating, follow these steps:
1 In the Name box, enter a name for the system you are creating.
2 In the Path box, enter the path to the system directory in which you will store the system.
You can also click the Browse button and browse to the system directory.
3 Click Next.
Entering the RobotWare keys
The RobotWare keys determine which RobotWare versions and parts to use in the system.
Creating a system to run on either IRC5 controllers or virtual controllers requires at least two keys: one for the controller module and one for each drive module in the cabinet. The keys are delivered together with the controller.
For creating a system to run on virtual controller only (for example, in Virtual IRC5), you can use virtual keys. Virtual keys give access to all options and robot models, but limits the use of the system to virtual controllers only.
To enter the key for the controller module, follow these steps:
1 In the Controller Key box, enter the controller key. You can also click Browse and browse to the key file. If creating a system for virtual use only, select the Virtual Key check box, and the controller key will be generated by the wizard.
2 In the Media Pool box, enter the path to the media pool. You can also click
Browse and browse to the folder.system
3 In the RobotWare Version list, select which version of the RobotWare you want to use. Only RobotWare versions that are valid for the used key are available.
4 Click Next.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
163
6 Working online
6.4.3 Building a new system
Continued
Entering the drive keys
To enter the keys for the drive modules:
1 In the Drive Key box, enter the key for the drive module. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the key file. If you used a virtual controller key, a virtual drive key is already generated by the wizard.
2 Click the right arrow button next to the Drive Key box. The key now appears in the Added drive keys list.
For real systems the drive key determines the connected robot model. For virtual systems you select the robot model in the Modify Options page. The default model is IRB140.
3 If you have a MultiMove system, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each drive key to add.
If you have a MultiMove system, make sure that the keys are numbered in the same way as their corresponding drive modules are connected to the controller module. Use the up and down arrows to rearrange the drive keys, if necessary.
4 If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to modify options, or add options, parameter data or additional files to the home directory, click Next.
Adding additional options
Here you can add options, such as external axes and dispense applications, that are not included in the basic system. Options require a license key and must be first imported to the media pool. To add additional options, follow these steps:
1 In the Key box, enter the option key. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the option's key file.
2 Click the Arrow button.
The option that the key unlocks is now displayed in the Added Options list.
Note
If several versions of an additional option exists, only the latest version can be selected. To use an older version, remove the other versions of the additional option from the Mediapool.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to include.
4 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to modify options, or add parameter data or additional files to the home directory, click Next.
Continues on next page
164
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.3 Building a new system
Continued
Modifying options
Here you can set up and configure the options in your system. For virtual systems, you also select the robot models to use. To modify any options, follow these steps:
1 In the Option tree, expand the option folders to the level where you find the option you want to modify.
Only the options unlocked by the used keys are available.
2 Modify the option.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to modify.
4 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to add parameter data or additional files to the home directory, click Next.
Adding parameter data
Parameter data is stored in the parameter data files (.cfg files). Each parameter topic has its own parameter file. You can add only one parameter file for each topic.
To add parameter data, follow these steps:
1 In the Parameter data box, enter the path to the folder for the parameter data files. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.
2 In the list of parameter data files, select the file you want to include and press the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to include.
The included parameter data files will now appear in the Added parameter
data files list.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each parameter data file you want to add.
3 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to add additional files to the home directory, click Next.
Adding files to the home directory
You can add any type of file to the system’s home directory. When the system is loaded to a controller, these files will also be loaded. To add files to the system's home directory, follow these steps:
1 In the Files box, enter the path to the folder for the files you want to include.
You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.
2 In the list of files, select the file to add and click the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to add.
The added files will now appear in the Added files list.
3 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to read a summary before you create the system, click Next.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
165
6 Working online
6.4.3 Building a new system
Continued
Completing the New Controller System Wizard
To complete the wizard, follow these steps:
1 Read the system summary.
2 If the system is OK, click Finish.
If the system is not OK, click Back and make modifications or corrections.
166
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.4 Modifying a system
6.4.4 Modifying a system
Overview
The Modify Controller System Wizard, used to modify existing systems, is launched from the System Builder.The wizard helps you with tasks like changing robots, adding and removing external axes and other options. A system that is running must be first shut down before modification.
Starting the wizard
To start the wizard when creating a new station:
1 If the system is currently running, on the Controller menu, point to Shutdown and then click Shutdown.
2 On the Controller menu, click System Builder to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the System directory list, enter or browse to the system directory. Select a system from the list beneath, review the system properties and add and save any comments.
4 In the Actions group, click Modify. This starts the wizard.
5 Read the information on the welcome page and click Next.
Modifying the program revision
The RobotWare versions that are available for the system are determined by the controller key. The key is essential to the system and cannot be modified.
To use another RobotWare version than the available ones, create a new system with another key.
To optionally modify the program revision, follow the appropriate step or steps:
1 To keep the current RobotWare version, select Yes and then click Next .
2 To replace the current RobotWare version, Select No, replace it..
3 In the Media pool box, enter the path to the media pool. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.
4 In the New program revision box, select which version of RobotWare you want to use. Only RobotWare versions that are valid for the RobotWare key are available.
5 Click Next.
Adding or removing drive keys
The drive key corresponds to the drive modules in your controller. For MultiMove systems, you have one drive module (and one key) for each robot. The keys for your system are delivered together with the controller.
the system is created with a vritual controller key, virtual drive keys are generated by the wizard. when you have added one virtual drive key for each robot, you select which robot to use for each key on the Modify Options page.
To optionally add or remove the keys for the drive modules, follow these steps:
1 To add a key for a drive module, enter the key in the Enter Drive Key box.
You can also click the Browse button and browse to the key file.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
167
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Working online
6.4.4 Modifying a system
Continued
2 Click the right arrow button. The key now appears in the Added drive key list.
If you have a MultiMove system, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each drive key to add.
3 To remove a drive module, select the corresponding key in the Added drive
key list and click Remove drive key.
If you have a MultiMove system, repeat step 3 for each drive key to remove.
4 If you have a MultiMove system, make sure that the keys are numbered in the same way as their corresponding drive modules are connected to the controller module. Use the up and down arrows to rearrange the drive keys, if necessary.
5 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to modify options, parameter data or add files to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.
Adding or removing additional options
To optionally add or remove additional options:
1 To add an addtional option, in the Enter Key box, enter the option key. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the option's key file.
2 Click the Arrow button.
The option that the key unlocks is now displayed in the Added Options list.
Note
If several versions of an additional option exists, only the latest version can be selected. To use an older version, remove the other versions of the additional option from the Mediapool.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to include.
4 To remove an additional option, iIn the Added options list, select the option you want to remove.
5 Click Remove.
6 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to modify parameter data or add files to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.
Modifying options
To optionally modify any options, follow these steps:
1 In the Option tree, expand the option folders to the level where you find the option you want to modify.
Only the options unlocked by the used keys are available.
Continues on next page
168 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Working online
6.4.4 Modifying a system
Continued
2 Modify the option.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to modify.
4 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to modify parameter data or add files to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.
Adding or removing parameter data
Parameter data is stored in the parameter data files (.cfg files). each parameter topic has its own parameter file. You can add only one parameter file for each topic.
To addor remove parameter data, follow these steps:
1 To add parameter data, in the Parameter data box, enter the path to the folder for the parameter data files. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.
2 In the list of parameter data files, select the file you want to include and press the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to include.
The included parameter data files will now appear in the Added parameter
data files list.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each parameter data file you want to add.
3 To remove parameter data, in the Added parameter data files list, select the parameter data file to remove.
4 Click Remove.
5 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
If you want to add to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.
Add files to or remove files from the home directory
You can add any type of file to the system’s home directory, or remove files from it. When the system is loaded to a controller, these files will also be loaded. To optionally add files to or remove files from the system's home directory, follow these steps:
1 To add files, in the Files box, enter the path to the folder for the files you want to include. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.
2 In the list of files, select the file to add and click the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to add.
The added files will now appear in the Added files list.
3 To remove files, in the Added files list, select the file to remove.
4 Click Remove.
5 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.
If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
169
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Working online
6.4.4 Modifying a system
Continued
If you want to read a summary before you create the system, click Next.
Complete the Modify Controller System wizard
To complete the wizard, follow these steps:
1 Read the system summary.
2 If the system is OK, click Finish.
If the system is not OK, click Back and make modifications or corrections.
Result
Modifications will take effect when the wizard is completed.
If the system has been downloaded to a controller, it must be downloaded again before the modifications will take effect on the controller.
If the system is used by a VC, perform an I-start for the changes to take effect.
Deleting a system
To delete a system, follow this steps:
1 From the System Builder dialog box, select the system and then click Delete.
170
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.5 Copying a system
6.4.5 Copying a system
Copy a system
To copy a system, follow these steps:
1 From the System Builder dialog box, select the system and then click Copy to bring up a dialog box.
2 Enter a name for the new system and a path, and then click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
171
6 Working online
6.4.6 Creating a system from backup
6.4.6 Creating a system from backup
Overview
The Create System from Backup Wizard, which creates a new system from a controller system backup, is launched form the System Builder. In addition, you can change the program revision and options.
Starting the wizard
To start the wizard, follow these steps:
1 From the System Builder dialog box, click Create from Backup. This starts the wizard.
2 Read the information on the welcome page and click Next.
Specifying the name and location
To specify the destination folder, follow these steps:
1 In the Name box, enter a name for the system you are creating.
2 In the Path box, enter the path to the system directory in which you will store the system.
You can also click the Browse button and browse to the system directory.
3 Click Next.
Locating the backup
To locate a system from backup, follow these steps:
1 In the Backup folder box, enter the path to the backup folder. Alternatively, click the Browse button to browse to it. Click Next.
2 In the Media Pool box, enter the path to the media pool containing the appropriate RobotWare program. Confirm the backup information that now appears in the wizard. Click Next.
172
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.7 Downloading a system to a controller
6.4.7 Downloading a system to a controller
Overview
All systems you access from the System Builder are stored on your computer. If you wish to run a system on a robot controller, you must first load it to the controller, which then requires a restart.
Load a system
To load a system to a controller, follow these steps:
1 From the System Builder dialog box, select a system and then click Download
to Controller to bring up a dialog box.
2 Specify the Destination Controller for the system.
You can select by using the...
Select controller from list option
Specify IP address or controller name
option
Use service port option
if...
the controller has been detected automatically.
your PC and the robot is connected to the same network.
You can only use the controller name in
DHCP networks.
your PC is directly connected to the controller's service port.
3 Optionally, click Test Connection to confirm that the connection between the computer and the Controller is OK.
4 Click Load.
5 Answer Yes to the question Do you want to restart the controller now?
Yes
No
Cancel
The controller restarts immediately and the downloaded system starts automatically.
The controller does not restart immediately.
To start using the downloaded system, you have to: a perform a C-start or an X-start b select the system manually
The downloaded system is removed from the controller.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
173
6 Working online
6.4.8 Creating boot media
6.4.8 Creating boot media
Overview
Boot media is an entire system which the System Builder packs to a single file and commonly stores on a hard disk or USB memory. The controller then accesses the file through its Ethernet port or USB port, respectively.
Creating boot media
To create boot media, follow these steps:
1 From the System Builder dialog box, create a new system. For creating a new system, see
Building a new system on page 163
.
2 From the System Builder dialog box, select a new system or an existing system and then click Boot Media.
3 In the Path box, enter the path to the folder where you want to store the boot media file. Alternatively, browse to the location.
4 Click OK.
Result
To load the boot media system to a controller, first connect it and then restart the controller with the advanced restart method X-start.
174
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots
6.4.9 Examples using the System Builder when offline
6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots
Overview
In this example we will use the System Builder to create a coordinated offline system with one IRB2400 and one IRB1600 robot to use in a new RobotStudio station.
Starting the New Controller System Wizard
To create a system like the one described above, follow these steps:
1 Click System Builder to bring up the dialog box.
2 In the dialog box, click Create New to bring up the New Controller System
Wizard.
3 Read the welcome text, and click Next to continue to the next page.
Entering the name and path
1 In the Name box, enter the name of the system. The name must not contain blank spaces or non-ASCII characters.
In this example, name the system MyMultiMove.
2 In the Path box, enter the path for the folder to save the system in, or click the Browse button to browse to the folder or create a new one.
In this example, save the system in C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial
IT\Robotics IT\RobotStudio\ABB Library\Training Systems.
3 Click Next to continue to the next page.
Entering the controller key
1 Select the Virtual key check box. A virtual controller key now appears in the
Controller Key box. In this example we will use the default media pool and
RobotWare version.
2 Click Next to continue to the next page.
Entering drive keys
1 Click the Right Arrow button next to the Enter Drive key box twice to create one drive key for each robot.
2 Click Next to continue to the next page.
Adding options
1 This system does not require any additional option keys. Click Next and continue to the next page of the wizard.
Modifying options
When creating robot systems from real robot keys, the key sets the options. But since we are using a virtual key, we have to set the options manually.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
175
6 Working online
6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots
Continued
To set the options necessary for a MultiMove, follow these steps:
1 Scroll down to the RobotWare / Motion Coordination 1 group and select the
MultiMove Coordinated check box.
2 Scroll down to the RobotWare / I/O control group and select the Multitasking and the Advanced RAPID check boxes.
3 Scroll down to the DriveModule1 / Drive module application group and expand the ABB Standard manipulator option. Select the IRB 2400 Type A option, manipulator variant IRB 2400L Type A.
4 Scroll down to the DriveModule2 / Drive module application group and expand the ABB Standard manipulator option. Select the IRB 1600 option, manipulator variant IRB 1600-5/1.2.
5 Click Finish and the system will be created.
176
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis
6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis
Overview
In this example we will use the System Builder to create an offline system to use in a new RobotStudio station with one IRB1600 robot and one IRBP 250D positioner external axis.
Prerequisites
When creating systems for positioner external axes, you need the media pool and the license key file for that specific positioner. In this example we will use a media pool and license key file for a demo positioner.
Paths to files and folders assume that RobotStudio and the RobotWare media pool have been installed at their default locations on Windows XP. If not, adjust the paths accordingly.
Starting the New Controller System Wizard
To create a system like the one described above, follow these steps:
1 Click System Builder to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the dialog box, click Create New to bring up the New Controller System
Wizard.
3 Read the welcome text, and click Next to continue to the next page.
Entering the controller key
1 Select the Virtual key check box. A virtual controller key now appears in the
Controller Key box. In this example we will use the default media pool and
RobotWare version.
2 Click Next to continue to the next page.
Entering drive keys
1 Click the Right Arrow button next to the Enter Drive key box to create one drive key for the robot.
2 Click Next to continue to the next page.
Adding options
This is where we point out the key file for the positioner.
1 Next to the Enter key box, click the browse button and select the key file.
In this example, browse to and select the file extkey.kxt in the folder
C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics
IT\MediaPool\3HEA-000-00022.01.
Tip
In the MediaPool folder media pools for several standard positioners are installed. They are named by the positioner’s article number, with a suffix that indicates if it is configured for single-robot or MultiMove systems.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
177
6 Working online
6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis
Continued
2 Click the Right Arrow button next to the Enter key box to add the key for the positioner.
3 Click Next and continue to the next page of the wizard.
Modifying options
When creating robot systems from real robot keys, the key sets the options. But since we are using a virtual key, we have to set the options manually. To set the options necessary for a positioner, follow these steps:
1 Scroll down to the RobotWare / Hardware group and select the 709-x
DeviceNet check box.
This option is for the communication between the controller and the track external axis.
2 Scroll down to the DriveModule1 / Drive module application group and expand the ABB Standard manipulator option. Select the IRB 1600 option.
This option sets the robot to an IRB 1600-5/1.2.
3 Scroll down to the DriveModule1 > Drive module configuration group; select the Drive System 04 1600/2400/260 option; expand the Additional axes
drive module group and select the R2C2 Add drive option.
a Expand the Drive type in position Z4 group and select the 753-1 Drive
C in pos Z4 option b Expand the Drive type in position Y4 group and select the754-1 Drive
C in pos Y4 option c Expand the Drive type in position X4 group and select the755-1 Drive
C in pos X4 option
This option adds drive modules for the positioner axes.
Note
When using the latest drive system, do the following:
Scroll down to the DriveModule1 > Drive module configuration group; select the Drive System 09 120/140/1400/1600 Compact option; expand the Power supply configuration group and select 1-Phase Power supply or 3-Phase Power supply (as applicable) > Additional axes drive module
> Additional drive a Expand the Drive type in position X3 group and select the Drive
ADU-790A in position X3 option b Expand the Drive type in position Y3 group and select the Drive
ADU-790A in position Y3 option c Expand the Drive type in position Z3 group and select the Drive
ADU-790A in position Z3 option
4 Click Finish and the system will be created. When starting the system in a
RobotStudio station, you have to set up the system to load a model for the positioner and to get the motions to work properly. See
Placing external axes on page 100
for more information.
178
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.4.9.3 Options settings for systems with positioners
6.4.9.3 Options settings for systems with positioners
Overview
This is an overview of the RobotWare options to set when creating a system for positioner external axes. Note that besides setting the RobotWare options, you must add an additonal option key for the positioner.
Media pools and option keys for the positioners
If you have the media pool and option key for your positioner, you can use these files.
If not, media pools for standard positioners are installed with RobotStudio. The path to these media pools in a default installation is: C.\program files\ABB Industrial
IT\Robotics IT\MediaPool. In this folder a media pool for each positioner is located.
These are named by the article number of the positioner, with a suffix that indicates if it is configured for a single-robot or a MultiMove system.
In the Add additional options page of the System Builder, you should add the option for the positioner by opening the mediapool folder for the positioner to add and selecting the extkey.kxt file.
Options for positioners in single-robot systems
When adding a positioner to a single-robot system, the positioner will be added to the same task as the robot. Below, the options to set on the Modify Options page of the System Builder for such a system are listed:
• RobotWare > Hardware > 709-x DeviceNet > 709-1 Master/Slave Single
• Optionally, for using the system with ArcWare also add RobotWare >
Application arc > 633-1 Arc
• DriveModule 1 > Drive module configuration > Drive System 04
1600/2400/260 > RC2C Add drive > 753-1 Drive C in pos Z4 > 754-2 Drive
T in pos Y4 > 755-3 Drive U in pos X4
Options for positioners in MultiMove robot systems
When adding a positioner to a MultiMove robot system, the positioner shall be added to a task of its own (thus you also have to add a drive key for the positioner).
Below, the options to set on the Modify Options page of the System Builder for such a system are listed:
• RobotWare > Hardware > 709-x DeviceNet > 709-1 Master/Slave Single
• RobotWare > Motion coordinated part 1 > 604-1 MultiMove Coordinated
Optionally, expand the MultiMove Coordinated option and select process options for the robots.
• Optionally, for using the system with ArcWare, add RobotWare > Application
Arc > 633-1 Arc
• DriveModule 1 > Drive module configuration > Drive System 04
1600/2400/260 > RC2C Add drive > 753-1 Drive C in pos Z4 > 754-2 Drive
T in pos Y4 > 755-3 Drive U in pos X4. For the other drive modules, no additional axes should be configured.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
179
6 Working online
6.5 Handle I/O
6.5 Handle I/O
Overview
The I/O system
The I/O system of a controller consists of I/O buses, I/O units and I/O signals. The
I/O buses are the controller's connections for I/O units (for instance I/O boards) and the I/O units contain channels for the actual signals.
The I/O buses and units are displayed in the robot view, as child nodes under each controller and the I/O signals are displayed in the I/O window.
I/O signals
I/O signals are used to communicate between the controller and external equipment, or to change variables within a robot program.
Input signals
Input signals notify something for the controller, for instance a feeder belt can set an input signal when it has positioned a work piece. The input signal can then be programmed to start a specific part of the robot program.
Output signals
Simulated signals
A simulated signal is a signal that is manually given a specific value that overrides the actual signal. Thus simulated signals might be useful for testing robot programs without activating or running equipment.
Virtual signals
The controller uses output signals to notify that a specified condition has been fulfilled. For instance, after the robot has finished its sequence, an output signal can be set. This signal can then be programmed to start a feeder belt, update a counter or trigger any other action.
Virtual signals are signals that are not configured to belong to a physical I/O unit.
Instead, they reside inside the controller's memory. A common use for virtual signals is to set variables and store changes in a robot program.
Procedures
The I/O system handles input and output signals to and from the controller. Below are the parts of the system described, as well as common types of signals.
The I/O system window is used to view and set previously configured signals, and to activate and deactivate I/O units.
For using the I/O system window, see
Inputs / Outputs on page 363 .
For adding a signal, see
.
180
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.6 Configure systems
6.6 Configure systems
Configuring system parameters
System parameters may be configured as follows:
• To view topics, types, instances and parameters
• To edit the parameters of an instance
• To copy and paste instances
• To add and delete instances
• To load and save complete configuration files to and from controllers
When working with configurations, the following tools, see
Configuration editor on page 373
, are useful:
Tool
The Configuration
Editor
Use
With the Configuration Editor you work with the types and instances of a specific topic.
The Instance Editor With the Instance Editor, you specify the values of the parameters in the instances of system parameter types.
Note
To edit system parameters, you must have write access to the controller.
Terms
System parameters The sum of all parameters that configure the system, these are divided into topics and types.
Topic
Type
A collection of parameters relating to a specific area, and the highest level in the system parameter structure. Examples are Controller,
Communication and Motion.
A set of parameters for a specific configuration task. A type can be seen as a pattern describing the construction and properties for the parameters included in the task. For instance, the type Motion System defines which parameters shall be used for configuring a motion system.
Instance
Parameter
Configuration file
An actualization of a type, an instance is a specific set of parameters with unique values created from a type pattern. In the Configuration
Editor, each row in the Instance list is an instance of the type selected in the Type list.
A property to set when configuring the robot system.
Contains all public parameters of a specific topic.
Viewing configurations
1 To view the topics of a controller, from the Controller tab, expand the
Configuration node for the controller.
All topics in are now displayed as child nodes to the Configuration node.
2 To view the types and instances of a topic, double-click the topic node for the topic to view.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
181
6 Working online
6.6 Configure systems
Continued
The Configuration Editor is now opened, listing all types of the topic in the
Type name list. In the Instance list, each instance of the type selected in the
Type name list is displayed as row. The parameter values of the instances are displayed in the columns of the instance list.
3 To view detailed parameter information for an instance, double-click the instance.
The instance editor now displays the current value, restrictions and limits of each parameter in the instance.
Editing parameters
You can either edit the parameters of one single instance, or you can edit several instances at one time. Editing several instances at one time is useful when you want to change the same parameter in several instances, like when moving signals from one I/O unit to another.
1 In the Controller tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the parameters to edit.
This opens the Configuration Editor.
2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type that the parameter to edit belongs to.
The instances of the type is now displayed in the Instance list of the
Configuration Editor.
3 In the Instance list, select the instances to edit and press the Enter Key. To select several instances at once, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting.
Alternatively, right-click an instance and then click Edit.
The Instance Editor is now displayed.
4 In the Parameter list of the Instance Editor, select the parameter to edit and change the value of the parameter in the Value box.
When editing several instances at one time, the parameter values you specify will be applied to all instances. For parameters that you do not specify any new value, each instance will keep its existing value for that parameter.
5 Click OK to apply the changes to the configuration database of the controller.
For many parameters, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart, you will be notified of this.
You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.
Continues on next page
182
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.6 Configure systems
Continued
Adding instances
With the Configuration Editor, you can select a type and create a new instance of it. For example, adding a new instance of the type Signal creates a new signal in the system.
1 In the Controller tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the type of which you want to add an instance.
This opens the Configuration Editor.
2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type of which you want to add an instance.
3 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and click Add type (the word type is replaced by the type you selected previously).
You can also right-click anywhere in the configuration editor and then select
Add type from the shortcut menu.
A new instance with default values is added and displayed in the Instance
Editor window.
4 If required, edit the values.
5 Click OK to save the new instance.
The values in the new instance are now validated. If the values are valid, the instance is saved. Otherwise, you will be notified of which parameter values to correct.
For many instances, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart you will be notified of this.
You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If the changes require a restart of the controller, the changes will not take affect until you do this. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.
Copying an instance
1 In the Controller tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the instance to copy.
This opens the Configuration Editor.
2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type of which you want to copy an instance.
3 In the Instance list, select one or several instances to copy.
If you select several instances and they don't have the same value for all parameters, these parameters will have no default values in the new instances.
4 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and click Copy Type (the word type is replaced by the type you selected previously).
You can also right-click the instance to copy and then select Copy Type from the shortcut menu.
A new instance with the same values as the one you copied is added and displayed in the Instance Editor window.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
183
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Working online
6.6 Configure systems
Continued
5 Change the name of the instance. If required, also edit the other values.
6 Click OK to save the new instance.
The values in the new instance are now validated. If the values are valid, the instance is saved. Otherwise, you will be notified of which parameter values to correct.
For many instances, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart you will be notified of this.
You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If the changes require a restart of the controller, the changes will not take affect until you do this. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.
Deleting an instance
1 In the Controller tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the type of which you want to delete an instance.
This opens the Configuration Editor.
2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type of which you want to delete an instance.
3 In the Instance list, select the instance to delete.
4 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and then click Delete type
(the word type is replaced by the type you selected previously).
You can also right-click the instance to delete and then select Delete type from the shortcut menu.
5 A message box is displayed, asking if you want to delete or keep the instance.
Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete it.
For many instances, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart you will be notified of this.
You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If the changes require a restart of the controller, the changes will not take affect until you do this. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.
Save one configuration file
The system parameters of a configuration topic can be saved to a configuration file, stored on the PC or any of its network drives.
The configuration files can then be loaded into a controller. They are thereby useful as backups, or for transferring configurations from one controller to another.
1 In the Controller tab, expand the Configuration node and select the topic to save to a file.
2 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and select Save System
Parameters.
You can also right-click the topic and then select Save System Parameters from the shortcut menu.
Continues on next page
184
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.6 Configure systems
Continued
3 In the Save As dialog box, browse for the folder to save the file in.
4 Click Save.
Saving several configuration files
1 In the Controller tab, select the Configuration node.
2 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and click Save System
Parameters.
You can also right-click the configuration node and then click Save System
Parameters.
3 In the Save System Parameters dialog box, select the topics to save to files.
Then click Save.
4 In the Browse for Folder dialog box, browse for the folder to save the files in, and then click OK.
The selected topics will now be saved as configuration files with default names in the specified folder.
Loading a configuration file
A configuration file contains the system parameters of a configuration topic. They are thereby useful as backups, or for transferring configurations from one controller to another.
When loading a configuration file to a controller, it must be of the same major version as the controller. For instance, you cannot load configuration files from an
S4 system to an IRC 5 controller.
1 In the Controller tab, select the Configuration node.
2 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and select Load Parameters.
You can also right-click the configuration node and then select Load
Parameters from the context menu.
This opens the Select mode dialog box.
3 In the Select mode dialog box, select how you want to combine the parameters in the configuration file to load with the existing parameters:
If you want to then
replace the entire configuration of the topic with the one in the configuration file.
select Delete existing parameters before
loading
add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic, without modifying the existing ones.
click Load parameters if no duplicates add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic and update the existing ones with values from the configuration file. Parameters that only exist in the controller and not in the configuration file will not be changed at all.
click Load parameters and replace du-
plicates
4 Click Open and browse to the configuration file to load. Then click Open again.
5 In the information box, click OK to confirm that you want to load the parameters from the configuration file.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
185
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Working online
6.6 Configure systems
Continued
6 When the loading of the configuration file is finished, close the Select mode dialog box.
If a restart of the controller is necessary for the new parameters to take affect, you will be notified of this.
186
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.7 Handle events
6.7 Handle events
Overview
An event is a message that notifies you that something has happened to the robot system, be it merely a change in operation mode or a severe error that calls for your immediate attention. If the event requires any action from you, this is stated in the event.
Events are displayed in the event logs of the FlexPendant and RobotStudio.
The event log keeps you informed of system status, allowing you to:
• view controller events.
• filter events.
• sort events.
• get detailed information about an event.
• save event log files on your PC.
• clear event records.
Event Log list
The event log list consists of all events matching your filter settings, with the following information for each event:
Type
Code
Title
Category
Seq. Number
Date and Time
The event type is an indication of the severity of the event.
The event code is a number that identifies the event message.
The event title is a short event description.
The event category is an indication of the source of the event.
The sequential number indicates the chronological order of the event.
Date and time is when the event occurred.
When you select an event in the list, detailed information will appear to the right.
Event type
The event type is an indication of the severity of the event.
There are three types of events:
Event type
Information
Warning
Error
Description
A normal system event, such as starting and stopping programs, change of operating mode, motors on/off and so on.
Information messages never require any action from you, but can be useful for error tracking, statistics collecting or monitoring user triggered event routines.
An event that you need to be aware of, but not so severe that the process or
RAPID program needs to be stopped. Warnings, however, often indicate underlying problems that sooner or later must be solved.
Warnings must sometimes be acknowledged.
An event that prevents the robot system from proceeding. The running process or RAPID program cannot continue, but is stopped.
All errors must be acknowledged. Most errors also require some immediate action from you in order to solve the problem.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
187
6 Working online
6.7 Handle events
Continued
Note
This information is also indicated by color: blue for information, yellow for warning and red for an error which needs to be corrected in order to proceed
Event code
The event code is a number that identifies the event message. Together with the event date and time each event has a unique identity.
Event title
The event title is a short description of the event.
Event category
Sequential number
The sequential number indicates the chronological order of the event; the higher the number the more recently the event occurred.
Date and time
The category is an indication of the source of the event.
Category
Common
Operational
System
Hardware
Program
Motion
I/O & Communication
User
Internal
Process
Cfg
Display
All recent events.
Events related to changes in operation or operating mode.
Events related to the current system.
Events related to controller hardware.
Events related to the running process applications and RAPID programs.
.
Events related to the movement of robots or other mechanical units
Events related to input and output signals, serial or network communication and process buses.
Custom messages that have been programed into RAPID programs.
Internal low-level controller errors for ABB service personnel.
Events related to Industrial Processes options., such as Spot, Arc and Dispense.
Errors in a configuration file.
Depending on how the system is configured, additional categories may exist.
Date and time indicate exactly when the event occurred. Along with the event code, this timestamp guarantees that each event has a unique identity.
Event description
When you select an event in the list, detailed information about it will be displayed to the right. This includes a description, and when appropritate also consequences, causes and suggested actions to solve the problem.
Continues on next page
188
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
6 Working online
6.7 Handle events
Continued
Overview
The Event Log automatically logs all controller events once it is started. By default, events are displayed in the chronological order specified by Seq Numbers.
Note
Any modifications to the list you see will never affect the event log of the controller. What you see is just a copy.
Managing events
1 In the Robot View Explorer, select a system.
2 Double-click the Event Log node.
To sort events
To filter events
To clear the event log
To save all events to a single log file on the computer
Click the header for the column you want to sort by. To switch between ascending and descending sorting, click the header once again.
In the Category list select the event category you want displayed.
Click Refresh.
This will not affect the event log of the robot controller. It might still be impossible, however, to retrieve all events from a cleared record once again, as the oldest ones may have been erased from the controller hard disk due to lack of space. It is therefore recommended to save the record to a log file before clearing.
Check the Log to File check box.
If it remains checked, the log file will be updated with new events as they occur.
To save events of one or several categories to files on the computer
Click Save and then make your category choice. Specify the location for the log file(s) in the Save As dialog and then click OK.
If you select All when selecting categories, a log file for each event category will be created.
Retrieving controller events
To clear the list and retrieve all existing events from the robot controller:
1 Optionally, save the existing Event Log record.
2 Select whether you want the list to be updated when new events occur , or if you are only interested in viewing events that have already occurred.
To ...
say no to automatic updates when new events occur
...then...
get automatic updates when new events occur check the Auto Update check box. (Checked by default.) clear the Auto Update check box.
3 To clear the current list, fetch and display all events that are currently stored in the controller log files.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
189
This page is intentionally left blank
7 File tab
7.1 Overview
7 File tab
7.1 Overview
Overview
The File tab contains the options to create new station, create new robot system, connect to a controller, save station as viewer, and RobotStudio options.
The following table lists the various options, presented in different tabs, available in the File tab:
Tabs
Save / Save As
Open
Close
Info
Recent
New
Share
Online
Help
Options
Exit
Description
Saves a station.
Opens a saved station.
Closes a station.
Once a station is open in RobotStudio, this tab shows the properties of the station, and also the robot systems and library files that are part of the open station.
Displays recently accessed stations.
Creates a new station. See
.
Prints the contents of the active window.
Shares data with others.
•
•
•
Connects to a controller.
•
Imports and Exports controller.
Creates and works with robot system.
•
Building a new system on page 163
•
Displays information on installing and licensing RobotStudio. See
Installing and licensing RobotStudio on page 40
.
Displays information on RobotStudio Options. See
Closes RobotStudio.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
191
7 File tab
7.2 New
7.2 New
Creating an empty station
1 On the File tab, click New.
2 Click Empty Station, and then click Create.
A new empty station is created.
Creating a station with Robot Controller
1 On the File tab, click New.
2 Click Station with Robot Controller.
The available small, medium, large, paint and special purpose robots are listed.
3 From the list, click to select an appropriate robot. Alternatively, click Browse to browse for and select a system.
RobotStudio automatically creates a matching virtual controller for your system.
4 Click Create.
Creating a station with existing Robot Controller
1 On the File tab, click New.
2 Select Station with existing Robot Controller.
3 In the System Pool drop-down list, select the folder which contains the system you need.
The default System Pool path is
C:\User\ABB\Documents\RobotStudio\Systems
.
You can also add a folder to the System Pool list. To add a folder, click Add.., browse to the required folder, and then click Select Folder. To remove a folder from the System Pool list, select it and then click Remove.
4 In the Systems Found list, select a system, and then click Create.
Creating a new RAPID module file
1 On the File tab, click New.
2 Click RAPID Module File.
3 Choose from the following options:
• Click Module (Program Module) to create a blank RAPID module file.
• Click Main Module (Program Module) to create a module with a main routine.
• Click Module (System Module) to create a module with attributes for read-only, view-only and not step-in.
According to the selection you make, the created RAPID module file opens in the RAPID editor.
For more information on managing file based RAPID modules, see
Managing file based RAPID modules on page 423
.
192
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
7 File tab
7.3.1 Pack and Go
7.3 Share
7.3.1 Pack and Go
Packing a station
1 On the File menu, click Share and select Pack & Go to open the Pack & Go
Wizard.
2 On the Welcome to the Pack & Go Wizard page, click Next.
3 On the Destination page, click Browse and specifiy the destination directory of the package. Click Next.
To password protect your Pack & Go file, select the Password protect the
package check box. Then, specify the password. To view the password you have typed in, select the Show password check box. When opening the Pack
& Go file, this password needs to be provided for the station to load.
4 On the Libraries page, select one of the three options. Click Next.
5 On the Systems page, select Include backups of all robot systems checkbox. Optionally, select Include a media pool for additional options checkbox. Click Next.
6 On the Ready to pack page, review the information and then click Finish.
7 On the Pack & Go finished page, review the results and then click Close.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
193
7 File tab
7.3.2 Unpack and Work
7.3.2 Unpack and Work
Unpacking a station
1 On the File menu, click Unpack & Work to open the Unpack & Work Wizard.
2 On the Welcome to the Unpack & Work Wizard page, click Next.
3 On the Select package page, click Browse and Select the Pack & Go file
to unpack and Select the directory where the files will be unpacked. Click
Next.
4 On the Controller Systems page, select the RobotWare version and click
Browse to select the path to the Media Pool. Optionally, select the check box to automatically restore backup. Click Next.
5 On the Ready to unpack page, review the information and then click Finish.
6 On the Unpack & Work finished page, review the results and then click
Close.
Note
If the Pack & Go file was set as password-protected during creation, then that password needs to be provided for the station to load.
194
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
7 File tab
7.3.3 Station Viewer
7.3.3 Station Viewer
Overview
The Station Viewer can playback a station in 3D on computers that do not have
RobotStudio installed. It packages the station file together with files needed to view the station in 3D. It can also play recorded simulations.
Prerequisites
The .NET Framework 4.0 must be installed on the playback computer.
Note
RobotStudio 64-bit edition can create 64-bit Station Viewers. However, a 64-bit station viewer can run only on the Windows 64-bit operating system.
Creating and loading a Station Viewer
1 To create a Station Viewer, on the File menu, click Share and select Save
Station as Viewer
2 Specify a file name and save as .exe file.
• Select the option Show comments on startup and add text in the box to view the comment when the Station Viewer is started.
• To save the simulation as Station Viewer, go to the Simulation Control group, click Play, and then select Record to Viewer. For more information, see
Running a simulation on page 342 .
Note
Record to viewer is disabled when Free Run mode is enabled.
3 To load a Station Viewer, double-click the package (.exe) file on the target computer.
The results are displayed in the Output window and the embedded station file is automatically loaded and presented in a 3D view.
Configuring user settings of a Station Viewer
To configure the user settings of a Station Viewer, on the File menu, click Options.
Command Buttons
Apply
Reset
Default
Click this button to save all options in the current page.
Click this button to reset to the settings you had before this session all values that you have changed on the current page.
Click this button to reset to their default values all settings on the current page.
Options:General:Appearance
Select application language
Select the language to be used.
The default language is the same as that of the target user's operating system if available, otherwise it is English.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
195
7 File tab
7.3.3 Station Viewer
Continued
Select color theme
Select the color to be used.
Options:General:Graphics
Background color
Select the color from the color theme, or from the color stored in the stations.
Simulation
When you run a simulation, the movements and visibility of objects are recorded.
This recording is optionally included in the Station Viewer.
Simulation control buttons are enabled when the Station Viewer contains a recorded simulation.
Following are the Simulation control buttons:
Play
Stop
Reset
Run mode
Process time
Starts or resumes simulation playback
Stops simulation playback
Resets all objects to their initial state and process time display to zero
Select to run the simulation once or continuously
Displays the current simulation time
196
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
7 File tab
7.4 Options
7.4 Options
Common buttons
Apply
Reset
Default
Click this button to save all options in the current page.
Click this button to reset to the settings you had before this session all values that you have changed on the current page.
Click this button to reset to their default values all settings on the current page.
Options:General:Appearance
Select application language
Select color theme
Select the language to be used.
Select the color to be used.
Default scale for zoomable windows
Defines the default scale to use for windows that are zoomable, for example, RAPID Editor, RAPID Data Editor and Configuration Editor.
Show ScreenTips
Display Position Edit boxes with
Red/Green/Blue background
Group related document windows under one tab
Restore hidden dialogs and messages
Select this check box to view ScreenTips.
Select the check box if you want to display the position boxes in the modify dialog boxes with colored background. Default value: selected.
Select this check box to group related document window under one tab. Modifying this option requires a restart for the changes to take effect.
Select this check box to restore dialogs or messages which you may have hidden while using RobotStudio.
Options:General:Licensing
View installed licenses
Click to view the licenses listed by feature, version, type, expiration date and status.
Activation Wizard
Click to activate RobotStudio license.
RobotStudio user experience program
• I want to help improve
RobotStudio
• I do not want to participate right now
For RobotStudio Basic users, it is mandatory to participate in the user experience report.
For RobotStudio Premium users, you can choose whether or not to participate in the user experience report .
Options:General:Units
Quantity
Unit
Display decimals
Edit decimals
Select the quantity for which you want to change the units.
Select the unit for the quantity.
Enter the number of decimals that you want to be displayed.
Enter the number of decimals that you want when modifying.
Options:General:Advanced
Number of undo/redo steps
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
The number of operations that can be undone or redone.
Lowering this value can decrease memory usage.
Continues on next page
197
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 File tab
7.4 Options
Continued
Warn about running Virtual Controller processes on startup
Warns of orphaned VC processes.
Show acknowledge dialog box when deleting objects
Warns when deleting objects.
Show acknowledge dialog box when deleting targets and corresponding move instructions
Warns when deleting targets and move instructions.
Bring the output window to front if an error message is displayed
Select this check box to bring the output window to front if an error message is displayed
Options:General:Files & Folders
User Project Folder
Enter the path to your project folder. This will be the folder displayed in the open and save dialog boxes in RobotStudio.
...
To browse for your project folder, click the browse button.
Automatically create document subfolders
Select this check box to enable the creation of individual subfolders for document types.
Enable Autosave
Interval
Specify the interval between the savings when using Autosave in this box.
Clear Recent Stations and
Controllers
Clears the list of recently accessed stations and controllers
Document Locations
Select the check box to automatically save the station with defined intervals. Default value: cleared
Launches the Document Locations dialog box. For more information, see
The Documents window on page 63
.
Options:General:Screenshot
Entire application window
Select this option to capture the entire application.
Active document window
Select this option to capture the active document window, typically the graphics window.
Copy to clipboard
Save to file
Location
Select this check box to save the captured image to the system clipboard.
Select this check box to save the captured image to file.
Specify the location of the image file. The default location is the "My Pictures" system folder.
...
File name
The file suffix list
Browse for the location.
Specify the name of the image file. The default name is "Robot-
Studio" to which is added a date.
Select the desired file format. The default format is JPG.
Options:General:Screen Recorder
Framerate
Start recording after
Stop recording after
Specify the framerate in frames per second.
Select this option to start recording after the specified time.
Select this option to stop recording after the specified time.
Continues on next page
198
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
7 File tab
7.4 Options
Continued
Resolution - Same as window
Select this option to use the same resolution as in the graphics window.
Resolution - Limit resolution
Select this option to scale down the resolution as per the
Maximum Width and Maximum Height you specify.
Maximum width
Specify the maximum width in pixels.
Maximum height
Video compression
Specify the maximum height in pixels.
Select the video compression format.
Note that DivX format is not supported.
File name and Output file format
Enter a file name and a file format. The default format is WMV.
You can also save the output format as MP4. The recommended format is MP4.
Options:Robotics:RAPID Editor
Show line numbers
Show ruler
Show whitespace
Wrap long lines
Convert tabs to spaces
Tab size
Text styles
Text color
Background color
Bold
Italic
Select this check box to view line numbers in the RAPID editor
Select this check box to show the ruler in the RAPID editor
Select this check box to show whitespace characters in the
RAPID editor
Select this check box if you want to wrap long lines.
Select this check box to convert tabs to spaces in the RAPID editor
Specify the number of spaces for a Tab press.
Specify the appearance of the various text classes.
Specifies the text color of the RAPID editor.
Specifies the background color of the RAPID editor.
Select this check box for bold-face fonts in the RAPID editor.
Select this check box for italicized fonts in the RAPID editor.
Options:Robotics:RAPID Profiler
Default RAPID log file
Always ask for filename
Open analysis when logging is stopped
Specify the name of the default RAPID log file.
Select this check box to manually specify the file name of the log file always.
Select this check box to open the analysis after the log is made.
Options:Robotics:Graphical Programming
Show dialog when warning for globally defined workobjects
Select this check box if you want RobotStudio to display a warning when there are workobjects with the same name that have been declared as in other tasks. Default value: selected.
Show synchronize dialog box after loading program
/module
Select this check box if you want the synchronize dialog box to be displayed when you have loaded a program or a module.
Default value: selected.
Show notification that default data is used
Select this check box if you want to be notified that wobj0 and/or tool0 is active and will be used in the current action.
Default value: selected.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
199
7 File tab
7.4 Options
Continued
Set as active when creating tooldata
Select this check box if you want newly created tooldata to be set as active. Default value: selected.
Set as active when creating workobjects
Select this check box if you want newly created workobjects to be set as active. Default value: selected.
AutoPath
Specify the maximum gap allowed when creating an AutoPath.
Options:Robotics:Synchronization
Use default synchronization locations
Converting data, such as target to Workobject, shall use the default behavior for synchronization locations. Default value: selected.
Show default synchronization locations notification
Notifies of the behavior above. Default value: selected.
Declaration default locations
Specify the locations for corresponding objects when synchronizing to the VC.
Options:Robotics:Mechanism
Approach Vector
Travel Vector
Enable configuration check for jump to target/move instruction
Select the approach vector. Default value: Z.
Select the travel vector. Default value: X.
Select this check box if you want to enable the configuration check configurations when jumping to target or move instructions. When selected and a target does not have a validated configuration assigned, you will be asked to set one. When cleared, the configuration closest to the current one is used.
Default value: selected.
Options:Robotics:Virtual Controller
Always on top
Enable transparency
Select this check box if you want to have the virtual FlexPendant always on top. Default value: selected.
Select this check box if you want parts of the virtual FlexPendant to be transparent. Default value: selected.
Logging
When the controller is warm started,
• Select this check box to log the console output to "console.log" in the controller directory
• Select this check box to log the console ouput to a console window
Automatically open virtual
Operator Window
Select this check box to automatically open the virtual Operator
Window. Default value: Enabled.
Options:Online:Authentication
Recent Users
Remove/Remove All
Lists the recent users.
Click these buttons to remove one or all recent users, respectively.
Enable Automatic Logoff
Select the check box if you want to log off automatically.
Timeout
Determines the length of the session before being automatically logged off.
Options:Online:Online Monitor
Update Rate (s)
Continues on next page
200
Specifies the update interval.
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
7 File tab
7.4 Options
Continued
Revolute Joint Limits
Sets the revolution limit for joints.
Linear Joint Limits
Sets the linear limit for joints.
Singularities
Sets the singularities.
Options:Graphics:Appearance
Anti-aliasing
Advanced lighting
Perspective
Orthographic
Custom background color
Click the colored rectangle to change default background color.
Show floor
Select the check box if you want the floor (at z=0) to be displayed by default. Change the floor color by clicking the colored rectangle. Default values: selected.
Transparent
Show UCS Grid
Select the check box if you want the floor to be transparent by default. Default values: selected.
Select the check box if you want the UCS grid to be displayed.
Default value: selected.
Grid Space
Show world coordinate system
Show navigation and selection buttons
Move the slider to control the multisampling level used to smooth jagged edges. The available options are hardware dependent. RobotStudio must be re-started for this setting to take effect.
Select the check box to enable advanced lighting by default.
Click this option to view the perspective view of the object by default.
Click this option to view the orthographic view of the object by default.
Change the UCS grid space in the X and y coordinate directions by entering the requested value in the box. Default value: 1000 mm (or equivalent in other units).
Select the check box if you want the coordinate systems to be displayed. Default value: selected.
Select this check box to have the navigation and selection buttons on the graphics window.
The settings you make take effect when creating a new station or when selecting
Default View Settings from the Settings menu of the View tab of the Graphics
Tools ribbon.
Options:Graphics:Performance
Detail level
Render both sides
Select if the detail level is to be Auto, Fine, Medium or Coarse.
Default value: Auto.
Select the check box if you want to ignore the back-facing triangles. Default value: selected.
Culling back-facing triangles improves the graphics performance but may give unexpected display if surfaces in models are not faced correctly.
Cull objects smaller than
Select the size in pixels under which objects will be disregarded. Default value: 2 pixels.
The settings you make here are generic for all objects in RobotStudio. With the
Graphic Appareance dialog box you can, however, override some of these settings for single objects.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
201
7 File tab
7.4 Options
Continued
Options:Graphics:Behavior
Navigation
Navigation sensitivity
Selection radius (pixels)
Selection highlight
Select a navigational activity and then specify the mouse buttons to be used for the selected navigational activity.
Select the navigation sensitivity when using the mouse movements or navigation buttons by clicking the bar and dragging it into position. Default value: 1.
Change the selection radius (that is, how close the mouse cursor click must be to an item to be selected) by entering the requested pixel value in the box. Default value: 5.
Set if the selected object shall be distinguished in the Graphics window by a color, by an outline or not at all. Default value: color.
Click the colored rectangle to change the highlight color.
Highlight color
Activate selection preview
Select the check box to enable temporarily highlighting of items that may be selected when the mouse cursor passes over them.
Default value: selected.
Show local coordinate system for selected objects
Select the check box to show the local coordinate system for the selected objects. Default value: selected.
Options:Graphics:Geometry
Detail Level
Specify the level of detail required when importing geometries.
Select Fine, Medium or Coarse as required.
Options:Simulation:Collision
Perform collision detection
Pause/stop simulation at collision
Log collisions to Output window
Select if collision detection is to be performed during simulation or always. Default value: always.
Select this check box if you want the simulation to stop at a collision or at a near miss. Default value: cleared.
Select this check box if you want the collisions to be logged to the output window. Default value: selected.
Log collisions to file:
Select this check box if you want to log the collisions to a file.
Browse for the file to log in by clicking the browse button. Default value: cleared.
Enable fast collision detection
Select this check box to enhance the performance by detecting collisions between geometrical bounding boxes instead of geometrical triangles. This might result in falsely reported collisions, since the triangles are the true geometry and the bounding boxes always are larger. All true collisions will, however, be reported. The larger the object, the greater the number of false collisions that are likely to be detected.
View
Clear
...
Click this button to open the log file specified in the file box in
Notepad.
Click this button to delete the log file specified in the file box.
Click this button to browse for the file in which you want to log the collisions.
Continues on next page
202
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
7 File tab
7.4 Options
Continued
Options:Simulation:Virtual Time
Virtual Time mode- Free run
This option makes RobotStudio always use the free run mode.
Simulations created using the Smart Component are now supported with VC in this mode. As a result, FlexPendant and
ScreenMaker applications can be executed on the FlexPendant together with Smart Component simulations.
Virtual Time mode - Time
Slice
This option makes RobotStudio always use the time slice mode.
Run time slice in parallel for multiple controllers
When simulating a large number of controllers (such as ten controllers), this option may increase performance by utilizing multiple CPU cores.
This option is hardware dependent and hence may give different results depending on the computer used.
Options:Simulation:Accuracy
Simulation speed
As fast as possible
Simulation timestep
Sets the simulation speed relative to real time. You can define the simulation speed to a maximum of 200%
Select this check box to run the simulation as fast as possible.
When you select this option, the simulation speed slider is disabled.
Specifies the simulation timestep.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
203
This page is intentionally left blank
8 Home tab
8.1 Overview
8 Home tab
8.1 Overview
The Home tab
The Home tab contains the controls required for building stations, creating systems, programming paths and placing items.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
205
8 Home tab
8.2 ABB Library
8.2 ABB Library
About this button
With this button, you can choose robots, positioners and tracks from their respective galleries.
206
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.3 Import Library
8.3 Import Library
About this button
With this button, you can import equipment, geometries, positioners, robots, tools and training objects to your station libraries.
Importing a library
Use this procedure for importing library files to a station:
1 On the Home menu, click Import Library and select one of the following controls:
• Equipment
• User Library
• Documents
• Locations
• Browse for Library
Note
You can also import component xml files (*.rsxml) to your station.
2 Click Equipment to import predefined ABB mechanism libraries.
3 Click User Library to select the user defined libraries.
4 Click Documents to open the Documents window. See
The Documents window on page 63
5 Click Locations to open the Document Locations window. See
.
6 Click Browse for Library to select the saved library files.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
207
8 Home tab
8.4.1 Robot System
8.4 Robot System
8.4.1 Robot System
About this button
With the Robot System button, you can either create a system from layout or template, choose an existing system, or select a system from a robot gallery and setup a conveyor tracking mechanism.
Creating a system from layout
1 Click From Layout to bring up the first page of the wizard.
2 In the Name box, enter the name of the system.
3 In the Location box, enter the path to the folder where the system will be stored. Alternatively, click Browse and browse to the folder.
4 In the Media Pool box, enter the path to the media pool. Alternatively, click
Browse and browse to the folder.
5 In the RobotWare Version list, select the version of RobotWare you want to use.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Mechanisms box, select the mechanisms that you want to include in the system.
8 Click Next.
The wizard now proposes a mapping of the mechanisms to a specific motion task, in accordance with the following rules:
• Only one TCP robot is allowed per task.
• Up to six motion tasks may be added, but only four TCP robots can be used, and they must be assigned to the first four tasks.
• The number of tasks may not exceed the number of mechanisms.
• If the system contains one TCP robot and one external axis, they will be assigned to the same task. It is, however, possible to add a new task and assign the external axis to it.
• If the system contains more than one TCP robot, any external axes will be assigned to a separate task. It is, however, possible to move them to other tasks.
• The number of external axes in a task is limited by the number of available drive modules in the cabinet (one for large robots, two for medium, three for small).
If only one mechanism was selected in the previous page, this page will not be shown.
Tasks can be added and removed using the respective buttons; mechanisms can be moved up or down using the respective arrows. To map the mechanisms to tasks, follow this step:
9 Optionally, make any edits in the mapping, and then click Next.
Continues on next page
208
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.4.1 Robot System
Continued
The System Option page appears.
10 On the System Option page, you have the option to align Task Frame(s) with the corresponding Base Frame(s).
• For single robot system, select the checkbox to align task frame with base frame:
• For MultiMove Independent system, select the check box to align task frame with base frame for each robot.
• For MultiMove Coordinated system, select the robot from the drop down list and select the check box to align task frame with base frame for the selected robot.
11 Verify the summary and then click Finish.
If the system contains more than one robot, the number of tasks and the baseframe positions of the mechanism should be verified in the System
Configuration window.
Adding a template system
1 Click From Template to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the Select Template System list, either select an appropriate template or click Browse and browse to one.
3 In the Libraries group, select whether to import libraries or to use the existing station libraries.
4 In the System group, enter a name and location, and then click OK.
Adding an existing system
1 Click Existing to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the Select System Pool list, select a folder.
3 In the Systems Found list, select a system.
4 In the Libraries group, select whether to import libraries or to use the existing station libraries.
5 Click OK.
Selecting a system from a robot gallery
1 Click Quick System to bring up a gallery, and then click the appropriate robot.
Setting up a conveyor
1 Click Setup.
2 In the Part Sequence tab, select Part from Available Parts.
The right arrow button is enabled.
3 Click right arrow button to move the Part to Parts moved by Conveyor list.
4 Click up and down arrow buttons to move the selected part in Parts moved
by Conveyor list.
5 In the Part Tracking tab, select Part from Parts moved by Conveyor list.
6 Select CNV1 from the Mechanical Unit list.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
209
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
8 Home tab
8.4.1 Robot System
Continued
7 Select a workobject from the Workobject list.
8 Click Add. The workobject appears in the list.
If the same workpiece is tracked by more than one robot, add a pair of workobject for each robot that tracks the workpiece. This procedure has to be repeated for each workpiece that should be tracked.
9 Click OK.
10 Activate the Conveyor Mechanical Unit (CNV1). See
Removing objects from conveyor
1 Click Setup.
The Conveyor Setup dialog box appears.
2 In the Part Sequence tab, select Part from the Parts moved by Conveyor list
The left arrow button is anabled.
3 Click left arrow to remove the part from the Parts moved by Conveyor list to Available Parts list.
210
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.4.2 External Axis Wizard
8.4.2 External Axis Wizard
Overview
The ABB IRC5 controller is capable of controlling a vast number of mechanical units other than the ABB robot manipulator. Some external equipment such as workpiece positioners and robot tracks are standard ABB equipment for which
ABB supplies and maintains controller system configuration files. But in many situations there is a need for customized external equipment.
It is possible to use standard ABB motor units and gear units in customized external equipment. The configuration file of the motor unit or gear unit in isolation is supplied and maintained by ABB. The External Axis Wizard tool simplifies the controller configuration for different combinations of motor units and gear units in customized mechanical units.
Mechanism modeling functionality in RobotStudio makes it is possible to define custom kinematic mechanisms. The External Axis Wizard lets you specify mechanisms to include in the system. First, connect and configure each axis in a mechanism to a corresponding motor unit or gear unit. Then, the template configuration files are used to assemble a complete system configuration according to specification.
Note
The External Axis Wizard can be downloaded from the RobotApps website. To access the RobotApps website, visit www.abb.com/roboticssoftware.
Limitation
For IRC5P systems (used for painting), the External Axis Wizard supports only up to three external axes.
Prerequisites
• Build the station, and import or model the geometry of the mechanism. For information about creating a new station, see
Workflow of building a station on page 77 .
• Use the Mechanism Modeling functionality to define custom kinematic mechanisms. For more information, see
.
• Add a virtual controller to the station, and include additional drives corresponding to the axes of the mechanism to the controller system.
• The robot will not be attached to the mechanism. You must manually attach the robot to the external axis after successful configuration by the External
Axis Wizard.
Using the External Axis Wizard
1 From the Robot System menu, click External Axis Wizard.
The first page of the wizard appears. It lists the the previously defined mechanisms (including robots) in the Mechanisms box.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
211
8 Home tab
8.4.2 External Axis Wizard
Continued
2 From the Mechanisms box, select the mechanisms to include in the system.
• The mechanism model must be built in such a way that a kinematics model can be created. The joint chain must be defined such that it can be described by Denavit-Hartenberg parameters. The mechanism model must sometimes be modified to be able to keep the flange in the desired position. This can be done automatically by the External
Axis Wizard, by adding a locked axis.
• For adding an additional locked axis, when prompted, click Ok.
This is a dummy axis with frame definition. This dummy axis is added to the controller configuration and also to the RobotStudio mechanism.
You cannot jog this additional axis.
3 Click Next.
The mechanisms along with their joints are listed.
4 Configure the Mechanical Unit based on the following information. The name of the mechanism in RobotStudio corresponds to the mechanical unit of the motion configuration.
• Select the drive module (DM1 - DM4) to use for the mechanical unit.
If the mechanism has more than three joints, or, if there are several external mechanisms which are to be part of the configuration, then you need to use additional drive modules. In such cases, before using the External Axis Wizard, configure the controller system with the appropriate number of drive modules.
• Optionally, you can use an Activation Relay by selecting the corresponding check box.
For more information, see Technical reference manual - System parameters (3HAC17076-1).
• For two axis positioners with rotating axes, where the two axes are in series, you can optionally select the Error Model check box.
Mechanisms defined with the error model can be calibrated with the
FlexPendant using the standard four point method for each axis. This will compensate for deviations present in the real mechanisms.
• You can configure two mechanical units to share a drive module.
To share the drive module with a mechanical unit, select that mechanical unit in the Common Drive list. The list shows all mechanisms (except TCP robot) with the same number of joints as the selected one. The joints of the mechanical units use the same logical axis and drive module. Note that the common drive option is not available unless an activation relay is chosen for the mechanical unit.
This ensures that two mechanical units sharing a drive cannot be activated at the same time.
5 Configure the joint based on the following information.
• For each joint select the Motor Unit. You can select a motor unit (MU), or a gear unit (MTD), or an interchange unit (MID). The list is populated with the standard motor and gear units provided by ABB.
Continues on next page
212
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.4.2 External Axis Wizard
Continued
Your choice will affect the capacity and cycle time of the external axis.
• Electronically linked motors are two motor units that drive the same axis. To link a motor unit to another one electronically, select the respective joint in the Follow list.
• The Drive Unit list is populated with the available drive units of the system. Each joint will be represented by its selected drive unit.
• You can configure Logical Axis, Transmission, Link, Board and Node according to your needs.
For more information, see Technical reference manual - System parameters (3HAC17076-1).
Note
Default values are given for all attributes, except Motor Unit. However, you must review and change to the correct parameters to give a valid configuration.
6 Click Next.
The Finish page comes up.
7 To save the configuration to a file, click Save.
The configured kinematics of external axis devices are saved to a configuration file.
8 To load the saved configuration to the system on exiting from the wizard, select the Load Configuration to System check box.
9 Click Finish to exit the wizard.
Use the saved configuration files to assemble a complete controller system configuration according to specification. When a system is configured, the MOC.cfg
file with a subset for the external equipment is saved and a virtual controller is started for verification.
Note
All mechanisms which have been used in this configuration will be disconnected from the library. To maintain these changes in a library file (.rslib), you need to manually save it. This is because the External Axis Wizard may have automatically adjusted the mechanisms to enable them to be configured.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
213
8 Home tab
8.5 Import Geometry
8.5 Import Geometry
Importing geometry
1 On the Home menu, click Import Geometry and select one of the following controls:
• User Geometry
• Browse for Geometry
2 Click User Geometry to select the user defined geomtery.
3 Click Browse for Geometry to browse to the folder where the geometry is located.
For predefined geometries, click the Geometry icon to the left in the dialog box.
4 Select the required geometry and click Open.
If you want the geometry to move with another object, attach it to the requested object, see
.
To modify the detail level for import of geometries, see
Note
The Modeling tab also contains the Import Geometry option.
214
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.6.1 Frame
8.6 Frame
8.6.1 Frame
Creating a frame
1 Click Frame.
2 In the dialog box, specify the positions for the frame.
Reference
Frame Position
Frame Orientation
Set as UCS
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the frame position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the
Frame Position boxes.
Specify the coordinates for the frame orientation.
Select this check box to set the created frame as the user coordinate system.
Note
The Modeling tab also contains the Frame option.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
215
8 Home tab
8.6.2 Frame from Three Points
8.6.2 Frame from Three Points
Creating a frame from three points
1 Click Frame from Three points to bring up a dialog box.
2 Decide how you want to specify the frame:
To specify the frame using Select
X, Y and Z coordinates, a point on the X axis and a point in the X-Y plane
Position
two points on the X axis and one point on the Y axis
Three Point
3 If you select Position:
• Enter the Position for the object.
• Enter the Point on X axis for the object.
• Enter the Point on X-Y plane for the object.
• Click Create.
4 If you select Three Point:
• Enter the First Point on X axis for the object. This is the point closest to the frame’s origin.
• Enter the Second Point on X axis for the object. This is the point further away in the positive X direction.
• Enter the Point on Y axis for the object.
• Click Create.
The Create Frame From Three Points dialog box
Position
Frame Position
Point on X axis
Point on X-Y plane
Three Point
First Point on X axis
Second Point on X axis
Point on Y axis
Select this option if you want to create the frame by using a position and two points.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the frame position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Frame
Position boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point on
X axis boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point on
X-Y plane boxes.
Select this option if you want to create the frame by using three points.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the First Point
on X axis boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Second
Point on X axis boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point on
Y axis boxes.
Continues on next page
216 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Set as UCS
8 Home tab
8.6.2 Frame from Three Points
Continued
Select this check box to set the created frame as the user coordinate system.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
217
8 Home tab
8.7 Workobject
8.7 Workobject
Creating a workobject
1 On the Home tab, in the Path Programming group, click Other, and then click Create Workobject.
This opens the Create Workobject dialog box.
2 In the Misc Data group, enter the values for the new workobject.
3 In the User Frame group, do one of the following:
• Set the position of the user frame by entering values for the Position
x,y,z and the Rotation rx, ry, rz for the workobject by clicking in the
Values box.
• Select the user frame by using the Frame by points dialog box.
4 In the Object Frame group you can reposition the object frame relative to the user frame by doing any of the following:
• Set the position of the object frame by selecting values for Position x,
y, z by clicking in the Values box.
• For the Rotation rx, ry, rz, select RPY (Euler XYX) or Quaternion, and enter the rotation values in the Values dialog box.
• Select the object frame by using the Frame by points dialog box.
5 In the Sync Properties group, enter the values for the new workobject.
6 Click Create. The workobject will be created and displayed under the Targets node under the robot node in the Paths&Targets browser.
The Create Workobject dialog box
Name
Robot holds workobject
Moved by mechanical unit
Select the mechanical unit that moves the workobject. This option is applicable only if Programmed is set to False.
Programmed
Select True if the workobject is to use a fixed coordinate system, and False if a movable (that is, external axes) will be used.
Position x, y, z
Rotation rx, ry, rz
Frame by points
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Position boxes.
Specify the rotation of the workobject in the UCS.
Specify the frame position of the user frame.
Position x, y, z
Specify the name of the workobject.
Select whether the workobject is to be held by the robot. If you select True, the robot will hold the workobject. The tool can then either be stationary or held by another robot.
Rotation rx, ry, rz
Frame by points
Storage type
Module
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Position boxes.
Specify the rotation of the workobject.
Specify the frame position of the object frame.
Select PERS or TASK PERS. Select the Storage TypeTASK
PERS if you intend to use the workobject in multimove mode.
Select the module in which to declare the workobject.
218
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.8 Tooldata
8.8 Tooldata
Creating tooldata
1 In the Layout browser, make sure the robot in which to create the tooldata is set as the active task.
2 On the Home tab, in the Path Programming group, click Other, and then click Tooldata.
This opens the Create Tooldata dialog box.
3 In the Misc Data group:
• Enter the Name of the tool.
• Select whether the tool is to be held by the robot in the Robot holds
tool list.
4 In the Tool Frame group:
• Define the Position x, y, z of the tool.
• Enter the Rotation rx, ry, rz of the tool.
5 In the Load Data group:
• Enter the Weight of the tool.
• Enter the Center of gravity of the tool.
• Enter the Inertia of the tool.
6 In the Sync Properties group:
• In the Storage type list, select PERS or TASK PERS. Select TASK
PERS if you intend to use the tooldata in MultiMove mode.
• In the Module list, select the module in which to declare the tooldata.
7 Click Create. The tooldata appears as a coordinate system in the graphics window.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
219
8 Home tab
8.9.1 Teach Target
8.9 Target
8.9.1 Teach Target
Teaching a target
To teach a target, follow these steps:
1 In the Layout browser, select the workobject and tool for which you want to teach the target.
2 Jog the robot to the preferred position. To jog a robot linearly, its VC must be running.
3 Click Teach Target.
4 A new target will be created in the browser, under the active workobject node.
In the graphics window a coordinate system will be created at the TCP position. The configuration of the robot at the target will be saved.
220
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.9.2 Create Target
8.9.2 Create Target
Creating a target
1 In the Layout browser, select the workobject in which you want to create the target.
2 Click Create Target to bring up a dialog box.
3 Select the Reference coordinate system you want to use to position the target:
If you want to position the target Select
absolute in the world coordinate system of the station
World
Work Object
relative to the position of the active workobject in a user-defined coordinate system
UCS
4 In the Points box, click Add New and then click the desired position in the graphics window to set the position of the target. You can also enter the values in the Coordinates boxes and click Add.
5 Enter the Orientation for the target. A preliminary cross will be shown in the graphics window at the selected position. Adjust the position, if necessary.
To create the target, click Create.
6 If you want to change the workobject for which the target is to be created, expand the Create Target dialog box by clicking the More button. In the
WorkObject list, select the workobject in which you want to create the target.
7 If you want to change the target name from the default name, expand the
Create Target dialog box by clicking the More button and entering the new name in the Target name box.
8 Click Create. The target will appear in the browser and in the graphics window.
Note
The created target will not get any configuration for the robot axes. To add the configuration values to the target, use either ModPos or the Configurations dialog box.
If using external axes, the position of all activated external axes will be stored in the target.
The Create Target dialog box
Reference
Position
Orientation
Add
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Position boxes.
Specify the orientation of the target.
Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the Points list.
Continues on next page
221
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
8 Home tab
8.9.2 Create Target
Continued
Modify
Points
More/Less
Target name
Workobject
Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the Points list and entered new values.
The target points. To add more points, click Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click Add.
Click this button to expand or collapse parts of the create target dialog box.
Here you can change the name of the target you are creating.
It is visible only when the create target dialog box is expanded.
Here you can change the workobject in which the target is to be created. It is visible only when the create target dialog box is expanded.
222
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.9.3 Create Jointtarget
8.9.3 Create Jointtarget
Creating a jointtarget
1 Click Create Jointtarget to bring up a dialog box.
2 If you want to change the default name of the jointtarget, enter the new name in the Name box.
3 In the Axes Values group, do as follows:
• For the Robot axes, click the Values box and then click the down arrow.
The Joint Values dialog box will be displayed. Enter the joint values in the boxes and click Accept.
• For the Joint axes, click the Values box and then click the down arrow.
The Joint Values dialog box will be displayed. Enter the joint values in the boxes and click Accept.
4 Click Create. The jointtarget will appear in the browser and in the graphics window.
The Create Jointtarget dialog box
Name
Robot axes
External axes
Storage Type
Module
Specify the name of the jointtarget.
Click the Values list, enter the values in the Joint values dialog box and click Accept.
Click the Values list, enter the values in the Joint values dialog box and click Accept.
Select the Storage TypeTASK PERS if you intend to use the jointtarget in multimove mode.
Select the module in which you want to declare the jointtarget.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
223
8 Home tab
8.9.4 Create Targets on Edge
8.9.4 Create Targets on Edge
Overview
Targets on Edge creates targets and move instructions along the edges of the geometric surface by selecting target points in the graphics window. Each point on a geometric edge has certain properties that can be used to position robot targets relative to the edge.
Creating targets on edge
1 On the Home tab, click Target and select Create Targets on Edge.
The Targets on Edge dialog box appears.
Note
The selection mode in graphics window is automatically set to Surface, and the snap mode is set to Edge.
2 Click on the surface of the body or part to create target points.
The closest point on the adjacent edge is calculated and added to the list box on as target points Point 1, Point 2 ....
Note
When an edge is shared between two surfaces, the normal and tangent directions depend on the surface selected.
3 Use the following variables to specify how a target is related to a point on the edge.
Select...
Vertical offset
Lateral offset to...
specify the distance from the edge to the target in the surface normal direction.
specify the distance from the edge to the target perpendicular to the edge tangent.
Approach angle
specify the angle between the (inverse) surface normal and the approach vector of the target.
Reverse travel direction
specify if the travel vector of the target is parallel or inversely parallel to the edge tangent.
Note
For each target point, a preview of the approach and travel vectors are displayed as arrows and as a sphere representing the point on the edge in the graphics window. The preview of the arrows are updated dynamically once the variables are modified.
4 Click Remove to remove the target points from the list box.
Continues on next page
224
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.9.4 Create Targets on Edge
Continued
5 Click More to expand the Create Targets on Edge dialog box and to choose the following advanced options:
Use...
Target name
Task
Workobject to..
change the target name from the default name to a new user defined name select the task for which to add targets.
By deafult, active task in the station is selected.
select the workobject for which you want to create the targets on edge
Insert Move Instructions in
create Move instructions in addition to targets, which will be added to the selected path procedure.
The active process definition and process template will be used.
6 Click Create.
The target points and Move instructions (if any) are created and are displayed in the Output window and graphics window.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
225
8 Home tab
8.10 Empty Path
8.10 Empty Path
Creating an empty path
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the folder in which you want to create the path.
2 Click Empty Path.
3 To set the correct motion properties for the targets, select the active process in the Change Active Process box in the Elements toolbar.
4 If the active template is set to MoveAbsJoint, then:
• A target that is dragged into a path will be converted into a jointtarget
(recognized by a different icon on in the browser).
• Jointtargets and their instructions can only use wobj0 and tool0.
• One target can not be used as different types, for example, MoveJoint, but must be deleted and re-created.
• When the target has been synchronized with the virtual controller, the jointtarget values will be calculated and inserted in the RAPID program.
226
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.11 AutoPath
8.11 AutoPath
Overview
AutoPath helps in generating accurate paths (linear and circular) based on CAD geometry.
Prerequisites
You need to have a geometric object with edges, curves, or both.
Creating a path automatically
AutoPath feature can create paths from curves or along the edges of a surface.
To create a path along a surface use selection level Surface, and to create a path along a curve, use selection level Curve. When using Selection level Surface, the closest edge of the selection will be picked for inclusion in the path. An edge can only be selected if connected to the last selected edge.
When using Selection level Curve, the selected edge will be added to the list. If the curve does not have any branches, all edges of the entire curve will be added to the list if holding the SHIFT button when selecting an edge. The Approach and
Travel directions as defined in the RobotStudio options are used to define the orientation of the created tarrgets, see
Options:Robotics:Mechanism on page 200 .
Use this procedure to automatically generate a path.
1 In the Home tab, click Path and select AutoPath.
The AutoPath tool appears.
2 Select the edge or curve of the geometric object for which you want to create a path.
The selection is listed as edges in the tool window.
Note
• If in a geometric object, you select curve (instead of an edge), then all the points that result in the selected curve are added as edges to the list in the graphic window.
• Ensure you always select continuous edges.
3 Click Remove to delete the recently added edge from the graphic window.
Note
To change the order of the selected edges, select Reverse check box.
4 You can set the following Approximation Parameters:
Select or enter values in
MinDist
Tolerance
to
Set the minimum distance between the generated points. That is, points closer than the minimum distance are filtered.
Set the maximum deviation from the geometric description allowed for the generated points.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
227
8 Home tab
8.11 AutoPath
Continued
Select or enter values in
MaxRadius
Linear
Circular
Constant
End Offset
Start Offset
to
Determines how large a circle radius has to be before considering the circumference as a line. That is, a line can be considered as a circle with infinite radius.
Generate a linear move instruction for each target.
Generate circular move instructions where the selected edges describe circular segments.
Generate points with a Constant distance
Set the specified offset away from the last target.
Sets the specified offset away from the first target.
The Reference Surface box shows the side of the object that is taken as normal for creating the path.
Click More to set the following parameters:
Select or enter values in to
Approach Generate a new target at a specified distance from the first target.
Depart Generates a new target at a specified distance from the last target.
5 Click Create to automatically generate a new path.
A new path is created and move instructions are inserted for the generated targets as set in the Approximation parameters.
Note
The targets are created in the active workobject.
6 Click Close.
228
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
8.12 MultiMove
Overview
For browsing between the pages of the MultiMove window, click the tabs in the navigation pane. By default the tabs are arranged in an order that corresponds to the typical workflow:
Setup tab
System Config
Select System
System
Enable
Type
Here you select the system that contains the robots to program.
Each robot in the system is presented in its own row in this grid. In the columns you make the settings as described below.
Select this check box to use the robot in the MultiMove program.
Specify if the robot holds the tool or the work piece.
Displays the name of the robot.
Path Config
Start Position
Robot
Update
Paths
Enable
Order
Click this button to update the paths in the grid if any of the paths have been changed. The button turns red if a change has been detected and an update is necessary.
Each path in the station is presented in its own row in this grid. In the columns you make the settings as described below.
Select this check box for the paths to use for the program.
Displays the order in which the paths will be executed. To change the order, use the lists in the path column for rearranging the rows in which the paths appear.
Path
Sets the path to be executed here.
Select Robot that other shall jump to
When creating a new start position, select a robot that the other will try to reach here.
Apply
Jumps the other robots to the new start position.
Motion Behavior tab
This is used for specifying constraints and rules for how the robots shall move relative to each other. The default setting is no particular constraints, which results in the fewest joint movements. However, changing the motion behavior might be useful for:
• Locking the orientation or position of the tool.
• Optimizing cycle time or reachability by allowing tolerances.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
229
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
Continued
• Avoiding collisions or singularity by restricting joint motions.
Both Joint Influence and TCP Constraints restrict the robot’s motions. Changes in these settings might result in lower performance or situations where it is impossible to find proper solutions. The weight values for Joint Weights and TCP Constraints set how much the setting for each joint or TCP direction shall affect the robots relative to each other. It is the difference between the weight values that matters, not the absolute values. If contradicting behaviors have been set, the one with the lowest weight value will win.
Tool Tolerance, instead of restricting, enables more motions. Therefore, tolerances may improve cycle and process times and enhance the reachability of the robots.
Tolerances, too, have weight value; here is set how much the robots shall use the tolerance. A low value indicates that the tolerance will be used a lot, while a high value means that the robots will try to avoid using the tolerance.
The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.
Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.
The TCP constraints control the position and orientation of the tool. Enabling a
TCP constraint will decrease the motion of the tool and increase the motion of the work piece.
The tool tolerances control the allowed deviation between the tool and the work piece. By default, tolerances are not enabled, which means that no deviation is allowed. Enabling a tolerance, if applicable, might improve motion performance.
For example, if the tool is symmetric around its Z axis, you can enable the Rz tolerance without affecting the accuracy of the generated paths.
The tool offset sets a fixed distance between the tool and the paths.
Joint Influence
Select Robot
TCP Constraints
Joints for Robot
Axis
Influence
Active TCP
Enable
Pose
Value
Select the robot’s joints to constrain in this box.
Displays the robot’s joints and their constraint weights. Each joint is presented in its own row.
Displays which axis the constraint affects.
Specify how much the motion for the axis is constrained. 0 means a locked axis, while 100 means no constraint relative to default constraint values.
This grid displays the position and rotations of the TCP together with their constraint weights.
Select this check box to activate the constraint for this TCP pose.
Displays the TCP pose that is affected by the constraint.
Specify the pose value to constrain at.
Either type the value, or click the Pick from TCP button to use the values of the current TCP position.
Continues on next page
230
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
Continued
Influence
Tool Tolerance
Enable
Pose
Value
Influence
Tool Offset
Enable
Pose
Offset
Specify how much the motion for the
TCP value is constrained. 0 means a locked TCP at this pose, while 100 means no constraint relative to default constraint values.
Select this check box to activate the tolerance for this tool pose.
Displays the tool pose that is affected by the constraint.
Specify the pose value to apply the tolerance around.
Specify the size of the tolerance. 0 means no deviation is allowed, while
100 means all deviations are allowed.
Select this check box to activate the offset for this tool pose.
Displays the tool pose that is affected by the offset setting.
Specify the value of the offset here.
Create Paths tab
This tab is used for creating RobotStudio paths for the MultiMove robots. The created paths will accord with the motions displayed during the most recently played test simulation.
With the settings group you set up the MultiMove properties that connect the tasks for the tool robot and work piece robot to each other.
With the WP robot settings group you set up the properties for the task that will be generated for the work piece robot.
The generate path group contains the button that creates the paths.
Settings
Start ID
WP robot settings
ID step index
Sync ident prefix
Task list prefix
Path Prefix
Target Prefix
WP Workobject
Specify the first ID number for the synchronization of the instructions for the robots.
Specify the gap between the succeeding ID numbers.
Specify a prefix for the syncident variable, which connects the sync instructions in the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot with each other.
Specify a prefix for the tasklist variable, which identifies the tasks for the tool robot and work piece robot to synchronize.
Specify a prefix for the generated paths.
Specify a prefix for the generated targets.
Specify the work object to which the targets generated for the work piece robot shall belong.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
231
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
Continued
WP TCP
Generate
Paths
Create paths
Specify which tool data the work piece robot shall use when reaching its targets.
Clicking this button generates paths in RobotStudio for the latest tested motions according to the settings specified.
MultiTeach tab
With this tab you teach complete synchronized move instructions for the robots in the MultiMove program.
Settings
Teach
Path Prefix
Target Prefix
Start ID
ID step index
Sync ident prefix
Task list prefix
Select type of Sync instruction
Setup
MultiTeach Information
MultiTeach
Specify a prefix for the paths to create.
Specify a prefix for the generated targets here.
Specify the first ID number for the synchronization of the instructions for the robots.
Specify the gap between the succeeding ID numbers.
Specify a prefix for the syncident variable, which connects the sync instructions in the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot with each other.
Specify a prefix for the tasklist variable, which identifies the tasks for the tool robot and work piece robot to synchronize.
Select the type of synchronization to use.
Coordinated implies that all move instructions are synchronized for the robots.
Semicoordinated implies that the robots work independently at some times and wait for each other at other
(like when repositioning the work piece).
For detailed information about the coordination types, see the Application manual - Multimove.
Select the robots for teaching targets.
This grid also displays the workobjects and tools that will be used for the targets.
Displays a hierarchal tree which contains the created move instructions.
The tree is organized the same way as the tree in the Layout browser.
Creates move instructions for the robots selected in the settings to their current positions. The created move instructions are immediately inserted at their correct places in the Multi-
Teach Information tree.
Continues on next page
232 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Test tab
Done
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
Continued
Confirms the creation of the instructions.
RobotStudio’s MultiMove window has a page with commands for testing multimove programs. Its default placement is at the bottom of the MultiMove window.
The status group displays the status of the simulation, that is, whether the current settings have been tested or if errors have occurred.
In addition to the status group, information from the virtual controller is also displayed in RobotStudio’s Output window during simulation.
Play
<< < > >>
Settings
Play
Simulation speed
Stop at end
Simulate Online
Jumps the robots, respectively, to the previous and next targets in paths.
The double arrow buttons jump several targets at once, while the single arrow buttons jump one target for each click.
Click this button to move the robots along the paths.
Play also has a list box in which you can activate the following commands:
• Save current position: Saves the current start position. Since the calculated motions are based on the robot start position saving the start position is useful when testing alternative solutions.
• Restore saved position: Moves the robots back to the saved start positions.
•
Restore last closed loop posi-
tion: Moves the robots back to the list used start position.
• Close loop: Finds a suitable start position based on the robots’ current positions and prepares the calculation of movements.
• Calculate: Calculates and executes the movements.
Sets the speed at which the simulation is performed.
Select this check box to make the simulation stop after running the paths one time. If cleared, the simulation will continue playing over and over until it is stopped manually.
Select this check box to run the simulation as the movements are calculated.
This is useful for troubleshooting purposes, since it displays and reports targets the robot cannot reach.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
233
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
Continued
Cancel on error
Watch Close Loop
Select this check box to stop the simulation if an error occurs. Cancel on errors is recommended to use when simulate online is used to minimize the number of error messages once the first error is identified.
Select this check box to display the search for a suitable start position in the graphics window.
Clear the check box to jump the robots to the start position when it is found.
The MultiMove configure system wizard
The MultiMove configure system wizard guides you through configuring robots and workobjects for MultiMove system. If the workobjects are not configured correctly when the MultiMove functions are started, you will be asked whether to run the wizard. You can also start it manually from the Tools page of MultiMove.
The wizard contains four pages, the information pane at the bottom indicates the current page.
Workpiece robot
Tool robots
Workobjects
Result
The workpiece robot page contains a list in which you select the robot that holds the workpiece.
Only one robot can be set up as workpiece robot. If your station has several robots that hold the workpiece, set up one of them as workpiece robot and the other as tools robots, and create paths for these robots in which they only hold the workpiece.
The tool robots page contains a list in which you select the robots that operate on the work piece.
All robots selected as tools robots will be coordinated to the workpiece robot. Any robot of the system that is selected neither as workpiece robot or tool robot will not be coordinated.
The Workobjects page contains a box for each tool robot in which you specify the workobject in which the targets for the
MultiMove paths shall be created. The wizard will attach this workobject to the workpiece robot, for enabling MutliMove.
Either type in a name for a new Workobject to create in the box, or select the Use existing WorkObject check box and then select one from the list.
The Result page displays a summary of the station configuration.
Either click Done to finish or Previous to go back and change the setup.
Note
The wizard will not help you configure the RobotWare system correctly. If the correct options are not used you will not be able to synchronize generated
MultiMove paths to the virtual controller, even if you can use the MultiMove functions in RobotStudio.
Continues on next page
234
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
Continued
The Analyze path tool
This tool checks whether existing paths are coordinated correctly for MultiMove.
The analyzer opens in a window of its own and contains three pages. The information pane at the bottom indicates the current page.
Select Paths
Enable
Analyze
Report
Task
Path
Analyze
Select to include the task in the analysis.
Displays the name of the task.
Select the path to analyze for the current task.
Click this button to start the analysis.
OK. The paths are compatible in the specified aspect.
reportok reportin reporter
Information. The paths are not fully compatible in the specified aspect, but the robot program may still be executable.
Error. The paths are not compatible in the specified aspect, and the robot program is not executable.
The Recalculate ID tool
This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It sets new sync ID arguments to the move instructions in a MultiMove path. By using the tool with the same start ID and ID step index on all paths that shall be synchronized, you can be sure that the IDs match if all paths contain the same number of move instructions.
Title
Start ID
Displays the name of the path to recalculate IDs for.
Sets the number of the first ID in the path.
ID Step index
Only update instructions that has ID defined
Sets the size of the step to increase the ID number for each move instruction.
Select this check box to recalculate only those IDs for instructions that have existing IDs.
Clear this check box to also create IDs for instructions that have no IDs (for example, if you have added new move instructions that shall be coordinated).
The Only update instruc-
tions between SyncMove
On/Off check box.
Select this check box to affect only those move instructions that belong to already synchronized parts of the path.
Clear this check box to update IDs for instructions in all parts of the path.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
235
8 Home tab
8.12 MultiMove
Continued
The Convert path to MultiMove path tool
This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It adds sync ID arguments to all move instructions in the path and, optionally,
SyncMoveOn/Off instructions, thus preparing an ordinary path for MultiMove use.
You use the tool on one path a time, so for creating a MultiMove program, you convert one path for each robot and then create a tasklist and syncidents which you add to the Sync instructions.
Title
Start ID
Displays the name of the path to recalculate IDs for.
Sets the number of the first ID in the path.
ID Step index
Sets the size of the step to increase the ID number for each move instruction.
Add SyncMove On/Off before and after
Select this check box to add instructions that start and stop the synchronization.
The Create Tasklist tool
This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It creates a variable of the RAPID data type tasks
, which identifies the tasks that will be synchronized. In each S yncMoveOn or
WaitSyncTask instruction, you then specify which tasklist to use.
Tasklist name
Specifies the name of the tasklist.
Tasks that will be included
Select the check box for each task to include in the list.
The Create Syncident tool
This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It creates a variable of the RAPID data type
SyncIdent
, which identifies the sync instructions that shall be synchronized.
Syncident name
Specifies the name of the
SyncIdent variable to create.
Tasks that SyncIdent will be created in
Select the check box for each task to use this Syncident in.
236
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.13 Teach Instruction
8.13 Teach Instruction
Teaching a move instruction
1 In the Layout browser, make sure the settings for active robot, workobject, tool, motion type and path are appropriate for the move instruction to create.
2 Jog the robot to the desired location. If jogging the robot using the freehand mode, you can also use snap modes for snapping its TCP to objects in the station.
3 Click Teach Instruction. A move instruction is now created last in the path.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
237
8 Home tab
8.14 Move Instruction
8.14 Move Instruction
Creating a move instruction and a corresponding target
To create a move instruction, follow these steps:
1 Click Move Instruction to bring up a dialog box.
2 Select the Reference coordinate system for the move instruction.
3 Enter the Position to reach for the move instruction by clicking Add New in the Coordinates box and then click the required to-points in the graphics window. You can also enter the values in the Coordinates boxes and click
Add.
4 Enter the Orientation for the move instruction.
5 By clicking the More/Less button, you can expand or collapse the Create
Move Instruction dialog box. When the dialog box has been expanded, you can change the Target name and the Work object to which the target (with the move instruction) will belong.
6 Click Create to create the move instruction. The move instruction will appear under the path node as a reference to the target.
The Create Move Instruction dialog box for jointtarget movements
Name
Robot axes
External axes box
Storage Type
Module
Here you can change the name of the target you create when creating the move instruction.
Specify the joint values for the robot. Select the box and click the list to set the values.
Specify the joint values for external axes, if any exist in the station. Select the box and click the list to set the values.
Click this button to expand or collapse parts of the create move instruction dialog box.
Specify the module in which the jointtarget shall be declared.
238
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.15 Action Instruction
8.15 Action Instruction
Creating an action instruction
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select where to insert the action instruction.
To insert the action instruction
at the beginning of a path after another instruction
Select
the path the proceeding instruction
2 Right click Path and select Insert Action Instruction.
The Create Action Instruction dialog box appears.
3 From the Instruction Templates list, select the action instruction to create.
4 Optionally, modify instruction arguments in the Instruction Arguments grid.
For detailed information about the arguments for each instruction, see the
Action Instruction on page 239
.
5 Click Create.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
239
8 Home tab
8.16 Instruction Template Manager
8.16 Instruction Template Manager
Overview
The Instruction Template Manager is used to add support for instructions other than the default set that comes with the RobotStudio.
For example, a robot controller system with the RobotWare Dispense option has specialized move instructions related to glueing like DispL and DispC. You can manually define the instruction templates for these using the Instruction Template
Manager. The instruction templates are exported to XML format and reused later.
RobotStudio has pre-defined XML files that are imported and used for robot controller systems with the appropriate RobotWare options.These XML files has both the Move and Action instructions.
It is recommended to use RobotStudio ArcWelding PowerPac while using
RobotWare Arc.
The instruction template supports the following Robotware options:
• Cap (Continuous Application Process)
• Disp (Dispense)
• Trigg (Fixed Position Events)
• Spot Pneumatic
• Spot Servo
• Spot Servo Equalizing
• Paint xx0600003320
Item
1
Description
Buttons for importing, exporting and validating.
Continues on next page
240
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.16 Instruction Template Manager
Continued
5
6
7
3
4
Item
2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
The instruction template tree. This hierarchal tree set organizes the templates.
Templates are always the lowest level nodes. For details about specific nodes in the tree, see item 5 and below.
Brief description for editing and creating instruction templates.
The Instruction grid. All arguments and settings for the object selected in the tree are displayed here. Only white boxes are editable. Red values indicate that the values are invalid.
The Instruction templates top node. Here you can see to which task the templates belong.
The Action instructions node contains everything related to action instruction templates.
An Action instruction description node, here represented by the Set DO instruction, defines the arguments that can be set for the action instruction templates of that kind.
You can create action instruction descriptions for all action instructions known by the system running on the virtual controller.
An Action instruction template node, here represented by Default, contains instances of the action instruction descriptions, with defined values for the arguments.
The Move instructions node contains everything related to move instruction templates.
The Move instruction descriptions node contains all move instructions descriptions for the task.
If the description for an instruction is not present in the list, right-click this node to add it. You can create move instruction descriptions for all move instructions known by the system running on the virtual controller.
A Move instruction description node, here represented by the MoveAbsJ node, defines the arguments that can be set for the move instruction templates of that kind.
Unlike action instructions, instruction templates related to a certain move instruction descriptions are not stored in child nodes under the description, due to a more complex hierarchy.
The Process definitions node, which gathers all process definitions, contains sets of process templates which in turn contain instruction templates optimized for specific processes.
A Process definition node, here represented by the generic Move process, contains sets of process templates which in turn contain instruction templates optimized for specific processes.
A Process template node, here represented by the generic Default process, contains sets of move instruction templates with argument values optimized for specific processes.
A process template can hold one move instruction template for each move instruction type defined by a move instruction description.
A Move instruction template node, here represented by MoveJ, contains instances of move instruction descriptions with argument values customized for specific processes.
Importing a template
1 Click Import to bring up the Open File dialog box.
2 Select the file to import, and click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
241
8 Home tab
8.16 Instruction Template Manager
Continued
Exporting a template
1 Select an exportable node in the tree view and click Export to bring up the
Save File dialog box.
2 Click OK.
Validating the templates
1 Select a node in the tree view and click Validate.
Any invalidity will be reflected by the icons and ToolTips of the respective node and reported in the Output window.
242
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.17.1 Task
8.17 Settings
8.17.1 Task
Selecting a Task
Select a task from the Task drop-down list. The selected task indicates active task, to which new workobjects, tooldata, target, empty path or path from curve will be added.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
243
8 Home tab
8.17.2 Workobject
8.17.2 Workobject
Selecting a Workobject
Select a workobject from the Workobject drop-down list. The selected workobject indicates active workobject, to which new targets and move instructions are added.
244
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.17.3 Tool
8.17.3 Tool
Selecting a Tool
Select a tool from the Tool drop-down list. The selected tool indicates active tool, to which move instructions are added.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
245
8 Home tab
8.18 The Freehand Group
8.18 The Freehand Group
Move
1 In the Layout browser, select the item you want to move.
2
3 Click Move.
4 In the graphics window, click one of the axes and drag the item into position.
Continues on next page
246
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.18.1 Rotate
8.18.1 Rotate
Rotating an item
1 In the Layout browser, select the item you want to rotate.
2 Click Rotate.
3 In the graphics window, click one of the rotational rings and drag the item into position.
If you press the ALT key while rotating, the item will snap 10 degrees at a time.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
247
8 Home tab
8.18.2 Jog Joint
8.18.2 Jog Joint
Jogging the joints of a robot
1 In the Layout browser, select the robot you want to move.
2 Click Jog Joint.
3 Click the joint you want to move and drag it to the preferred position.
If you press the ALT key when jogging the joints of the robot, the robot will move 10 degrees at a time. If you press the f key, the robot will move 0.1
degree at a time.
248
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.18.3 Jog Linear
8.18.3 Jog Linear
Jogging the TCP of a robot
1 In the Layout browser, select the robot you want to move.
2 In the Freehand group, click Jog Linear. A coordinate system will be displayed at the TCP of the robot.
3 Click the axis you want to move and drag the TCP to the preferred position.
If you press the f key while jogging the robot linearly, the robot will move with a smaller step size.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
249
8 Home tab
8.18.4 Jog Reorient
8.18.4 Jog Reorient
Reorienting the TCP rotation
1 In the Layout browser, select the robot you want to reorient.
2 In the Freehand group, click Jog Reorient.
An orientation ring appears around the TCP.
3 Click the orientation ring and drag the robot to rotate the TCP to the preferred position.
The X, Y, and Z orientation appears with units.
Note
If you press the ALT key while reorienting, the robot moves by 10 units and if you press the F key, it moves by 0.1 unit.
Note
The behavior of orientation differs with the different reference coordinate system (World, Local, UCS, Active Workobject, Active Tool).
250
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.18.5 MultiRobot Jog
8.18.5 MultiRobot Jog
Jogging robots in multirobot mode
1 In the Freehand group, click MultiRobot Jog. Select the robots to be jogged from the list of available robots.
2 Select the jogging mode, jog one of the robots and the other ones will follow the movement.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
251
8 Home tab
8.19 Graphics Tools
8.19 Graphics Tools
Overview
The Graphics Tools helps you to control the graphics view and to modify the appearance of objects. All available options are grouped under the following tabs.
• View Tab
• Edit Tab
Continues on next page
252
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.19.1 View Tab
8.19.1 View Tab
Introduction
Use the View tab to choose view settings, control graphics view and create new views, and to show/hide the selected targets, frames, paths, parts, and mechanisms.
The View tab options are grouped under the following groups.
• View
• Navigate
• Markups
• Lights
• Clip Planes
• Freehand
• Close
View Group
Introduction
The View group helps you to choose view settings, control graphics view and create new views, and to show/hide the selected targets, frames, paths, parts, and mechanisms.The following options are available:
• New View
• View Settings : Projection, Representation, Frame Size
• Settings
• Advanced Lighting
• Show/Hide
Select New View to create a new view.
View Settings
You can select the following different view settings.
Setting
Projection
• Orthographic
• Perspective
Representation
• Surface
• Wireframe
• Both
• Hidden-line removal
Frame Size
• Large
• Medium
• Small
Description
To view the orthographic and perspective view of the object.
To view the objects as a surface, wireframe, both surface and wireframe, by removing hidden lines.
To view the frame in large, medium and small sizes.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
253
8 Home tab
8.19.1 View Tab
Continued
Advanced Lighting
Advances Lighting activates the advanced lighting model that enables features such as multiple lights, shadows and environment mapping. This feature requires graphics hardware that supports Direct3D feature level 10_1 or higher.
The standard lighting model is supported on all systems and is optimized for performance and visibility.
Settings
The Settings button in the View tab provides various display options for graphics.
The Settings commands work on the active graphics view and do not affect persisted settings or other views. The available options are:
Settings
Show Floor
Show UCS Grid
Description
Shows or hides the floor the graphics view.
Shows or hides the UCS grid in the graphics view.
Show World Coordinates Shows or hides the world coordinates in the graphics view.
Show Buttons
Reset Floor Size
Shows or hides buttons in the graphics view.
Adjusts the floor and UCS grid to cover the area used by objects in the station.
Background Color
Default View Settings
Reset to Defaults
Allows the user to set a custom background for the view.
Opens the Options dialog box that shows the defaults settings.
Resets the active view to the default settings.
Show/Hide
You can either show or hide the following options:
• Target Names
• Frame Names
• Path Names
• All Targets/Frames
• All Paths
• All Parts
• All Mechanisms
Continues on next page
254
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.19.1 View Tab
Continued
Navigate Group
Introduction
Navigate group contains buttons for creating and managing viewpoint and for controlling the orientation of graphics.
Setting
View Orientation
Create Viewpoint
Description
To view the objects in the following different orientations.
• View All
• View Center
• Top
• Bottom
• Front
• Back
• Left
• Right
Stores the location and direction of a virtual camera in the 3D environment.
Viewpoint
A Viewpoint stores the location and direction of a virtual camera in the 3D environment. It stores points of interest in a station to create camera movements during simulation.
Creating Viewpoint
You can create a viewpoint in a station in two ways:
1 In the View tab, click Create Viewpoint.
2 In the Layout browser, right-click the station and select Create Viewpoint.
A viewpoint is created and displayed (as an eye icon) in the layout browser to the left.
The position and direction of the Viewpoint can also be visualized as an arrow in the 3D graphics. By default, the newly created viewpoints are not visible and cannot be selected by clicking on the graphics.
Viewpoint functions
In the Layout browser, right-click Viewpoint to perform the following functions:
Function
Move to Viewpoint
Set to current
Visible
Delete
Rename
Description
Moves the active 3D view to the location stored in the viewpoint.
Modifies the viewpoint to the current location and direction of the active 3D view.
This action cannot be undone.
Toggles the visibility of the viewpoint 3D representation.
This action cannot be undone.
Deletes the viewpoint.
This action cannot be undone.
Renames the viewpoint.
This action cannot be undone.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
255
8 Home tab
8.19.1 View Tab
Continued
Move to Viewpoint
You can also move active 3D view to the location stored in the Viewpoint using
Event manager.
1 Create a viewpoint.
2 Add an event.
The Create new event dialog box appears.
3 Select Simulation under Activation and Simulation time under Event trig
type. Click Next.
4 Set the activation time. Click Next.
5 Select Move to Viewpoint from Set Action type. Click Next.
6 Select the viewpoint from select Viewpoint and set the transition time.
7 Click Finish.
Move to viewpoint function is also executed when replaying the simulation in a
Station Viewer. In addition, you can switch between view points using the
MoveToViewpoint Smart Components, see
Running a simulation on page 342
.
Markups Group
Overview
A markup is a text box displayed in the 3D graphics. It is similar to the temporary text shown when performing measurement or freehand movement, but it is part of the station.
The markup is displayed as a node in the layout browser and remains so when the station is saved. It appears as text bubble pointing to a position in the graphics window.
Creating Markup
Use this procedure to create markup to an object
1 In the Home tab, click View and select Create Markup.
The Create Markup dialog box appears.
Note
Alternatively, in the Layout browser, right-click the station and select Create
Markup for the dialog box to appear.
2 In the Markup Text field, enter a name for the markup text.
3 In the Pointer position field, set the position of the pointer.
4 Select Always on top if you want to display the text on top.
5 Click Create.
Markup functions
In the Layout browser, right-click Markup to perform the following functions:
Function
Visible
Modify Markup
Description
Shows or hides the markup in the 3D graphics.
Modifies the Markup properties.
Continues on next page
256 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Modify Markup
Function
Attach to
Detach
Delete
Rename
8 Home tab
8.19.1 View Tab
Continued
Description
Attaches the markup to another graphical object.
Detaches the attached markup.
Deletes the markup.
Changes the name of the markup object.
Use this procedure to modify the markup properties:
1 In the Layout browser, right-click the markup and select Modify Markup.
The Modify Markup dialog box appears.
2 Modify the markup text, pointer position or text position.
3 Click Apply for the changes to take effect.
4 Click Close.
Lights Group
Overview
Light Properties
The Lights group helps you to control the number and nature of light sources in the station when advanced lighting is enabled. There are four different kinds of light sources:
• Ambient Light – Controls the ambient (background) light level in the station.
• Infinite Light – A directional light source, similar to the sun, this light source can cast shadows.
• Spotlight – A light source with a cone of influence, this light source can cast shadows.
• Point light – Casts light radially from a specified position, this light source can not cast shadows.
By default, a new station contains two infinite light sources in addition to the ambient light source. The ambient light source cannot be removed or created, but it can be disabled. The Create Light menu contains commands for creating a new light source and adding it to the station.
In the browser, right-click the light source and then select Light Properties from the context menu. You can view the Light Properties window. Use this window to modify the light source. The Light Properties window contains different controls depending on the type of light.
Settings
Enabled (all kinds)
Casts shadows (infinite and spot lights)
Color (all kinds)
Ambient intensity (ambient light)
Description
Enables or disables the light source
Causes objects influenced by the light to cast shadows
Controls the color of the light
Controls the ambient (background) intensity of the light
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
257
8 Home tab
8.19.1 View Tab
Continued
Settings
Diffuse intensity (infinite, spot and point lights)
Highlight (infinite, spot and point lights)
Position (spot and point lights)
Direction (infinite and spot lights)
Limit range (spot and point lights)
Spotlight angle (spot lights)
Description
Controls the intensity of diffuse highlights
Controls the intensity of specular highlight
Controls the position of the light source
Controls the direction of the light
Optionally limits the range of influence of the light
Controls the angle of the light cone
Light presets
Light sources are saved in the station. User can use light presets to save a set of lights for reuse. The Presets menu contains a list of user defined light presets.
When a preset is selected, the light sources in the station are replaced by the preset. The menu also contains the following commands:
Command Description
Reset lights to default Resets light to the default preset
Save lights as preset
Edit presets
Saves the lights in the station as a preset
Allows the user to remove previously created presets
Clip Planes
Overview
A clip plane is an infinite plane that cuts through geometric objects in the station.
Objects on one side of the plane are visible while objects on the other side are invisible. A station can contain multiple clip planes, but each graphics view can only have one active clip plane.
Note
Creating and Editing a Clip Plane
Use the following procedure to create and edit a clip plane.
1 In the View tab, click Create Clip Plane.
2 In the browser, right-click the clip plane. The context menu appears.
3 In the context menu, click Edit. The Clip Plane property window appears.
When a clip plane is selected in the browser, a graphical representation of the plane is displayed in the Graphics view. This allows the user to move and rotate the clip plane by using freehand controls.
Clip Plane Functions
Non-geometric objects such as graphic representations of paths and targets are not affected.
Function Description
Position Controls the position of the clip plane, you can select or type in the x, y and z co-ordinates of the clip plane.
Continues on next page
258
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
8 Home tab
8.19.1 View Tab
Continued
Function Description
Normal
Flip
Active
Controls the orientation of the clip plane, you can select or type in the x, y and z co-ordinates of the clip plane.
Allows the user to reverse the orientation of the clip plane.
Enables or disables the clip plane in the active graphics view.
Freehand
Moving an item
Rotating an item
Freehand options are used to move and rotate the selected object. User can select the coordinate system.
1 In the Layout browser, select the item you want to move.
2 Click Move.
3 In the graphics window, click one of the axes and drag the item into position.
1 In the Layout browser, select the item you want to rotate.
2 Click Rotate.
3 In the graphics window, click one of the rotational rings and drag the item into position.
If you press the ALT key while rotating, the item will snap 10 degrees at a time.
World
Use this option to move or rotate an object in the station in relation with the specified coordinate system. The following options are available:
• World
• Local
• UCS
• Active Workobject
• Active Tool
Close Graphics
Select this option to close the Graphics Tools tabs.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
259
8 Home tab
8.19.2 Edit Tab
8.19.2 Edit Tab
Overview
The Edit tab contains commands for working with materials and their application on geometric objects. The available options are:
• Materials
• Pick Material
• Apply Material
• Edit Materials
• Adjust Textures
• Close Graphics
Appearance Group
The Appearance group contains the following options:
Settings
Materials
Pick Material
Apply Material
Description
Contains a gallery of predefined and user defined materials
Allows the user to select a material
Activates or deactivates apply material mode
Edit Materials Allows editing of user defined materials
Adjust Textures Allows the user to adjust texture coordinates on surfaces directly in the main graphics view
Materials
The Material menu contains controls for setting material parameters or for selecting a material from the list of user defined and predefined materials. It is also possible to save the current material to the user defined materials list.
Apply Material
When Apply Material is activated, the active material is automatically applied to the geometric surfaces or objects (depending on selection mode) selected in the
Graphics view. The active material is selected by using the Materials menu or the
Pick Material command. When a material is selected, Apply Material is automatically activated.
Edit Materials
The Edit Materials menu allows editing of user defined materials. Click this button to see the list of defined materials. This list can be edited by adding, deleting and copying materials. The name and description of a material can be changed by right-clicking in the list. A preview of the selected material is displayed in the
Graphics view.
Adjust Textures
The Adjust Textures menu allows the user to adjust texture coordinates on surfaces directly in the main Graphics view. When the command is activated and a textured surface is selected, the user can use the keyboard to move, rotate, mirror and scale the texture on the surface.
Continues on next page
260 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
8 Home tab
8.19.2 Edit Tab
Continued
Graphics browser
A separate browser window is displayed when one of the graphics menu is selected.
It contains objects in the station that are related to the graphics system. The following options are available:
• Markups
• Viewpoints
• Lights
• Clip planes
Close Graphics
Select this option to close the Graphics Tools tabs .
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
261
This page is intentionally left blank
9 Modeling tab
9.1 Overview
9 Modeling tab
9.1 Overview
The Modeling tab
The Modeling tab contains the controls for creating and grouping components, creating bodies, measurements and CAD operations.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
263
9 Modeling tab
9.2 Component Group
9.2 Component Group
Creating a component group
1 Click Component Group. The Group node will be displayed in the Layout browser.
2 Click the objects to add to the group. Drag them to the Group node.
264
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.3 Empty Part
9.3 Empty Part
Creating an empty part
1 Click Empty Part. The Part node will be displayed in the Layout browser.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
265
9 Modeling tab
9.4.1 Smart Component
9.4 Smart Component
9.4.1 Smart Component
Overview
Smart Component is a RobotStudio object (with or without a 3D graphical representation) that has the behavior which can be implemented by code-behind and/or aggregation of other Smart Components.
Terminology
The following table describes the different terminologies that you come across when working with Smart Component.
Term
Code behind
[Dynamic] property
[Property] binding
[Property] attributes
[I/O] signal
[I/O] connection
Aggregation
Asset
Definition
A .NET class associated with a Smart Component that can implement custom behavior by reacting to certain events, for example simulation time steps and changes in property values.
An object attached to a Smart Component that has value, type and certain other characteristics. The property value is used by code behind to control the behavior of the Smart Component.
Connects the value of one property to the value of another property.
Key-value pairs that contain additional information about a dynamic property, for example value constraints.
An object attached to a Smart Component that has a value and a direction (input/output), analogous to I/O signals on a robot controller. The signal value is used by code behind to control the behavior of the Smart Component.
Connects the value of one signal to the value of a different signal.
The process of connecting several Smart Components using bindings and/or connections in order to implement a more complex behavior.
Data object contained in a Smart Component. Uses include code behind assembly and localized resources.
266
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.2 Smart Component Editor
9.4.2 Smart Component Editor
Overview
The Smart Component Editor allows you to create, edit, and aggregate Smart
Components using a graphical user interface. It is an alternative to using the xml based library compiler.
Layout of a Smart Component Editor
It onsists of an icon, the name, the description for the component wherein the description can be modified by typing in the text box, and a combo box.
The combo box specifies the language for editing localized strings (captions and descriptions) in the component. The default language is always English, even if the application language is different. For more information, see
The Smart Component Editor consists of the following tabs:
•
•
The Properties and Bindings tab on page 271
•
The Signals and Connections tab on page 274
•
Opening a Smart Component Editor
Click Smart Component or select Edit Component from the context menu.
The Smart Component Editor window appears.
Protecting a Smart Component from edits
You can protect a Smart Component from being edited. To protect the smart component, right-click the smart component, and then click Protected. You can also optionally specify a password that will be required to unlock the component for edits.
Protecting a Smart Component hides its internal structure and protects it from edits. You can use this feature to hide the complexity in the smart component, and to secure the functionality. Child components in a protected smart component are hidden in all RobotStudio browsers and also in the Signal Analyzer browser.
Note
Protecting a Smart Component in this manner is a way of hiding complexity, and is not for providing security or securely protecting it.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
267
9 Modeling tab
9.4.3 The Compose tab
9.4.3 The Compose tab
Overview
The Compose tab consists of the following:
•
•
•
Child components
It is a list box that displays all the objects contained by the component. Objects connected to a library have an overlay that indicates that the objects are locked.
Smart Components are displayed first followed by other type of objects.
If an object is selected from the list, the following commands are displayed in the right panel:
Command
Add component
Edit parent
Disconnect from library
Export to XML
Description
Adds a child object to the component from the list.
You can select a built-in base Smart Component, a new empty
Smart Component, a library from file or a geometric part from file.
Base components are organized as sub-menus based on the usage. For example, Signals and Properties, Sensors, Actions and so on. Recently used base components are listed at the top.
For more information about base Smart Component, see
Smart Components on page 278 .
Sets the context of the Editor to the parent of the component that is currently being edited. If the parent is the station, see
Disconnects the selected object from library, allowing it to be edited.
Opens a dialog box where you can export and save the component definition along with its properties as an *.rsxml file
Right-click on the selected object to display the following context menu items
Item
Edit
Delete
Show in Browser
Set as Role
Properties
Description
Sets the context of the Editor to the selected child object.
Deletes the child object.
Indicates if the object should be displayed in the Layout browser.
Sets the object as the Role of the component. The Smart
Component will inherit certain characteristics of the Role object.
For example, attaching a component with a tool as Role to a robot will cause a ToolData to be created.
Opens the Property editor dialog box for the object. See
Continues on next page
268
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.3 The Compose tab
Continued
Saved States
The state of the component can be saved to be restored later. The state contains selected modifiable aspects of the component and its child components at the time when the state was saved. The following commands are available:
Command
Save Current State
Restore Selected State
Details
Delete
Description
Opens the Save Current State dialog box. See
.
Restores the component to the selected state.
Opens a window that displays detailed information about the selected state.
Deletes the selected state.
Save Current State
1 In the Name text box, enter a name for the state. If a state with the same name already exists, you will be asked to overwrite the existing state.
2 In the Description text box, enter the description for the state.
3 In the Values to save, select the value to be saved.
4 Select the check box to save the state of all child components.
Note
When working on a station level,
• In the Values to save, you can also select certain Virtual Controller values in the saved states.
• You need not select the option Recursive as the state of the station is always saved.
For more information, see
Assets
The assets contained in the component are displayed as grid.
The following commands are available:
Command
Add Asset
Set Icon
Update All Assets
View
Save
Delete
Description
Opens a dialog box and allows you to browse and select any file as an asset.
Opens a dialog box and allows you to browse and select an image that represents a Smart Component.
Replaces the data of all the assets with the data of the corresponding file on the disk. If the file is not available, a warning message is displayed in the output window.
Opens the selected asset in the associated program
Opens a dialog box and allows you to save the selected asset.
Deletes the selected asset.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
269
9 Modeling tab
9.4.3 The Compose tab
Continued
Note
The text resources (descriptions) for properties and signals are stored in an asset called Resources.<language-id>.xml. If this is deleted, the texts for that language will be empty and the default (English) will be used. The default language when authoring a component is always English, regardless of the application language.
270
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab
9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab
Overview
The Properties and Bindings tab consists of the following:
•
Dynamic Properties on page 271
•
Dynamic Properties
The dynamic properties contained in the component are displayed in a grid.
The following commands are available
Command
Add Dynamic Property
Expose Child Property
Edit
Delete
Description
Opens the Add Dynamic Property dialog box. See
Dynamic Property on page 271 .
Opens the Expose Child Property dialog box. See
.
Opens the Edit Dynamic Property dialog box for the selected property.
Deletes the selected property.
Add or Edit Dynamic Property
The Add Dynamic Property dialog box allows you to create a new dynamic property or edit an existing property.
The following controls are available:
Control
Property Identifier
Description
Read-only
Property Type
Property Value
Attributes
Description
Specifies an identifier for the property. The identifier must be alphanumeric, start with a letter and must be unique.
Detailed description of the property.
Indicates if the property value should be possible to modify in
GUI such as the Property Editor.
Specifies the type of the property from a list of allowed types.
Specifies the value of the property. The control is updated when you change the property type and/or attributes.
Allows you to add, remove, and modify property attributes.
The following lists the available attributes:
• MinValue
• MaxValue
• Quantity
• Slider
• AutoApply
Numeric attributes are specified in SI units.
Note
When editing an existing property, the Identifier and Type controls are locked and cannot be modified. If the input is valid the OK button is enabled, allowing the you to add or update the property. If not, an error icon is displayed.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
271
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
9 Modeling tab
9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab
Continued
Expose Child Property
The Expose Child Property dialog box allows you to add a new property and bind to an existing property in a child object. The new property will have the same type and attributes as the child property.
The following controls are available:
Control
Property Identifier
Description
Identifier of the new property. By default, this is the same as the identifier of the selected child property.
Specifies the direction of the property binding
Binding Direction
Source or Target Object
Specifies the child object for which to expose a property.
Source or Target Property
Specifies the child property.
Property Bindings
The property bindings contained in the component are displayed in a grid.
The following commands are available:
Command
Add Binding
Add Expression Binding
Edit
Delete
Description
Opens the Add Binding dialog box.
Opens the Add Expression Binding dialog box.
Opens the Edit Binding or Edit Expression Binding dialog box, depending on the type of binding selected.
Deletes the selected binding.
Add or Edit Binding
The Add Binding dialog box allows you to create or edit a property binding.
The following options are available:
Control
Source Object
Source Property
Target Object
Target Property
Allow cyclic binding
Description
Specifies the owner of the source property.
Specifies the source of the binding.
Specifies the owner of the target property.
Specifies the target of the binding.
Only properties of the same type as the source property type are listed.
Allows the target property to be set two times in the same context, which otherwise generates an error.
The target list box, besides dynamic properties also displays some common properties such as object transform that can only be used as target and not as source.
Continues on next page
272
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab
Continued
Add or Edit Expression Binding
The Add Expression Binding dialog box allows you to specify a mathematical expression as the source of a property binding.
The following controls are available:
Control
Expression
Target Object
Target Property
Description
Specifies the mathematical expressions.
The following lists the allowable mathematical expressions:
• Allowed operators: +, - (unary and binary) *, /, ^ (power),
Sin(), Cos(), Sqrt(), Atan() and Abs().
• Allowed operands: Numeric constants, PI, and Numeric dynamic properties on the current smart component and any child smart components.
The text box has the IntelliSense-like funtionality which allows you to select from the available properties. If the expression entered in the text box is invalid, an error icon is displayed.
Specifies the owner of the target property.
Specifies the target of the binding.
Only numeric properties are listed.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
273
9 Modeling tab
9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab
9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab
Overview
The Signals and Connections tab consists of the following:
•
•
I/O Signals
The I/O Signals contained in the component are displayed in a grid.
The following commands are available:
Command
Add I/O Signals
Expose Child Signal
Edit
Delete
Description
Opens the Add I/O Signals dialog box.
Opens the Expose Child Signal dialog box.
Opens the Edit Signal dialog box.
Deletes the selected signal.
Add or Edit I/O signals
The Add I/O Signals dialog box allows you to edit an I/O signal, or add one or more
I/O signals to the component.
The following controls are available:
Control
Type of Signal
Signal Base Name
Signal Value
Description
Auto-reset
Number of Signals
Start Index
Step
Minimum
Maximum
Description
Specifies the type and direction of the signal.
The following are the available types of signals:
• Digital
• Analog
• Group
Specifies the name of the signal.
The name must contain an alphanumeric character and start with a letter (a-z or A-Z).
If more than one signal is created, numeric suffixes specified by Start Index and Step are added to the names.
Specifies the initial value of the signal.
Text that describes the signal. When creating multiple signals, all will have the same description.
Specifies that a digital signal should have transient behavior.
This applies to digital signals only. Indicates that the signal value is automatically reset to 0.
Specifies the number of signals to create.
Specifies the first suffix when creating multiple signals.
Specifies the suffix interval when creating multiple signals.
Specifies the minimum value for an analog signal.
This applies to Analog signal only.
Specifies the maximum value for an analog signal.
This applies to Analog signal only.
Continues on next page
274
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Control
Hidden
Read only
9 Modeling tab
9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab
Continued
Description
Indicates if the property should not be visible in GUI such as the Property Editor and I/O Simulator.
Indicates if the property value should be possible to modify in
GUI such as the Property Editor and I/O Simulator.
Note
When editing an existing signal, only the Signal Value and Description can be modified, while all other controls are locked.
If the input is valid,OK is enabled allowing you to create or update the signal. If not, an error icon is displayed.
Expose Child signal
The Expose Child Signal dialog box allows you to add a new I/O signal that is connected to a signal in a child object.
The following controls are available:
Control
Signal Name
Child Object
Child Signal
Description
Specifies the name of the signal to be created. By default, it is the same as the name of the selected child signal.
Specifies the object for which to expose a signal.
Specifies the child signal.
I/O Connections
The I/O Connections contained in the component are displayed in a grid.
The following controls are available:
Control
Add I/O Connection
Edit
Manage I/O Connections
Delete
Move Up or Move Down
Description
Opens the Add I/O Connection dialog box.
Opens the Edit I/O Connection dialog box.
Opens the Manage I/O Connections dialog box.
Deletes the selected connection.
Sorts by moving the selected connections up and down the list.
Add or Edit I/O Connection
The Add I/O Connection dialog box allows you to create an I/O connection or edit an existing connection.
The following controls are available:
Control
Source Object
Source Signal
Target Object
Description
Specifies the owner of the source signal.
Specifies the source of the connection. The source must either be an output from a child component, or an input to the current component.
Specifies the owner of the target signal.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
275
9 Modeling tab
9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab
Continued
Control
Target Signal
Allow cyclic connection
Description
Specifies the target of the connection. The target must be of the same type as the source, and either an input to a child component or an output from the current component.
Allows the target signal to be set two times in the same context, which would otherwise generate an error.
Manage I/O Connections
The Manage I/O Connections dialog box displays a graphical view of the I/O connections of the component.
It allows you to add, remove, and modify connections. Only digital signals are displayed.
The following controls are available:
Control
Source / Target Signals
Connections
Logic Gates
Add
Remove
Description
Lists the signals used in the connections, source signals to the left and target signals to the right. Each signal is specified by the owner object and the signal name.
Displays connections as an arrow from source to target
Specifies a logic operator and a delay time. It performs digital logic on input signals.
• Add Source - Adds a source signal to the left.
• Add Target - Adds a target signal to the right.
• Add Logic Gate - Adds a logic gate at the center
Removes the selected signal, connection or logic gate.
Managing I/O connections
Use this procedure to add, remove, and create new I/O connections:
1 Click Add and select Add Source or Add Target or Add Logic Gate to add a source signal or target signal or logic gate respectively.
2 Move the cursor towards the Source Signal until a cross hair appears.
3 Click and drag the left mouse button towards the logic gate to create a new
I/O connection.
4 Select the signal, connection, or logic gate and click Remove to delete.
276
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.6 The Design tab
9.4.6 The Design tab
Overview
The Design tab displays a graphical view of the structure of the component. It includes the child components, internal connections, properties and bindings. The
Smart Component can be organized on the viewing screen and their viewing position will be stored with the station.
Using the Design tab
You can do the following in the Design tab:
Action
Move child components and their positions.
Description
• Click Auto Arrange to organize the components coherently.
• Use the Zoom slider to zoom the view.
Select a component from the graphical view.
Connections and bindings are color coded and highlighted to avoid confusion.
By default, Show Bindings, Show Connections, and Show
unused check-box are selected.
• De-select Show Bindings check-box to hide the bindings.
• De-select Show Connections check-box to hide the connections.
• De-select Show unused check-box to hide the unused components.
Create connections and bindings
1 Select the source signal or property. The cursor is displayed as a pen.
2 Drag and drop the cursor on the target signal or property.
If the target is valid, a connection and binding is created.
If the target is invalid, the cursor changs to "not allowed" symbol.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
277
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Overview
The base components represent a complete set of basic building block components.
They can be used to build user defined Smart Components with more complex behavior.
This lists the basic Smart Components available and are described in the following sections:
•
Signals and Properties on page 278
•
Parametric Primitives on page 282
•
•
•
•
Signals and Properties
LogicGate
The signal Output is set by the logical operation specified in Operator of the two signals InputAand InputB, with the delay specified in Delay.
Properties
Operator
Delay
Description
The logical operator to use.
The following lists the various operators:
• AND
• OR
• XOR
• NOT
• NOP
Time to delay the output signal.
Signals
InputA
InputB
Output
Description
The first input.
The second input.
The result of the logic operation.
LogicExpression
Evaluates a logic expression.
Properties
String
Operator
Description
The expression to evaluate.
The following lists the various operators:
• AND
• OR
• NOT
• XOR
Continues on next page
278
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
LogicMux
LogicSplit
LogicSRLatch
Converter
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Description
Contains the result of the evaluation.
Signals
Result
Output is set according to: Output = (Input A * NOT Selector) + (Input B * Selector)
Signals
Selector
InputA
InputB
Output
Description
When low, the first input is selected.
When high, the second input is selected.
Specifies the first input.
Specifies the second input.
Specifies the result of the operation.
The LogicSplit takes Input and sets OutputHigh to the same as Input, and OutputLow as the inverse of Input.
PulseHigh sends a pulse when Input is set to high, and PulseLow sends a pulse when Input is set to low.
Signals
Input
OutputHigh
OutputLow
PulseHigh
PulseLow
Description
Specifies the input signal.
Goes high (1) when input is 1.
Goes high (1) when input is 0.
Sends pulse when input is set to high.
Sends pulse when input is set to low.
TheLogicSRLatch has one stable state.
• When Set=1, Output=1 and InvOutput=0
• When Reset=1, Output=0 and InvOutput=1
Signals
Set
Reset
Output
InvOutput
Description
Sets the output signal.
Resets the output signal.
Specifies output signal.
Specifies Inverse output signal.
Converts between property values and signal values.
Properties
AnalogProperty
DigitalProperty
GroupProperty
BooleanProperty
Description
Converts to AnalogOutput.
Converts to DigitalOutput.
Converts to GroupOutput.
Converts from DigitalInput and to DigitalOutput.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
279
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Signals
DigitalInput
DigitalOutput
AnalogInput
AnalogOutput
GroupInput
GroupOutput
VectorConverter
Description
Converts to DigitalProperty.
Converted from DigitalProperty.
Converts to AnalogProperty.
Converted from AnalogProperty.
Converts to GroupProperty.
Converted from GroupProperty.
Converts between Vector3 and X, Y,and Z values.
Properties
X
Y
Z
Vector
Description
Specifies the X-value of Vector.
Specifies the Y-value of Vector.
Specifies the Z-value of Vector
Specifies the vector value..
Expression
The Expression consists of numeric literals (including PI), parentheses, mathematical operators +,-,*,/,^ (power) and mathematical functions sin, cos, sqrt, atan, abs. Any other strings are interpreted as variables, which are added as additional properties. The result is displayed in Result.
Signals
Expression
Result
NNN
Description
Specifies the expression to evaluate.
Specifies the result of evaluation.
Specifies automatically generated variables.
Comparer
The Comparer compares First value with Second value, using Operator. Output is set to 1 if the condition is met.
Properties
ValueA
ValueB
Operator
Description
Specifies the first value.
Specifies the second value.
Specifies the comparison operator.
The following lists the various operators:
• ==
• !=
• >
• >=
• <
• <=
Signals
Output
Description
True if the comparison evaluates to true, otherwise false.
Continues on next page
280
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Counter
Count is increased when the input signal Increase is set, and decreased when the input signal Decrease is set. Count is reset when the input signal Reset is set.
Properties
Count
Description
Specifies the current count.
Signals
Increase
Decrease
Reset
Description
Adds one to the Count when set to True.
Subtracts one from the Count when set to True.
Resets the Count to zero when set to high.
Repeater
Pulses Output signal Count number of times.
Properties
Count
Description
Number of times to pulse Output.
Signals
Execute
Output
Description
Set to high (1) to pulse Output Count times.
Output pulse.
Timer
The Timer pulses the Output signal based on the given interval.
If Repeat is unchecked, one pulse will be triggered after the time specified in
Interval. Otherwise, the pulse will be repeated at the interval given by Interval.
Properties
StartTime
Interval
Repeat
Current time
Description
Specifies the time to pass before the first pulse.
Specifies the simulation time between the pulses.
Specifies if the signal should be pulsed repeatedly or only once.
Specifies the current simulation time.
Signals
Active
Output
Description
Set to True to activate the timer, and False to deactivate it.
Sends pulses at the specified time intervals.
StopWatch
The StopWatch measures time during simulation (TotalTime). A new lap can be started by triggering the Lap input signal. LapTime shows the current lap time. The time is only measured when Active is set to 1. The times are reset when the input signal Reset is set.
Properties
TotalTime
LapTime
AutoReset
Description
Specifies the accumulated time.
Specifies the current lap time.
If true, TotalTime and LapTime will be set to 0 when the simulation starts.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
281
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Signals
Active
Reset
Lap
Description
Set to True to activate the stop watch, and False to deactivate it.
Resets Total time and Lap time when set to high.
Starts a new lap.
Parametric Primitives
ParametricBox
The ParametricBox generates a box with dimensions specified by length, width, and height.
Properties
SizeX
SizeY
SizeZ
GeneratedPart
KeepGeometry
Description
Specifies the length of the box in the X-axis direction.
Specifies the length of the box in the Y-axis direction.
Specifies the length of the box in the Z-axis direction
Specifies the generated part.
False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.
This can make other components such as Source execute faster.
Signals
Update
Description
Set to high (1) to update the generated part.
ParametricCircle
The ParametricCircle generates a circle with a given radius.
Properties
Radius
GeneratedPart
GeneratedWire
KeepGeometry
Description
Specifies the radius of the circle.
Specifies the generated part.
Specifies the generated wire object.
False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.
This can make other components such as Source execute faster
Signals
Update
Description
Set to high (1) to update the generated part.
ParametricCylinder
The ParametricCylinder generates a cylinder with the dimensions given by Radius and Height.
Properties
Radius
Height
GeneratedPart
KeepGeometry
Description
Specifies the radius of the cylinder.
Specifies the height of the cylinder.
Specifies the generated part.
False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.
This can make other components such as Source execute faster.
Continues on next page
282 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Description
Set to high (1) to update the generated part.
Signals
Update
ParametricLine
The ParametricLine generates a line with a given end point or a given length. If either of them is changed, the other one will be updated accordingly.
Properties
EndPoint
Length
GeneratedPart
GeneratedWire
KeepGeometry
Description
Specifies the end point for the line.
Specifies the length of the line.
Specifies the generated part.
Specifies the generated wire object.
False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.
This can make other components such as Source execute faster.
Signals
Update
Description
Set to high (1) to update the generated part.
LinearExtrusion
The LinearExtrusion extrudes SourceFace or SourceWire along the vector given by Projection.
Properties
SourceFace
SourceWire
Projection
GeneratedPart
KeepGeometry
Description
Specifies the face to extrude.
Specifies the wire to extrude.
Specifies the vector to extrude along.
Specifies the generated part.
False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.
This can make other components such as Source execute faster.
CircularRepeater
The CircularRepeater creates a number of given copies of Source around the center of the SmartComponent with a given DeltaAngle.
Properties
Source
Count
Radius
DeltaAngle
Description
Specifies the object to copy.
Specifies the number of copies to create.
Specifies the radius of the circle.
Specifies the angle between the copies.
LinearRepeater
The LinearRepeater creates a number of copies of Source, with the spacing and direction given by Offset.
Properties
Source
Description
Specifies the object to copy.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
283
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Properties
Offset
Count
MatrixRepeater
Description
Specifies the distance between copies.
Specifies the number of copies to create.
The MatrixRepeater creates a specified number of copies in three dimensions, with the specified spacing of the object in Source.
Properties
Source
CountX
CountY
CountZ
OffsetX
OffsetY
OffsetZ
Description
Specifies the object to copy.
Specifies the number of copies in the X-axis direction.
Specifies the number of copies in the Y-axis direction.
Specifies the number of copies in the Z-axis direction.
Specifies the offset between the copies in the X-axis direction.
Specifies the offset between the copies in the Y-axis direction.
Specifies the offset between the copies in the Z-axis direction.
Sensors
CollisionSensor
The CollisionSensor detects collisions and near miss events between the First object and the Second object. If one of the objects is not specified, the other will be checked against the entire station. When the Active signal is high and a collision or a near miss event occurs and the component is active, the SensorOut signal is set and the parts that participate in the collision or near miss event are reported in the first colliding part and second colliding partof the Property editor.
Properties
Object1
Object2
NearMiss
Part1
Part2
CollisionType
Description
The first object to check for collisions.
The second object to check for collisions.
Specifies the near miss distance.
The part of First object that has a collision.
The part of Second object that has a collision.
• None
• Near miss
• Collision
Signals
Active
SensorOut
Description
Specifies if the CollisionSensor is active or not.
True if there is a NearMiss or Collision.
Continues on next page
284
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
LineSensor
The LineSensor defines a line by the Start, End, and Radius. When an Active signal is high, the sensor detects objects that intersect the line. Intersecting objects are displayed in the ClosestPart property and the point on the intersecting part that is closest to the line sensors start point is displayed in the ClosestPoint property.
When intersection occurs the SensorOut output signal is set.
Properties
Start
End
Radius
SensedPart
SensedPoint
Description
Specifies the start point.
Specifies the end point.
Specifies the radius.
Specifies the part that intersects the line sensor.
If several parts intersect, then the one closest to theStart point is listed.
Specifies the point on the intersecting part, closest to the Start point.
Signals
Active
SensorOut
Description
Specifies if the LineSensor is active or not.
True if the sensor intersects with an object.
PlaneSensor
The PlaneSensor defines a plane by Origin, Axis1, and Axis2. When the Active input signal is set the sensor detects objects that intersect this plane. Intersecting objects are displayed in the SensedPart property and when intersection occurs the SensorOut output signal is set.
Properties
Origin
Axis1
Axis2
SensedPart
Description
Specifies the origin of the plane.
Specifies the first axis of the plane.
Specifies the second axis of the plane.
Specifies the part that intersects the PlaneSensor.
If several parts intersect, then the one listed first in the Layout browser is selected.
Signals
Active
SensorOut
Description
Specifies if the PlaneSensor is active or not.
True if the sensor intersects with an object.
VolumeSensor
The VolumeSensor detects objects that are inside or partly inside a box-shaped volume. The volume is defined by a Corner Point, the Length, Height, and Width of the sides and the orientation angles.
Properties
CornerPoint
Orientation
Length
Description
Specifies the local origin of the box.
Specifies the orientation (Euler ZYX) relative to Reference.
Specifies the length of the box.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
285
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Properties
Width
Height
Percentage
PartialHit
SensedPart
SensedParts
VolumeSensed
Signals
Active
ObjectDetectedOut
ObjectDeletedOut
SensorOut
PositionSensor
Description
Specifies the width of the box.
Specifies the height of the box.
The percentage of the volume to react on. Set to 0 to react on all objects.
Allow an object to be sensed if only a part of it is inside the volume sensor.
The last object that either entered or left the volume.
The objects sensed in the volume
The total volume sensed
Description
Set to high (1) to activate the sensor.
Goes high (1) when an object is detected within the volume. Is reset immediately after an object has been detected.
Goes high (1) when an object is detected to leave the volume.
Is reset immediately after an object has left the volume.
Goes high (1) when the volume is full.
The PositionSensor monitors the position and orientation of an object.
The position and orientation of an object is updated only during the simulation.
Properties
Object
Reference
ReferenceObject
Position
Orientation
Description
Specifies the object to monitor.
Specifies the reference coordinate system (Parent or Global).
Specifies the reference object, if Reference is set to Object.
Specifies the position of the object relative to Reference.
Specifies the orientation (Euler ZYX) relative to Reference.
ClosestObject
The ClosestObject defines a Reference object or a Reference point. When the
Execute signal is set, the component finds the ClosestObject, ClosestPart, and the
Distance to the reference object, or to the reference point if the reference object is undefined. If RootObject is defined, the search is limited to that object and its descendants. When finished and the corresponding properties are updated the
Executed signal is set.
Properties
ReferenceObject
ReferencePoint
RootObject
ClosestObject
Description
Specifies the object to get the closest object to.
Specifies the point to get the closest object to.
Specifies the object whose children to search.
Empty means entire station.
Specifies the object closest to Reference object or Reference point.
Continues on next page
286
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Properties
ClosestPart
Distance
Signals
Execute
Executed
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Description
Specifies the part closest to Reference object or Reference point.
Specifies the distance between the Reference object and the
Closest object.
Description
Set to True to find the Closest part.
Sends a pulse when completed.
Actions
Attacher
Detacher
The Attacher will attach Child to Parent when the Execute signal is set. If the Parent is a mechanism, the Flange to attach to must also be specified. When the input
Execute is set, the child object is attached to the parent object. If Mount is checked, the child will also be mounted on the parent, with the Offset and Orientation specified. The output Executed will be set when finished.
Properties
Parent
Flange
Child
Mount
Offset
Orientation
Description
Specifies the object to attach to.
Specifies the Index of mechanism flange to attach to.
Specifies the object to attach.
If true, the object to attach mounts on the attachment parent.
Specifies the position relative to the attachment parent when using Mount.
Specifies the orientation relative to the attachment parent when using Mount.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to True to attach.
Sends a pulse when completed.
The Detacher will detach the Child from the object it is attached to when the Execute signal is set. If Keep position is checked, the position will be kept. Otherwise the child is positioned relative to its parent. When finished, the Executed signal will be set.
Properties
Child
KeepPosition
Description
Specifies the object to detach.
If false, the attached object is returned to its original position.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to True to remove the attachment.
Sends a pulse when completed.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
287
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Source
The Source property of the source component indicates the object that should be cloned when the Execute input signal is received. The parent of the cloned objects is specified by the Parent property and a reference to the cloned object is specified by the Copy property. The output signal Executed signifies that the clone is complete.
Properties
Source
Copy
Parent
Position
Orientation
Transient
Description
Specifies the object to copy.
Specifies the copied object.
Specifies the parent to the copy.
If not specified, the copy gets the same parent as the source.
Specifies the position of the copy relative its parent.
Specifies the orientation of the copy relative its parent.
Marks the copy as transient if created during simulation. Such copies are not added to the undo queue and are automatically deleted when the simulation is stopped. This is used to avoid increased memory consumption during simulation.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to True to create a copy of the object.
Sends a pulse when completed.
Sink
The Sink deletes the object referenced by the Object property. Deletion happens when the Execute input signal is received. The Executed output signal is set when the deletion is finished.
Properties
Object
Description
Specifies the object to remove.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to True to remove the object.
Sends a pulse when completed.
Show
When the Execute signal is set, the object referenced in Object appears. When finished, Executed signal will be set.
Properties
Object
Description
Specifies the object to show.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to True to show the object.
Sends a pulse when completed.
Continues on next page
288
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Hide
When the Execute signal is set, the object referenced in Object will be hidden.
When finished, Executed signal will be set.
Properties
Object
Description
Specifies the object to hide.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to True to hide the object.
Sends a pulse when completed.
Manipulators
LinearMover
Rotator
The LinearMover moves the object referenced in the Object property with a speed given by the Speed property in the direction given by the Direction property. The motion starts when the Execute input signal is set and stops when Execute is reset.
Properties
Object
Direction
Speed
Reference
ReferenceObject
Description
Specifies the object to move.
Specifies the direction to move the object.
Specifies the speed of movement.
Specifies the coordinate system in which values are specified.
It can be Global, Local, or Object.
Specifies the reference object, if Reference is set to Object.
Signals
Execute
Description
Set to True to start move the object, and False to stop.
The Rotator rotates the object referenced in the Object property with an angular speed given by the Speed property. The axis of rotation is given by CenterPoint and Axis. The motion starts when the Execute input signal is set and stops when the Execute is reset.
Properties
Object
CenterPoint
Axis
Speed
Reference
ReferenceObject
Description
Specifies the object to rotate.
Specifies the point to rotate around.
Specifies the axis of the rotation.
Specifies the speed of the rotation.
Specifies the coordinate system in which values are specified.
It can be Global, Local, or Object.
Specifies the object which are relative to CenterPoint and Axis, if Reference is set to Object.
Signals
Execute
Description
Set to True to start rotating the object, and False to stop.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
289
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Positioner
The Positioner takes an Object, Position, and Orientation as properties. When the
Execute signal is set the object is repositioned in the given position relative to the
Reference. When finished the Executed output is set.
Properties
Object
Position
Orientation
Reference
ReferenceObject
Description
Specifies the object to position.
Specifies the new position of the object.
Specifies the new orientation of the object.
Specifies the coordinate system in which values are specified.
It can be Global, Local, or Object.
Specifies the object which are relative to Position and Orientation, if Reference is set to Object.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to True to start move the object, and False to stop.
Set to 1 when operation is completed.
PoseMover
The PoseMover has a Mechanism, a Pose, and Duration as properties. When the
Execute input signal is set the mechanism joint values are moved to the given pose. When the pose is reached the Executed output signal is set.
Properties
Mechanism
Pose
Duration
Description
Specifies the mechanism to move to a pose.
Specifies the Index of the pose to move to.
Specifies the time for the mechanism to move to the pose.
Signals
Execute
Pause
Cancel
Executed
Executing
Paused
Description
Set to True, to start or resume moving the mechanism.
Pauses the movement.
Cancels the movement.
Pulses high when the mechanism has reached the pose.
Goes high during the movement.
Goes high when paused.
JointMover
The JointMover has a Mechanism, a set of Joint Values and a Duration as properties. When the Execute input signal is set the mechanism joint values are moved to the given pose. When the pose is reached the Executed output signal is set. The GetCurrent signal retrieves the current joint values of the mechanism.
Properties
Mechanism
Relative
Duration
Description
Specifies the mechanism to move to a pose.
Specifies if J1-Jx are relative to the start values, rather than absolute joint values.
Specifies the time for the mechanism to move to the pose.
Continues on next page
290 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Properties
J1 - Jx
Signals
GetCurrent
Execute
Pause
Cancel
Executed
Executing
Paused
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Description
Joint values.
Description
Retrieve current joint values.
Set to True to start moving the mechanism.
Pauses the movement
Cancels the movement
Pulses high when the mechanism has reached the pose.
Goes high during the movement.
Goes high when paused.
Other
GetParent
GraphicSwitch
The GetParent returns the parent object of the input object. The executed signal is triggered if a parent is found.
Properties
Child
Parent
Description
Specifies the object to whose parent is to be found.
Specifies the parent of the child
Signals
Output
Description
Goes high (1) if the parent exists.
Note
The Child list for Properties:GetParent does not show every part or object in the station. However, if you do not find the required part or object in the list, then add it from the browser or graphic window by clicking it.
Switches between two parts, either by clicking on the visible part in the graphics or by setting and resetting the input signal.
Properties
PartHigh
PartLow
Description
Displayed when the signal is high.
Displayed when the signal is low.
Signals
Input
Output
Description
Input signal.
Output signal.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
291
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Highlighter
The Highlighter temporarily sets the color of the Object to the RGB-values specified in Color. The color is blended with the original color of the objects as defined by
Opacity When the signal Active is reset, Object gets its original colors.
Properties
Object
Color
Opacity
Description
Specifies the object to highlight.
Specifies the RGB-values of the highlight color.
Specifies the amount to blend with the object's original color
(0-255).
Signals
Active
Description
True sets the hightlight. False restores the original color.
Logger
Prints a message in the output window.
Properties
Format
Message
Severity
Description
Format string.
Supports variables like {id:type}, where type can be d (double), i (int), s (string), o (object)
Formatted message.
Message severity: 0 (Information), 1 (Warning), 2 (Error).
Signals
Execute
Description
Set to high (1) to print the message.
MoveToViewPoint
Moves to the selected viewpoint in the given time, when the input signal Execute is set. The output signal Executed is set when the operation is completed.
Properties
Viewpoint
Time
Description
Specifies the viewpoint to move to.
Specifies the time to complete the operation.
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to high (1) to start the operation.
Goes high (1) when the operation is completed.
ObjectComparer
Determines if ObjectA is the same as ObjectB.
Properties
ObjectA
ObjectB
Description
Specifies the object to compare.
Specifies the object to compare.
Signals
Output
Description
Goes high if the objects are equal.
Continues on next page
292
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Queue
The Queue represents a FIFO (first in, first out) queue. The object in Back is added to the queue when the signal Enqueue is set. The front object of the queue is shown in Front. The object in Front is removed from the queue when the signal Dequeue is set. If there are more objects in the queue, the next object is shown in Front. All objects in the queue are removed from the queue when the signal Clear is set.
If a transformer component (such as LinearMover) has a queue component as its
Object, it will transform the contents of the queue, rather than the queue itself.
Properties
Back
Front
Queue
NumberOfObjects
Description
Specifies the object to enqueue.
Specifies the first object in queue.
Contains unique IDs of the queue’s elements.
Specifies the number of objects in the queue.
Signals
Enqueue
Dequeue
Clear
Delete
DeleteAll
Description
Adds the object in Back to the end of the queue.
Removes the object in Front from the queue.
Removes all objects from the queue.
Removes the object in Front from the queue and from the station.
Clears the queue and removes all objects from the station
SoundPlayer
Plays the sound specified by Sound Asset when the input signal Execute is set.
The asset must be a .wav file
Properties
SoundAsset
Description
Specifies the sound file that should be played. Must be a .wav
file.
Signals
Execute
Description
Set to high to play the sound.
StopSimulation
Stop a running simulation when the input signal Execute is set.
Signals
Execute
Description
Set to high to stop the simulation.
Random
Random generates a random number between Min and Max in Value when Execute is triggered.
Properties
Min
Max
Value
Description
Specifies minimum value.
Specifies maximum value.
Specifies a random number between Min and Max.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
293
9 Modeling tab
9.4.7 Basic Smart Components
Continued
Signals
Execute
Executed
Description
Set to high to generate a new random number.
Goes high when the operation is completed.
294
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.8 Property Editor
9.4.8 Property Editor
Overview
The Property editor is used to modify the values of dynamic properties and I/O signals for a Smart Component. By default, the Property editor is displayed as a tool window to the left.
Each dynamic property is represented by a control. The type of control that is displayed depends on the property type and property attributes.
Properties with the Hidden flag set to true are not displayed. Read-only properties cannot be modified but are only displayed.
The values are validated according to the property attributes. If an invalid value is entered, an error icon is displayed next to the control and the Apply button is disabled.
If you set the AutoApply attribute of a property to true, the value is applied whenever you change the value in the control. You can apply the values of other properties by clicking the Apply button. If the component has no properties without
AutoApply, then the Apply button will never be enabled.
You can toggle the value of a digital signal by clicking the control. Similarly, you can change the value of an analog or group signal by entering the new value in the text box.
Opening the Property editor
You can open the Property editor dialog box in any one of the following ways:
• Right-click context menu for a Smart Component and select Properties.
• Launches automatically when the Smart Component Editor is started.
• Launched when you add a base component. See
Basic Smart Components on page 278
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
295
9 Modeling tab
9.4.9 The Simulation Watch window
9.4.9 The Simulation Watch window
Overview
The Simulation Watch allows you to monitor the values of dynamic properties and
I/O signals in Smart Components. It specifies the simulation that should be paused when a value changes or meets a condition.
Layout of the Simulation Watch window
The Simulation Watch window by default takes the lower tab area in the RobotStudio
GUI.
The window contains a list view of four columns with one row for each watch item:
Watch item
Break
Object
Property/Signal
Value
Description
Specifies the Simulation break point and Break Condition.
For more information, see
Setting Breakpoints on page 297 .
Specifies the object that owns the property or signal (for station signals the name of the station is displayed).
Specifies the watched property or signal.
Specifies the current value of the property or signal.
Adding and Deleting the Watch items
Use this procedure to add or delete a watch item.
Note
As a prerequisite, you should add smart component, its properties and signals.
For more information, see
Smart Component Editor on page 267 .
1 In the Simulation Watch window, right-click and select Add to display the
Add submenu.
The Add submenu displays a recursive view of all the smart components, their properties and signals. The top level submenu displays the station signals.
Note
Watch items that are already watched are not displayed in the recursive view.
2 From the Add submenu, select property or signal to add a single property or signal of a component.
3 From the Add submenu, select Add all to add all the properties and signals of a component.
Continues on next page
296
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.4.9 The Simulation Watch window
Continued
4 In the Simulation Watch window, right-click on the row of the watch item and select Delete to delete one or more watch items.
Note
The Watch items are saved in the station and are restored when the station is opened.
Setting Breakpoints
You can set the breakpoint in one of the following ways:
1 To set the simulation breakpoint, select the check box next to a watch item.
Note
By default, the simulation is paused whenever the value of the property or signal changes.
2 In the Simulation Watch window, right-click on the row of the watch item and select Break Condition.
The Break Condition dialog box appears.
• Set the simulation to paused, when the value meets a certain logical condition. The condition can be viewed in the Break column of the
Watch window.
• When a breakpoint is reached, the simulation is paused which is indicated by both the Play and Stop buttons being enabled.
• If the Simulation Watch window is hidden behind the other windows, it is brought to the front and the text of the corresponding watch item turns red.
Note
• Break condition can be specified only for the properties of numeric and string types, and not for the object types.
• After the current simulation time step is completed, all the remaining
Smart component events are executed before the simulation is actually paused.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
297
9 Modeling tab
9.5 Tags
9.5 Tags
Overview
For a complex RobotStudio station containing many robots, parts, paths, targets and other objects the browser and the 3D graphics view becomes cluttered. Tags function helps the user to identify objects in the cluttered 3D graphics view and in the browser during station modeling and offline programming.
Using tags function, you can group objects in a defined structure by labeling them.
It is possible to hide or show these tags independent of the other tags. A hidden tagged object is invisible in the browser and in the 3D graphics window unless it is labeled by a currently visible tag.
Tip
For easy and quick access of Tags function, add it to the Quick Access Toolbar using the customize Commands.
Creating a New Tag
Use any of the following steps to create a new tag.
• In the Modeling tab, select Tags and then click New Tag.
• Right-click the object and in the context menu, click Tags and then click New
Tag. The object will be labeled by the tag
The new tag appears in the browser with the default name. Press F2 and select
Rename from the context menu to rename the tag.
Use any of the following steps to hide or show tagged objects.
• In the Tag browser, right-click the tag and then check/uncheck Visible.
• Click the Tags menu and then check/uncheck the tag to show/hide the tag.
Tag Visibility
When a tag is invisible/ unchecked, the corresponding tagged object will be hidden in the 3D graphicas view and in the browsers (layout, path and targets, modeling).
If an object is labeled by several tags, the object will be visible when at least one of the tags is set visible. Untagged objects are always visible.
Note
The regular visible property remains and overrides the tag visibility. If regular visible property is unchecked for an object, the object will be hidden in the 3D graphics view but it is visible in the browser. For a tagged object, when the visibility is unchecked, the object will be hidden in the 3D graphics view and in the browser.
298
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.6 Solid
9.6 Solid
Creating a solid
1 Click Solid and then click the type of solid you want to create to bring up a dialog box.
2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the curve to create, see below:
The Create Box dialog box
D
C
A xx060000
Reference
Corner Point (A)
B
Orientation
Length (B)
Width (C)
Height (D)
The Create Box from 3-Points dialog box
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the corner point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Corner Point boxes, or type the position. The corner point will be the local origin of the box.
If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.
Specify the box dimension along its X axis.
Specify the box dimension along its Y axis.
Specify the box dimension along its Z axis.
C
B xx060001
Reference
A
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
299
9 Modeling tab
9.6 Solid
Continued
Corner Point (A)
Point on diagonal of XY-
plane (B)es
This point will be the local origin of the box.
Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.
This point is the the corner, diagonal to the local origin. It sets the X and Y directions of the local coordinate system, as well as the dimension of the box along these axes.
Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.
Indication Point Z-axis (C)
This point is the corner above the local origin, It sets the Z direction of the local coordinate system, as well as the dimension of the box along the Z axis.
Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.
The Create Cone dialog box
C
A
B xx060002
Reference
Base Center Point (A)
Orientation
Radius (B)
Diameter
Height (C)
The Create Cylinder dialog box
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Base Center
Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the cone.
If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.
Specify the radius of the cone.
Specify the diameter of the cone.
Specify the height of the cone.
C
B
A xx060003
Continues on next page
300
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Reference
Base Center Point (A)
Orientation
Radius (B)
Diameter
Height (C)
The Create Pyramid dialog box
9 Modeling tab
9.6 Solid
Continued
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Base Center
Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the cylinder.
If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.
Specify the radius of the cylinder.
Specify the diameter of the cylinder.
Specify the height of the cylinder.
C
A
B xx060004
Reference
Base Center Point (A)
Orientation
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Base Center
Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the pyramid.
If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.
Center to Corner Point (B)
Either type the position, or click in the box and then select the point in the graphics window.
Height (C)
Specify the height of the pyramid.
Number of Sides
Specify the number of sides of the pyramid. The maximum number of sides is 50.
The Create Sphere dialog box
B
B
A xx060005
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
301
9 Modeling tab
9.6 Solid
Continued
Reference
Center Point (A)
Radius (B)
Diameter
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the sphere.
Specify the radius of the sphere.
Specify the diameter of the sphere.
302
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.7 Surface
9.7 Surface
Creating a surface
1 Click Surface and then click the type of solid you want to create to bring up a dialog box.
2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the curve to create, see below:
The Create Surface Circle dialog box
A
B xx060006
Reference
Center Point (A)
Orientation
Radius (B)
Diameter
The Create Rectangle dialog box
Select the Reference coordinate system, to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the circle.
If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.
Specify the radius of the circle.
Specify the diameter of the circle.
C
A
B xx060007
Reference
Start Point (A)
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes, or type the position. The start point will be the local origin of the rectangle.
Continues on next page
303
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
9 Modeling tab
9.7 Surface
Continued
Orientation
Length (B)
Width (C)
The Create Surface Polygon dialog box
If the object shall be rotated relative the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.
Specify the length of the rectangle.
Specify the width of the rectangle
A
B xx060008
Reference
Center Point
First Vertex Point
Vertices
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the polygon.
Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.
Specify the number of the vertices here. The maximum number of vertices is 50.
The Create Surface from Curve dialog box
Select Curve from graphics
Select a curve by clicking it in the graphics window.
304
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.8 Curve
9.8 Curve
Creating a curve
1 Click Curve and then click the curve you want to create to bring up a dialog box.
2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the curve to create, see below:
The Create Line dialog box
xx050034
Reference
Start point (A)
End Point (B)
The Create Circle dialog box
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the start point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the End Point boxes.
xx050035
Reference
Center point (A)
Orientation
Radius (A-B)
Diameter
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.
Specify the orientation coordinates for the circle.
Specify the radius of the circle.
Alternatively, specify the diameter.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
305
9 Modeling tab
9.8 Curve
Continued
The Create Three Points Circle dialog box
xx050036
Reference
First Point (A)
Second Point (B)
Third Point (C)
The Create Arc dialog box
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the first point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the First Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the second point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Second Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the third point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Third Point boxes.
xx050037
Reference
Start Point (A)
Mid Point (B)
End Point (C)
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the start point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the second point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Mid Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the End Point boxes.
Continues on next page
306
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.8 Curve
Continued
The Create Elliptical Arc dialog box
xx050038
Reference
Center Point (A)
Major Axis End Point (B)
Minor Axis End Point (C)
Start Angle (α)
End Angle (β)
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point for the major axis of the ellipse in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Major Axis End Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point for the minor axis of the ellipse in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Minor Axis End Point boxes.
Specify the start angle for the arc, measured from the major axis.
Specify the end angle for the arc, measured from the major axis.
The Create Ellipse dialog box
xx050039
Reference
Center Point (A)
Major Axis End Point (B)
Minor Radius (C)
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of the Center Point boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point for the major axis of the ellipse in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Major Axis End Point boxes.
Specify the length of the minor axis of the ellipse. The minor radius will be created perpendicular to the major axis.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
307
9 Modeling tab
9.8 Curve
Continued
The Create Rectangle dialog box
xx050040
Reference
Start Point (A)
Orientation
Length (B)
Width (C)
The Create Polygon dialog box
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the start point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes.
The rectangle will be created in the positive coordinate directions.
Specify the orientation coordinates for the rectangle.
Specify the length of the rectangle along the x axis.
Specify the width of the rectangle along the y axis.
xx050041
Reference
Center Point (A)
First Vertex Point (B)
Vertices
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the first vertex point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the First Vertex
Point boxes. The distance between the center point and the first vertex point will be used for all vertex points.
Specify the number of points to be used when creating the polygon. The maximum number of vertices is 50.
Continues on next page
308
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.8 Curve
Continued
The Create Polyline dialog box
xx050042
Reference
Point Coordinates
Add
Modify
List
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Specify each node of the polyline here, one at a time, by either typing the values, or by clicking in one of these boxes, and then selecting the point in the graphics window to transfer its coordinates.
Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the list.
Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the list and entered new values.
The nodes of the polyline. To add more nodes, click Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click
Add.
The Create Spline dialog box
xx050043
Reference
Point Coordinates
Ad
Modify
List
Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Specify each node of the spline here, one at a time, by either typing the values, or by clicking in one of these boxes, and then selecting the point in the graphics window to transfer its coordinates.
Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the list.
Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the list and entered new values.
This nodes of the spline. To add more nodes, click Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click
Add.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
309
9 Modeling tab
9.9 Border
9.9 Border
Creating a curve
1 Click Border and then click the border you want to create to bring up a dialog box.
2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the border to create, see below:
The Create Border Between Bodies dialog box
To use the create border between bodies command, the station must contain at least two objects.
xx050044
First Body
Second Body
Click in this box and then select the first body in the graphics window.
Click in this box and then select the second body in the graphics window.
The Create Border Around Surface dialog box
To use the create border around surface command, the station must contain at least one object with a graphical representation.
xx050045
Select Surface
Click in this box and then select a surface in the graphics window.
Continues on next page
310
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.9 Border
Continued
The Create Border From Points dialog box
To use the create border from points command, the station must contain at least one object.
en050000
Selected Object
Point Coordinates
Add
Modify
List
Click in this box and then select an object in the graphics window.
Specify the points that define the border here, one at a time, by either typing the values, or by clicking in one of these boxes, and then selecting the point in the graphics window to transfer its coordinates.
Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the list.
Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the list and entered new values.
The points that define the borders. To add more points, click
Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click Add.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
311
9 Modeling tab
9.10 Intersect
9.10 Intersect
The Intersect dialog box
A xx060009
Keep Original
Intersect... (A)
...and (B)
B
Select this check box to keep the original bodies when creating the new body.
Select the body from which you want to make an intersection
(A) by clicking it in the graphics window.
Select the body with which you want to make an intersection
(B) by clicking it in the graphics window.
A new body will be created based on the common area between the selected bodies A and B.
312
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.11 Subtract
9.11 Subtract
The Subtract dialog box
A xx060010
Keep Original
Subtract... (A)
...with (B)
B
Select this check box to keep the original bodies when creating the new body.
Select the body from which you want to subtract (A) by clicking it in the graphics window.
Select the body you want to subtract (B) by clicking it in the graphics window.
A new body will be created based on the area of body A subtracted with the common volume between body A and B.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
313
9 Modeling tab
9.12 Union
9.12 Union
The Union dialog box
A xx060011
Keep Original
Union... (A)
...and (B)
B
Select this check box to keep the original bodies when creating the new body.
Select the body that you want to unify (A) by clicking it in the graphics window.
Select the body that you want to unify (B) by clicking it in the graphics window.
A new body will be created based on the areas of the two selected bodies A and B.
314
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.13 Extrude Surface or Curve
9.13 Extrude Surface or Curve
Extruding a surface or curve
1 From the selection level toolbar, select Surface or Curve, as appropriate.
2 In the graphics window, select the surface or curve you wish to extrude. Click
Extrude Surface or Extrude Curve, as appropriate. The Extrude Surface or
Curve dialog box opens below the Modeling browser.
3 For extrusion along a vector, fill in the values.
For extrusion along a curve, select the Extrude Along Curve option. Click the Curve box, and select the curve in the Graphics window.
4 If you wish the form to appear as a surface model, clear the Make Solid check box.
5 Click Create.
The Extrude Surface or Curve dialog box
Surface or Curve
Extrude Along Vector
From Point
To Point
Extrude Along Curve
Curve
Denotes the surface or curve to be extruded.
To select the surface or curve, first click in the box, then select the surface or curve in the graphics window.
Enables extrusion along a specified vector.
The start point of the vector.
The end point of the vector.
Enables extrusion along a specified curve.
Denotes the curve used as a sweep path.
xx0600003076
To select the curve, first click the box, then the curve in the graphics window.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
315
9 Modeling tab
9.13 Extrude Surface or Curve
Continued
Make Solid
Select this check box to convert the extruded form into a solid.
316
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.14 Line from Normal
9.14 Line from Normal
Creating a line from normal
1 Click Surface Selection.
2 Click Line to Normal to bring up a dialog box.
3 Click on a face to select it in the Select Face box.
4 In the Length box, specify a length for the line.
5 Optionally, select the Invert Normal check box to invert the direction of the line.
6 Click Create.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
317
9 Modeling tab
9.15 The Measure Group
9.15 The Measure Group
Tip
Make sure to select the appropriate snap mode and selection levels before making your measurements.
Measuring distances or angles
1 Click the type of measurement you want to use:
To measure the
distance between two points you select in the graphics window.
Select
Point to point
angle defined by three points you select in the graphics window.
The first point to select is the converging point, thereafter you shall select one point on each line.
Angle
diameter, with the circle defined by three points you select from the graphics window.
Diameter
closest distance between two objects you select in the graphics window.
Minimum distance
The mouse pointer will turn into a ruler when you have activated any of the measurement functions.
2 In the graphics window, select the points or objects to measure between.
Information about the measuring points is displayed in the Output window.
The results will be displayed in the Measurements tab in the Output window when all points have been selected.
3 Optionally, repeat step 3 for making a new measurement of the same type.
Tip
You can also activate and deactivate the measurement functions from the measurement toolbar.
318
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.16 Create Mechanism
9.16 Create Mechanism
Create a new mechanism
1 Click Create Mechanism.
The Mechanism Modeler opens in create mode.
2 In the Mechanism Model Name box, enter a mechanism name.
3 From the Mechanism Type list, select a mechanism type.
4 In the tree structure, right-click Links, and then click Add Link to bring up the Create Link dialog box.
A suggested name appears in the Link Name box.
5 In the Selected Part list, select a part (which will be highlighted in the graphics window) and click the arrow button to add the part to the Parts list box.
The Selected Part list then automatically selects the next part, if any more are available. Add these, as required.
Note
Parts that are part of a library or mechanism cannot be selected.
6 Select a part in the Parts list box, enter any values in the Selected Parts group boxes, and then click Apply to Part.
Repeat for each part, as required.
7 Click OK.
8 In the tree structure, right-click Joints, and then click Add Joint to bring up the Create Joint dialog box.
A suggested name appears in the Joint Name box.
9 Complete the Create Joint dialog box, and then click OK.
10 In the tree structure, right-click Frame/Tool Data, and then click Add
Frame/Tool to bring up the Create Frame/Tool dialog box.
A suggested name appears in the Frame/Tool Data name box.
11 Complete the Create Frame/Tool dialog box, and then click OK.
The validity criteria for the Frame/Tool node are as follows:
12 In the tree structure, right-click Calibration, and then click Add Calibration to bring up the Create Calibration dialog box.
13 Complete the Create Calibration dialog box, and then click OK.
14 In the tree structure, right-click Dependency, and then click Add Dependency to bring up the Create Dependency dialog box.
15 Complete the Create Dependency dialog box, and then click OK.
16 If all nodes are valid, compile the mechanism, see
Compiling a mechanism on page 320
.
Create Conveyor mechanism
1 Click Create Mechanism.
The Mechanism Modeler opens in create mode.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
319
9 Modeling tab
9.16 Create Mechanism
Continued
2 In the Mechanism Model Name dialog box, enter a mechanism name.
3 From the Mechanism Type list, select Conveyor.
4 From the Selected Part list, select Part.
5 In the Position of Calibration frame list, enter the base frame values relative to the local origin of the selected graphic component.
6 In the Conveyor length box, enter the length of the conveyor.
The Compile Mechanism button is enabled.
7 In the Attachment Points box, set the Pitch and Count value.
8 Click Add to create new attachment points.
9 Click Compile Mechanism, to compile the mechanism. See
Compiling a mechanism on page 320
.
10 In the Layout browser, right-click the conveyor mechanism and select Save
As Library. Close the station.
11 Build a new system. See
Building a new system on page 163
.
On the Modify Options page of the System Builder, scroll down to the Motion
coordination part 3 group and select 606-1 Conveyor Tracking check box.
12 Create new station using this new system. See
.
After starting the system, when asked to select the library for the conveyor mechanism browse and select the already saved library.
Compiling a mechanism
When compiling, a new mechanism, created in the create mode of the Mechanism
Modeler, is added to the station with the default name "Mechanism_" followed by an index number.
When compiling, an existing editable mechanism, modified in the modify mode of the Mechanism Modeler, is saved without any poses, joint mapping ot transition times.
To compile a mechanism, follow these steps:
1 To compile a new or edited mechanism, click Compile Mechanism.
The mechanism is inserted into the active station. The link parts are cloned with new names, but the corresponding links will update their part references.
When the Mechanism modeler is closed, these cloned parts will be removed.
2 The Mechanism Modeler now switches to modify mode. To complete the mechanism, see below.
Completing or modifying a mechanism
To complete the modeling of a mechanism, follow these steps:
1 If the values in the Joint Mapping group are correct, click Set.
2 Configure the Poses grid. To add a pose, click Add and then complete the
Create Pose dialog box. Click Apply, followed by OK.
To add a pose, click Add and then complete the Create Pose dialog box.
Click Apply, followed by OK.
Continues on next page
320
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.16 Create Mechanism
Continued
To edit a pose, select it in the grid, click Edit, and then complete the Modify
Pose dialog box. Click OK.
To remove a pose, select it in the grid and then click Remove.
3 Click Edit Transition Times to edit transition times.
4 Click Close.
The Create Mechanism dialog box
Mechanism Model Name
Mechanism Type
Tree structure
Compile Mechanism
Specifies the model name of the mechanism.
Specifies the mechanism type.
The components of the mechanism in a tree structure. The tree structure will not be visible unless the mechanism is editable.
Each node (link, joint, frame, calibration and dependency) can be edited in its own dialog box, see below.
Click this button to compile the mechanism. This button will not be visible unless the mechanism is editable and the mechanism model name is valid.
The Create Conveyor Mechanism dialog box
Mechanism Model Name
Mechanism Type
Selected Part
Position of Calibration frame
Conveyor Length
Attachment Points
Compile Mechanism
Specifies the model name of the conveyor mechanism.
Specifies the diffrent mechanism types.
Specifies the part to be selected for the conveyor.
Specifies the baseframe value relative to the local origin of the selected graphic component.
Specifies the length of the conveyor.
Specifies the conveyor position to attach the workpieces.
Click this button to compile the mechanism. This button will not be visible unless the mechanism is editable and the mechanism model name is valid.
The Create/Modify Link dialog box
A link is a moving component of a mechanism. Selecting a link node will highlight it in the graphics window.
Link Name
Selected Part
Set as BaseLink
Specifies the name of the link.
Specifies the parts to add to the Part list box.
The BaseLink is where the kinematical chain begins. This must be the parent of the first joint. A mechanism may have only one BaseLink.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
321
9 Modeling tab
9.16 Create Mechanism
Continued
Adds a selected part to the Part list box.
xx060000
Remove Part
Selected Part
Part Position
Part Orientation
Apply to Part
Click this button to remove a selected part from the Part list box.
This group manipulates the transform of the selected part.
Specify the position of the part.
Specify the orientation of the part.
Click this button to apply the settings to the part.
The Create/Modify Joint dialog box
A joint is the axis where two links move in relation to each other, rotationally or prismatically. Selecting a joint node will display a yellow-green line in the graphics window.
Joint Name
Joint Type.
Parent Link
Child Link
Active
Joint Axis
First Position
Second Position
Jog Axis
Limit Type
Joint Limits
Min Limit
Max Limit
Joint Limits
Specifies the name of the joint.
Specifies the joint type. The default option is Rotational.
Changing the Joint Type clears the Joint Limits below.
Specifies the parent link, usually the first joint of the mechanism.
Specifies the child link. To be valid, the parent and child links may not be identical to each other, and the pair must be unique.
Select this check box to make the joint active. An active joint is one that a user can move, while an inactive joint is a slave to an active joint.
This group specifies the axis around or along which the child moves.
Specify the start point of the axis vector.
Specify the end point of the axis vector.
Demonstrates how the child link moves along its axis.
Specifies the limits in each direction to which a joint may move.
The options are Constant, Variable and No.
This group is visible in Constant or Variable mode.
Specifies the minimum joint limit.
Specifies the maximum joint limit.
This group is visible in Constant or Variable mode.
Continues on next page
322
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Variable Limits
9 Modeling tab
9.16 Create Mechanism
Continued
In Variable mode, variable limit points may be added as an advanced way of delimiting the area of movement.
xx060012
Adds a selected point to the Point list box.
left-cli
Remove
Click this button to remove a selected point from the Point list box.
The Modify Frame/Tool Data dialog box
A frame/tool data node determines the link and location of a frame.
Frame/Tool Data name
Belongs to Link
Position
Orientation
Select values from target/Frame
Tool Data
Specifies the name of the frame or tool data.
Specifies the link to which the frame or tool belongs.
Specify the position of the transform.
Specify the orientation of the transform.
Select this box to select the values from a target or frame, which is selected in the box beneath the check box.
This group is visible if the mechanism is a tool.
Mass
Center of Gravity
Specifies the mass of the tool.
Specify the center of gravity of the tool.
Moment of Inertia lx, ly, lz
Specify the moment of inertia of the tool.
The Create Calibration dialog box
A calibration contains transforms for calibrating the joints. Two calibrations cannot share the same joint.
Specifies the joint to be calibrated.
Calibration belongs to
Joint
Position
Orientation
Specify the position of the transform.
Specify the orientation of the transform.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
323
9 Modeling tab
9.16 Create Mechanism
Continued
The Create Dependency dialog box
A dependency is a relationship between two joints, by either a factor or a complex formula.
Joint
Use LeadJoint and factor
Select this option to specify a lead joint and factor.
LeadJoint
Specifies the lead joint.
Factor
Specifies the joint whose motion will be controlled by other joints.
Use Formula
This list holds a double which denotes the extent to which the lead joint will control the main joint.
Select this option to enter a formula in the box.
The Modify Mechanism dialog box
The Modify Mechanism dialog box contains the objects found in the Create
mechanism dialog box, as well as the following:
Joint Mapping
Set
Poses
Add
Edit
Remove
Set Transition Times
These boxes handle the joint mapping of the mechanism. When editing, the mechanism must be disconnected from its library.
The values must be integers from 1 – 6 in ascending order.
Click this button to set the joint mapping.
Displays the poses and their joint values.
Selecting a pose will move the mechanism to it in the graphics window.
Click this button to bring up the Create Pose dialog box for adding a pose.
Click this button to bring up the Modify Pose dialog box for editing a selected pose.
A SyncPose cannot be edited unless the mechanism is disconnected from its library.
Click this button to remove the selected pose.
A single SyncPose cannot be removed.
Click this button to edit the transition times.
The Create/Modify Pose dialog box
Pose Name
Home Pose
Launch Joint Jog Tool
Use Current
Reset Values
Joint Values
Specifies the name of the pose. If the pose is a SyncPose, this box is not editable.
The names "HomePosition" and "SyncPosition" are disallowed.
Select this box to specify the home pose of the mechanism. If selected, the non-editable pose name will be "HomePose".
Click this button to bring up the joint jog tool.
Click this button to set the current joint values in the Joint
Values group.
Click this button to reset the joint values in the Joint Values group to what they were when the dialog box was opened.
Specify the joint values of the pose.
Continues on next page
324
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
9 Modeling tab
9.16 Create Mechanism
Continued
The Set Transition Times dialog box
The Set Transition Times dialog box is designed like a distance table in a road atlas. The default values are zero.
From Pose
To Pose
Specifies the start of the transition for the named pose.
Specifies the end of the transition for the named pose.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
325
9 Modeling tab
9.17 Create Tool
9.17 Create Tool
Creating a tool
You can create a robot hold tool by using the Create Tool Wizard. The wizard allows you to easily create a tool from an existing part or by using a dummy part to represent a tool. To create a tool complete with tooldata, follow these steps:
1 Click Create Tool.
2 In the Tool Name box, enter a tool name and choose one of the following options:
Option
Use Existing
Use Dummy
Action
Select one of the existing parts from the list. The selected part will represent the tool graphics.
The selected part must be a single part. Parts with attachments cannot be selected.
A cone will be created to represent the tool.
3 Continue entering the Mass of the tool, the Center of Gravity and the Moment
of Inertia Ix, Iy, Iz, if these values are known.
Note
If you do not know the correct values, the tool can still be used for programming motions, but this data must be corrected before running the program on real robots or measuring cycle times.
Tip
If the tool is built from materials with a similar density, you can find the center of gravity by clicking the tool model using the Center of gravity snap mode.
4 Click Next.
5 In the TCP Name box, enter a name for the Tool Center Point (TCP).
Note
Continues on next page
326
The default name is the same as the name of the tool. If creating several
TCPs for one tool, each TCP must have a unique name.
6 Enter the position of the TCP relative to the world coordinate system, which represents the tool mounting point, by any of the methods below:
Method Description
Read values from existing target or frame
Click in the Values from Target/Frame box, then select the frame either in the graphics window or the
Paths&Targets browser.
Enter position and orientation manually.
In the Position and Orientation boxes, type the values.
If Use Dummy Part is selected, the position value can not be 0,0,0. At least one coordinate has to be > 0 in order for a cone to be created.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
9 Modeling tab
9.17 Create Tool
Continued
7 Click the arrow right button to transfer the values to the TCP(s): box.
If the tool shall have several TCPs, repeat steps 5 to 7 for each TCP.
8 Click Done.
The tool is created and appears in the Layout browser and in the graphics window.
Creating tooldata for an existing geometry
Ensure to select the robot in which tooldata is created. To create tooldata for an existing geometry, follow these steps:
1 Click Create Tool and select Use Existing and the imported tool from the list.
2 Enter the requested data in the boxes in the Create Tool Wizard.
3 Attach the tool by dragging it to the robot.
What to do next
To make the tool ready to use, do one of the following:
• To make the robot hold the tool, attach the tool to the robot.
• In the graphics window, check the position and orientation of the TCP. If it is incorrect, modify the values in the tool frame part of the tooldata.
• To simplify future usage of the created tool, save it as a library. On the File menu, click Save As Library. Browse to the folder where you want to store the tool component, enter a name for the tool component and click Save.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
327
This page is intentionally left blank
10 Simulation tab
10.1 Overview
10 Simulation tab
10.1 Overview
The Simulation tab
The Simulation tab contains the controls for setting up, configuring, controlling, monitoring and recording simulations.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
329
10 Simulation tab
10.2 Create Collision Set
10.2 Create Collision Set
Overview
A collision set contains two groups, Objects A and Objects B, in which you place the objects to detect any collisions between them. When any object in Objects A collides with any object in Objects B, the collision is displayed in the graphical view and logged in the output window. You can have several collision sets in the station, but each collision set can only contain two groups.
Creating a collision set
1 Click Create Collision Set to create a collision set in the Layout browser.
2 Expand the collision set and then drag one of the objects to the ObjectsA node to check for collisions.
If you have several objects you want to check for collisions with objects in the ObjectsB node, for example, the tool and the robot, drag all of them to the ObjectsA node.
3 Drag the objects to the ObjectsB node to check for collisions.
If you have several objects you want to check for collisions with objects in the ObjectsA node, for example, the work piece and the fixture, drag all of them to he ObjectsB node.
Tip
Selecting a collision set or one of its groups (Objects A or Objects B) highlights the corresponding objects in the graphical window and the browser. Use this feature to quickly check what objects have been added to a collision set or to one of its groups.
330
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.3 Simulation Setup
10.3 Simulation Setup
Overview
The Simulation Setup dialog box is used to perform the following two main tasks.
• Setting up the sequence and entry point in the robot program
• Creating simulation scenarios for different simulated objects
Prerequisites
To set up a simulation, the following conditions must be met:
• At least one path must have been created in the station.
• The paths to be simulated must have been synchronized to the virtual controller.
The Setup Simulation dialog box
The Setup Simulation dialog box consits of the following two tabs,
• Program Sequence
• Simulation Scenarios
Program Sequence
From this tab, you can perform the combined task of configuring the program sequence and program execution such as entry point, and running the execution mode.
The Program Sequence tab consists of the following:
Select Active Tasks
Execution Sequence
<Task Name>
<-
X arrow up arrow down
Available Procedures
Displays all running IRC5 controllers in the station along with the tasks.
Displays the procedures in the main entry routine of the task.
The sequence of the procedures shows the sequence of execution.
Click the arrow left button to transfer the selected procedure to the Main Sequence box.
The procedure will be added last to the sequence.
Click this button to remove the selected procedures or sequences from the Main sequence box.
Click the arrow up button to move the sequence up in the list in the Main Sequence box or in the Available Procedures box.
Click the arrow down button to move the sequence down in the list in the Main Sequence box or in the Available Proced-
ures box.
Displays all procedures available in the controller.
These procedures can be added to the execution sequence.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
331
10 Simulation tab
10.3 Simulation Setup
Continued
Entry point
Run mode
The task starts its execution in the routine specified by the
Entry point. You can setup several simulations at the same time.
1 Click Entry point, the Select entry point dialog box appears.
2 Click Select entry point for drop down to select the routine to be used as entry point . By default, the value is set to main.
3 Click Select module drop down to select the module in the task.By default, the value is set to Module1.
4 Click OK.
You can change the run mode between continuous and single cycle mode by toggling the radio buttons.
• Continuous : In this mode, the main routine is executed over and over again until you stop the program.
• Single : In this mode, the main routine is executed once and thereafter the program is stopped.
Simulation Scenarios
From this tab, you can create simulation scenarios containing different simulated objects and connect each scenario with a predefined state to ensure that the correct state is applied to all project objects before running the scenario.
If you want to simulate a specific part or segment of the cell where not all simulated objects in the cell are included, you can set up a new scenario and add only the objects needed for simulation.
The Simulation Scenarios tab consists of the following:
Scenarios
Simulated object
Saved State
Lists all station scenarios. By default, atleast one scenario is created when you create a station.
Select the check box to make the scenario active. Active scenarios cannot be deleted and there should always be one active scenario.
• Add : Click Add to create a new scenario.
• Remove : Click Remove to delete the selected scenario.
Click the scenario in the list view to rename it.
Displays all objects that can be part of a simulation.
Objects that utilize simulation time can be part of a simulation.
For example, Virtual Controllers and Smart Components.
When you create a new scenario, all objects are selected by default.
When you set the scenario to active and start the simulation, you can connect a saved state for each scenario and restore this state to all objects that are part of the state.
The Saved State drop-down contains all saved states in the station, as well as the entries with no state. By default, no state is connected to the scenario.
For more on Saved states, see
.
Setting up a simulation
1 Click Simulation Setup to bring up the Setup Simulation dialog box.
2 From the Program Sequence tab, select the tasks to be active during simulation in the Select Active Tasks box.
3 Select the run mode as either Continuous or Single Cycle.
Continues on next page
332
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.3 Simulation Setup
Continued
4 In the Main Sequence box, select the execution sequence of the procedure in the tasks main entry routine.
5 From the Available Procedures list, transfer the procedures to be active in the simulation to the Main Sequence box by selecting them and clicking the left arrow button between the lists. (This creates a procedure call in the main procedure).
6 To start the simulation from procedure other than the actual Main procedure, click Entry point and set the entry point and module. By default, entry point is set to Main and module as Module1.
7 Click Apply to set the simulation. If you click OK, the simulation will be set and the dialog box will be closed.
Creating simulation scenarios
1 Click Simulation Setup to bring up the Setup Simulation dialog box.
2 From the Simulation Scenarios tab,
• Click Add to create a new scenario in the Screnarios box.
• Click Remove to delete the selected scenario from the Scenarios box.
When you create a new scenario, by default, all objects are selected in the
Scenarios box.
3 Select a saved state for the scenario from the Saved State drop down.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
333
10 Simulation tab
10.4 Event Manager
10.4 Event Manager
Creating an event
1 Click Event Manager.
2 Click Add to open the New Event Wizard.
3 Complete the New Event wizard to create the event.
Event manager main parts
eventman
Part
1
2
3
4
Description
The Task pane.
Here you create new events, or copy or delete existing events selected in the Event grid.
The Event grid.
Displays all events in the station. Here you select events to edit, copy or delete.
The Trigger editor.
Here you edit the properties of the events trigger. The upper part of the trigger editor is the same for all triggers, and the lower part adapts to the selected trigger type.
The Action editor.
Here you edit the properties of the events action. The upper part of the action editor is the same for all actions, and the lower part adapts to the selected action type.
The task pane parts
Part
Add
Delete
Copy
Refresh
Export
Import
Continues on next page
334
Description
Starts the Create New Event Wizard.
Deletes the event selected in the Event grid.
Copies the event selected in the Event grid.
Refreshes the Event manager.
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.4 Event Manager
Continued
The event grid columns
In the event grid, each row is a an event and the columns in the grid display their properties.:
Column
Activation
Trigger Type
Trigger System
Trigger Name
Trigger Parameter
Description
Displays whether the event is active or not.
On = The action is always carried out when the trigger event occurs.
Off = The action is not carried out when the trigger event occurs.
Simulation = The action is only carried out if the trigger event occurs when running a simulation.
Displays the type of condition that triggers the action.
I/O signals changed = Changes a digital I/O signal.
I/O Connection = Simulates the behavior of a Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC).
Collision = Starts or ends a collision or near-miss between objects in a collision set.
Simulation time = Sets the activation time.
Note: The Simulation time button is enabled once the activation is set to Simulation.
The trigger type cannot be changed in the trigger editor. If you want another trigger type than the current one, create a completely new event.
When the trigger type is I/O Signal Trigger, this column displays to which system the signal used as trigger belongs.
A dash (-) signifies a virtual signal.
The name of the signal or collision set used as trigger.
Displays the condition of the event under which triggering occurs.
0 = The I/O signal used as trigger switches to false.
1 = The I/O signal used as trigger switches to true.
Started = A collision starts within the collision set used as trigger.
Ended = A collision ends within the collision set used as trigger.
Near miss started = A near-miss starts within the collision set used as trigger.
Near miss ended = A near-miss ends within the collision set used as trigger.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
335
10 Simulation tab
10.4 Event Manager
Continued
Column
Action Type
Action System
Action Name
Action Parameter
Time
Description
Displays the action type that occurs in conjunction with the trigger
I/O Signal Action = Changes the value of a digital input or output signal.
Attach Object = Attaches an object to another.
Detach Object = Detaches an object from another.
Turn On/Off Simulation Monitor = Toggles the simulation monitor of a specific mechanism.
Turn On/Off Timer = Toggles the process timer.
Move Mechanism to Pose = Moves the selected mechanism to a predefined pose and thereafter sends a station signal.
Activates or deactivates the process timer.
Move Graphical Object = Moves a graphical object to a new position and orientation.
Show/Hide Graphical Object = Shows or hides the graphical object.
Do Nothing = No action occurs.
Multiple = The event triggers multiple actions, either all at once or one at a time, each time the trigger is activated. Each action can be viewed in the action editor.
When the action type is Change I/O, this column displays the system to which the signal to change belongs.
A dash (-) signifies a virtual signal.
Displays the name of the signal to change, when the action type is Change I/O.
Displays the condition after the action has occurred.
0 = The I/O signal will be set to false.
1 = The I/O signal will be set to true.
On = Turns the process timer on.
Off = Turns the process timer off.
Object1 -> Object2 = Displays the object to which another will be attached when the action type is Attach object.
Object1 <- Object2 = Displays the object from which another will be detached when the action type is Detach object.
Ended = A collision ends within the collision set used as trigger.
Near miss started = A near-miss starts within the collision set used as trigger.
Near miss ended = A near-miss ends within the collision set used as trigger.
Multiple = Signifies multiple actions.
Displays the time when the event trigger was executed.
Continues on next page
336
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.4 Event Manager
Continued
The trigger editor parts
In the trigger editor you set the properties of the trigger. The upper part of the editor is common for all types of triggers, and the lower part adapts to the trigger type at hand.
Parts common to triggers
Part
Activation
Comments
Description
Sets whether the event is active or not.
On = The action is always carried out when the trigger event occurs.
Off = The action is not carried out when the trigger event occurs.
Simulation = The action is only carried out if the trigger event occurs when running a simulation.
Text box for comments and notes about the event.
Parts specific to I/O signal triggers
Part
Active Controller
Signals
Trigger Condition
Description
Select the system to which the I/O to use as a trigger belongs.
Displays all signals that can be used as triggers.
For digital signals, sets whether the event shall trigger when the signals are set as true or false.
For analog signals, which are only available for station signals, the event shall trigger under any of the following conditions:
Greater than, Greater/Equal, Less than, Less/Equal, Equal
to, Not equal to.
Parts specific to I/O connection triggers
Part
Add
Remove
Add >
Remove
Delay (s)
Description
Opens a dialog box for adding an activator signal to the Activator Signals pane.
Removes a selected activator signal.
Opens a dialog box for adding an operator symbol to the Connections pane.
Removes a selected operator symbol.
Specifies the delay in seconds.
Parts specific to Collision triggers
Part
Collision Type
Collision set
Description
Set the kind of collision to use as trigger.
Started = Triggers when a collision starts.
Ended = Triggers when a collision ends.
Near miss started =Triggers when a near-miss starts.
Near miss ended = Triggers when a near-miss ends.
Select the collision set to use as trigger.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
337
10 Simulation tab
10.4 Event Manager
Continued
The action editor parts
In the action editor you set the properties of the actions for the event. The upper part of the editor is common to all types of actions, and the lower part adjusts to the selected action.
Parts common to all actions
Part
Add Action
Remove Action
Cyclic
Added Actions
Arrow
Description
Adds a new action that occurs when the triggering condition fulfills. You can add several different actions that either are performed at once or one at a time each time the event triggers.
The following types of actions are available:
Change I/O = Changes the value of a digital input or output signal.
Attach object = Attaches an object to another.
Detach object = Detaches and object from another.
Turn On/Off Timer = Activates or deactivates the process timer.
Do Nothing = No action occurs (might be useful for manipulating sequences of actions).
Removes the action selected in the Added Actions list.
When selected, the actions are performed one at a time each time the trigger occurs. When all actions in the list have been performed, the event will restart with the first action in the list.
When cleared, all actions are performed at once every time the trigger occurs.
Lists all actions of the event, in the order they will be executed.
Rearranges the order in which the actions are executed.
Parts specific to I/O Actions
Part
Active Controller
Signals
Action
Description
Displays all systems of the station. Select the system to which the I/O to change belongs.
Displays all signals that can be set.
Sets whether the event shall set the signals to true or false.
If the action is connected to an I/O Connection, this group will not be available.
Parts specific to Attach actions
Part
Attach object
Attach to
Update position / Keep
position
Flange index
Description
Select an object in the station to attach.
Select the object in the station to attach to.
Update position = Moves the local origin of the attached object to the attachment point of the other object when making the attachment. For mechanisms, the attachment point is the TCP or the flange; for other objects, it is the local origin.
Keep position = Keeps the current position of the object to attach when making the attachment.
If the mechanism you attach the object to has several flanges
(attachments points), select the one to use.
Continues on next page
338
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.4 Event Manager
Continued
Part
Offset Position
Offset Orientation
Description
Optionally, specify an offset between the objects when making the attachment
Optionally, specify an offset between the objects when making the attachment
Parts specific to Detach actions
Part
Detach object
Detach from
Description
Select an object in the station to detach.
Select the object in the station to detach from.
Parts specific to Turn On/Off Simulation Monitor actions
Part
Mechanism
Turn Simulation Monitor
On/Off
Description
Selects the mechanism.
Sets whether the action shall start or stop the simulation monitor function.
Parts specific to Turn On/Off Timer actions
Part
Turn On/Off Timer
Description
Sets whether the action shall start or stop the process timer.
Parts specific to Move Mechanism to Pose actions
Part
Mechanism
Description
Selects the mechanism.
Pose
Remove
Selects between SyncPose and HomePose.
Station signal to set when
Pose reached
Lists the station signals that are sent after the mechanism reaches its pose.
Add Digital
Click this button to add a digital signal to the grid.
Click this button to remove a digital signal from the grid.
Parts specific to Move Graphical Object actions
Part Description
Graphical Object to Move
Select a graphical object in the station to move.
New Position
New Orientation
Sets the new position of the object.
Sets the new orientation of the object.
Parts specific to Show/Hide Graphical Object actions
Part
Graphical Object
Show/Hide
Description
Select a graphical object in the station.
Sets whether the object is shown or hidden.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
339
10 Simulation tab
10.5 Station Logic
10.5 Station Logic
Introduction to Station Logic
The Station Logic has some of the characteristics of a Smart Component. It can be used to work with these characteristics on the station level.
The Station Logic editor consists of the following tabs similar to that of a Smart
Component editor:
• Compose
• Properties and Bindings
• Signals and Connections
• View
For more information on the characteristics of a Smart Component editor, see
Opening Station Logic
You can launch Station Logic in any of the following two ways:
• In the Simulation tab, click Reset and select Manage States.
• In the Layout browser, right-click the station and select Station Logic.
Differences between Station Logic and Smart Component
The following table lists some of the differences while working with Station Logic and a Smart Component:
Smart Component Station Logic
The Editor window consists of a text box displaying the description of the component that is used for modifying the text.
The Editor window do not have the description text box wherein the description can be modified.
The Compose tab has the following options:
• Child components
• Saved States
• Assets
The Compose tab has the following options:
• Child components
• Saved States
The Properties and Bindings tab has the following options:
• Dynamic Properties
• Property Bindings
The Properties and Bindings tab has the following options:
• Property Bindings
In the Signals and Connections tab, when working with Add or Edit I/O Connections, you do not have the option of selecting the
VCs in the station from the the Source Object and Target Object list.
You can create connections to and from I/O signals in a VC.
In the Signals and Connections tab, when working with Add or Edit I/O Connections, you have the option of selecting the VCs in the station from the the Source Object and
Target Object list.
340
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.6 Activate Mechanical Units
10.6 Activate Mechanical Units
To activate or deactivate mechanical units manually
1 Click Activate Mechanical Units to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the Activate Mechanical Units dialog box, select the check boxes for the mechanical units to set as active. When activating a mechanical unit that shares a common drive unit, the other mechanical unit sharing that drive unit will be deactivated automatically.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
341
10 Simulation tab
10.7 Simulation Control
10.7 Simulation Control
Running a simulation
1 In the Simulation Control group,
Click...
Play/Resume
to...
start and resume the simulation.
• The Pause button is enabled once you start the simulation
• The Play button is changed to Resume once you pause the simulation.
• Click Resume to resume the simulation.
Play and select Record
to Viewer
Pause/Step start the simulation and to record it to a Station Viewer.
The Save As dialog box appears where the simulation is saved.
pause and step the simulation.
• The Pause button is changed to Step once you start the simulation.
• Click Step to run the simulation in steps.
You can set the simulation timestep. See
Options:Simulation:Accuracy on page 203 .
Reset
reset the simulation to its initial state. See
Resetting simulation on page 342
.
Note
The Record to Viewer option is a special recording mode that allow simulations created using Smart Components to be viewed in the Station
Viewer. Record to viewer is disabled when Free Run mode is enabled.
Resetting simulation
1 In the Simulation Control group, click Reset to reset the simulation.
2 Click Reset and select Save Current state to store states of objects and VCs to be used in a simulation scenario. For more information, see
.
3 Click Reset and select Manage states to launch Station Logic. For more information, see
342
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.8 I/O Simulator
10.8 I/O Simulator
Setting I/O signals using the I/O Simulator
1 Click I/O Simulator. This opens the I/O simulator.
2 If the station contains several systems, select the appropriate one in the
Select System list.
3 In the Filter list and I/O Range list, make selections that display the signals to set. Depending on the filter used, you might also set a filter specification.
4 To change the value of a digital I/O signal, click it.
To change the value of an analog signal, type the new value in the value box.
The I/O Simulator window
With RobotStudio’s I/O simulator you view and manually set existing signals, groups and cross-connections during program execution, thus making it possible to simulate or manipulate the signals.
The I/O simulator displays the signals for one system at a time in groups of 16 signals. For handling large sets of signals, you can filter which signals to display and also create custom lists with favorite signals for quick access.
io_overv
Part
1
2
Description
Select System. Select the system whose signals you want to view.
Filter type. Select the type of filter to use.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
343
10 Simulation tab
10.8 I/O Simulator
Continued
Signal icons
4
5
6
7
Part
3
Types of signal filters
Filter
Board
Group
User List
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Description
Filter Specification. Select the filter for limiting the signal display. For example, if Board is set as filter type, then you select the board whose signals you want to view.
Inputs. Displays all input signals that pass the applied filter.
If more than 16 signals pass, only 16 signals at a time are displayed. Then use the I/O range list to select the signals to view.
Outputs Displays all output signals that pass the applied filter. If more than
16 signals pass, only 16 signals at a time are displayed. Then use the I/O
range list to select the signals to view.
Edit Lists. Click this button to create or edit lists of favorite signals.
I/O Range. When more than 16 signals pass the filter, use this list to select the range of signals to display.
Description
Displays all signals on a specific board. To select a board, use the Filter Specification list.
Displays all signals that belong to a specific group. To select a group, use the Filter Specification list.
Displays all signals in a favorite list. To select a list, use the
Filter Specification list.
Displays all digital input signals of the system.
Displays all digital output signals of the system.
Displays all analog input signals of the system.
Displays all analog output signals of the system.
Digital signal with value 1.
value 1
Digital signal with value 0.
value zero
The cross in the upper right corner indicates that the signals are a cross-connection.
cross connec
The -1 in the upper right corner indicates that the signal is inverted.
inverted
Value box for groups or analog signals.
value box
344
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.9 Monitor
10.9 Monitor
The TCP Trace tab
Enable TCP Trace
Trace length
Trace Color
Alert color
Clear Trace
The Alerts tab
Select this check box to activate tracing of the TCP path for the selected robot.
Specify the maximum length of the trace in millimeters.
Displays the color of the trace when no alerts are activated. To change the color of the trace, click the colored box.
Displays the color of the trace when any of the alerts defined on the Alerts tab exceeds a threshold value. To change the color of the trace, click the colored box.
Click this button to remove the current trace from the graphics window.
Enable Simulation Alerts
Select this check box to activate simulation alerts for the selected robot.
Log Alerts to Output Window
Select this check box to see a warning message when a threshold value is exceeded. If TCP trace is not enabled, this is the only display of the alert.
TCP Speed
Specify the threshold value for TCP speed alerts.
TCP Acceleration
Wrist Singularity
Joint Limits
Specify the threshold value for TCP acceleration alerts.
Specify how close joint five can be to zero rotation before alerting.
Specify how close each joint can be to its limits before alerting.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
345
10 Simulation tab
10.10 Stopwatch
10.10 Stopwatch
Stopwatch for measuring process time
The Stopwatch feature is used for measuring the time taken between two trigger points in a process, and also for the process as a whole. The two trigger points are called the Start Trigger and the End Trigger.
When a stopwatch is setup, the timer starts when the Start Trigger occurs, and stops when the End Trigger occurs.
Setting up a Stopwatch
1 On the Simulation tab, in the Monitor group, click Stopwatch.
The Stopwatch settings dialog appears.
2 Specify a Name for the stopwatch.
3 Select a Start Trigger and an End Trigger for the stopwatch.
The following parameters are listed for selection as triggers:
• Simulation Start
• Simulation Stop
• Target Changed
Additionally, specify the mechanical Unit and the target.
• I/O Value
Additionally, specify the source mechanical unit from where the signal comes, the type of I/O signal and the value of the signal.
4 Click Add.
346
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.11.1 Signal Analyzer for both real and virtual controllers
10.11 Signal Analyzer
10.11.1 Signal Analyzer for both real and virtual controllers
The Signal Analyzer functionality helps in displaying and analyzing signals from a robot controller. Using the Signal Analyzer, you can optimize the robot program.
The Signal Analyzer functionality is present for both virtual and real controllers.
The version adapted for real controllers is called Signal Analyzer Online. The following section describes the Signal Analyzer functionality for virtual controllers, though it includes certain common features.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
347
10 Simulation tab
10.11.2 Signal Setup
10.11.2 Signal Setup
Overview
This feature allows you to configure the signals to be saved for the next simulation.
The signals are recorded from the controller information stream and are stored in the station.
Layout of Signal Setup
The Signal Setup window displays all the signals available for recording. It also displays the signals selected for recording.
The Signal Setup window has the following options:
• Select Signals view
• Current Setup view
• Refresh
Select Signals view
Displays all the available source signals. By default, the source tree is expanded.
In the source tree, you can select the check-box and add the signal to the Current
Setup view.
The signals are organized in a hierachical tree structure. You can expand or collapse the nodes (except the signal nodes which are at the lowest level) either from the context menu or double-click the node.
Current Setup view
Displays all the selected signals.
To remove a signal, Right-click the signal and select Delete.
Refresh
The Signal Setup window, by default, will be updated automatically, if a signal is added or removed. However, in some cases, a manual refresh may be needed.
In the Signal Setup window, click Refresh to ensure all signals are displayed in the window.
Available signals
The following tables show the signals that are available for setting up. You can subscribe to a maximum of 12 signals simultaneously.
Category
Controller Signals
EventLog
I/O System
Joint
Available signals
Total Motor Power. See the description provided after this table.
Total Power Consumption. See the description provided after this table.
All domains
All signals
J1-J6
Near Limit. See the description provided after this table.
Continues on next page
348 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
10 Simulation tab
10.11.2 Signal Setup
Continued
Category
Target
TCP
Available signals
Fine Point
Target Changed , Tool Changed, Workobject
Changed
Maximum Linear Acceleration in World
Orientation Q1-Q4 Current Workobject
Orientation Speed in Current Workobject
Pos X, Y, Z in Current Workobject
Robot Configuration cf1, cf4, cf6, cfx
Speed in Current Workobject
Zone Entered, Zone Left
TCP
Smart Components All signals
Total Motor Power
The signal Total Motor Power shows the sum of the instantaneous power for each joint. It may be positive or negative.
The instantaneous power for a specific joint is positive when it accelerates and negative when it decelerates. If one joint is accelerating at the same time as another is decelerating, then the negative energy from the decelerating joint is reused for the accelerating joint. If the sum of the instantaneous power of all joints is negative then the power surplus cannot be reused but is burned off in the bleeder.
Total Power Consumption
The signal Total Power Consumption is the integral of the positive part of the Total
Motor Power, plus the estimated power consumption of the controller cabinet.
Near Limit
Near Limit checks the distance to the closest limit for each joint. If any joint is less than 20 degrees from a limit, the Near Limit signal will show the current value.
Otherwise, the value of the signal will be constant at 20 degrees. If more than one joint is below 20 degrees from a limit, then the one that is closest will be looked at.
Setting up the signals
Use this procedure to configure the signals to be saved for the next simulation:
1 Load a station with system. See
.
2 In the Simulation tab, click Signal Analyzer and select Signal Setup.
The Signal Setup window appears.
3 In the Select Signals view, select the signals to be configured and stored for simulation.
The selected signals are added in the Current Setup window.
4 In the Current Setup view, right-click Station Database and select Enabled.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
349
10 Simulation tab
10.11.2 Signal Setup
Continued
This ensures that all selected signals will be recorded whenever a simulation is running.
Note
• Disabling the station database will stop the recording but stores the configuration and all completed recordings in the station.
Note
• You can analyze the recorded signals. See
.
• You can organize the saved signal data. See
• Disable signal recording as soon as the analysis is completed to avoid the station file size to increase.
Note
It is not possible to subscribe to signals connected to a unit of type
LOCAL_GENERIC. Attempting to do so produces this error message in the Output window:
Failed to subscribe on signal: …
350
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.11.3 Layout and usage
10.11.3 Layout and usage
Layout of Signal Analyzer
The following figure shows the layout of the Signal Analyzer
Toolbar en1100000034
1
2
3
4
5
Toolbar
Digital signal values
Analog signal values
Events
Signals table
Displays a toolbar with options to configure and to work with the Signal Analyzer.
Displays a colored bar representing a segment where the signal is set.
Displays analog and numeric signal values.
Displays discrete events, such as EventLog messages.
Displays information about all recorded signals for the current data session.
The toolbar displays the following options:
Option
Drop-down list
Timer slider
Zoom in/out buttons
Live data button
Crosshair
Auto scale button
Line marker button
Save button
Description
For selecting the signal recording to be displayed. These signals are also available in Signal History. See
For moving the time forward and backward.
For zooming in / out the time axis.
For enabling data to be shown live, that is, as recorded during a simulation.
For displaying the crosshairs following the mouse.
For enabling / disabling vertical axis autoscaling.
For displaying the line markers for each sample in the analog
/ numeric graph.
For exporting the data to a file.
The data can be saved in Microsoft Excel 2007 format and tab delimited text format.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
351
10 Simulation tab
10.11.3 Layout and usage
Continued
Digital signal values
It displays one row per digital signal, showing the signal state over time. A solid colored bar indicates the signal is set (value=1), otherwise the signal is cleared
(value=0). The signal name is displayed to the left.
Move the mouse over the colored bars to view additional information like the time stamps when the signal was set and reset.
Analog signal values
It displays a 2D line graph for each analog signal. It consists of the following:
• Left-side vertical axis
• Horizontal axis displaying time in seconds
• Plot area displaying the signal graphs
• Optional right-side vertical axis.
You can configure the individual signals to use the right-side vertical axis scale from the signals table at the bottom of the window. This axis is hidden by default.
The following actions can be performed in this segment:
• Scale the vertical axes: If you select the autoscale button in the toolbar, then the vertical axes will automatically scale to ensure that the line graphs are visible. You can modify the vertical scale using the mouse if the cursor is over the axis value area. This automatically deselects the autoscale button.
• Pan and Zoom time axis: If the cursor is over the central, main area of the plot, then you can scale, pan, and zoom the time axis using the mouse.
Events
It displays one row per selected event category. Each event is indicated with a diamond shaped icon. Click this icon to display a popup with more information about the event.
Signals table
Displays information about each recorded signal. This enables you to configure settings for each signal such as color, visibility, whether to use left or right vertical axis and so on.
Using the Signal Analyzer
Use this procedure to analyze the recorded signal data:
1 Set up the signals to be analyzed. See
Setting up the signals on page 349 .
2 Record signal data by running a simulation. See
Setting up the signals on page 349 .
3 In the Simulation tab, click Signal Analyzer.
Continues on next page
352
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.11.3 Layout and usage
Continued
The Signal Analyzer window appears.
Note
• If the station does not contain any saved signal data, you will then have to setup the signals to analyze and record by running a simulation. See
.
• You can organize the saved signal data. See
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
353
10 Simulation tab
10.11.4 History
10.11.4 History
Overview
This feature displays and helps in organizing saved signal recordings of the current
RobotStudio station.
Layout of Signal History
You can do the following from the Signal History window:
• Click the column header to sort the history in ascending or descending order.
• Click the drop-down to group the history as View By Today or View by Order.
Organizing the Signal History
Use this procedure to organize the signal history:
1 Create a saved signal data in the station. See
Setting up the signals on page 349 .
2 In the Simulation tab, click Signal Analyzer and select History.
The Signal History window with all the stored signal history elements are displayed.
Note
The signal history elements in the Signal History window is updated automatically whenever the signals are setup and the simulation is started
/ stopped.
3 In the Signal History window, right-click a history element and select:
• Analyze: To open the Signal Analyzer window.
• Export: To save selected history elements to a file.
• Delete: To remove the selected signal recording permanently.
• Rename: To rename the signal recording.
Note
Disable signal recording as soon as the analysis is completed to avoid the station file size to increase.
354
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.12 Record Movie
10.12 Record Movie
Prerequisites
For optimal results, first configure the options, see
Recording the screen
1 In the Record Movie group, click Record application to capture the entire application window, or Record graphics to capture just the graphics window.
2 When you are done, click Stop Recording. A dialog box appears in which you may choose to save the recording or discard it.
3 Click View Recording to playback the latest capture.
Recording the simulation
1 In the Record Movie group, click Record Simulation to record the next simulation to a video clip.
2 When you are done, click Stop Recording.
The simulation is saved in a default location which is displayed in the output window.
3 Click View Recording to playback the recording.
The recording of simulation starts when you click Play in the Simulation tab.
Note
Record Simulation gives better output quality than Record application or Record
graphics.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
355
10 Simulation tab
10.13.1 Conveyor Tracking
10.13 Conveyor Tracking Mechanism
10.13.1 Conveyor Tracking
Overview
Conveyor tracking is the function where the robot follows a workobject mounted on a moving conveyor.
This section describes how to create a conveyor, add and remove objects to and from the conveyor, create targets during tracking, and simulate conveyor.
For more information, see the Application manual - Conveyor tracking.
Conveyor tracking mechanism
This procedure describes the workflow for making a conveyor tracking system work in RobotStudio.
1 Create a conveyor mechanism. See
Create Conveyor mechanism on page 319 .
2 Setup the conveyor. See
Setting up a conveyor on page 209 and
.
For information on setting up a conveyor tracking station with two robots working on the same conveyor, see
Conveyor tracking station with two robots on page 79 .
3 Jog the conveyor as well as the robot and teach some targets. See
Mechanism Joint Jog on page 469
.
4 Simulate the conveyor. See
Conveyor Simulation on page 357
.
5 Remove objects from conveyor. See
Removing objects from conveyor on page 210 .
356
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
10 Simulation tab
10.13.2 Conveyor Simulation
10.13.2 Conveyor Simulation
Running a conveyor simulation
1 Create Action Instructions. See
Action Instruction on page 239
.
Create the following five action instructions along with Move instructions:
ConfL\Off,ActUnit CNV1,WaitWObj Workobject_1,
DropWObjWorkobject_1 and DeactUnit CNV1
.
The following program is an example showing how the sequence of instructions appears: action_i
Note
If an error occurs while executing the program, the controller reaches Guard state. In this state, RobotStudio cannot execute the program during the next simulation. To recover from this state, open the Control Panel and switch to Manual Mod and then to Auto Mode.
For more information, see Application manual - Conveyor Tracking.
2 Synchronize to VC. See
.
3 Set up the Simulation. See
Simulation Setup on page 331 .
4 Click Simulation.
The Conveyor Simulation dialog appears.
5 In the Conveyor Speed box, set the speed during simulation.
To move the conveyor in the backward direction, select the Reverse check box.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
357
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
10 Simulation tab
10.13.2 Conveyor Simulation
Continued
6 Click Apply.
7 Click Play to run the simulation.
Note
The conveyor speed and direction can be changed while running the simulation.
To jump the conveyor back to the start position, click Reset. This button remains enabled as long as the station has at least one conveyor.
358
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.1 Real and virtual controllers
11 Controller tab
11.1 Real and virtual controllers
The Controller tab contains the controls for managing the real controller and also the controls for synchronization, configuration and tasks assigned to the virtual controller.
RobotStudio allows you to work with an off-line controller, which is a virtual IRC5 controller running locally on your PC. This offline controller is also referred to as the virtual controller (VC). RobotStudio also allows you to work with the real physical
IRC5 controller, which is simply referred to as the real controller.
The features on the Controller tab can be categorized as follows:
• Features for both virtual and real controllers
• Features for real controllers
• Features for virtual controllers
For more information on working with a real controller, see
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
359
11 Controller tab
11.2.1 Add Controller
11.2 Features for both virtual and real controllers
11.2.1 Add Controller
Adding and connecting to a controller
You can connect to real or virtual controller using the Add Controller button.
To connect to a real controller, on the Controller tab click the arrow next to the
Add Controller icon, and then click one of the following commands as per your requirement:
• One Click Connect - For connecting to the service port of the controller
• Add Controller - For adding available controllers to the network
Note
For connecting RobotStudio to a real controller over the Ethernet (LAN), the controller system must have the RobotWare option PC-interface. This option is not required when connecting through the service port.
To start and connect to a virtual controller, on the Controller tab click the arrow next to the Add Controller icon, and then click Start Virtual Controller.
One Click Connect
The One Click Connect feature allows connecting to a robot controller, that is connected to the service port, in a single step. You need to do the following before using this feature:
• Connect the computer to the controller service port.
• Ensure that the network settings on the PC is correct. DHCP should either be enabled or the IP address should have a specific value. For more information on network settings, see
Network settings on page 155 .
On the Controller tab, click the arrow next to the Add Controller icon, and then click One Click Connect.
Add Controller
1 In the Controller tab, click Add Controller to bring up a dialog box in which all available controllers are listed.
2 If the controller is not found in the list, type its IP address in the IP Address box, and then click Refresh.
3 Select the controller in the list and click OK.
Continues on next page
360
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.1 Add Controller
Continued
Start Virtual Controller
The Start Virtual Controller command allows you to start and stop a virtual controller, using a given system path and without needing a station.
Tip
You can use the Start Virtual Controller command when you require a virtual controller as emulator while developing PC SDK or RobotWare Additional Options.
You can also use this command when you need to use the Configuration editor or the RAPID editor without requiring a station.
Clicking Start Virtual Controller under Add Controller opens the Start Virtual
Controller dialog box. In this dialog box, specify the following:
1 In the System Pool drop-down list specify the location and folder of your PC where the required virtual controller system are stored.
To add a folder to this list, click Add and then browse to and select the folder to be added. To remove a folder from the list, click Remove.
2 The Systems Found table lists the virtual controller systems found in the selected system folder. Click a system to select to select it for starting.
3 Select the required check boxes:
• I-Start, to start the VC with the current system and the default settings
• Local login
• Handle Write Access automatically
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
361
11 Controller tab
11.2.2 Events
11.2.2 Events
Events log
To view the events log of the controller, on the Controller tab in the Controller
Tools group, click Events. This opens the Event log. The severity of each event is indicated by its background color; blue for information, yellow for warning and red for an error which needs to be corrected in order to proceed.
You can perform the following operations on the Event log.
• Click any event to view a brief description about the event.
• The Auto Update check box is selected by default, so that new events appear in the list as they occur.
Clearing the check box to disable automatic update. Selecting it again, fetches and displays the events missed while it was cleared.
• You can filter the event log list based on the category of the event or based on any text in its displayed details.
To filter the list based on any required text, specify it in the Text box.
To filter based on the events categories, use the Category drop-down list.
The list contains the following different event categories.
Common (the default category, includes all categories)
Operational
System
Hardware
Program
Motion
IO & Communication
User
Internal
Process
Configuration
RAPID
• To clear the current event record, click Clear. This does not affect the event log of the controller, which can be retrieved again by clicking the Get button.
• To retrieve and display all events currently stored in the controller, click Get
• To save the event records of the selected event categories to log files on the computer, click Save.
• To enables all events currently in the Common Event Log to be saved to a log file on the computer, select the Log to file check box.
The log file will be updated with all new events as they occur.
362
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.3 Inputs / Outputs
11.2.3 Inputs / Outputs
I/O System
You can view and set input and output signals in the I/O System window. To open this window, on the Controller tab, in the Controller Tools group, click
Inputs/Outputs.
The following details of I/O signals are available in the I/O System window:
• The Name column
This column shows the name of the signal. The name is set by the I/O unit's configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.
• The Type column
This column shows which type of signal it is, by using any of the abbreviations described below. The signal type is set by the I/O unit's configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.
Abbreviation
DI
DO
AI
AO
GI
GO
Description
Digital input signal
Digital output signal
Analog input signal
Analog output signal
Group of signals, working as one input signal
Group of signals, working as one output signal
• The Value column
This column shows the value of the signal. The value can be changed by double-clicking the signal row.
• The Min Value column
This column displays the minimum value that the signal can have.
• The Max Value column
This column displays the maximum value that the signal can have.
• The Logical State column
This column shows whether the signal is simulated or not. When a signal is simulated, you specify a value that overrides the actual signal. Changing the logical state by turning the simulation on or off can be done from the I/O system.
• The Unit column
This column shows to which I/O unit the signal belongs. This is set by the
I/O unit's configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.
• The Bus column
This column shows to which I/O bus the signal belongs. This is set by the
I/O bus' configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.
• The Label column
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
363
11 Controller tab
11.2.3 Inputs / Outputs
Continued
This column displays the Signal Identification Label as defined in the I/O
Configuration database.
You can filter the I/O system window to view only a subset of all signals. You can filter the view using the following parameters:
• Name and Label- Use the free-text edit boxes above these columns. The resulting view will show signals that contain the entered text string in the respective field.
• Simulated - Select this check box to view simulated signals only
• Unit, Bus, and Category - Use the drop-down list boxes above each column to select the required option for the respective parameter. The resulting view will show only those signals that have the selected option.
• Clear filter - Click this button to reset the view, and show all signals again.
364
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.4 ScreenMaker
11.2.4 ScreenMaker
Overview
ScreenMaker is a tool in RobotStudio for creating customized FlexPendant user interfaces without the need to learn Visual Studio development environment and
.NET programming.
For more information on ScreenMaker, see
Prerequisites
Note
ScreenMaker is not available in RobotStudio 5.15 64-bit edition.
To use ScreenMaker, you should have:
• RobotStudio with Premium license.
• RobotWare FlexPendant Interface option enabled. See
Testing on Virtual controller/Real controller on page 365 .
• Microsoft .NET Compact Framework 2.0 installed.
For more information on the system requirements, hardware requirements, and the supported Operating Systems, see RobotStudio Release Notes.
Testing on Virtual controller/Real controller
RobotWare FlexPendant Interface option is required for ScreenMaker applications.
NOTE! RobotWare PC Interface option is required only when using ScreenMaker for Robots on a LAN (to get the data from the controller, bind, and deploy). If there is no PC Interface option, service port can be used to design and deploy screens.
en0900000723
PC Interface option is needed
en0900000724
PC Interface option is not needed
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
365
11 Controller tab
11.2.4 ScreenMaker
Continued
Launching ScreenMaker
You can launch ScreenMaker either from the Controller tab.
1 In the Controller tab, click the arrow next to the FlexPendant icon.
2 Click ScreenMaker.
ScreenMaker is launched as a new tab.
The connection to all connected virtual and real controllers can be established.
Note
For more information, see
.
366
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.5 Restart a controller
11.2.5 Restart a controller
When to restart a controller
Some operations require a restart of the controller to take effect. When working in
RobotStudio , you will be notified when a restart is necessary.
Warm restart
Typically, you need to make an ordinary warm restart of a controller when:
• You have changed the baseframe of any of the robots belonging to that controller.
• You have changed the robot's configuration, either with the Configuration
Editor or by loading new configuration files.
• You have added new options or hardware to the system.
• A system failure has occurred.
Advanced restart options
The controller can be restarted with the following advanced restart options:
Option
I-Start
P-Start
X-Start
C-Start
B-Start
Description
Restarts the controller with the current system and the default settings.
This restart discards the changes made to the robot's configuration. It reverts the current system to the state it had when it was installed on the controller (an empty system). This restart deletes all RAPID programs, data and custom configurations that have been added to the system.
Restarts the controller with the current system and reinstall
RAPID.
This restart deletes all RAPID program modules. It can be useful if the system has changed in such a way that the programs no longer are valid, for instance if system parameters used by the program are changed.
This restart applies only to real controllers.
This restart saves the current system, with the current settings, and starts the boot application on the FlexPendant from which you can choose a new system to start with. You can also configure the controller's network settings from the boot application.
This restart applies only to real controllers.
This restart deletes the current system and starts the boot application on the FlexPendant from which you can choose a new system to start with. You can also configure the controller's network settings from the boot application.
This restart applies only to real controllers.
Restarts the controller with the current system and the last known good settings. This restart restores changes made to the robot's configuration to a previously good state.
Restarting a virtual controller
1 In the Controller browser, select the controller to restart.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
367
11 Controller tab
11.2.5 Restart a controller
Continued
2 In the Controller Tools group, click the arrow next to the Restart icon, and then select one of the following options:
Warmstart
I-start
P-start
Restarts the VC and activates the changes made to the system.
This is the default option if you directly click Restart.
Restarts the VC with the current system and the default settings.
Restarts the VC with the current system and reinstalls
RAPID.
The options for Restart are also present in the context menu when you right-click a controller in the Controller browser.
Restarting a real controller
The following are the prerequisites for restarting a real controller:
• You must have Write access to the controller you are restarting.
• For the advanced restart methods X-start and C-start, you must have access to the controller's FlexPendant.
To restart a real controller:
1 In the Controller browser, select the controller to restart.
2 In the Controller Tools group, click the arrow next to the Restart icon, and then select one of the following options:
Warmstart
Advanced
Restarts the real controller and activates the changes made to the system.
The controller can be restarted with the following advanced restart options:
•
I-start
•
P-start
• X-start (FlexPendant required)
• C-start (FlexPendant required)
•
B-start
The options for Restart are also present in the context menu when you right-click a controller in the Controller browser.
368
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.6 Back up a system
11.2.6 Back up a system
Overview
When backing up a system you copy all the data needed to restore the system to its current state:
• Information about software and options installed on the system.
• System's home directory and all its content.
• All robot programs and modules in the system.
• All configuration and calibration data of the system.
Prerequisites
To backup a system you must have:
• Write access to the controller
• Logged on to the controller with appropriate grants. For more information, see
User Authorization on page 158
.
Creating a Backup
To create a backup, follow these steps:
1 In the Controller browser, select the system you want to backup from the browser.
2 Right click and select Create Backup.
The Create Backup dialog box appears.
3 Enter a new backup name and specify a location for the backup, or keep the default ones.
4 Click OK.
The progress of the backup is displayed in the Output window.
Backup folder
When the backup is complete you will have a folder with the name of the backup in the specified location. This folder contains a set of subfolders which together comprise the backup.
CAUTION
If the contents of the Backup folder are changed, then it will not be possible to restore the system from backup.
Subfolders
BACKINFO
HOME
RAPID
SYSPAR
Description
Contains information necessary for re-creating the system's software and options from the mediapool.
Contains a copy of the system’s home directory content.
Contains one subfolder for each task in the system’s program memory. Each of these task folders contains separate folders for program modules and system modules.
Contains the system's configuration files.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
369
11 Controller tab
11.2.6 Back up a system
Continued
Note
The contents of the PIB board of a IRC5P system (a controller system for painting) will not be included with the regular RobotStudio backup. Please use the backup function of the FlexPaintPendant to include the PIB content.
370
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.7 Restore a system
11.2.7 Restore a system
Overview
When restoring a system from backup, the current system gets the same content as when the backup was performed. Restoring a system replaces the following contents in the current system with the content from the backup:
• All RAPID programs and modules in the system.
• All configuration and calibration data of the system.
Note
The system's home directory and all its content are copied from the backup to the current system.
Prerequisites
To restore a system you must have:
• Write access to the controller.
• Logged on to the controller with appropriate grants. For more information, see
User Authorization on page 158
.
Restoring a system
Note
Before proceeding, make sure that the system from the backup is compatible with the controller you are restoring.
To restore a system, follow these steps:
1 In the Controller browser, select the system you want to restore.
2 Click Backup and select Restore Backup.
The Restore from Backup dialog box appears.
3 In the Restore from Backup dialog box, select which backup to use for restoring the system.
4 Click OK.
The progress of the restore appears in the Output window. The controller is automatically restarted to load the restored system.
Note
If the system from the backup does not originate from the controller you are restoring, you get the following message about the mismatch.
en0900001061
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
371
11 Controller tab
11.2.8 System Builder
11.2.8 System Builder
Functions of the System Builder
For procedures using the various functions of the System Builder, see
.
372
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.9 Configuration editor
11.2.9 Configuration editor
Configuration editor
From the Configuration Editor you view and edit the system parameters of a specific topic in a controller. The Instance Editor is a complementary editor with which you edit the details of a type instance (a row in the Configuration Editor's instance list).
The Configuration Editor has a direct communication with the controller. This means that changes you make are applied to the controller as soon as you complete the command.
With the Configuration Editor, including the Instance Editor, you can:
• view types, instances, and parameters
• edit instances and parameters
• copy and paste instances within a topic
• add and delete instances
Layout of the Configuration Editor
The Configuration Editor consists of the Type name list and the Instance list.
The Type name list displays all available configuration types for the selected topic.
The list of types is static. This means you cannot add, delete or rename types.
The Instance list displays all system parameters of the type selected in the Type
name list. Each row in the list is an instance of the system parameter type. The columns show each specific parameter and its value for each instance of the parameter type.
The Configuration editor has the following options:
• Controller
• I/O
• Communication
• Motion
• Man-machine communication
• Add Signals
Add Signals
You must have write access to the controller to be able to open the add signal window.
Type of Signal
Signal Base Name
Assigned to Unit
Defines the type of signal.
Defines the name for one or more signals.
Defines the I/O unit to which the signal belongs.
Signal Identification Label Optionally, offers filtering and sorting based on this category.
Number of Signals Defines the number of signals to add in a range
Start Index
Step
Unit Mapping Start
Defines the index (number) to start the range with.
Defines the number which the index should increase with.
Defines the bits in the I/O memory map of the assigned unit to which the signal is mapped.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
373
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
11 Controller tab
11.2.9 Configuration editor
Continued
Category
Access Level
Optionally, offer filtering and sorting based on this category.
Defines the write access to I/O signals for categories of I/O controlling clients connected to the robot controller.
Specifies the I/O signal value to be used at the start.
Default Value
Value at System and Power
Failure
Specifies whether the output I/O signal should keep its current value or take the I/O signal's default value in case of system failure or at a power fail.
Store Value at Power Failure
Specifies if the I/O signal should be set to the value stored in the permanent memory pool or not at the start.
Invert Physical Value Applies an inversion between the physical value of the signal and its logical representation in the system.
Layout of the Instance editor
The Instance Editor lists the parameters and their values in the open instance.
In the Value column you can view and edit the value of the parameter.
When you click a row, the lower section of the Instance Editor window displays the type of parameter, restrictions for the parameter value and other conditons for the parameter.
374
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.10 Load Parameters
11.2.10 Load Parameters
Prerequisite
You must have write access to the controller.
Loading a configuration file
1 In the Controller browser, select the system and expand the Configuration node.
2 Click Load Parameters to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the dialog box, select how you want to combine the parameters in the configuration file to load with the existing parameters:
If you want to...
then select...
replace the entire configuration of the topic with the one in the configuration file.
Delete existing parameters before loading
add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic, without modifying the existing ones.
Load parameters if no duplicates
add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic and update the existing ones with values from the configuration file. Parameters that only exist in the controller and not in the configuration file will not be changed at all.
Load parameters and replace duplicates
4 Click Open and browse to the configuration file to load. Then click Open again.
5 In the information box, click OK to confirm that you want to load the parameters from the configuration file.
6 When the loading of the configuration file is finished, close the Select mode dialog box.
If a restart of the controller is necessary for the new parameters to take affect, you will be notified of this.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
375
11 Controller tab
11.2.11 Save Parameters
11.2.11 Save Parameters
Overview
The system parameters of a configuration topic can be saved to a configuration file, stored on the PC or any of its network drives.
The configuration files can then be loaded into a controller. They are thereby useful as backups, or for transferring configurations from one controller to another.
File-naming conventions
The configuration files should be named with a name that relates to their corresponding topics. When saving configuration files, the correct name for each file will be suggested by default.
Saving a configuration file
1 In the Controller browser, select the system and expand the Configuration node.
2 Click Save Parameters and select the topic to save to a file and click Save.
3 In the Save As dialog box, browse for the folder to save the file in.
4 Click Save.
Saving several configuration files
1 Select the Configuration node.
2 Click Save System Parameters.
3 In the Save System Parameters dialog box, select the topics to save to files.
Then click Save.
4 In the Browse for Folder dialog box, browse for the folder to save the files in.
Then click OK.
The selected topics will now be saved as configuration files with default names in the specified folder.
376
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.12 Transfer
11.2.12 Transfer
Overview
The transfer function allows easy transfer of offline-created RAPID programs to the real robot on the shop floor. This means that you can transfer data from a virtual controller (which is offline) to a real controller (which is online). As part of the transfer function you can also compare the data present in the virtual controller with that present in the real controller and then select which data to transfer.
You can also use the transfer function to transfer data from a virtual controller to another virtual controller.
Relations for transfer of data
To transfer data, you must first set up a Relation between the two controllers. A
Relation defines the rules for the transfer of data between the two controllers.
Creating a Relation
When you have two controllers listed in the Controller browser, you can create a
Relation between them. To create a Relation:
1 On the Controller tab, in the Transfer group, click Create Relation.
The Create Relation dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter a Relation Name for the relation.
3 Specify the First Controller, from the list. This must be a virtual controller
The First Controller, also called the Source, owns the data being transferred.
4 Specify the Second Controller, from the list. This can either be a real controller or another virtual controller.
The Second Controller, also called the Target, receives the data being transferred.
5 Click Ok.
The relation between the controllers is now created.
After this, the Relation dialog box opens, using which you can configure and execute the transfer. Relations of a controller are listed under its Relations node in the
Controller browser.
Note
The properties of the relation are saved in a XML file under INTERNAL in the owner controller’s system folder.
Transferring data
You can configure the details of the transfer of data and also execute the transfer, in the Relation dialog box.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
377
11 Controller tab
11.2.12 Transfer
Continued
To open the Relation dialog box, double-click a relation. Alternatively, select a relation in the Controller browser, and then in the Transfer group, click Open
Relation.
Configuring the transfer
Before executing a transfer, you can configure the data to be transferred, under the Transfer Configuration heading. Configure using these guidelines:
• Use the check boxes in the Included column to include or exclude the corresponding items shown in the tree structure. All items in a module that are included will be transferred. Other non-listed items of a module such as comments, records and so on will be automatically included in the transfer.
• The Action column shows a preview of the transfer’s result, based on the items you include or exclude.
• If a module exists both in the source and the target controllers, and the Action column shows Update, then click Compare in the Analyze column. This opens the Compare box which shows two versions of the module in different panes. The affected lines are highlighted and you can also step through the changes. You can choose one of the following options for the comparison:
Source with target - Compares the source module with the target module
Source with result - Compares the source module with the module that will be the result of the transfer operation
• BASE (module), wobjdata and tooldata are excluded by default.
• wobjdata wobj0, tooldata tool0, and loaddata load0 of the BASE module are unavailable for inclusion.
A task can be transferred only if:
• Write access to the target controller is present (must be manually retrieved).
• Tasks are not running.
• Program execution is in the stopped state.
Executing the transfer
After you have configured the transfer, you can execute it.
Under the Transfer heading, the Source and Target modules are shown along with the arrow showing the direction of the transfer. You can change the direction of the transfer by clicking Change Direction. This also switches the source and target modules.
To execute the transfer click Transfer now. A dialog showing a summary of the transfer appears. Click Yes to complete the transfer. The result of the transfer is displayed for each module in the output window.
The Transfer now button is disabled if:
• None of the included tasks can be transferred.
• Write access is required but not held.
Continues on next page
378
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.2.12 Transfer
Continued
Note
If one of several modules fail, then the following error message is displayed.
Module xxx.zzz has failed. Do you want to continue?
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
379
11 Controller tab
11.2.13 Signal Analyzer Online
11.2.13 Signal Analyzer Online
Analyzing signals from the controller
The Signal Analyzer Online functionality helps in displaying and analyzing signals from a robot controller. Using the Signal Analyzer, you can optimize the robot program.
The Signal Analyzer functionality is present for both virtual and real controllers.
The following section describes the Signal Analyzer functionality for real controllers.
For information on the Signal Analyzer Online functionality for virtual controllers, see
To open the Signal Analyzer Online, on the Controller tab, in the Controller Tools group, click Signal Analyzer Online. Alternatively, you can open the Signal Analyzer
Online using the context menu in the Signal History window.
Note
The Signal Analyzer Online command in the Controller Tools group is enabled only if the selected controller is a real controller, or if the controller tree has only one real controller.
For information about the layout of the Signal Analyzer Online, see
Turning the signal recording on and off
To turn the recording of signals on or off, use the Start recording and Stop
recording buttons.
To start the recording, click Start recording.
To stop the recording, click Stop recording. The recording stops and the recorded session is saved.
Configuring signals for the next recording
To configure the signals which are to be saved during the next signal recording session, use the Signal Setup window. For this, click the arrow next to the Signal
Analyzer icon, and then click Signal Setup. The Signal Setup window appears.
The signals that are available for configuration are shown in the Signal Setup window. For the list of available signals, see
.
For information on setting up the signals, see
Setting up the signals on page 349 .
Continues on next page
380
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
History
11 Controller tab
11.2.13 Signal Analyzer Online
Continued
The signal data from each signal recording session is saved. To view these, click the arrow next to the Signal Analyzer icon, and then click History. For more information, see
Note
The signal data from each signal recording session is saved as a .sdf file at the following location. The History feature uses these files.
C:\Users\<your user name>\AppData\Local\ABB Industrial
IT\Robotics IT\RobotStudio\SignalAnalyzer
This path is for a PC with a standard installation of Windows 7 or 8 (English version). The path may differ if you have a customized installation or use Windows
XP.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
381
11 Controller tab
11.2.14 Safety Configuration
11.2.14 Safety Configuration
Overview
For information on safety configuration, see:
• Application manual - SafeMove
• Application manual - Electronic Position Switches
382
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.1 Request Write Access
11.3 Features for real controllers
11.3.1 Request Write Access
Overview
Prerequisites for Write access
You can get Write access to any controller as long as the prerequisites are fulfilled.
When the Controller is in Mode:
This has to be fulfilled:
Auto
Manual
The Write access must not be taken by any other user.
The remote Write access must be granted on the FlexPendant. For safety reasons, a FlexPendant user can also recall this remote Write access in manual mode.
If the prerequisites are not fulfilled you will be denied, or lose, the Write access.
This means that if you have Write access in auto mode and the controller is switched over to manual mode you will lose the Write access without any warning. This is because the FlexPendant unit by default has the Write access in manual mode, for safety reasons. The same will happen if the remote Write access in manual mode is recalled from the FlexPendant unit.
Result
You need Write access for editing programs and configurations or in any other way to change data on the controller.
The Controller Status window will be updated when the request for Write access is granted.
If the Write access is denied, a message is displayed.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
383
11 Controller tab
11.3.2 Release Write Access
11.3.2 Release Write Access
Overview
Several users can be logged on to a single controller but only one can have the write access. You can release the write access when you do not need it anymore.
Result
The Controller Status window will be updated when your access right has changed from read/write to read only.
384
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.3 Authenticate
11.3.3 Authenticate
Overview
The data, functionality, and commands on a controller are protected by a User
Authorization system (also called UAS). The UAS restricts the parts of the system the user has access to. Different users can have different access grants.
You can perform the following functions from the Authenticate menu:
• Login as a Different User
• Log off
• Log off all controllers
• Edit User Accounts
• UAS Grant Viewer
Login as a Different User
1 In the Authenticate menu, click Login as a Different User. The Add new
user dialog box appears.
2 In the User Name box, enter the user name you want to log on as.
3 In the Password box, enter the password for the user name you are logging on as.
4 Click OK.
Note: If you have previously logged on as a different user and wish to revert as default user, click Login as Default User.
Log off
In the Authenticate menu, click Log off to log the user off from the controller.
Login off all controllers
In the Authenticate menu, click Log off to log the user off from all the controllers.
Edit User Accounts
For more information on User Accounts, see
UAS Grant Viewer
For more information on UAS Grant Viewer, see
UAS Grant Viewer on page 401 .
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
385
11 Controller tab
11.3.4 File transfer
11.3.4 File transfer
Overview
You can transfer the files and folders between the PC and a controller through the
File Transfer window.
Prerequisites
The following are the prerequisites to be met:
• The PC must be connected to the same network as the controller, or connected to the service port of the controller.
• You must be logged on to the controller as a user with UAS grants that allows file transferring.
Transferring files and folders
Use this procedure to transfer files and folders between the PC and a controller:
1 In the Controller Tools group, click File Transfer.
The File Transfer window appears.
2 In the PC explorer, browse to the folder from or to which you want to transfer the data.
3 In the Controller explorer, browse to the folder from or to which you want to transfer the data.
4 Select the item to transfer from the list.
To select several items at once, do one of the following:
To select
several adjacent items several non-adjacent items all items in the list
then press
the
SHIFT key and select the first and the last item.
the
CTRL key and select each item.
the keys
CTRL + A
5 When the files and folder to transfer are selected, do one of the following:
To
cut the files copy the files
then press
CTRL + X
CTRL + C
, or click Arrow
Continues on next page
386
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.4 File transfer
Continued
6 Place the insertion point either in the PC explorer or the Controller explorer and click CTRL + V.
Note
In the PC explorer or Controller explorer window, right-click to view the following context menu:
• Transfer
• One level up
• Open
• Refresh
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Delete
• Remove
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
387
11 Controller tab
11.3.5 FlexPendant Viewer
11.3.5 FlexPendant Viewer
Overview
FlexPendant Viewer is an add-in to RobotStudio that retrieves and displays a screenshot from the FlexPendant. The screenshot is generated automatically at the moment of the request.
Prerequisites
The controller you want to retrieve screen shots from must be added to your robot view.
A FlexPendant must be connected to the controller. If no FlexPendant is currently connected (option Hot plug is installed and the jumper plug is used) then no screen shot can be retrieved.
Using FlexPendant Viewer
1 Make sure you are connected to the controller.
2 In the Controller Tools group, click the arrow next to the FlexPendant icon, and then click FlexPendant Viewer.
A screen shot will be displayed in the workspace.
3 To reload the screen shot, click Reload in the workspace.
4 To set an automatic reload period for the screen shot, click on the menu
Tools, point to FlexPendant Viewer and click Configure.
Set the desired reload period and select the check-box Activated. Then click
OK.
Results on the controller
The screenshot will automatically be saved as a file on the controller. When a new request is sent, a new screenshot is generated and saved, overwriting the previous file.
No message will be displayed on the FlexPendant.
388
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.6 Import Options
11.3.6 Import Options
Importing system options
1 In the Configuration group, click Import Options to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the Option source box, enter the path to the folder where the options to import are located. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.
3 In the Media Pool destination box, enter the path to the media pool you want to store the options in. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the media pool folder.
4 Select the options to import and click Import.
To select several options at once, do one of the following:
To select
several adjacent options
then hold down
the SHIFT key and select the first and the last option.
several non-adjacent options the CTRL key and select each option.
5 Click OK.
Removing system options
1 In the Configuration group, click Import Options to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the Media Pool destination list, enter the path to the media pool from which you want to delete the options. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the media pool folder.
3 Select the options to delete and click Remove.
To select several options at once, do one of the following:
To select
several adjacent options
then hold down
the SHIFT key and select the first and the last option.
several non-adjacent options the CTRL key and select each option.
4 Click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
389
11 Controller tab
11.3.7 Properties
11.3.7 Properties
Overview
You can perform the following from the Properties menu:
• Renaming the controller
• Setting the controller date and time
• Setting the Controller ID
• Viewing controller and system properties
• Handling the Device Browser
Renaming the controller
The controller name is an identification of the controller that is independent of the system or the software running on the controller. Unlike the controller ID, the controller name does not have to be unique for each controller.
Note
The controller name must be written with characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin
1) character set.
1 In the Configuration group, click Properties, and then click Rename.
The Rename Controller dialog box appears.
2 Enter the new name of the controller in the dialog box.
3 Click OK.
The new name will be activated when the controller is restarted.
You will be prompted to either click Yes to restart the controller immediately or click No to restart later.
Setting the controller date and time
You can either set the date and time to the same as the computer you are working from, or you can specify the date and time manually.
Use this procedure to set the controller date and time:
1 In the Configuration group, click Properties, and then click Date and Time.
The Set Date and Time dialog box appears.
2 In the Set Controller’s date and time, click the arrow next to the date and time list to set the date and time of the controller.
Note
Click Get local computer’s time to set the date and time of the controller to the same as the computer you are working on.
Setting the Controller ID
The Controller ID is by default set to the serial number of the controller and is thereby a unique identifier of the controller.
Continues on next page
390
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.7 Properties
Continued
The Controller ID is a unique identifier for the controller and should not be changed.
However, if the hard disk of the controller is replaced, the ID will be lost and you must set it back to the serial number of the controller.
Note
You must Request Write Access to the controller before setting the controller
ID.
1 In the Configuration group, click Properties, and then click Controller ID.
The Set Controller ID dialog box appears.
2 Enter the Controller ID and then click OK.
Note
Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 40 characters.
Viewing controller and system properties
You can view the following properties for a controller and its running sytem.
Controller Properties
Boot Application
Controller ID
Controller Name
Installed Systems
Network Connections
System Properties
Control Module
Drive Module #1
Serial Number
System Name
1 In the Configuration group, click Properties, and then click Controller and
System Properties.
The Controller and System Properties window appears.
2 In the tree view at the left of the window, browse to the node for which you want to view the properties.
The properties of the selected object are displayed in the Properties list to the right of the window.
Viewing the Device Browser
The Device Browser displays the properties and trends of the various hardware and software devices in a robot controller. To open the Device Browser, in the
Configuration group, click Properties, and then click Device Browser.
Displaying the properties of a device
In the tree view, browse to the node for which you want to view the properties and then click it. The properties of the selected object, along with their corresponding values, are listed to the right of the tree view.
Updating the tree view
Press F5, to update the tree view.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
391
11 Controller tab
11.3.7 Properties
Continued
Alternatively, right-click inside the tree view pane, and then click Refresh.
Displaying a trend
Select a device in the tree view and then double-click any property, that has a numerical value, in the right-hand panel. This opens a trend view. The trend view collects data at a rate of one sample per second.
Hiding, stopping, starting or clearing a trend
Right-click anywhere on the trend view and then click the required command.
Saving system diagnostics
You can create a System Diagnostics data file from RobotStudio.
To save a System Diagnostics data file to your PC, in the Configuration group, click Properties, and then click Save system diagnostics.
392
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.8 Go Offline
11.3.8 Go Offline
Overview
The main purpose of this feature is to create a new station with a VC similar to the connected real controller. This helps a robot technician to work offline, and not just when connected to the real controller.
Using Go Offline
1 Connect the PC to a real controller.
2 On the Controller tab, click Request Write Access.
For more information on Request Write Access, see
Request Write Access on page 383
.
3 Click Go Offline.
The Go Offline dialog box is displayed.
4 Enter a name for the system and browse for the location to save the system.
A new station is created with a VC with the same configuration as the real controller.
Note
Go Offline transfers additional options from a real controller and installs them on the PC. A Relation is automatically created between the virtual controller and the real controller.
For more information on Relations, see
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
393
11 Controller tab
11.3.9 Online Monitor
11.3.9 Online Monitor
This feature allows you to remotely monitor the robot connected to a real controller.
It displays a 3D layout of the connected robot controller and enhances user’s current perception of reality by adding motion visualization augmentation.
Note
The Online Monitor shows TCP robots and TCP robots with track. When connecting the Online Monitor to a virtual controller, the motion is shown only if the virtual controller is using Free-Run mode, not the Time Slice mode.
Using Online Monitor
The following procedure describes the Online Monitor feature in RobotStudio:
1 Connect the PC to a controller and add the controller. See
2 Click Online Monitor.
The 3D view of the mechanical units of the controller system is displayed in the graphics window.
Note
The robot view is refreshed every second with the current jointvalues of all the mechanical units.
Indication of TCP
A cone is automatically created to indicate the active tool data being used. The cone has its base in the robot wrist and its tip at the location of the tool data.
Kinematic Limitations
When the Kinematic Limitation button is enabled, the graphical 3D viewer indicates whether the robot is at a joint limit or at a singularity.
For joint limits, the corresponding link is highlighted in yellow to indicate a warning and in red to indicate an error. The tolerance limits are defined in RobotStudio
Options - Online - Online Monitor.
For singularity, a markup indicates when the axis 5 is close to singularity. The singularity level is also defined in RobotStudio Options.
Visualizing Safety Zones in Online Monitor
This feature allows the user to visualize the current status of the manipulators in a robot system and provides an augmented reality of the robot cell. The user can visualize a failure scenario of a robot, that is, when the robot makes an unplanned stop. When the robot enters a restricted zone, the safeMove supervision feature stops the robot. To give the user an idea of the physical layout and the safety zone that has caused the stop, the safety zones are visualized in online monitor.
Continues on next page
394
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.9 Online Monitor
Continued
Features
• A Show Safety Zones button is available in the Online Monitor for each manipulator in the system, for example, four buttons in a MultiMove system with four manipulators.
• The name of each tool zone and the corresponding manipulator is shown as a markup, for example, Rob1 STZ1, …, Rob4 STZ8, Rob1 MTZ1, …, Rob4
MTZ8 and so on.
• Zones that are defined as Allow inside in the definition of the zone are visualized as a green semitransparent hollow shape.
• Zones that are defined as Allow outside in the definition of the zone must be visualized as a red semitransparent solid shape.
• A message is displayed in the output window if no STZ or MTZ is defined for the manipulator.
• The controller event log message 20468 SC STZ violation is displayed in the output window if it is present in the controller event log.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
395
11 Controller tab
11.3.10 User Accounts
11.3.10 User Accounts
Overview
All the procedures below require the following steps to be taken before managing the details:
1 In the Controller browser, select the controller to which you want to manage a user or group
2 From the Controller tab, click Request Write Access to provide write access to the controller.
3 In the Controller tab, click Authenticate and select Edit User Accounts, for administering UAS accounts, grants, and groups.
Users tab
With the Users tab you set which users will be able to log on to the controller and which groups the users shall belong to.
Users tab Parts
users-ta
1 The Add button. Opens a dialog box for adding new users.
2 The Edit button. Opens a dialog box for changing the log on name and password of the user.
3 The Delete button. Deletes the selected user account from the controller.
Continues on next page
396
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.10 User Accounts
Continued
4 The Users on this Controller list. Shows the user accounts defined on this controller. The list has two columns:
Column
User
Status
Description
The name of the user account
Shows if the account is activated or deactivated. When deactivated, it is not possible to log on using that account.
5 The Activated/Deactivated item box. Changes the status of the user account.
6 The User’s groups/User’s grants list.
The User’s groups list shows which group(s) the user is a member of. For changing the membership of a group, select or clear the checkbox in front of the group name.
The User’s grants list shows the available grants for the selected User’s group(s). When selecting a grant from the User’s grants list, a description of the selected grant appears.
users-t0
Adding a user
1 On the Users tab, click Add to bring up a dialog box.
2 In the User Name box, enter the user name. Use only characters from the
ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.
3 In the Password box, enter the user's password. The password you type in will not be visible. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.
4 In the Retype Password box, enter the user's password again.
5 Click OK to add the new user and close the dialog box.
6 Click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
397
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
11 Controller tab
11.3.10 User Accounts
Continued
Deleting a user
1 On the Users tab, select the user to delete from the Users on this controller list and click Delete.
2 To the question Are you sure you want to remove this user?, answer Yes.
3 Click OK.
Setting up group membership
1 On the Users tab, select the user from the Users on this controller list.
2 In the User’s groups list, select the groups the user shall be a member of.
3 Click OK.
Changing a name or password
1 On the Users tab, select the user to edit from the Users on this controller list and click Edit user.
This opens the Edit dialog box.
2 To change the user name, enter the new name in the User Name box. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than
16 characters.
3 To change the password, enter the new password in the Password box, then retype the password in the Retype Password box. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.
4 Click OK to save the changes to the user and close the dialog box.
5 Click OK.
Activating or deactivating a user
1 On the Users tab, select the user from the Users on this controller list and click the status text (Activated or Deactivated). An item box appears and you can change the status.
The user's new state is now displayed in the status column of the Users on
this controller list.
2 Click OK.
Exporting a user list
On the Users tab, select the user from the Users for this Controller list and click
Export.
This opens a Save as dialog box, in which you specify the name and location for the file with the user list.
Importing a user list
On the Users tab, select the user from the Users for this Controller list and click
Import.
This opens an Open file dialog box, in which you browse to the file with the list to import.
Continues on next page
398
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.10 User Accounts
Continued
When you have selected the file, the ImportOptionsForm dialog appears.
Select ...
Description
Delete existing users and groups before importing
Advanced options
Earlier groups and users will be deleted.
A new dialog appears.
Import users but don’t replace duplicates means that you will not replace the existing users.
Import users and replace duplicates means that you will replace the existing users.
Import groups but don’t replace duplicates means that you will not replace the existing groups.
Import groups and replace duplicates means that you will replace the existing groups.
Adding a group
1 On the Groups tab, click Add.
This opens the Add new group dialog box.
2 In the Group Name box, enter the name of the group. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.
3 Click OK to add the new group and close the dialog box.
4 Click OK.
Renaming a group
1 On the Groups tab, select the group to rename from the Groups on this
controller list and click Rename.
This opens the Rename Group dialog box.
2 In the Group Name box, enter the name of the group. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.
3 Click OK to rename the group and close the dialog box.
4 You will now be asked if you want the users who belong to this group to continue belonging to a group with the old name as well as the new one.
Click
Yes
No
Cancel
To
Let the users of the group be members to groups with both the old and the new name. However, the old group will no longer be defined in the controller's UAS since it is replaced by the new group.
This option might be useful if you plan to recreate the old group, or copy the user's settings to another controller who has the old group defined.
Delete the user's memberships to the old group. This is to just replace the old group name with the new one.
To cancel the change and keep the old group name, with its user's memberships.
5 Click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
399
11 Controller tab
11.3.10 User Accounts
Continued
Deleting a group
1 On the Groups tab, select the group to delete from the Groups on this
controller list and click Delete.
2 You will now be asked if you want the users who belong to this group to continue belonging to it though it is not valid.
Click
Yes
No
Cancel
To
Let the users of the group remain members to it even if it is no longer defined in the controller's UAS.
This option might be useful if you plan to recreate the group, or copy the user's settings to another controller who has the group defined.
Delete the user's memberships to the group.
Cancel the change and keep the group, with its user's memberships.
3 Click OK.
Giving grants to a group
1 On the Groups tab, select the group from the Groups on this controller list.
2 In the Controller grants/Application grants list, select the grants to give to the group.
3 Click OK.
400
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.11 UAS Grant Viewer
11.3.11 UAS Grant Viewer
Overview
The UAS Grant Viewer page displays information about the grants provided to the user currently logged in and the groups owning them.
1 In the Authenticate menu, click UAS Grant Viewer. The UAS Grants window appears.
en0900000852
Examples of common actions to perform
Action
Rename the controller
(A restart of the controller is necessary)
Necessary grants
Modify controller properties
Remote warm start
Change system parameters and load configuration files
Modify configuration
Remote warm start
Install a new system
Perform a backup
(A restart of the controller is necessary)
Restore a backup
(A restart of the controller is necessary)
Administration of installed system
Backup and save
Remote warm start
Restore a backup
Remote warm start
Load/delete modules
Create new module.
Edit code in RAPID modules
Save modules and programs to disk
Start program execution from Task Window
Load program
Load program
Edit RAPID code
Backup and save
Execute program
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
401
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
11 Controller tab
11.3.11 UAS Grant Viewer
Continued
Action
Create a new I/O signal, that is, add a new instance of the type Signal
( A restart of the controller is necessary)
Set the value of an I/O signal
Access to controller disks from File Transfer window
Necessary grants
Modify configuration
Remote warm start
I/O write access
Read access to controller disks
Write access to controller disks
Controller grants
Full access
Manage UAS settings
Execute program
Edit RAPID code
This grant includes all controller grants, also new grants added in future RobotWare versions. The grant does not include any application grants or the Safety Controller configuration grant.
Gives access to read and write the UAS configuration, that is to read, add, remove and modify UAS users and groups.
Gives access to perform the following:
• Start/step program (stop is always allowed)
• Move PP to Main
• Execute service routines
Perform ModPos and HotEdit Gives access to perform the following:
• Modify or teach positions in RAPID code (ModPos)
• During execution modify positions in RAPID code as single points or as a path (HotEdit)
• Restore ModPos/HotEdit positions to original
• Modify current value of any RAPID variable
Modify current value
I/O write access
Gives access to modify current value of any RAPID variable.
This grant is a subset of the grant Perform ModPos and
HotEdit.
Gives access to perform the following:
• Set I/O signal value
• Set signal as simulated and remove simulation
• Set I/O unit and bus as enabled/disabled
Backup and save
Restore a backup
Modify configuration
Gives access to perform a backup and to save modules, programs and configuration files. The grant gives full FTP access to the current systems BACKUP and TEMP directory.
Gives access to restore backup and perform B-start.
Gives access to modify the configuration database, that is to load configuration files, change system parameter values and add/delete instances.
Load program
Remote warm start
Gives access to load/delete modules and programs.
Gives access to perform warm start and shutdown from a remote location. No grant is required to perform warm start via a local device, as for example the FlexPendant.
Gives access to perform the following:
• Modify code in existing RAPID modules
• Frame calibration (tool, workobj)
• Commit ModPos/HotEdit positions to current values
• Rename program
Continues on next page
402
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.11 UAS Grant Viewer
Continued
Program debug
Decrease production speed
Calibration
Administration of installed systems
Read access to controller disks
Write access to controller disks
Gives access to perform the following:
• Move PP to routine
• Move PP to cursor
• HoldToRun
• Activate/deactivate RAPID tasks
• Request write access from the FlexPendant
• Enable/disable non-motion execution
Gives acces to decrease speed from 100% in Auto mode.
This grant is not required if speed is already below 100%, or controller is in Manual mode.
Gives access to perform the following:
• Fine calibrate mechanical unit
• Calibrate base frame
• Update/clear SMB data
Frame calibration (tool, wobj) requires the grant Edit RAPID code. Manual offset of mechanical unit calibration data and loading new calibration data from file require the grant
Modify configuration.
Gives access to perform the following:
• Install new system
• P-start
• I-start
• X-start
• C-start
• Select System
• Install system from device
This grant gives full FTP access, that is, the grant gives the same rights as Read access to controller disks and Write access to controller disks.
Gives external read access to controller disks. This grant is only valid for explicit disk access, for example with an
FTP client or the File Manager of RoboStudio.
It is possible, for example, to load a program from /hd0a without this grant.
Gives external write access to controller disks. This grant is only valid for explicit disk access, for example with an
FTP client or the File Manager of RoboStudio.
It is possible, for example, to save a program to the controller disk or perform a backup without this grant.
Modify controller properties
Delete log
Gives access to set controller name, controller ID and system clock.
Gives access to delete messages in the controller Event
Log.
Revolution counter update Gives access to update the revolution counter.
Safety Controller configuration Gives access to perform a configuration of the Safety Controller. This is valid only for the PSC-option and is not included in the Full access grant.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
403
11 Controller tab
11.3.11 UAS Grant Viewer
Continued
Application grants
Access to the ABB menu on
FlexPendant
Value true gives access to the ABB menu on the FlexPendant. This is the default value if a user does not have the grant.
Value false means that the user cannot access the ABB menu when the controller is in Auto mode.
The grant has no effect in Manual mode.
Log off FlexPendant user when switching to Auto mode
A user having this grant is automatically logged off from the FlexPendant when switching from Manual mode to Auto mode.
404
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.3.12 Integrated Vision
11.3.12 Integrated Vision
The Integrated Vision system provides a robust and easy‐to‐use vision system for general purpose Vision Guided Robotics (VGR) applications. The system features a complete software and hardware solution that is fully integrated with the IRC5 robot controller and the RobotStudio programming environment. The vision capability leverages on the Cognex® In-Sight® smart camera family, with embedded image processing and an Ethernet communication interface.
RobotStudio has been equipped with a vision programming environment that exposes the full palette of Cognex EasyBuilder® functionality with robust tools for part location, part inspection and identification. The RAPID programming language has been extended with dedicated instructions and error tracing for camera operation and vision guidance.
For more information, see Application manual - Integrated Vision
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
405
11 Controller tab
11.4.1 Virtual FlexPendant
11.4 Features for virtual controllers
11.4.1 Virtual FlexPendant
Opening a Virtual FlexPendant
You can open a virtual FlexPendant in one of the following ways:
1 On the Controller tab, in the Controller Tools group, click the arrow next to the FlexPendant icon, and then click Virtual FlexPendant.
2 Press the keyboard shortcut, CTRL + F5.
Note
The Virtual FlexPendant is applicable while running a virtual controller.
For information on specifying the appearance and placement of virtual
FlexPendant, see
.
406
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.4.2 Control Panel
11.4.2 Control Panel
The Control Panel dialog box
Operation Mode
Auto
Manual
Manual Full Speed
Motors On
Enable Device
Release Device
Reset Emergency Stop
This group contains the three operational modes of the controller represented by option buttons.
This option corresponds to the Auto mode on the FlexPendant.
Moving between the Auto and Manual Full Speed options must proceed via the Manual option.
This option corresponds to the Manual mode on the FlexPendant.
This option corresponds to the Manual 100% mode on the
FlexPendant.
Moving between the Auto and Manual Full Speed options must proceed via the Manual option.
Click this button to turn on the motors.
In a manual mode, click this button to simulate holding the enabling device to turn on the motors.
In a manual mode, click this button to turn off the motors.
If the controller enters the emergency stop state, click this button to reset the state.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
407
11 Controller tab
11.4.3 Shutdown
11.4.3 Shutdown
Shutting down a controller
1 In the Controller browser, select the controller to shut down.
2 Right-click the controller, and then click Shutdown.
Note
Suppose you want to restart the controller, select Warmstart. For more information on restarting a controller, see
Restart a controller on page 367 .
408
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.4.4 Set Task Frames
11.4.4 Set Task Frames
Modifying Task frame
1 On the Controller tab, in the Virtual Controller group, click Task Frames.
The Modify Task Frames dialog box appears.
2 Set the reference to World, UCS, or Local.
3 Edit the position and orientation of task frames in the Task Frames coordinate box.
4 Click Apply.
To the question, Do you also want to move the Base Frames(s)?
• Click Yes to move the base frame, but keeps its relative placement to the task frame.
• Click No. The following question appears Do you want to update the
controller configuration and restart?. Click Yes to restart the controller and update the base frame configuration of the connected VC.
Note
If there are any stationary RAPID objects (tooldata, workobjects) connected to the robot, the following question appears Do you want to keep the
positioning of all stationary RAPID objects?
• Click Yes to keep all the stationary RAPID objects in their global coordinates.
• Click No to move all the stationary RAPID objects along with the base frame (same coordinates relative to base frame).
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
409
11 Controller tab
11.4.5 Edit System
11.4.5 Edit System
Overview
The Edit System window contains functions for making and viewing advanced system configurations, such as changing controller and baseframe positions, calibrating and setting up external axes.
The left side of the Edit System window contains a hierarchical tree with which you browse to different aspects of the system. The right side contains a property sheet for the aspect selected in the tree. Below are short descriptions of the property sheets for each aspect node of the tool.
CAUTION
Editing the system may result in corrupted systems or unexpected robot behaviors. Be sure to understand the effects of the changes before proceeding.
The System node
The system node contains a box with information about the system and a button for loading new parameters (configuration files) to the system.
The task node
The task node has no property page.
The mechanism folder node
The property page of this node contains controls for mapping and setting axis and joints. It is from this page you set up external axes.
The mechanism library node
The property page of this node contains controls for changing the baseframe of the robot or mechanism. Here, too, you specify whether the baseframe is moved by another mechanism (coordinated motion), like a track external axis.
Updating the baseframe position
1 Move the mechanical unit (robot or external axis) to its new location using the ordinary tools for moving and placing objects.
2 In the Controller browser, select the controller for the mechanical unit.
3 On the Controller tab, in the Virtual Controller group, click Edit System.
This opens the System Configuration dialog.
4 Select the node for the mechanical unit in the hierarchical tree. The baseframe property sheet for the robot is now displayed.
5 Select the baseframe position values to use after restarting the robot.
Select
Controller values
To
Reset all changes to the baseframe made since the last time the system was started.
Continues on next page
410
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
11 Controller tab
11.4.5 Edit System
Continued
Select
Stored station values
To
Reset all changes made to the baseframe since the last time the station was saved.
Optionally, you can enter new values in the baseframe coordinate boxes (relative to the controller world coordinate system).
Use current station values
Read and use the current location of the baseframe.
Optionally, you can enter new values in the baseframe coordinate boxes (relative to the controller world coordinate system).
6 Click OK.
Note
For information on adding a track from the Edit System tool, see
Track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 on page 85
.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
411
11 Controller tab
11.4.6 Encoder Unit
11.4.6 Encoder Unit
Configuring an Conveyor Encoder Unit
1 Click Encoder Unit.
The Configure Conveyor Encoder Unit dialog box appears.
Alternatively, the Configure Conveyor Encoder Unit dialog box can be opened from the Paths&Targets browser. Right-click a station in the browser, select
Configuration, and then click Encoder Unit.
2 Select CNV1 from the Mechanical Unit list.
3 In the Parameters box, enter the values for Maximum Distance, Minimum
Distance, Queue Tracking Distance and Start Window Width.
Note
If any of the parameter values are changed, the controller must be restarted.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Yes to restart the controller.
412
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.1 Overview of the RAPID tab
12 RAPID tab
12.1 Overview of the RAPID tab
The RAPID tab provides tools and functionalities for creating, editing, and managing
RAPID programs. You can manage RAPID programs which are online on a real controller, offline on a virtual controller, or standalone programs which are not part of a system.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
413
12 RAPID tab
12.2 Synchronize to Station
12.2 Synchronize to Station
Synchronizing to the station
1 On the RAPID tab, in the Access group, click the arrow next to the
Synchronize icon, and then click Synchronize to Station.
2 Select the paths to be synchronized to the station from the list.
3 Click OK.
The message Synchronization to Station completed is displayed in the
Output window.
Note
This function is also present in the Controller group on the Home tab.
414
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.3 Synchronize to VC
12.3 Synchronize to VC
Synchronizing to the virtual controller
1 On the RAPID tab, in the Access group, click the arrow next to the
Synchronize icon, and then click Synchronize to VC.
2 Select the elements to be synchronized to the VC from the list.
3 Click OK.
The message Synchronization to VC completed is displayed in the Output window.
Note
This function is also present in the Controller group on the Home tab.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
415
12 RAPID tab
12.4 Edit RAPID code
12.4 Edit RAPID code
Editing RAPID code using RAPID Editor
The RAPID editor enables you to view and edit programs loaded into a controller, both real and virtual. The integrated RAPID editor is useful for editing all robot tasks other than robot motion. With the RAPID editor you can edit the RAPID code of the program modules and system modules. Each module you open appears in an editor window of its own, where you can add or edit RAPID code.
For examples of using the RAPID editor, see
Examples of using the RAPID editor on page 440 .
General RAPID Editor features
The following are the general features of the RAPID Editor:
• Read-only documents - If the document is read-only (for example, due to lack of mastership), then the background of the editor area will be light gray instead of the normal white. Typing in an editor that is in the read-only state results in a dialog asking you whether RobotStudio should acquire write access.
• Syntax highlighting - Text is highlighted in different colors depending on their token classification (such as keyword, identifier and so on). You can configure these colors in the File tab, under Options:Robotics:RAPID Editor.
For more information, see
Options:Robotics:RAPID Editor on page 199
.
In addition to token classification, the editor also shows different colors for built-in and installed identifiers (such as MoveL) and also for identifiers declared in user code.
• Quick-Info tooltips - When you hover the mouse pointer over a symbol (such as a data declaration or procedure call), a tooltip is displayed describing the symbol. For many built-in symbols (such as MoveJ) a short description is also displayed. For symbols corresponding to a data declaration, the current value is also displayed.
• Context-sensitive help - Pressing F1 when the cursor is on a RAPID programming construct, such as an instruction, opens the related section in the RAPID reference manual, instead of the main RobotStudio help.
• Auto-indent cursor on return - When you press Enter, the cursor is automatically indented by the appropriate amount on the following line. For example, after typing a PROC header, pressing ENTER will indent the cursor one tab (or the corresponding number of spaces, depending on settings).
• Completion list - When you type in code in the editor, a pop-menu which lists possible code suggestion maybe displayed depending on the kind of
RAPID code construct being written. The suggestions listed also depend on where in the document the cursor is.
Pressing comma (,), semi-colon (;), colon (:), equal sign (=), Spacebar, Tab, or Enter keys automatically inserts the selected item. Press Esc to cancel the list.
Continues on next page
416
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.4 Edit RAPID code
Continued
• Auto-completion - After typing or completing a procedure call (such as
MoveJ), pressing the Tab key will fill in all required parameters. Note that this is only available for certain built-in procedures, such as those listed in the Insert Instruction menu.
• Argument information - While typing in procedure calls and function calls, tooltips showing argument information are displayed.
• Collapsible regions - Certain regions of the code can be collapsed. For example, Data declarations area, routines, IF/WHILE/FOR statements and so on.
• Error highlighting - Red squiggly lines appear under errors in the code. All syntax errors and a subset of semantic errors are indicated in this manner.
• Zooming in and out - In the RAPID editor you can zoom in and zoom out of the code display. Click the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons at the top right corner of the RAPID editor window to zoom in and zoom out.
Tip
The Zoom in Zoom out feature is also present in the RAPID Tasks, Rapid
Editor, Configuration Editor, Event viewer, and I/O windows.
• Cut, copy, paste and drag and drop - These standard commands for clipboard handling of text are supported.
• Undo and redo - Standard commands for undo and redo operations are supported.
• Selection modes - You can select text by character, row and column.
• Line numbers - Line numbers for the RAPID code lines are displayed in the left margin of the editor.
• Keyboard shortcuts - For keyboard shortcuts in the RAPID Editor, see
.
Starting the RAPID Editor
To open a RAPID module in the RAPID editor, in the Controller browser right-click on a RAPID module, and then click RAPID Editor.
The RAPID code of the module opens in the editor window.
Tip
You can view the graphical layout, without closing the editor, by clicking the graphics window tab.
Editing a RAPID program
The Edit group om the RAPID tab has commands which help in editing the lines of code in the RAPID Editor. Other than standard functions such as Cut, Copy, and
Paste, the following functions are present in the Edit group:
• Comment – To comment out selected lines
Uncomment – To uncomment commented lines
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
417
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
12 RAPID tab
12.4 Edit RAPID code
Continued
The comment and uncomment buttons in the ribbon will add/remove comment characters (“!”) at the beginning of the selected line(s).
• Indent – To increase the indent of selected line(s) by four white spaces
Unindent – To decrease the indent of selected line(s) by four white spaces
The indent and unindent buttons in the ribbon will move the selected code line(s) one tab position to the right/left.
• Format Document - Auto-formats the active document by arranging the spaces and tabs in the RAPID code.
• Uppercase Keywords - To change RAPID keywords from lowercase to uppercase. This function operates on the current document.
• Format Selection – This function is similar to Format Document, but with the difference that it operates on currently selected text.
• Convert Spaces to Tabs - Converts consecutive spaces to the corresponding number of tabs. This function operates on the current selection.
• Convert Tabs to Spaces - Does the opposite of function above.
Note
To make formatting easier, the tabs and white spaces can be indicated by arrows and dots, respectively. To enable this go to Options:Robotics:RAPID
Editor (
Options:Robotics:RAPID Editor on page 199 ) and then select the
Show whitespace check box.
By default a Tab consists of four whitespaces. To change this, go to
Options:Robotics:RAPID Editor and set the Tab size as your require.
Edited lines are denoted by change bars which remain until the edits are applied.
Also, the RAPID Editor’s tab sports an asterisk (*) until the edits are applied.
Adding code snippets
Code Snippets are pieces of code which you can insert into the RAPID Editor. To view and select a code snippet, in the Insert group, click Snippet.
The list which appears show two kinds of code snippets:
• Predefined code snippets
• User defined code snippets
The following are the predefined code snippets in RobotStudio:
• Array of num, 2x2x4
• Array of num, 2x4
• Array of num, 2x4x2
• Array of num, 4x2
• Module header
• Procedure with parameters
• Procedure with error handler
• Robtarget declaration
• Tooldata declaration
Continues on next page
418
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.4 Edit RAPID code
Continued
• Workobject declaration
You can also create your own code snippets or save a section of existing code from the RAPID editor as a code snippet. Such user created code snippets are also listed along with the predefined snippets.
To save a section of existing code, from the RAPID editor, as a code snippet:
1 Select the code you wish to save as a snippet.
2 In the Insert group, click the arrow next to the Snippet icon, and then click
Save Selection as Snippet.
The Save As dialog box appears. Specify a name for the snippet and save it. The RobotStudio .snippet files are saved in the following folder.
C:\<Documents and Settings>\<user name>\RobotStudio\Code Snippets
To insert a snippet in the RAPID editor, click the arrow next to the Snippet icon, and then click the required snippet from the listed snippets.
Note
The folder <Documents and Settings> may be configured with different names, for example, Data. It may also be translated on localized versions of Windows.
Snippets can also be edited in an XML editor such as Microsoft Visual Studio.
For information on creating customized code snippets, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/.
Inserting instructions
To insert a predefined instruction into the code:
1 Place the cursor at the required point in the RAPID code.
2 In the Insert group, click Instruction.
A list of pre-defined instructions is shown.
The instruction is inserted into the code where the cursor is placed.
RobotStudio generates and inserts default arguments to the instruction, using similar rules as the FlexPendant.
Applying and verifying the edits
To apply the changes made in the editor to the system and also to check the program go to the Controller group, and click the arrow next to the Apply icon.
Then:
• To apply only the changes in made in the module, currently shown in the editor, click Apply Changes.
Alternatively, you can also directly click the Apply icon
• To apply the changes made in all modified modules, click Apply All.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
419
12 RAPID tab
12.4 Edit RAPID code
Continued
Note
The Apply commands are enabled only if there are changes waiting to be applied.
When possible, RobotStudio will try to commit the changes without losing the program pointer. If this is not possible, you will be asked if it is OK to lose the program pointer.
To verify the syntactic and semantic correctness of the modules, in the Test and
Debug group, click Check Program.
420
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.5 Find and replace RAPID code
12.5 Find and replace RAPID code
Overview
The Find group, on the RAPID tab contains commands for performing Find and
Replace actions on the code in the RAPID editor.
Quick Find
Enter the search string in the Quick find box and then press Enter or F3. If an instance is found, it is highlighted. Press F3 again to search for the next instance.
Go to line
Enter a line number in the Go to line box and press Enter. The cursor moves to the corresponding line in the RAPID editor.
Jump To
The Jump To list has an item for each routine and data declaration in the program module. Click an item to move to its location in the code.
Find or Replace
Click Find/Replace to open the Find/Replace dialog box. This dialog box provides standard find/replace functionality in addition to the following:
Use the Look in list box to specify where to look for in a find/replace operation.
You can choose to search in the Current Document, Current System or in a folder on your PC (you can browse to a folder to specify it).
The Search Results window displays the results of a Find operation. Double-click a search result to go to the corresponding instance in the RAPID editor. If the instance is from a module which is not in the RAPID editor, then the module automatically opens in the editor.
Go To Definition
The Go To Definition command is enabled for an identifier in the RAPID Editor context menu if the source code for the corresponding symbol definition is available.
Click Go To Definition to move the cursor to (and select) the corresponding symbol definition. This action detects symbol definitions such as routine declarations, data declarations and record definitions.
Find Unused References
Click Find unused references in Task to see all data declarations in the task of the active module document that are not used anywhere. The results are shown in the Search Results window. Click Find unused references in Module to see unused data declarations in the current module.
Find All References
The Find All References command is enabled for identifiers in the editor code.
For a given identifier, click Find All References to search through the entire task for uses of the same identifier (including its definition). Note that this is not just a
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
421
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
12 RAPID tab
12.5 Find and replace RAPID code
Continued string search. It takes RAPID scoping rules into account. For PERS and syncident data, this function searches the other tasks for a matching global symbol and return the uses of those.
422
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.6 Manage RAPID modules
12.6 Manage RAPID modules
Managing file based RAPID modules
File based RAPID modules can be opened in the editor in four different ways:
• Using the Open command on the File tab
• Using the New:RAPID Module File command on the File tab. For more information, see
Creating a new RAPID module file on page 192 .
• Double-clicking a module in the File browser of the RAPID tab. For more information on the File browser, see
Manage RAPID files and backups on page 426 .
• Right-clicking the Files nodes and selecting Open in the File browser of the
RAPID tab. For more information on the File browser, see
Manage RAPID files and backups on page 426
.
Tip
For file based modules, the standard file commands are applicable: Save/Save
As will save the module; Open will open a module and Close will close the module.
The Apply Changes command is disabled for file based modules. It is applicable only for controller based modules.
Creating a new RAPID module
1 On RAPID tab, in the Controller browser, right-click a task and then click
New Module.
The Create Module dialog box opens.
2 Enter a module name.
3 Select the Module type as Program or System, as required.
4 Select one of the following options:
• No Step-In - The module cannot be entered during step-wise execution.
• Read-only - The module cannot be modified.
• View-only - the module cannot be modified, but the attribute can be removed.
5 Click Create.
Loading a RAPID module
1 On RAPID tab, in the Controller browser, right-click a task and then click
Load Module.
2 Browse to and select the module to be loaded to your station, and then click
Open.
Saving a RAPID module as another
1 On RAPID tab, in the Controller browser, right-click a module and then click
Save Module As.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
423
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
12 RAPID tab
12.6 Manage RAPID modules
Continued
2 Browse to the location where the new module is to be saved and then click
Save.
424
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.7 Edit RAPID data
12.7 Edit RAPID data
RAPID Data Editor overview
The RAPID Data Editor allows you direct access to RAPID data values, which you can view and edit.
To open the RAPID Data Editor, on the RAPID tab go to the Controller browser, right-click a RAPID module, and then click RAPID Data Editor. This opens the Data window which shows the data declarations in that particular module.
Data declarations are grouped according to their data types. All data declarations belonging to a data type are shown in a table below it. Each row corresponds to a data declaration and shows the contents of the declaration.
Using the RAPID Data Editor
• Editing the values of a row opens the changed value in the RAPID Editor window. The new value is shown in both the Data editor and also the RAPID editor. This means that the changes made in the RAPID data editor are seen in the RAPID editor, and vice-versa.
Tip
A asterisk (*) on the window tab indicates that the changes have not been saved.
• You can select multiple cells and edit them together.
• You can create, edit or delete a data declaration from the RAPID Data Editor.
• To delete a data declaration, select the row and click the Delete button beside it.
• To add a new declaration, click New Declaration next to the required data type. This adds a new row to the table below it having some default properties and values, which can be edited. However, you cannot add a declaration of a data type that is not already present in the module. In such as case you need to manually add the declaration to the module using the RAPID Editor.
Note
The RAPID Data Editor only shows data declarations that contain editable values.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
425
12 RAPID tab
12.8 Manage RAPID files and backups
12.8 Manage RAPID files and backups
Managing RAPID files
In the Files browser, right-click the File node and then click Open. The Open File dialog box appears, using which you can browse to and open system module
(*.sys), RAPID modules (*.mod), and Configuration files (*.cfg) which are residing on your PC or on a network.
Upon opening a RAPID or system module file, it opens in the RAPID editor. The system parameters file (*.cfg) open in a notepad-like editor but is unlike the RAPID editor. To save the changes made in an editor, click the Save button on the Quick
Access Toolbar.
Note
When you open standalone RAPID modules, the editor may show the code as having syntax errors if the variable declarations exist in another module.
Managing system backups
Right-click Backup and click Browse, to browse to and open system backups.
The structure of the backup is reflected in the Files browser under the Backups node. There is one node for each task defined in the system. The RAPID modules of each task are shown as its child nodes in the tree view. The editor will find data declared in other modules and correctly mark the code as being syntactically and semantically correct.
The contents of the HOME folder are shown in a separate folder. RAPID modules of the HOME folder will be edited in the standalone mode, which means that the editor will not find data declared in other modules. The reason is that the editor cannot know in which context (task) the module should be treated.
The SYSPAR folder will show the configuration files.
Note
There is no syntax check or intellisense for editing configuration files.
426
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.9.1 Manage RAPID programs
12.9 Manage RAPID code on the controller
12.9.1 Manage RAPID programs
Loading a RAPID program
To load a RAPID program to a station:
1 On the RAPID tab, in the Controller group, click Program icon and then select Load Program.
Alternatively, in the Controller browser, right-click the active task under the station, and click Load Program.
2 In the Open dialog box that appears, browse to the location of the program to be loaded to your station and click Open.
Saving a program
1 On the RAPID tab, in the Controller group, click Program icon and then click
Save Program As.
Alternatively, in the Controller browser, right-click the active task under the station, and select Save Program As.
2 In the Save As dialog box that appears, browse to the location where you want to save your program, and click Save.
Renaming a program
1 On the RAPID tab, in the Controller group, click Program icon and then click
Rename Program.
Alternatively, in the Controller browser, right-click the active task under the station, and select Rename Program.
2 In the Rename dialog box that appears, enter a new name for your program, and click Ok.
Deleting a program
1 On the RAPID tab, in the Controller group, click Program and select Delete
Program.
A confirmation dialog is displayed.
2 Click Yes.
The selected program is deleted.
To delete the entire program under a task in a station, in the Controller group, click
Program and then click Delete Program.
Alternatively, in the Controller browser, right-click the task under the station, and then click Delete Program.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
427
12 RAPID tab
12.9.2 RAPID Tasks
12.9.2 RAPID Tasks
Overview
The RAPID Tasks window shows the configured tasks of the selected controller and their state, in a tabular form. To open the RAPID Tasks window, in the
Controller group click RAPID Tasks.
The following table describes the columns displayed for each task.
Task Name
Type
Mechanical Unit
Run Mode
State
TrustLevel
Program Name
Module Name
Routine Name
Task in Foreground
The task name, as defined by the controller configuration in topic Controller, type Task.
For information on topic Controller type Task, see the Technical
Reference Manual for System Parameters.
A task can be of type Normal, Static, or SemiStatic. This is defined by the controller configuration in topic Controller, type
Task.
For information on topic Controller type Task, see the Technical
Reference Manual for System Parameters.
Shows which mechanical unit group is used for the task. This is defined by the controller configuration in topic Controller, type
Task
For information on topic Controller type Task, see the Technical
Reference Manual for System Parameters.
Defined by the Run Mode setting in RobotStudio. For more information on Run Mode, see
Run mode of the controller on page 430 .
Displays the task execution state. A task can be in state Ready,
Running, or Stopped.
• Ready: The program has no PP (program pointer). To set the program pointer, use the Program Pointer menu of the
RAPID Tab. Alternatively, use the FlexPendant.
• Running: The program is running.
• Stopped: The program has stopped.
For more information on the Program Pointer (PP), see
Using the Program Pointer on page 435
.
Handles the system behavior when a SemiStatic or Static task is stopped or not executable.
The possible values here are NoSafety, SysFail, SysHalt or
SysStop.
A SemiStatic or Static task can only be stopped if it has Trust-
Level as NoSafety. The TrustLevel is defined by the controller configuration in topic Controller, type Task.
For information on topic Controller type Task, see the Technical
Reference Manual for System Parameters.
The name of the program in the specific task.
The current module name.
The current routine name.
Use this to set priorities between tasks. The current task will execute only if the foreground task is idle. This is defined by the controller configuration in topic Controller, type Task.
Continues on next page
428
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.9.2 RAPID Tasks
Continued
Task execution state
A task can be activated, started, and stopped from the Controller browser, with the following limitations:
• Only Normal tasks can be activated and deactivated. Background tasks will always be automatically activated.
• Background tasks of type Static and SemiStatic can only be started and stopped if they have TrustLevel NoSafety.
For detailed information about the different TrustLevel values, see the
Technical reference manual - system parameters.
• You need to have write access and the appropriate grant.
• The limitations concerning task execution that hold for the FlexPendant also apply to RobotStudio.
The following table shows cases where task execution state cannot be changed.
If...
RobotStudio gives a message that informs the user that...
the user does not have the grant Execute program or Full access the operation is not possible.
the user changes from manual mode to automatic mode, or vice versa, the user loses the write access and the operation is not possible.
the motors are in off state the Start operation is not possible.
Note
It is not possible to override the controller’s safety system, that is, you cannot stop a background task (Static and SemiStatic) that has the TrustLevel set to a value other than NoSafety.
For detailed information about the different TrustLevel values, see Technical reference manual - system parameters.
Activating, starting and stopping tasks
To activate a task, right-click the task in the Controller browser and then turn on the Active command.
If the prerequisites are met, you can operate the task, such as start and stop the task, move the program pointer to main and set the run mode.
To start a task, right-click the task in the Controller browser and then click Start
Task. You can start Normal tasks, but you can only start a Static or SemiStatic task if the TrustLevel is set to NoSafety.
CAUTION
When starting a task, the manipulator axes may move very quickly and sometimes in unexpected ways! Make sure no personnel is near the manipulator arm!
To stop a task, right-click the task in the Controller browser and then click Stop
Task. You can stop Normal tasks, but you can only stop a Static or SemiStatic task if the TrustLevel is set to NoSafety.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
429
12 RAPID tab
12.9.3 Run Mode
12.9.3 Run Mode
Run mode of the controller
The Run Mode indicates the mode of the controller. It has the following two options:
• Continuous
• Single
You can set the run mode of the controller in the following ways:
• On the RAPID tab, in the Controller group, click Run Mode and then click either Continuous or Single.
• This method is only applicable to virtual controllers in a station.
On the Simulation tab, in the Configure group, click Simulation Setup and then select Continuous or Single in the Setup Simulation dialog box.
430
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.9.4 Adjust Robtargets
12.9.4 Adjust Robtargets
Overview
The Adjust Robtargets feature helps in recalculating and changing the robtarget data (tooldata and workobject data) while maintaining the joint angles of the robot.
The robtarget data related to the specified source tooldata and workobject will be adjusted for usage with the new tooldata and workobject.
Prerequisites
• You should have a controller (virtual or real) running with one or more modules containing procedures with a sequence of move instructions expressed with a defined tool and workobject.
• You should have RobotStudio Premium license to use this feature.
• The Execute button of the feature Adjust Robtargets will be enabled only if the selected tool data or workobject data have the same properties, such as robhold, ufprog, ufmec and so on.
Note
Inline targets, arrays, event records, and offsets are not supported. Relative tool is also not supported. Circular move instruction (MoveC) is supported.
Using Adjust Robtargets
Note
Take a backup copy of your modules before adjusting your robtargets.
The following procedure describes the Adjust Robtargets feature in RobotStudio:
1 On the RAPID tab, in the Controller browser, select a RAPID task or module under the RAPID icon. Then click Adjust Robtargets on the RAPID tab.
Alternatively, right-click the RAPID task or module in the Controller browser, and then click Adjust Robtargets in the context menu.
The Robtarget Adjust dialog box appears.
Note
You can access Adjust Robtargets from the Controller tab also. Right-click the RAPID task or module in the Controller browser and then click Adjust
Robtargets in the context menu.
2 If the module you want to adjust is selected, then go to Step 4. Otherwise continue with the next step.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
431
12 RAPID tab
12.9.4 Adjust Robtargets
Continued
3 Select a task from the Task drop-down list and module from the Module drop-down list.
Note
In the Module drop-down list, you can either select a particular module or
<ALL> to update.
4 Select the source robtarget data (that is, the data defined in the selected task) from Old tooldata and Old wobjdata drop-down list.
5 Select the destination robtarget data (that is, new tooldata and workobject) from New tooldata and New wobjdata drop-down list.
6 Click Execute.
The Execute button is enabled only if source robtarget data (that is, old tooldata and workobject) and destination robtarget data (that is, new tooldata and workobject) are different.
The module searches for move instructions that use the specified old tooldata or workobject and recalculates the robtarget data for the new tooldata and workobject.
For example,
1 Select "tool0" as the source tool and "wobj0" as the source workobject.
2 Select "toolb" as the new tool and "wobjb"as the new workobject.
3 Click Execute.
Robtargets of "tool0" and "wobj0" will be replaced with re-calculated robtargets which correspond to the same robot configuration (all joint angles will be the same), and with the new tool "toolb" and "wobjb". Note that both the tooldata and the wobjdata are replaced independently.
Update instruction
By default, the Update instruction check box is selected. This means that move instructions using the specified source (old) tooldata and workobject will be updated to use the target (new) tooldata and workobject in addition to recalculating the robtargets.
If the Update instruction check box is cleared, the robtargets will be recalculated, but the move instructions will not be updated. They will still use the source tooldata and workobject.
This feature is useful after the calibration of tooldata and workobject. After calibration, you might still want to use the old names of the tooldata and workobject, but update their values and recalculate the robtargets accordingly. The following sample procedure illustrates how this can be accomplished.
Sample procedure
Prerequisite: RAPID module with robtargets and move instructions that use uncalibrated tooldata tool1, and workobject wobj1.
1 Calibrate your tooldata tool1, and workobject wobj1. Store the new values in tool1_calib and wobj1_calib, respectively. Keep the old values of the uncalibrated tooldata and workobject in tool1, and wobj1.
Continues on next page
432
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Limitations
12 RAPID tab
12.9.4 Adjust Robtargets
Continued
2 Open the Adjust robtargets tool and clear the Update instruction check box.
Select your RAPID module, enter tool1, and wobj1 as your old tooldata and wobjdata, and tool1_calib, and wobj1_calib as the new tooldata and wobjdata, respectively.
3 Click Execute, and apply the changes to the controller from the RAPID Editor
4 In the RAPID Editor, rename your tooldata tool1 to tool1_uncalib, and tool1_calib to tool1 and apply the changes to the controller. Also, perform the same for wobj1.
Now, your robtargets are updated to match the calibrated values of tool1 and wobj1.
If a robtarget is used more than once but with different tools or workobjects, then a message Target is referenced is displayed in the output window.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
433
12 RAPID tab
12.10.1 Commands for testing and debugging
12.10 Test and debug
12.10.1 Commands for testing and debugging
The Test and Debug group on the RAPID tab consists of the following commands.
Command
Start
Stop
Step over
Step in
Description
Starts the execution of all normal RAPID tasks in the system.
Stops the execution of all normal RAPID tasks in the system.
Starts and executes one statement in all normal tasks in the system.
Starts and executes into a routine, while stopping at the beginning of the routine.
Step out
Executes all remaining statements of the current routine, and stops after the call to the current routine.
Breakpoint : Ignore breakpoints
Ignores all breakpoints during simulation.
Toggles a breakpoint at the cursor.
Breakpoint : Toggle breakpoint
Check Program
Verifies the syntactic and semantic correctness of the RAPID modules.
Other tools such as the Program Pointer (PP) and the RAPID Profiler, which aid in testing and debugging RAPID code, are explained in detail in the following sections.
434
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.10.2 Using the Program Pointer
12.10.2 Using the Program Pointer
How the Program Pointer helps
During program execution, the Program Pointer (PP) points to the line of code that is currently executing.
The function Follow Program Pointer keeps the program pointer visible during program execution by automatically scrolling the RAPID editor window according to the movements of the program pointer. To enable the function, in the Test and
Debug group on the RAPID tab, click the arrow next to the Program Pointer icon and then select Follow Program Pointer.
Note
While the program executes, you can see the program pointer jump across modules only if those modules are already open in the editor. Hence, you can decide in which modules you wish to follow the program pointer in, and keep them open.
The other commands in the Program Pointer menu are:
• Go To Program Pointer – To show the current location of the program pointer in the RAPID editor
• Go To Motion Pointer – To show the current location of the motion pointer in the RAPID editor
• To set the program pointer at a particular line code or code segment and then start program execution from that point, use the Set Program Pointer options. You can choose from the following options:
Set Program Pointer to Main in all tasks
Set Program Pointer to Cursor
Set Program Pointer to Routine
Maintaining the Program Pointer
The RAPID code can only be edited when the controller is not running, that is when it is in state Ready or Stopped. In Ready state the program pointer is not set, but in Stopped state the Program Pointer is set to a specific location of the program.
For limited changes to the RAPID code of a controller in Stopped state, the current location of the program pointer can be maintained. After such an edit you can resume program execution from where it was without having to reset the program pointer.
Note
If the edit is too large for the program pointer to be maintained then a warning message is displayed to convey this.
The program pointer cannot be maintained, for example, when editing the line of code at which the program pointer is located. Editing that line of code results in
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
435
12 RAPID tab
12.10.2 Using the Program Pointer
Continued resetting the program pointer. In effect, the program will start from the beginning when the controller is started after the edit.
WARNING
Starting program execution after the program pointer has been reset will cause the robot to move along the shortest path from its current location to the first point of the program.
436
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.10.3 Using the RAPID Profiler
12.10.3 Using the RAPID Profiler
What's RAPID Profiler
The RAPID Profiler analyzes the execution times on procedure level, identifies critical procedures and reports these during the execution of RAPID code.
Prerequisites for using the RAPID Profiler
• You should have RobotStudio Premium license to use this feature.
• You should have a controller with one or more executable tasks running.
• When using the RAPID Profiler with a real controller, you require more than
25 MB of free controller disk space.
Note
The RAPID Profiler will automatically stop if either of the following controller events is generated by the controller. This is to avoid disturbing the robot operation.
• 20192, Disk memory low (less than 25 MB free storage left)
• 20179, Disk memory critically low (less than 10 MB free storage left, program execution is stopped)
How to use the RAPID Profiler
To use the RAPID Profiler:
1 Set the Program Pointer at a desired point in the RAPID code from where you wish to start your analysis. For example, set the program pointer to Main in all tasks.
2 On the RAPID tab, in the Test and Debug group, click the arrow next to the
RAPID Profiler icon and then click Start.
3 Start the simulation.
In the background the RAPID Spy feature logs the data about the program’s execution.
4 After the program execution ends, click the arrow next to the RAPID Profiler icon and then click Stop.
5 On the RAPID tab, in the Test and Debug group, click the arrow next to the
RAPID Profiler icon and then click Analyze.
The RAPID Profiler window appears, showing the results of the analysis.
Click Export to Excel to export the results to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file.
To view the log file of the analysis, click the arrow next to the RAPID Profiler icon and then click Open log file.
Execution of the Rapid Profiler based on RobotWare version
Depending on the RobotWare version, the RAPID Profiler is executed in one of the following methods:
• For controller systems with RobotWare versions prior to 5.14, the RAPID instructions SpyStart and SpyStop must be inserted at the RAPID execution
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
437
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
12 RAPID tab
12.10.3 Using the RAPID Profiler
Continued start and end, respectively. When the program is run, a Spy log file is generated. You can open the file for analysis by the RAPID Profiler. Use the
RAPID Profiler menu option Browse for Spy log to open the log file.
For more information about Spy instructions, see Technical reference manual
- RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types.
Note
When the RAPID Profiler is used to analyze a log file, there is no information about in which procedure the SpyStart command is executed. The triggering procedure defaults to <SpyStart Procedure>.
• For RobotWare version 5.14 or later, the log file can be generated automatically. Activate the RAPID Profiler and run the program of the controller. When the program execution stops, the results are presented to the user.
438
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.11 RAPID Watch window
12.11 RAPID Watch window
Viewing variables and I/O signals
The RAPID Watch window displays the following details of selected variables and
I/O signals during program execution.
Column
Name
Value
Type
Source
Description
Displays variable name
Displays variable value
Displays type of datatype
Displays system name
You can view and edit the RAPID data of the variables in the RAPID watch window, both during program execution and when the controller is stopped. However, you can only view, but not edit, I/O signals in the watch window.
To view a variable or I/O signal in the RAPID Watch window, you need to first add it to the window. In the RAPID editor, right-click the required variable or I/O signal, and then click Add Watch.
By default, during program execution the values of the variables are automatically refreshed in the watch window every 2 seconds. You can also manually refresh the values.
To enable or disable automatic refresh, in the context menu, select or clear the
Auto Refresh command.
To do a manual refresh, in the context menu, click Refresh (keyboard shortcut F5).
Note
CONST variables cannot be edited.
On closing RobotStudio, the variables and signals added to the watch window are removed.
On the RAPID Watch window, right-click to display the following context menu:
Item
Copy
Paste
Delete
Select All
Clear All
Refresh
Auto Refresh
Used for
Copying the value
Pasting the copied value
Deleting the watch item
Selecting all the items
Clearing all the variables and signals from the watch window
Manually updating the values of the variables and signals
Automatically refreshing the values displayed in the watch window at regular intervals
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
439
12 RAPID tab
12.12 Examples of using the RAPID editor
12.12 Examples of using the RAPID editor
Overview
This section provides examples illustrating several useful functions of the RAPID editor including IntelliSense, code snippets and the watch window.
Editing
Assume that you wish to create an infinite loop whereby the controller receives commands from a line PLC. The controller communicates with the PLC using digital
I/O signals, but you have forgotten the exact name of the function that reads an input signal.
1 Using code snippets, create a new procedure.
2 On the Rapid tab, in the Insert group, click Instruction.
A drop-down list of available instructions is displayed.
3 On the Instruction menu, point to I/O, and then click DOutput.
4 Press the spacebar to display the parameter information ToolTip. As you enter parameters, the ToolTip is updated, displaying the current argument in bold. The ToolTip is closed either by concluding the instruction with a semicolon (;), or by pressing ESC.
Tip
At any time you may press CTRL + Spacebar to complete what you have begun typing. This will either bring up a narrowed-down list of selectable parameters, or, if only one selection remains, will automatically complete your text.
Tip
After typing the name of an identifier or an instruction, press the TAB key to automatically fill in the default arguments or parameters. For instructions, the last used argument of each type will be used.
Searching
Assume that you have programmed targets and motion instructions and synchronized them to the controller. The number of targets is large, so you decide to distribute them among several modules.
You may have forgotten in which module your main procedure is found.
1 Press CTRL + F to bring up the Find and Replace dialog box.
2 In the Find what box, type "PROC main". Since no modules are open, in the
Look In list, select Current System, and then click Find All.
The search result is displayed in the Search Results window.
3 Double-click the line matching your search to launch the RAPID editor.
Continues on next page
440
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
12 RAPID tab
12.12 Examples of using the RAPID editor
Continued
Adding breakpoints
Now that you have finished editing, you may want to test your loop and add some breakpoints.
1 Place the insertion on the new statement and press F9 to set a breakpoint.
2 Ensure that the Ignore breakpoints button in the editor toolbar is not clicked, and click the Play button on the Simulation toolbar.
The program will run and then stop at the breakpoint.
3 To run the program statement by statement, click the Step over button in the editor toolbar.
Executing
You might want to debug your loop or monitor a specific variable.
1 In the RAPID editor browser, right-click the procedure you want to set as entry point, and then click Set Program Pointer to Routine.
2 In the RAPID tab, click the Play button.
The program will run and then stop at the next breakpoint.
3 Select a variable for monitoring and drag it to the watch window.
4 Restart the loop and monitor the variable at each iteration.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
441
This page is intentionally left blank
13 Add-Ins tab
13 Add-Ins tab
Overview of the Add-Ins tab
The Add-Ins tab contains the control for PowerPacs, Migrate backup and Gearbox
Heat Prediction. The Add-Ins browser shows the installed PowerPacs, General add-ins.
For instruction on building General add-ins visit the ABB Robotics Developer Center web site at http://developercenter.robotstudio.com.
General add-ins are loaded from the following folder on your PC:
C:\Program
Files (x86)\Common Files\ABB Industrial
IT\RoboticsIT\RobotStudio\Addins
Note
For the RobotStudio 5.15 64-bit edition:
• PowerPacs, Visual Studio Tools for Applications, and any customized add-ins that use PC-SDK are not supported.
• Add-ins will be loaded from the following folder:
C:\Program Files
(x86)\ABB Industrial IT\RoboticsIT\RobotStudio
5.15\Bin64\Addins
This is the path on a PC with Microsoft Windows 7 64-bit English version, on default installation. For customized installations and for operating system versions in other languages, this path may differ.
Gearbox Heat Prediction
Overview
The Gearbox Heat Prediction Tool is an add-in for RobotStudio which helps predict heat problems in the gearboxes. When the temperature is above a predefined value, you can adjust the cycle to reduce the temperature or order a fan that can cool down the gear.
Robots with compact gearboxes have a risk of getting overheated under certain circumstances. The gearbox temperature is supervised by Service Information
System (SIS). It is a software function within the robot controller, that simplifies maintenance of the robot system. It supervises the operating time and mode of the robot, and alerts the operator when a maintenance activity is scheduled. It also supervises large robots from damaging the motors during high load operations with a safety shutdown.
The temperature supervision is based on an algorithm that predicts the stationary temperature of the gearboxes and motors of the robot. The algorithm predicts the heat based on the character of the robot motion and also the room temperature.
Intensive motion (high average speed and /or high average torque and/or short wait time) will increase the heat of the gearbox and motors.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
443
13 Add-Ins tab
Continued
To avoid overheat, SIS stops the robot if the temperature becomes too high. For large robots, there is an option to add a cooling fan to axis 1, 2 and sometimes axis 3 to allow the robot to run even with a heavy duty program.
Note
Gearbox Heat Prediction is not supported for Tool and External axis.
Prerequisites
1 RobotStudio 5.14.02 or later.
2 RobotWare 5.14.01 or later.
3 RobotStudio station with controller having a programmed cycle that includes payload for the robot.
Calculating the Gearbox Heat
Use the following procedure for predicting the heat generated by the robot:
1 Create a new station or open a saved station. The Gearbox heat button is now visible in the Add-Ins tab.
2 In the Add-Ins tab, click Gearbox Heat. The Gearbox Heat Prediction window opens.
3 In the Add-Ins tab, select Enabled to enable the Gearbox Heat Prediction tool .
Note
For a manipulator without compact gear, Gearbox Heat Prediction is disabled.
4 Run a simulation.
Note
If the RobotStudio license is expired, the Play button in the Simulation tab will be disabled. As such, you will be unable to run the simulation from the
Simulation tab. In such a scenario, use the Play button which will now be visible in the Gearbox Heat Prediction tab window to run the simulation.
Note
Continues on next page
444
The data is recorded during the simulation only if the Gearbox Heat tool is enabled. After the recording is finished, you can perform another recording or perform a calculation for heat related problems.
5 In Cycles, define the behavior of the cycle for predicting the heat generated by the robot:
• Continuous: Select this option if you want the robot to continuously calculate the predictions without waiting time between two consecutive cycles.
• Number of cycles per hour: Select this option if you want to manually specify the number of cycles per hour for calculation.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
13 Add-Ins tab
Continued
• Waiting time between cycles (sec): Select this option to specify the waiting between cycles. Specify the waiting time in seconds.
6 In Ambient Temperature, define the ambient temperature.
• Use the slider to change the temperature.
• Select Use temperature from controller(s) to reset the the ambient temperature.
Note
The ambient temperature used in the calculations should be the same that is used in the configuration of the actual robot in its real environment.
7 Calculate the result in either of the following ways:
• In the Recordings section, either double-click a recording or select a recording and click Calculate.
• In the System section, either double-click a controller or select a controller and click Calculate.
Note
The Recordings section displays the recordings to be analyzed when Gearbox Heat Prediction is enabled.
The System section displays all the available controllers. Data for all controllers are recorded at all times and you can select the controller to be analysed from the list.
The results are displayed for each joint and with fans for the joints that can have fans installed as an option.
Note
The following factors influence the heat accumulated:
Axis speed
Payload
Room temperature (ambient temperature)
Waiting time (to allow robot to cool down)
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
445
13 Add-Ins tab
Continued
Note
The calculated energy is displayed as different heat levels:
Green: Indicates no heat problem
Orange: Indicates it is recommended to install a fan.
Red: Indicates a fan must be installed.
Grey: Indicates it is not possible to calculate the possible energy level for this joint.
Not available: Indicates the joints that cannot have a fan installed.
Note
Recommended action is displayed along with the warning level for each joint.
Joint: Represents the joint.
Without fan: Displays the percentage of heat levels calculated to the corresponding joint without fan.
With fan: Displays the percentage of heat levels calculated to the corresponding joint with fan.
Action: Displays the recommended action.
Migrate backup feature
The Migrate backup feature is an add-in to RobotStudio. This helps in migrating
IRC5 backups from RobotWare versions 5.15 to RobotWare versions 5.60 and later.
To use the tool, press Migrate backup in the Add-Ins tab and then select the controller backup you want to migrate. Click OK to start the migration.
Information about the migration progress will be displayed in the output window.
After migration, configuration files that contain incompatibilites are opened in a text editor. Configuration parameters that are not migrated automatically will be commented out together with an explanation. These parameters must be migrated manually.
The backup is ready to be restored when migration is completed for all incompatible files. Incompatible configuration files are retained in the SYSPAR folder with *.bak
extension.
446
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.1 Add to Path
14 Context menus
14.1 Add to Path
Creating a move instruction based on an existing target
1 Select the target for which to create the move instruction.
2 From the Home menu, in the Path Programming group, select the type of move instruction to create.
3 Click Add to Path.
The move instruction will appear under the path node as a reference to the original target.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
447
14 Context menus
14.2 Align Frame Orientation
14.2 Align Frame Orientation
The Align Frame Orientation dialog box
Reference
Align Axis
Lock Axis
Specify the frame or target for which you want to align the selected objects here.
The axis you specify here will be aligned as on the reference target/frame for all selected objects.
The axis you specify here will not be changed on the selected objects by the align function, but will keep its orientation.
448
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.3 Align Target Orientation
14.3 Align Target Orientation
Aligning target orientation
1 Select the targets whose orientation you wish to change.
2 Click Align Target Orientation to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Reference box, specify the target whose orientation you want to use as reference, by first click in the box and then selecting the target either from the graphics view or the Layout browser.
4 In the Align Axis box, select the axis whose orientation you want to copy from the reference target to the selected ones.
5 In the Lock Axis box, select the axis to rotate the target around. The orientation of this axis will not be changed on the targets. For example, if the
Z axis of all targets are orientated normally to the surface of the work piece and you want to keep it this way, you should lock the Z axis.
6 Click Apply.
Tip
You can change the Align and Lock axis and click Apply again to reorientate the targets until you deselect them.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
449
14 Context menus
14.4 Attach to
14.4 Attach to
Attaching an object
1 In the Layout browser, right-click the child object, click Attach to and click the parent object in the list.
Attaching an object by drag and drop
1 In the Layout browser, drag the child object to the parent object.
2 In the displayed message, click the corresponding button:
To Click
attach the child object and move it to the attachment point
Yes
attach the child object and keep its position
No
not perform the attachment
Cancel
450
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.5 Configurations
14.5 Configurations
Auto Configuration
Use this procedure for setting the configuration of all targets in the path that are marked as The configuration is not verified :
Note
For all targets in the path, the function will ignore any existing unverified configuration and replaces it with optimal configuration with respect to theconfiguration of the preceeding target.
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a path, select Configurations and then select Auto Configuration.
The robot now steps through each target in the path and sets the configurations.
Note
• If the first target in the path has no configuration assigned, then the configurations tool appears.
• If the first target has a configuration assigned, then the one assigned will be used.
The result of auto configuration varies depending on the configuration of the first target.
The configuration for targets in the path that have a verified configuration, will not be re-assigned.
Reset Configurations
The configuration data which is a part of the target, when reset, is optimized by
Auto Configuration. As a result ,the target / move instruction icon will change and is marked as The configuration is not verified.
Use this procedure for resetting the configuration:
Note
You can reset the configuration of a path, target, or move instruction.
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a path, select Configurations and then select Reset Configurations.
Note
To reset the configuration of a target or move instruction,
In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a target or move instruction, and select Reset Configuration.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
451
14 Context menus
14.5 Configurations
Continued
Verify Configurations
Use this procedure for verifying the existing configuration:
Note
Targets and Move instructions marked as The configuration is not verified can be verified with respect to the configuration.
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a path, select Configurations and then select Verify Configurations.
Note
If the existing configuration is correct, then the move instruction is set as verified.
If the configuration is incorrect, then the target is set as unreachable.
452
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.6 Check Reachability
14.6 Check Reachability
Checking the reachability
You can use the Check Reachability function to check whether targets are reachable or not. If you select a path for the check, then the reachability of all move instructions in the path is checked. This function provides an easy reachability check which you can use for initial positioning of the robot, its workobject, paths and targets.
The Check Reachability function ignores the robot axis configuration. The function indicates a target as being reachable if it can be reached with any robot axis configuration, and ignores the defined robot axis configuration.
Note
The Check Reachability feature does not verify whether a path can be executed or not.
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click the workobject or target or path to be checked for reachability.
2 Click Reachability to see the reachability status of the selected object.
The frames for the selected object change color in the graphic window based on the reachability status.
Color
Green
Red
Means
The object can be reached.
The object cannot be reached at its current position.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
453
14 Context menus
14.7 Configurations
14.7 Configurations
Manually setting a robot axis configuration for single targets
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select a target and then click Configurations to bring up a dialog box.
2 If more than one configuration solution exist, examine them by clicking them, one at a time.
The position of the robot with the selected configuration will be displayed in the graphics window, and the joint values for the configuration will be displayed in the joint values list below the configurations list.
In most cases, selecting a configuration similar to the previous one is the best choice.
3 Select the configuration to use and click Apply.
454
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.8 Convert Frame to Workobject
14.8 Convert Frame to Workobject
Converting a frame to a workobject
1 In the Layout browser, select a frame.
2 Click Convert Frame to Workobject. The new workobject will appear in the
Paths&Targets browser.
3 Optionally, rename or edit the workobject in any way.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
455
14 Context menus
14.9 Convert to Move Circular
14.9 Convert to Move Circular
Prerequisites
At least two targets, the via-point target and the end point target, must have been created.
A path containing at least the via-point target and the end point target, in correct order, must have been created.
Converting to Move Circular
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, expand the path node that contains the move instruction to be converted.
2 Select the move instruction that contains the via-point of the circular motion together with the succeeding move instruction, which will serve as the end point. You can select several instructions by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking the instructions.
3 Click Convert to Move Circular. The two selected move instructions will be converted to a circular move instruction, which includes the via-point and the end point.
Tip
To convert two move instructions to a circular motion, you can also select and right-click both move instructions at once and then click Convert to Circular.
456
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.10 Copy / Apply Orientation
14.10 Copy / Apply Orientation
Copying and applying an orientation
1 In the browser, select the object or target from which to copy the orientation.
2 On the Modify menu, click Copy Orientation.
3 In the browser, select the object or target to which to apply the orientation.
4 On the Modify menu, click Apply Orientation. This can be performed on several targets or a group of selected targets.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
457
14 Context menus
14.11 Detach
14.11 Detach
Detaching an object
1 In the Layout browser, right-click the attached object (child) and then click
Detach. The child will be detached from the parent and return to its position before the attachment.
458
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.12 Execute Move Instruction
14.12 Execute Move Instruction
Prerequisites
The move instruction must exist.
A virtual controller must be running for the robot with the move instruction.
Executing a move instruction
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, browse to the motion instruction to execute through the Controller, Tasks and Paths nodes.
2 Click Execute move instruction. The TCP of the active robot will move from the current location to the motion instruction according to the programed motion properties. If the target for the motion instruction does not have a stored configuration, the robot will use the configuration nearest the current one.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
459
14 Context menus
14.13 External Axis Interpolation
14.13 External Axis Interpolation
Prerequisites
You need to have a path selected and a robot with external axis configured.
Interpolating external axis
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select a path, right-click and select Interpolate
External Axis.
The Interpolate External Axis dialog box appears.
2 Select the mechanical unit from the Mechanical Unit drop-down list.
3 Select the axis to interpolate from the Axis drop-down list.
4 In the Interpolation drop-down list,
select...
Constant
TCP Offset to...
set a constant value for the axis in each robtarget.
You can set the value from the Value drop-down list.
calculate an axis value such that the
• For a linear axis, robot base is translated the offset distance relative to the target along the axis direction.
• For a rotating axis, external axis value is calculated so that the angle between the TCP approach direction and the rotational axis zeroposition is kept constant at the offset angle.
5 Click Apply.
460
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.14 Graphic Appearance
14.14 Graphic Appearance
Overview
With the graphic appearance dialog box you set the graphic properties for an individual object. These settings override the generic settings made in the options dialog box. To launch the Graphic Appearance dialog box right-click a part in the browser and select Graphic Appearance from the context menu.
The right part contains a preview of the part and controls for setting the behavior and appearance of the preview. The user can work on the entire part, or on individual bodies or faces by selecting them in the preview.
Graphic Appearance: The Material tab
The Material tab contains controls for setting material parameters or selecting a material from the list of user defined and predefined materials. It is also possible to save the current material to the user defined materials.
The Material tab contains two groups: Colors and Textures. The Color group contains parameters for controlling the color properties of an object. The Textures group contains the settings for textures. The color and texture setting together define a material. You can save your current settings as a new material for later re-use or apply an existing material.
The following options are available:
• Apply material : Provides a list of predefined material that can be applied to the object.
• Save material : Saves the specified combination of color and texture settings as a material.
Color group
Simple Color
Opacity
The color boxes
Shininess
Click this color box to select another color for the object.
Controls the transparency of the object.
Set the color of the object for different light situations here.
Specify the reflectiveness of the object here.
Textures group
Base texture
Specify texture size
Specifies the basic structure of the selected part. It is a standard 24-bit image displayed on a 3D surface.
Note
Transparency of textures is provided only for .png images.
Check this option to specify the texture size. When a material with a specified texture size is applied to a geometry, Robot-
Studio tries to adjust the texture coordinates so that the texture image covers the specified area.
Note
This option works best on flat surfaces; on curved surfaces the size will be approximate.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
461
14 Context menus
14.14 Graphic Appearance
Continued
Blend Mode
Environment map
Normal Map
Specifies how the texture is combined with the specified object color.
Provides a highly reflective appearance to the surface.
Specifies a texture that defines the bumpiness of the surface
Graphic Appearance: The Properties tab
The Properties tab contains controls for surface properties and texture coordinates.
Surface Properties
Render both sides
Invert surface(s)
Generate new normals
By selecting this option surfaces will be rendered regardless of orientation.
Selected surfaces can be inverted by this button.
This process is simplified by checking Highlight inverted faces, which will cause the backside of surfaces to be displayed in red.
Generate new normals. If the surface normals of an imported geometry are of poor quality, they can be recreated by clicking this button.
Texture coordinates
Swap u/v
Modify
Normalize
Flip
Stretch
Shrink
Shift<
Shift>
Click this button to swap the horizontal and vertical directions of the texture.
Select along which directions the commands listed below shall be applied.
u is the horizontal axis of the texture.
v is the vertical axis of the texture.
Click this button to set the ratio between the dimensions of the object and the texture to 1.
Click this button to invert the coordinates along the selected axes. This is the same as mirroring around the other axis.
Click this button to stretch the texture along the selected axes.
Click this button to shrink the texture along the selected axes.
Click this button to move the texture along the selected axes.
Click this button to move the texture along the selected axes.
462
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.15 Go to Visualization and Go to Declaration
14.15 Go to Visualization and Go to Declaration
Go to Visualization
The Go to visualization context menu command is available for targets in the
RAPID editor. It takes you to the 3D graphical widow to show you where the target is found.
Note
This command requires that the RAPID code has been synchronized to the station.
Go to Declaration
In the Paths & Targets browser, the Go To Declaration context menu command is available for targets. This command takes you back to the target in the RAPID editor.
Note
This command requires that the RAPID code has been synchronized to the virtual controller.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
463
14 Context menus
14.16 Interpolate Path
14.16 Interpolate Path
Reorienting targets in a path by interpolation
1 In the Layout browser or the graphics window, select the path with the targets to reorient.
2 Click Interpolate Path. to bring up a dialog box.
3 With the Interpolate type options, select whether to use Linear or Absolute interpolation.
Linear interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets positions along the length of the path. By contrast, absolute interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets’ sequence in the path.
4 If using the Select Start/End option, select the start and end targets for the interpolation in the Start target and End target boxes, respectively.
5 Optionally, with the Lock Axis options, select an axis to lock.
6 Click Apply.
464
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.17 Invert
14.17 Invert
Inverting the direction of a face
1 Right-click in the Modeling browser, point to Filter and make sure that both
Show Bodies and Show Faces are selected.
2 In the Modeling browser, expand the node for the object and browse down to and select the face which direction you want to invert.
3 In the Modeling browser, expand the node for the object and browse down to and select the face whose direction you want to invert.
4 Click Invert. If the option backface culling is activated, the face will now shift from visible to not visible, or the other way around, depending on from which direction you view the face. If backface culling is deactivated, there will be no visible indication that the direction of the face has been inverted.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
465
14 Context menus
14.18 Jump to Target
14.18 Jump to Target
Jumping to a target
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, browse to the target to jump to through the
Controller, Tasks and WorkObjects nodes.
2 Click Jump to target.
If the target has a valid configuration for the robot axes stored, the active
TCP of the robot will immediately be positioned at the target. If no valid configuration is stored, the Select Robot configuration dialog box is displayed.
3 In the Select Robot Configuration dialog box, select a suitable configuration solution and click Apply. The selected configuration is now stored with the target.
Note
You can deactivate the configuration check when jumping to targets. The robot will then use the configuration solution closest to the current one when reaching the target. For more information, see
.
466
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.19 Linked Geometry
14.19 Linked Geometry
Overview
The Linked Geometry feature allows you to load geometry from a shared repository.
If the source file is updated, then the station will be updated with a single click.
Adding Link
You can add a link to a geometry in two ways:
1 In the Home tab, click Import Geometry to open a dialog box.
Select the option Link to Geometry.
2 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station and select
Add Link.
A dialog box opens where you can select the CAD file to be linked.
Editing Link
To edit an existing link:
1 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station.
2 Select the option Link to Geometry and click Edit Link.
Deleting Link
To delete an existing link:
1 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station.
2 Select the option Link to Geometry and click Delete Link.
Updating Linked Geometry
To update a linked geometry:
1 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station, component group or the station.
2 Select the option Link to Geometry and click Update Linked Geometry.
The update result is displayed in the output window.
Note
When you select a component group or a station, all linked geometries within the group or station is updated. If the timestamp on the file is newer than the timestamp stored in the station, all corresponding parts will be updated from the source location.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
467
14 Context menus
14.20 Modify Library Component
14.20 Modify Library Component
Modifying a library component
1 In the Layout browser, select the library you wish to modify.
2 Click Disconnect Library.
3 Select the library and then make any modifications to it.
4 Select the modified library, and then click Save As Library.
468
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.21 Mechanism Joint Jog
14.21 Mechanism Joint Jog
Jogging the joints of a robot
1 In the Layout browser, select the robot.
2 Click Mechanism Joint Jog to bring up a dialog box.
3 Each row in the Jog Joints dialog box represents a joint of the robot. Jog the joints either by clicking and dragging the bar at each row, or by using the arrows to the right of each row.
Set the length of each step in the Step box.
The Mechanism Joint Jog dialog box
Joint
Cfg
TCP
Step
External Axis
Lock TCP
External axes joint
Move the joints of the objects by dragging the slider on the row corresponding to each joint. Alternatively, click the buttons to the right of the row, or type a value.
The current configuration value.
The current position of the TCP.
Specify the length of the joint movements for each click of the buttons to the right of each joint row.
If the robot uses external axes, you can select an axis to jog from this list. The external axes must belong to the same task as the object you are jogging for occurring in this list. If no external axes are present in the same task, this list is not available.
Select this check box to reposition the robot according to the jogging of the external axis.
For track-external axes the robot will reposition so that the TCP is locked relative to the world coordinate system.
For positioner-external axes the robot will reposition so that the position of the robot’s TCP is locked relative to the attachment point of the positioner. The robot will move with the positioner the same way as when using multi-robot jog.
If no external axes are present in the same task, this check box is not available.
Move the joint of the external axes by dragging the slider on the row corresponding to each joint. Alternatively, click the buttons to the right of the row, or type a value.
If no external axes are present in the same task, this check box is not available.
Jogging a conveyor
1 Create Empty Path. See
.
2 In the Layout browser, select the conveyor.
3 Right-click Conveyor Mechanism and select Mechanical Joint Jog.
The Joint Jog dialog box appears.
4 Jog the conveyor by moving the slider and click Teach Instruction.
A move instruction is added to the path.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
469
14 Context menus
14.21 Mechanism Joint Jog
Continued
Note
When you jog the conveyor mechanism, objects on the conveyor are also moved.
• If you jog the conveyor mechanism beyond the maximum distance, the workobject will be dropped.
• If you jog the conveyor mechanism beyond the zero position, the workobject that belongs to the first part is attached to the conveyor attachment point.
If the workobject is dropped in Teach Mode, you can jog the conveyor backwards to connect it again.
470
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.22 Mechanism Linear Jog
14.22 Mechanism Linear Jog
Jogging the TCP of a robot by using the Linear Jog dialog box
1 In the Layout browser, select the robot.
2 Click Mechanism Linear Jog to bring up a dialog box.
3 Each row in the Linear Jog dialog box represents a direction or rotation for the TCP. Jog the TCP along the preferred direction or rotation, either by clicking and dragging the bar at each row, or by using the arrows to the right of each row.
4 From the Reference list, you can select the coordinate system that you want to jog the robot relative to.
5 In the Step box, specify the step movement per deg/rad.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
471
14 Context menus
14.23 Mirror Path
14.23 Mirror Path
The Mirror Path dialog box
Duplicate
Replace
X-Y, X-Z and Y-Z
Reference
Select Frame
Flip axis X/YZ
Keep orientation
Mirror Robot Configuration
More / Less
New path name
Target prefix
Receiving robot
Receiving work object
Select this option to keep the existing path when mirroring.
Select this option to remove the existing path after mirroring.
Select the plane to mirror the path around with these options.
The plane is defined by the selected axes and position of the reference coordinate system selected below.
Select the frame or coordinate system to define the mirror plane in.
To use another frame than any of the predefined ones, select
Select Frame from the list and specify the frame in the box below.
If Select Frame is used as Reference frame, specify the frame to use here by first clicking in the box and then selecting the frame from the graphics window or the Layout browser.
Select one of these options to mirror the orientation of the targets. When any of these are selected, the robot will approach the targets in a mirrored way.
The axis you select will change the most for achieving the mirrored orientation, while the other one will be kept as near to its current direction as possible.
The axis that is set to the robot’s approach vector cannot be selected.
Select this option to keep the orientation of the targets. When selected, the robot will go to the mirrored position, but approach the target from the same direction as for the original target.
Select this option to also mirror the robot axis configuration for the targets. Selecting this option will mirror the robot’s motions completely.
For using this option, the following conditions must be met:
• The Reference frame must be set to Baseframe.
• The Mirror plane must be set to X-Z.
• The tool of each move instruction must have its TCP in the X-Z plane of tool0.
• All targets in the path must have robot axis configuration set.
• The virtual controller must be running.
Click this button to show or hide the commands for naming and location of generated targets and paths.
Specify the name of the path that will be generated by the mirroring here.
Specify a prefix for the targets that will be generated by the mirroring here.
Specify the robot task in which the new targets and path shall be created.
Specify the work object in which the new targets shall be created.
472
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.24 Mirror
14.24 Mirror
Mirroring a part
1 In the Layout browser, select the part to mirror and right-click.
2 Select Mirror and then click one of the following options from the context menu:
select...
Mirror YZ
Mirror ZX
Mirror XY to create a new part..
around YZ plane around ZX plane around XY plane
Note
The mirror feature is applicable only to objects of type body and part that contains geometry. Parts and and bodies that are imported without geometry cannot be mirrored. See
Libraries, geometries and CAD files on page 37 .
For information on mirroring a path, see
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
473
14 Context menus
14.25 Modify Curve
14.25 Modify Curve
Overview
The following table provides an overview of the generic content available in the
Modify Curve dialog box.
Extend
Join
Project
Reverse
Split
Trim
Extend a curve at any vertex with a straight line in the direction of the curve’s tangent.
Join two or more curves into one. The original curves will be deleted when joining curves.
Project a curve onto a surface or a body, creating a new curve on the target part.
Reverse the direction of curves.
Split a curve in two bodies. Only open curves can be split.
Cut a segment of a curve between intersection or end points.
Extending a curve with a straight line in the direction of the curve’s tangent
1 Click the Modify curve and then select Extend Curve from the drop down menu.
The Extend Curve menu opens.
2 Click the curve you want to extend.
3 In the From start vertex and From end vertex boxes, type or select the required length you want to extend the curve. In the graphics window a yellow line displays a preview of the extension.
4 Click Apply.
Joining curves
1 Click the Modify curve and then select Join Curves from the drop down menu.
The Join Curves menu opens.
2 Click the curves to join in the graphics window. The curves may be either intersecting or adjacent to be joined.
The Selected curves list displays the curves that will be joined. To remove a curve from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.
3 In the Tolerance box, enter a value. Adjancent curves whose end points lie within the tolerance will be valid for the operation.
4 Click Apply.
Projecting curves on a surface
1 Click the Modify curve and then select Project Curve from the drop down menu.
The Project Curves menu opens.
2 Click the curves to project in the graphics window.
Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve, the projection direction is displayed. The project direction is always the negative Z direction of the
Continues on next page
474 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
14 Context menus
14.25 Modify Curve
Continued
User Coordinate System. To change the projection direction, create a new frame with the desired orientation and set it as user coordinate system.
The Selected curves list displays the curves that will be projected. To remove a curve from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.
3 Click in the Target bodies list and then click the bodies to project on in the graphics window. The bodies must be in the projection direction and be big enough to cover the projected curves.
To remove a bodies from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.
4 Click Apply. A new curve will now be created in a new part, wrapped around the surface of the selected bodies.
Reversing curves
1 Click the Modify Curve and then select Reverse Curve from the drop down menu.
The Project Curves menu opens.
2 Click the curves to reverse in the graphics window.
Note that when you rest the pointer over a curve, the current direction of the curve is displayed by yellow arrows.
The Selected curves list displays the curves that will be reversed. To remove a curve from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.
3 Click Apply. The curves will now be reversed.
Splitting a curve
Trimming a curve
1 Click the Modify Curve and then select Split Curve from the menu to open the tool.
2 Click the curve at the point to split at. Only open curves can be split.
Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve, point of the split is highlighted. This point is affected by the current snap mode setting.
3 Click Apply. The curve will now be split to two separate curves in the same part.
1 Click the Modify Curve and then select Trim Curve in the menu to open the tool.
2 Click the curve segment to trim.
Trim only works on single curves with intersection points. If you want to trim a curve that intersects with another curve, first join the two curves.
3 Click Apply. The selected part of the curve will now be removed.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
475
14 Context menus
14.26 Modify External Axis
14.26 Modify External Axis
Modifying external axis positions in targets
1 Select the targets (one or several) you want to modify, either in the Layout browser or in the graphics window. If you select several targets, the values you specify will be applied to all selected targets.
2 Click Modify External Axis to bring up a dialog box.
3 Edit the values of the axis by performing any of the following:
Action
Type a new position value for an axis
Jog the axis to the new position
Description
In the Eax column, select the value of the external axis you want to edit, and enter the new value.
Use the arrow buttons to the left of the Joint Values column for jogging the axis. Then click the right arrow button between the Joint values column and the Eax column to transfer the current joint value to the Eax value.
4 Click Apply.
The Modify External Axis dialog box
<
>
value box
<-
->
Eax
Jog the joint of the external axis corresponding to each row by clicking the < button.
Jog the joint of the external axis corresponding to each row by clicking the > button.
Enter the axis value for the corresponding joint of the external axis in the value box.
With the arrow left button, you transfer the value from the Eax box to the corresponding value box.
With the arrow right button, you transfer the value from the value box to the corresponding Eax box.
Specify the value of the corresponding joint of the external axis.
476
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.27 Modify Instruction
14.27 Modify Instruction
Modifying an instruction
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the instruction you want to modify. If you want to apply the same properties to several instructions, press the
CTRL key and select them.
2 Click Modify Instruction to bring up a dialog box.
3 For move instructions, select joint or linear motion in the Motion type list.
4 In the Instruction Argument group, modify the values for the instruction.
For details about each argument, see the selected instruction in the RAPID
Reference Manual. For an overview of the arguments for move instructions, see below.
5 When you have finished modifying, click Apply.
Arguments for move instructions
The table below is an overview of common arguments for move instructions. For detailed information about the arguments, see the selected instruction in the RAPID
Reference Manual.
To set the
subsequent instructions to be executed at once.
Use
\Conc
destination target for the instruction target.
speed for the tool center point, the tool reorientation and external axes.
ToPoint
Speed
velocity of the TCP in mm/s directly in the instruction (it will be substituted for the corresponding speed data).
\V
total time in seconds during which the robot moves (it will be substituted for the corresponding speed data).
\T
size of the generated corner path.
Zone
position accuracy of the robot TCP directly in the instruction
(the length of the path will be substituted for the corresponding zone specified in the zone data).
\Z
tool used for the movement (the TCP of this tool will be positioned at the destination target).
\Tool
workobject to which the robot position in the instruction belongs.
\Wobj
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
477
14 Context menus
14.28 Modify Mechanism
14.28 Modify Mechanism
The Modify Mechanism dialog box
See
The Modify Mechanism dialog box on page 324
.
478
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.29 Modify Tooldata
14.29 Modify Tooldata
Modifying tooldata
1 In the Layout browser, select the tooldata you want to modify.
2 Click Modify Tooldata to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Misc Data group:
• Modify the Name of the tool.
• Select if the tool is to be held by the robot in the Robot holds tool list.
4 In the Tool Frame group:
• Modify the Position x, y, z of the tool.
• Modify the Rotation rx, ry, rz of the tool.
5 In the Load Data group:
• Enter a new Weight for the tool.
• Modify the Center of gravity for the tool.
• Modify the Inertia for the tool.
6 In the Sync Properties group:
• In the Storage type list, select PERS or TASK PERS. Select TASK
PERS if you intend to use the tooldata in MultiMove mode.
• In the Module list, modify the module in which to declare the tooldata.
7 Click Apply.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
479
14 Context menus
14.30 Modify Workobject
14.30 Modify Workobject
Modifying a workobject
1 In the Layout browser, select the workobject you want to modify.
2 Click Modify Workobject. to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Misc Data group, modify the values for the workobject:
• Enter a Name for the workobject.
• In the Robot holds workobject list, select True or False. If you select
True, the robot will move the work piece instead of the tool.
• In the Moved by mechanical unit list, select the mechanical unit with which the robot movements are coordinated. This setting is only valid when Programmed has been set to False.
• In the Programmed list, select True or False. True means that the workobject will use a fixed coordinate system, and False that a movable coordinate system (that is, coordinated external axes) will be used.
4 In the User Frame group, do one of the following:
• Modify the user frame by entering values for the Position x, y, z and the Rotation rx, ry, rz for the workobject. Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values.
• Modify the user frame by using the Frame by points dialog box, see
Frame from Three Points on page 216
.
5 In the Object Frame group, do one of the following:
• Modify the object frame by selecting values for Position x, y, z and
Rotation rx, ry, rz for the workobject.
• Modify the object frame by using the Frame by points dialog box.
6 In the Sync Properties group, modify the values for the workobject:
• In the Storage type list, select PERS or TASK PERS. Select TASK
PERS if you intend to use the workobject in MultiMove mode.
• In the Module list, select the module in which to declare the workobject.
7 Click Apply.
Note
If you change the position of a workobject that is used in a program, you have to synchronize the affected paths to the virtual controller; otherwise, the program will not be updated.
480
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.31 Move Along Path
14.31 Move Along Path
Prerequisites
At least one path must have been created in the station.
A virtual controller must be running for the robot to move along the path.
Moving along a path
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the path to move along.
2 Click Move along path. In the graphics window, the robot will move along the path.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
481
14 Context menus
14.32 Move to Pose
14.32 Move to Pose
Prerequisites
At least one joint position must be defined.
Only one mechanism may be selected at a time.
Moving to a pose
1 In the Layout browser, select one mechanism to move.
2 Click Move to Pose and then click one of the available poses. In the graphics window, the mechanism will move to the pose.
482
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.33 Offset Position
14.33 Offset Position
Offset the position an item
1 Right-click the item you want to move.
2 Click Offset Position to bring up the Offset Position dialog box.
3 In the dialog box, select the reference coordinate system you want to use:
If you want to move the item
relative to its own coordinate system relative to the coordinate system of its parent
Select
Local
Parent
relative to the coordinate system of the station
World
relative to a user-defined coordinate system
UCS
relative to a target reference frame
Target Reference Frame
This option is available only for targets.
4 In the Translation X, Y, Z boxes, either type the offset, or select it by first clicking in one of the value boxes and then clicking the point in the graphics window.
5 Specify the Rotation for the item.
6 Click Apply.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
483
14 Context menus
14.34 Place
14.34 Place
Placing an item
1 Select the item you want move.
2 Click Place and then click one of the commands to bring up a dialog box.
If you want to move the item Choose
from one position to another without affecting the orientation of the object.
Select the axes to be affected.
One Point
according to the relationship between a start and a finish line.
The object will move to match the first point, then it will rotate to match the second point.
Two Points
according to the relationship between a start plane and a finish plane.
The object will move to match the first point, then it will rotate to match the third point.
Three Points
from one position to a target or frame position and simultaneously change the orientation of the object according to the frame orientation.
The position of the object changes according the orientation of the to-point coordinate system.
Frame
from one frame of reference to another
Two Frames
3 Set the reference coordinate system you want to use.
4 Click the points in the graphics window to transfer values to the from-point boxes to the to-point boxes. For detailed information, see the tables below.
5 Click Apply.
The Place Object by One Point dialog box
Reference
Primary Point - From
Primary Point - To
Translate along these axes
Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary
Point - From boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary
Point - To boxes.
Select whether the translation is to be performed along the X,
Y or Z axis, or several of the axes.
The Place Object by Two Points dialog box
Reference
Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Continues on next page
484
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.34 Place
Continued
Primary Point - From
Primary Point - To
Point on X-Axis - From
Point on X-Axis - To
Translate along these axes
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary
Point - From boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary
Point - To boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point
on X-Axis - From boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point
on X-Axis - To boxes.
Select whether the translation is to be performed along the X,
Y or Z axis, or several of the axes.
The Place an Object by Three Points dialog box
Reference
Primary Point - From
Primary Point - To
Point on X-Axis - From
Point on X-Axis - To
Point on Y-Axis - From
Point on Y-Axis - To
Translate along these axes
Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary
Point - From boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary
Point - To boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point
on X-Axis - From boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point
on X-Axis - To boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the y axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point
on Y-Axis - From boxes.
Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the y axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point
on Y-Axis - To boxes.
Select whether the translation is to be performed along the X,
Y or Z axis, or several of the axes.
The Place Object with Frame dialog box
Select Frame
Specify the name of the frame with which you want to place the object.
The Place by Two Frames dialog box
From
To
Select the frame object (For example, Target, Workobject,
Tooldata or Frame) from this dropdown list to set the From point of moving the object.
Select any of the frame object (For example, Target, Workobject, Tooldata or Frame) from this dropdown list to set the To point of moving the object.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
485
14 Context menus
14.35 Protected Smart Component
14.35 Protected Smart Component
You can protect a Smart Component from being edited. To protect the smart component, right-click the smart component, and then click Protected. You can also optionally specify a password that will be required to unlock the component for edits.
For more information on protected smart components, see Protecting a Smart
Component from edits in the section
Note
Protecting a Smart Component in this manner is a way of hiding complexity, and is not for providing security or securely protecting it.
486
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.36 Remove Unused Targets
14.36 Remove Unused Targets
Removing unused targets
1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select either the Controller node or the Task node from which you wish to remove the unused targets, and then click
Remove Unused Targets.
2 To the question Are you sure you want to remove unused targets?, answer
Yes. All targets that not are used by any move instructions are now removed.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
487
14 Context menus
14.37 Rename Targets
14.37 Rename Targets
Renaming targets
1 In the Paths & Targets browser, select the targets to rename.
To rename all targets in one or several paths, select the paths that contain the targets.
2 Click Rename targets to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Target Prefix box, enter a text string to precede the target numbers.
4 Optionally, in the Increment box and the Start with box, change the numbering series for the target names.
5 Optionally, in the Target Suffix box, enter a text string to follow the target numbers.
6 Click Apply.
488
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.38 Reverse Path
14.38 Reverse Path
The commands
Simple
Here you reverse only the target sequence. The new path will keep the move instruction for each path segment and just reverse the programed positions.
Advanced
xx050046
Note that move instructions are not changed, just the targets. Even the MoveAbsJ instruction to the joint target is preserved, but placed last.
Both target sequence and move instructions are reversed in a way that corresponds to recording the robot movements and playing the movie backwards. For example, if the robot used a linear motion to move from a target, it will use a linear motion to move to the target after the reversal.
xx050047
Note that the move instructions have changed together with the targets. For example, in the original path, a joint motion was used to reach target 20 and a linear motion to leave it. After the reversal there is a linear motion to the target and joint motion from it.
Also, note that the jointtarget has been converted into an ordinary target; otherwise, it would not be possible to program a linear motion to that position.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
489
14 Context menus
14.39 Rotate
14.39 Rotate
Rotating an item
1 Select the item you want to rotate.
2 Click Rotate to bring up a dialog box.
3 Select the reference coordinate system you want to use:
If you want to move the item
relative to its own coordinate system relative to the user-defined system
Select
absolute in the coordinate system of the station
World
relative to the coordinate system of its parent
Parent
Local
UCS
relative to an axis defined by two points
User defined axis
relative to a target reference frame
Note that this option is available only for targets.
Target Reference Frame
4 Specify the rotation of the item in the Rotate around x, y, z by first clicking in one of the boxes, and then click the center position in the graphics window to transfer the values.
5 If you have selected the coordinate system User defined axis, specify the
Axis start point x, y, z and the Axis end point x, y, z.
6 Specify the Rotation of the item and the axis around which the rotation is to occur.
7 Click Apply.
490
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.40 Rotate Path
14.40 Rotate Path
Rotating a paths
1 In the Layout browser or the graphics window, select the paths to rotate.
2 Click Rotate path to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Reference frame list, select the frame to rotate the paths around.
Select
World
Baseframe
UCS
Select Frame
To
rotate around the station’s world coordinate system rotate around the robot’s baseframe rotate around a frame or target that previously has been set to User Coordinate System.
rotate around an existing target or frame other than the listed ones. When using Select Frame, specify the frame to rotate around further down.
4 If Selected frame was selected in the Reference frame list, specify a frame or target in the text box by clicking in the box and then selecting the frame in the graphics window.
5 With the Rotation axis options, select the axis of the frame to rotate around.
6 In the Rotation angle box, enter the rotation.
7 Click Apply.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
491
14 Context menus
14.41 Set Local Origin
14.41 Set Local Origin
Setting the origin of the local coordinate system
1 If the object you want modify is a library component, first disconnect it from the library.
2 In the Layout browser or the graphics window, select the part to modify.
3 Click Set Local Origin to bring up a dialog box.
4 In the Set Local Origin dialog box, select the reference coordinate system you want to use:
If you want to move Select
relative to the part’s current local coordinate system
Local
relative to the coordinate system of its parent
Parent
absolute in the coordinate system of the station
World
relative to a user-defined coordinate system
UCS
5 In the Position X, Y, Z boxes, either type the new position or, select it by first clicking in one of the value boxes and then clicking the point in the graphics window.
6 Type the Orientation.
7 Click Apply.
492
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.42 Set Normal to Surface
14.42 Set Normal to Surface
Setting the target orientation normal to a surface
1 In the Paths & Targets browser, select the target to modify.
2 Click Set Normal To Surface to bring up a dialog box.
3 On the Selection Level toolbar, set the selection level.
• To align the target to a specific surface, set the selection level to
surface.
• To align the target to a specific point at the surface, set the selection level to part.
4 In the graphics window, click the reference surface. This will transfer the name of the part or surface to the Surface box.
5 In the Approach Direction, click the button for the axis to be used as the approach direction.
6 To set the distance between the surface and the target in the approach direction, specify an Offset value.
7 Click Apply.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
493
14 Context menus
14.43 Set Position
14.43 Set Position
Positioning an item
1 Right-click the item you want to move.
2 Click Set Position to bring up the Set Position dialog box.
3 In the dialog box, select the reference coordinate system you want to use:
If you want to move the item
relative to its own coordinate system relative to the coordinate system of its parent
Select
Local
Parent
absolute in the coordinate system of the station
World
relative to a user-defined coordinate system
UCS
relative to a target reference frame
Target Reference Frame
This option is available only for targets.
4 In the Position X, Y, Z boxes, either type the new position, or select it by first clicking in one of the value boxes and then clicking the point in the graphics window.
5 Specify the Orientation for the item.
6 Click Apply.
494
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.44 Tool Compensation
14.44 Tool Compensation
Offsetting a path to compensate for tool radius
1 In the Paths&Targets browser or the graphics window, select the path.
2 Click Tool Compensation to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Distance box, enter the size of the compensation (normally, the tool radius).
4 Using the Direction options, select whether the new path shall be on the left or the right side of the current path.
5 Click Apply.
Note
Tool Compensation function supports only planar paths. In planar paths, the targets are in the same plane. User will be notified when a selected path is non-planar.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
495
14 Context menus
14.45 Translate Path
14.45 Translate Path
Translating a path
1 In the Paths&Targets browser or the graphics window, select the paths to translate.
2 Click Translate path to bring up a dialog box.
3 In the Reference frame list, select the coordinate system to use as reference for moving the paths.
Select
World
Base Frame
UCS
Select Frame
Point to Point
To
move relative to the origin of the world coordinate system move relative to the origin of the robot’s baseframe move relative to the origin of a frame or target that previously has been set to User Coordinate System.
move relative to the origin of an existing target or frame other then the listed ones. When using Select Frame, specify the frame to use further down.
move the path from one point to another without specifying any coordinate system.
4 If Select frame was selected in the Reference frame list, specify a frame or target in the text box by clicking in the box and then selecting the frame from the graphics window.
5 In the Translation vector box, specify the distance to move the path along the X, Y and Z axes of the reference frame.
Translation vector is applicable only if a reference frame is used. If Point to
Point is used as reference, specify the start and end points for the translation, instead. To do this, click in one of the boxes for the point to specify and then select the point in the graphics window, or type the coordinates of the point.
6 Click Apply.
496
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
14 Context menus
14.46 View Robot at Target
14.46 View Robot at Target
Viewing a robot at a target
1 Click View Robot at Target.
2 Select a target, either in the Paths&Targets browser or in the graphics window.
3 The robot will be shown at each selected target whenever a target is selected.
By stepping through the targets in the browser, it will be easy to see how the position of the robot changes.
4 To turn the function off, click the command again.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
497
14 Context menus
14.47 View Tool at Target
14.47 View Tool at Target
Viewing a tool at a target
1 Click View Tool at Target and select the tool you want to view at the target.
2 Select a target, either in the Paths&Targets browser or in the graphics window. You can also multiselect targets to show several copies of the tool.
A copy of the tool will be shown at the selected target. By stepping through the targets in the browser, it is easy to see how the tool orientation changes.
3 To turn the function off, click the command and clear the check box.
498
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.1 Introduction to ScreenMaker
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.1 Introduction to ScreenMaker
What is ScreenMaker?
ScreenMaker is a tool in RobotStudio for developing custom screens. It is used to create customized FlexPendant GUIs without the need to learn Visual Studio development environment and .NET programming.
Why use ScreenMaker?
A customized operator interface on the factory floor is the key to a simple robotic system. A well-designed custom operator interface presents the right amount of information at the right time and in the right format to the user.
GUI concepts
xx0800000226
A GUI makes it easier for people to work with industrial robots by presenting a visual front end to the internal workings of a robotic system. For FlexPendant GUI applications, the graphical interface consists of a number of screens, each occupying the user window area (the blue box in the figure above) of the
FlexPendant touch screen. A FlexPendant screen is then composed of a number of smaller graphical components in a design layout. Typical controls (sometimes referred as widgets or graphic components) include buttons, menus, images, and text fields.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
499
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.1 Introduction to ScreenMaker
Continued
A user interacts with a GUI application by:
• Clicking a button
• Selecting from a menu
• Typing a text in a text box
• Scrolling
An action such as clicking a button is called an event. Whenever an action is performed, an event is sent to the GUI application. The exact content of an event is solely dependent on the graphic component itself. Different components trigger different types of events. The GUI application responds to the events in the order generated by the user. This is called event-driven programming, since the main flow of a GUI application is dictated by events rather than being sequential from start to finish. Due to the unpredictability of the user’s actions, one major task in developing a robust GUI application is to ensure that it works correctly no matter what the user does. Of course, a GUI application can, and actually does, ignore events that are irrelevant.
The event handler holds sets of actions to be executed after an event occurs.
Similar to trap routines in the RAPID program, the event handler allows the implementation of application-specific logic, such as running a RAPID program, opening a gripper, processing logic or calculating.
In summary, from a developer’s point of view, a GUI consists of at least two parts:
• the view part: layout and configuration of controls
• the process part: event handlers that respond to events
Modern GUI development environments often provide a form designer, a (What
You See Is What You Get ) WYSIWYG tool to allow the user to select, position and configure the widgets. As for event handlers, typically the developer must use a special programming language recommended by the development environment.
Continues on next page
500
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
FlexPendant concepts
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.1 Introduction to ScreenMaker
Continued xx0800000228
Running Windows CE, the ABB FlexPendant has limited CPU power and memory compared to a PC. A custom GUI application must therefore be placed in the designated folders on the controller hard drive before being loaded. Once loaded, it can be found in the ABB menu as seen in the figure above. Clicking the menu item will launch the GUI application.
As the robot controller is the one actually controlling the robot and its peripheral equipment by executing a RAPID program, a GUI application needs to communicate with the RAPID program server in order to read and write RAPID variables and set or reset I/O signals.
It is essential for RAPID programmers to understand that there are two different levels controlling a work cell: an event-driven GUI application running on the
FlexPendant, and a sequential RAPID program running in the controller. These reside on different CPUs and use different operating systems, so communication and coordination are important and must be carefully designed.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
501
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.2 Development environment
15.2 Development environment
Overview
This section presents an overview of the ScreenMaker development environment for creating user screens.
3
4 en0900000584
1
2
5
Parts
Ribbon
Project explorer
Design area
Output window
ToolBox / Properties
Description
Displays group of icons organized in a logical sequence of functions. See
.
Shows the active screen project and lists the screens that are defined in the project. For more information, see
.
Layout to design the screen with the available controls.
Displays information about the events that occur during
ScreenMaker development.
Displays a list of available controls. For more information.
see
Contains the available properties and events of the selected control(s). The value of the properties can either be a fixed value or a link to an IRC5 data or an Application
Variable. For more information, see
Properties window on page 506 .
Continues on next page
502
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Ribbon
Arrange
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.2 Development environment
Continued
The ScreenMaker tab contains groups of commands organized in a logical sequence of functions that facilitates the user in managing ScreenMaker projects. The tab consists of the following groups:
Group
Project
Add
Build
Controller
Arrange
Diagnosis
Close
Functions used for
Managing a ScreenMaker project. See
Managing projects on page 507 .
Adding screen and application variables. See Managing screens and
Managing application variables on page 522
.
Building a project. See
Building a project on page 518 .
Connecting and deploying to the controller. See
Connecting to controller on page 517
and
Deploying to controller on page 518 .
Also for opening the Virtual FlexPendant.
Re-sizing and positioning the controls on the design area. See
.
Detecting problems in the project and providing a diagnostic solution. See
ScreenMaker Doctor on page 526 .
Closing a project.
This toolbar displays icons for resizing and positioning controls on the design area.
The icons are enabled once you select a control or group of controls on the design area.
en0900000592
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
503
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.2 Development environment
Continued
ToolBox
ToolBox acts a container for holding all the available controls that can be placed on a screen.
en0900000407
The following table displays the GUI controls that can be dragged to the design area.
Control
ActionTrigger
BarGraph
Button
CheckBox
Description
Allows to run a list of actions when either a signal or rapid data changes
Represents an analog value in a bar
Represents a control that can be clicked.
Provides a simple way to trigger an event, and is commonly used to execute commands. It is labeled either with text or an image.
Allows multiple selections from a number of options. They are displayed as a square box with white space (for unselected) or as a tick mark (for selected).
Continues on next page
504 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Control
ComboBox
CommandBar
ConditionalTrigger
ControllerModeStatus
DataEditor
Graph
GroupBox
LED
ListBox
NumEditor
NumericUpDown
Panel
PictureBox
RadioButton
RapidExecutionStatus
RunRoutineButton
Switch
TabControl
TpsLabel
VariantButton
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.2 Development environment
Continued
Description
Represents a control that enables to select items from a list
Combination of a drop-down list and a textbox. It allows you to either type a value directly into the control or choose from the list of existing options.
Provides a menu system for a ScreenForm
Allows to define conditions while defining action triggers. An action is triggered, if there is any change in value of the data bound.
Displays the mode of the Controller (Auto - Manual)
Represents a text box control that can be used to edit the data.
Represents a control that plots data with lines or bars.
Represents a Windows control that displays a frame around a group of controls with an optional caption.
Is a container used to group a set of graphic components. It usually has a title at the top.
Displays a two states value, like a Digital Signal.
Represents a control to display a list of items.
Allows the user to select one or more items from a list contained within a static, multiple line text box.
Represents a text box control that can be used to edit a number.
When the user clicks it, a Numpad is opened.
Represents a spin box that displays numeric values.
Used to group collection of controls.
Represents a picture box control that displays images.
Allows to select only one of a predefined set of options.
Displays the execution status of the Controller Rapid Domain
(Running - Auto)
Represents a Windows button control that calls a RapidRoutine when clicked
Displays and lets change a two states value, like a Digital
Output Signal.
Manages a set of tab pages.
Very commonly used widget that displays text, a label is usually static, that is, it has nointeractivity. A label generally identifies a nearby text box or other graphic component.
Used to change the values of RAPID variables or Application variables.
Note
For more information on using these controls and their properties, see the section
Development environment on page 502
and the chapterUsing the FlexPendant
SDK of the Application manual - FlexPendant SDK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
505
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.2 Development environment
Continued
Properties window
A control is characterized by its properties and events. Properties describe the appearance and behavior of the component, while events describe the ways in which a control notifies its internal state change to others. By changing the value of a property, the controls have a different look and feel, or exhibit different behavior.
506 en0900000408
1
2
Element Description
Graphical component name panel Displays the selected component, and lists the available components of the active design screen.
Properties window toolbar
3
4
Table panel
Information panel en0900000409
1 Organizes table panel in categories
2 Organizes table panel alphabetically
3 Displays Properties in table panel
4 Displays Events in table panel
Displays all the properties or events in twocolumns. The first column shows the property or event name, the second shows the value of the property or name of the event handler.
Display information about a property or event.
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
15.3 Working with ScreenMaker
15.3.1 Managing projects
Overview
This section describes how to manage projects in ScreenMaker. A complete cycle includes creating, saving, building, connecting, and deploying a ScreenMaker project.
You can manage a project (create, delete, load, or save) either from the
ScreenMaker ribbon or the context menu.
Creating a new project
Use this procedure to create a new project:
1 Click New from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select New Project.
The New ScreenMaker Project dialog box appears.
Note
You can create a new project either from ScreenMaker installed templates or ScreenMaker custom templates.
2 To create a new project from the ScreenMaker installed templates, a Click Simple Project.
b Enter a name and specify the location for the new project. By default, the new project is saved on C:\My Documents\RobotStudio\My
ScreenMaker Projects.
c Click OK.
d A screen MainScreen(main) is added in the tree view.
3 To create a new project from the ScreenMaker custom templates, a Click Basic, Standard, or Extended.
b Enter a name and specify the location for the new project. By default, the new project is saved on C:\My Documents\RobotStudio\My
ScreenMaker Projects.
c Click OK.
Note
• If you select the template Basic, a project with two screens are created.
• If you select the template Standard, a project with four screens are created.
• If you select the template Extended, a project with six screens are created.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
507
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
Loading a project or template
Use this procedure to load an existing project or an existing template:
1 Click Open from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Open Project.
The Open Screen Project File dialog box appears.
2 Browse to the location of the project file or template file to be loaded and click Open.
Note
You can also load an existing project using a quick access method.
1 Click Recent from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Recent Projects.
2 Select the project file from the list of most recently opened projects.
Saving a project
To save a project or template, follow this step:
• Click Save from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Save.
To save the existing project or template with a new name, follow this step:
• Click SaveAs from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select SaveAs.
Note
• Project files are saved with the extension *.smk.
• Template files are saved with the extension *.smt.
SaveAs FlexPendant Project
To save the ScreenMaker project as a FlexPendant project, in the project context menu, click SaveAs FlexPendant Project.
The project is saved with the extension *.csproj which can be opened using
Microsoft Visual Studio 2008.
Designing screens
This section describes adding, copying, renaming, deleting, and editing a screen.
Overview
The Form designer is a tool to edit or design a screen. It allows you to design the screen with the required controls and the design area resembles a FlexPendant screen.
Editing a screen
To edit a screen, follow these steps:
1 Drag a control from the toolbox and drop it on the design area.
The Properties window displays all the properties of the control.
Continues on next page
508
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
2 Select the control and resize or reposition for configuration.
Note
You can either select a single control or multiple controls:
• Single control : Left-click the control on the design area or select the control from the list in the Properties window.
• Multiple controls: Left-click on the design area, drag the mouse and create a window selecting all the controls.
3 Click the smart tag on the upper right corner of the control to perform the basic tasks of configuration. See
Configuring data binding on page 523 .
Note
You can perform additional configuration by editing the attributes in the
Properties window. See
Properties window on page 506 .
Using ScreenMaker controls
This section describes building the GUIs using the following controls from the
ToolBox.
ActionTrigger
1
2
An action trigger initiates an event, such as making a hidden object visible when an action is performed using a control. It allows to run a list of actions when the property value changes. The property value can be bound to a signal, rapid data, or application variable.
ActionTrigger control can also be used to invoke the application from RAPID.
Use this procedure to add an ActionTrigger control::
Action
Drag an ActionTrigger control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
You can modify the name, set the default value and configure data binding value for a ActionTrigger control.
• To set the values of a property, see
.
• You can set the trigger event for an ActionTrigger to any of the event handler created either from a control or from an Events Manager option.
• To configure the data binding values, see
Configuring data binding on page 523
.
• To set the application variables, see
Managing application variables on page 522
.
Note
An action is not triggered when the screen is launched for the first time, but is triggered when there is a difference in the bound value at any point of time. This functionality is supported only in RobotWare 5.12.02 or higher.
Example: Consider a signal being bound to the value property. The value of the signal changes at runtime on performing a specific action. The event handler
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
509
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued configured for ActionTrigger control gets triggered based on this signal value change.
TpsLabel
TpsLabel is a standard Windows label that displays a descriptive text.
Use this procedure to add a TpsLabel control:
Step
1
2
3
Action
Drag a TpsLabel control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
You can set the values, setup events, configure data binding values and set the application values for a TpsLabel control.
• To set the values of a property, see
.
• To set up the events, see
• To configure the data binding values, see
Configuring data binding on page 523
.
• To set the application variables, see
Managing application variables on page 522
.
You can set the option Allow Multiple States to true and change the property.
1 Click Allow Multiple States. The StatesEditor dialog box appears.
2 Click the check-box Allow Multi-States, select the properties to change from
Properties For States and click OK.
The controls Button, PictureBox, and TpsLabel support AllowMultipleStates. For more information on how to use AllowMultipleStates, see
Picture object and changing images due to I/O on page 529 .
Panel
Panel is used to group a collection of controls.
Use this procedure to add a Panel control:
2
3
Step
1
Action
Drag a Panel control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
You can add a group of controls to a panel.
You can modify the name, set the default value and binding value for a Panel control.
• To set the values of a property, see
.
• To set up the events, see
.
• To configure the data binding values, see
Configuring data binding on page 523
.
• To set the application variables, see
Managing application variables on page 522
.
Note
Currently only EventHandler, CancelEventHandlers, and MouseEventArgs are supported.
ControllerModeStatus
ControllerModeStatus displays the mode of the controller (Auto - Manual).
Use this procedure to add a ControllerModeStatus control:
Step
1
Continues on next page
510
Action
Drag a ControllerModeStatuscontrol from the ToolBox on to the design area.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
Step
2
3
Action
You can set the values, setup events, configure data binding values, and set the application variables for a ControllerModeStatus control.
• To set the values of a property, see
.
• To set up the events, see
• To configure the data binding values, see
Configuring data binding on page 523
.
• To set the application variables, see
Managing application variables on page 522
.
You can select the image to be displayed when the controller is in Auto mode and in Manual mode.
• Click AutoImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed in Auto mode.
• Click ManualImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed in Manual mode.
RapidExecutionStatus
RapidExecutionStatus displays the execution status of the Controller Rapid Domain
(Running - Auto). This control is used
Use this procedure to add a RapidExecutionStatus control:
Step
1
2
3
Action
Drag a RapidExecutionStatus control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
You can set the values, setup events, configure data binding values, and set the application values for a RapidExecutionStatus control.
• To set the values of a property, see
.
• To set up the events, see Setup Events.
• To configure the data binding values, see
Configuring data binding on page 523
.
• To set the application variables, see
Managing application variables on page 522
.
You can select the image to be displayed when the Program is running and is stopped.
• Click RunningImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed when the Program is running.
• Click StoppedImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed when the Program is stopped.
RunRoutineButton
RunRoutineButton represents a Windows button that calls a RapidRoutine when clicked.
Note
To call a routine containing movements, you are not recommended to use the
RunRoutine Button control. Instead use a normal button control to call a Trap routine. In the Trap routine, use instructions such as StopMove, StorePath,
RestorePath and StartMove to control the movements of the robot.
Use this procedure to add a RunRoutineButton control:
Step
1
Action
Drag a RunRoutineButton control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
511
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
Step
2
3
4
5
6
Action
Click the smart tag on the RunRoutineButton and select one of the following Run-
RoutineButtonTasks.
• Define Actions before calling Routine
• Select Routine to call
• Define Actions after calling Routine
Click Define Actions before calling Routine to define an action/event before calling the routine.
The Events Panel dialog box appears.
Click Define Actions after calling Routine to define an action/event afterre calling the routine.
The Events Panel dialog box appears.
Click Select Routine to call.
The Controller Object Binding dialog box appears.
In the Properties window, set the value for the following properties:
• RoutineToCall - Set the routine to be called. Indicates the RAPID Routine that will be called when this button is pressed.
• AllowInAuto - Set to True or False. Indicates if the routine could be called in the Auto mode.
• TextAlign - Set to MiddleLeft and MiddleCenter. Indicates the text alignment.
Note the following restrictions:
• You cannot bind RunRoutineButton to built-in Service routines.
• Only user defined procedures with no arguments can be bound.
• Set the PP to task before performing action through RunRoutineButton.
CommandBar
3
4
CommandBar allows you to add menu items in a controlled and organized order.
Use this procedure to add menu items to the CommandBar control:
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Drag a CommandBar control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
The CommandBar appear at the bottom of the screen.
Click the smart tag on the CommandBar and select Add/Remove Items.
The MenuItem Collection Editor window appears.
Click Add.
A new menu item is added and its properties are displayed which can be edited.
Note that while editing the menu item, ensure that the property Text is filled. If not, nothing appears on the CommandBar.
To remove the menu item, select the menu item and Click Remove.
Click Close to close the MenuItem Collection Editor window.
To add an event to a menu item, for example menuItem1 on the command bar, use this procedure:
Step
1
2
Action
Go to the Properties window and select menuItem1 from the drop-down list.
Click Events icon and then double-click the Click event. This opens the Events
Panel dialog for the Click event.
Click Add Action from the Events Panel dialog. This opens a sub-list of actions.
Click an action from the sub-list of actions to add it to menuItem1's Click event.
Continues on next page
512 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
VariantButton
The VariantButton control is a simple button control with additional features and properties. Using this control, you can change the values of RAPID or Application variables.
Use this procedure to add the VariantButton control:
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
Drag a VariantButton control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
You can perform the following VariantButton tasks from the SmartTag:
• Define Actions before value change
• Define Actions after value change
You can set the following VariantButton specific properties from the Properties window:
• Select Increment or Decrement from Behavior drop down. The default behavior of VariantButton is Increment.
• Select StepRate and set the rate at which the value must be varied.
• Select DataType to which the value should be bound and set the value property of the selected datatype.
Supports only the RAPID datatypes, Num and Dnum. For more information on data binding, see
Configuring data binding on page 523
.
You can also perform the following common tasks from the Properties windows:
• Set BackColor, ForeColor, Location, and Size of the control.
• Select True or False from the Visible dropdown to hide or unhide the control.
• Select True or False from the Enabled drop down to enable or disable the control.
ConditionalTrigger
The ConditionalTrigger button defines the condition while defining action triggers.
An action will be triggered if there is a change in the value of the data bound.
Use this prcodedure to add the ConditionalTrigger control:
Step
1
2
Action
Drag a ConditionalTrigger control from the ToolBox on to the design area.
You can set the following ConditionalTrigger properties from the Properties window:
• Select the condition to execute from the Condition drop down. The following are the supported conditions AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and EQUAL.
• Select True or False from the Enabled drop down to enable or disable the control.
• Select LHS and RHS and bind the data value to Controller Object or Application Variable. For more information on data binding, see
Defining Events
Event handler is a set of actions to be executed after an event occurs.
To set up an event, follow these steps:
1 Select the control for which the event handler is to be defined.
2 Open the Events Panel dialog box in any one of the following ways:
• Double-click the control.
• Right-click the control, select Events Manager, click Add enter the name, and click OK and close.
• Click smart tag and select the task from the list.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
513
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
• In the Properties window, click Events icon and select the desired event from the list.
3 Click Add Action to add an action from a predefined list of actions.
The following table lists the set of predefined actions:
Screens
Signals
RapidData
• Open Screen
• Close Screen
• Set a Digital Signal
• Invert a Digital Signal
• Pulse a Digital Signal
• Read a Signal
• Write a Signal
• Reset a Digital Signal
• Read a Rapid Data
• Write a Rapid Data
• Read and Write
Application Variable
Advanced
• Call another Action list
• Call .NET method
• Call Custom Action
• Call FP Standard View
Deleting an event handler
To delete a user created event handler, do the following:
1 Right-click the control, select Events Manager. The Events Manager dialog box appears.
2 Select the event handler to be deleted from the list and click Delete.
Advanced Actions
Call another Action List
Existing event handlers from Events Manager can be reused by other controls while defining actions for event. You can call another event handler from an existing event handler.
In the following example, listbox1_SelectedIndexChanged event handler is called from comboBox1_SelectionIndexChanged event handler.
Select the Show warning message before performing actions check box to have a warning displayed before you can perform these actions.
Call .NET Method
4 Select the action from the left window and perform the following:
• Click Delete to delete the action.
• Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of execution of actions.
5 Click OK
You can import the dlls and add references to the Advanced tab of the Project
Properties dialog box.
Continues on next page
514
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
Once the references are defined, .NET methods appear in the Project Properties dialog box and can be included in the Actions list which will be executed on performing the desired action.
The .NET assembly supports only public static methods.
Double click the method and bind the return value to the application variable.
Binding can be done only to the application variable. For more information, see
Application variable data binding on page 525 .
Note
ScreenMaker allows you to call static methods of the public classes defined in another DLL. This DLL is usually a class library or a control library. It has the following limitations and the user should be aware of them while using .Net DLLs.
• DLL’s references must be in the same directory in order to load the DLL.
• ScreenMaker provides access only to the static methods which contain basic data types such as string, int, double, boolean, object.
The following procedure provides information on creating a .NET assembly. This assembly can be added as a reference to ScreenMaker Project and for performing certain computations which are not directly possible using ScreenMaker or to call methods of FPSDK or PCSDK.
Use Visual Studio 2010 or above to create a .NET assembly.
1 Create a new project with Class Library as your template.
2 Create public static methods like the following.
namespace SMDotNetMethods
{ public class Methods
{
/// <summary>
/// Inverts a boolean value
/// </summary>
/// <param name ="Value">input boolean value</param>
/// <returns>inverted boolean value</returns> public static bool InvertBool(bool value)
{ return (value == false);
}
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
/// <summary>
/// Increments a numerical value
/// </summary>
/// <param name="value">value to be incremented</param>
/// <returns>incremented value</returns> public static double Increment(double value)
}
}
{ return (value + 1);
}
Continues on next page
515
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
3 Build the project.
4 Use the assembly generated from this Class Library project.
5 Add it as a reference to the ScreenMaker project.
Call Custom Action
You can add an user control to the ScreenMaker toolbox and call a custom method for that control by defining it in the ScreenMaker.dll.config file.
Call Custom Action supports only the Graph control.
Call FP Standard View
Standard FlexPendant screens can be opened on any action performed on the control. The standard FlexPendant screens include Rapid Editor, Rapid Data,
LogOff, Jogging, Backup and Restore.
For example, on button1_click, Rapid Editor view is opened.
Editing the property value
You can edit the property value of a control from the Properties window in three ways:
1 By typing the numerics, strings and text. For example, Location, Size, Name etc.
2 By selecting the predefined values from the list. For example, BackColor,
Font etc.
3 By entering the values in the dialog box. For example, Enabled, States,
BaseValue etc.
Deleting an event handler
To delete a user created event handler, do the following:
1 Right-click the control, select Events Manager. The Events Manager dialog box appears.
2 Select the event handler to be deleted from the list and click Delete.
Modifying Project properties
Project properties define the properties of the ScreenMaker project, including how the GUI is loaded and displayed in the FlexPendant.
Use this procedure to modify the project properties:
1 Right-click Project context menu and select Properties.
The Project Properties dialog box appears.
2 In the Display tab under Caption, enter the text in the Caption of the
Application field to edit the caption.
The updated caption appears in the ABB Menu on the right side.
3 In the Display tab under ABB Menu, select the following options,
Option
Left
Right
None
Description
application is visible to the left in the ABB Menu.
application is visible to the right in the ABB Menu.
application is not visible at all in the ABB Menu.
Continues on next page
516 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
Note
The applications that uses the option None cannot be run on RobotWare releases earlier than 5.11.01.
4 In the Display tab under ABB Menu, browse and select the ABB menu image.
5 In the Display tab under TaskBar, browse and select the TaskBar image.
Note
By default, the Use Default Image and Use Menu Image checkbox is enabled and the deafult image tpu-Operator32.gif is selected.
6 In the Display tab under Startup , select Automatic to load the screen automatically at the Startup.
Note
By default, the start up type is Manual.
7 In the Advanced tab under Run Settings, select Launch virtual FlexPendant
after deploying checkbox.
The virtual FlexPendant will be launched after deploying the ScreenMaker project to the virtual controller.
Note
This feature is not applicable if connected to a real controller.
Connecting to controller
Use this procedure to connect to both real and virtual controllers:
1 Click Connect from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Connect.
The Select a Robot Controller dialog box appears.
Note
Click the Connect dropdown from the ScreenMaker ribbon to directly connect to the controller.
2 Click Refresh to find a list of all the available controllers.
Note
By default, the currently connected controller is highlighted and has a small icon before the row as an indicator.
3 Select the controller to be connected from the list and click Connect.
The connection status is displayed in the Project tree view.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
517
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
To remove the connection with the controller, click Disconnect from the Project context menu.
Building a project
The result from building the ScreenMaker project is a set of files including DLL file and images. The ScreenMaker project can be compiled into binary format (.dll) that can be deployed on a FlexPendant.
Use this procedure to build a project:
1 Click Build from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Build
The result is displayed in the output window.
Deploying to controller
Use this procedure to deploy a ScreenMaker project to a real controller or virtual controller:
1 Connect to the controller you want to deploy to. See
Connecting to controller on page 517
.
2 Click Deploy from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Deploy Screen to Controller.
The Download dialog box appears displaying the progress of download. It disappears once the download is successful.
The TpsViewxxxxxx.dll file is downloaded.
3 Restart the controller.
Note
• If a real controller is used, you can reboot the FlexPendant by moving its joystick three times to the right, once to the left, and once towards you.
• If a virtual controller is used, you can reboot the FlexPendant by closing the virtual FlexPendant window.
Closing a project
To close a project, follow this step:
• Right-click Project context menu and select Close Project.
Closing ScreenMaker
To close ScreenMaker, follow this step:
• Click Close ScreenMaker from the ScreenMaker ribbon.
Managing ScreenMaker Widgets
What is a widget
A widget is a visual building block, containing an information arrangement, which represents an aspect of a robot application. It is a reusable and sharable user interface building block which can help speed up the development of screens.
Continues on next page
518
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
A ScreenMaker widget is similar in function to the widgets used in computer programming. The widget is an element of a graphical user interface (GUI) that displays an information arrangement which is changeable by the user. The widgets, when combined in an application, hold data processed by the application and the available interactions on this data.
Widget Workflow
Widget created from ScreenMaker can be used in ScreenMaker application and in Production Screen application.
The following are the steps required to create a Widget in ScreenMaker.
1 Start RobotStudio.
2 Launch ScreenMaker.
3 Create a new Widget Project or open an existing widget project.
For information on how to create a new widget project, see
ScreenMaker widget project on page 520 .
4 Connect to a real or a virtual controller, as required.
5 If required, change the widget properties, using the Widget Properties dialog box.
For information on the Widget Properties dialog box, see
Specifying widget properties on page 520 .
6 Drag-and-drop the necessary user interface components, as you would in a normal ScreenMaker project.
7 Link the user interface properties to the IRC5 data or to the application variables
8 Build the widget project. The widget component is created and saved in
...\Documents\RobotStudio\Widget Components folder.
Sample use case
Consider a case where you want to design a production screen which can do the following:
• Display a graph
• Show alarms
• Show status of the controller
To achieve this:
1 Create a new widget project in ScreenMaker and names it as, for example,
GraphWidget.
2 Drags-and-drop the graph control and other necessary controls on the widget form.
3 Connect to a real or virtual controller, as required.
4 Bind the controls to the controller data.
5 Use the widget properties dialog box, to change the size of the widget.
6 Build the project
7 Download the output to the production screen.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
519
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
You can then repeat the above steps to create widgets either in the same or in different projects based on your need to show the alarms and the status of the controller.
Creating a ScreenMaker widget project
1 On the ScreenMaker tab, click New. Alternatively, in the project context menu, click New Project.
The New ScreenMaker Project dialog box appears.
2 Under Widget Templates, click Widget.
3 Specify a name for the widget project.
ScreenMaker widgets projects are by default stored in the
...\Documents\RobotStudio\Widget Projects folder.
4 Click Ok.
The widget project along with a screen MainScreen(main), appears in the tree view. The widget project has .wzp file name extension. Widgets also appear in the
Toolbox.
Note
• You can have only one widget project open at any time. Close an open widget project before opening a new one.
• A widget project has only one screen, the main screen, on which the widgets are designed. All controls defined on a widget are considered as one widget.
• Widgets are loaded into the toolbox from a folder which contains the widget component DLLs, from Additional Options folder under MediaPool and from
RobotApps Repository. If you delete the widget components from any of the above locations (
...\Documents\RobotStudio\Widget
Components
), then the widgets will not be appear in the Toolbox.
Specifying widget properties
To specify the properties of a widget project, right-click a widget project, and then click Properties. The Widget Properties dialog box appears.
You set and modify the following in the properties for the widget project:
• Name of the project
• Size of the widget - x,y (in mm)
• Select the type of Widget
Production Screen: The Widget can be used with Production Screen environment
ScreenMaker: The Widget can be used with ScreenMaker applications
Modifying Binding Information of Widget
Use this option to modify the binding information of widget. When a widget is built from the Widget Project, an xml file is created. This xml contains widget details and binding information. This entry must be vailable in the Production.xml file to work with the Production Screen Environment .
<Bindings>
Continues on next page
520
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.1 Managing projects
Continued
<Binding PropertyName ="meter1.Value" BindingType="IO"
DataName="aoMeterSignal" />
<Binding PropertyName ="meter1.Title" BindingType="RAPID"
DataName="Flow1Title" />
</Bindings>
It is possible to create, use and modify the bindings of a widget created from
ScreenMaker and to view the results in Production Screen and in ScreenMaker application environment.
Building and Deploying
The output of the Widget Project is a single Widget Component dll file, for example,
TpsViewMyWidget.dll. The widgets built from the Widget Project are used in the
ScreenMaker project. Widgets cannot be deployed to the controller from
ScreenMaker. If Widgets are used in ScreenMaker projects, it gets deployed.
When the ScreenMaker project which uses a widget is built, the widget component is added as a reference to the project.
When the ScreenMaker project output is deployed to the controller, the referenced widget components are also copied to the system HOME folder.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
521
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.2 Application variables
15.3.2 Application variables
Overview
Application Variables are variables defined inside a ScreenMaker application. An application variable is similar to a RAPID variable. It supports the data types supported by RAPID, such as num, dnum, string, tooldata, wobjdata, and so on.
An application variable’s definition includes its name, data type and initial value.
During the execution of the ScreenMaker application, an application variable has a persistent value. It can store values coming from controller data or can be used to write values to controller data. Therefore, it is like an intermediate persistent variable which is used during RAPID execution along with other RAPID variables.
Managing application variables
To create, delete, and rename an application variable, follow these steps:
1 On the ScreenMaker tab, in the Add group, click Application Variables.
Alternatively, in the ScreenMaker browser, right-click the project, and then click Application Variables.
The Project Application Variables dialog box appears.
2 Click Add and define the name, type and value of the new variable.
3 Select the variable, click Delete to delete a variable.
4 Select the variable, click Rename, enter the new name and click OK to rename a variable.
5 Click Close.
You can view the application variables related to a project listed in the Project
Application Variables dialog box. To filter and view the variables according to their data types, use the Type list.
Note
For information on application variable data binding, see
.
522
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.3 Data binding
15.3.3 Data binding
Overview
Data binding is the mechanism that links a GUI property with an external data source such that whenever the data source is updated the GUI property will be updated automatically and vice verse. Databinding has the following three aspects:
• A unidirectional connection means that an update of the data source is reflected by the GUI, or vice versa; a bidirectional connection means that updates to either are reflected by the other.
• A temporal connection can be suspended and resumed at any time.
• A convertable connection negotiates between the different data types or formats between the data source and the GUI property.
A screen has to be linked with data to be useful. There are two ways of linking the data with the GUI properties:
•
Controller object data binding on page 524
•
Application variable data binding on page 525
Configuring data binding
Data binding can be configured in the following two ways:
Using smart tag
Smart tags perform basic configuration tasks like binding default GUI property with controller data. The controls that either display or edit information normally have a value property to represent the information. Smart tag binds the value to the controller object.
• On the design area, select the control and click the smart tag. The tasks menu appears.
Click...
to...
Bind Value to a Controller Object bind data to a Controller Object.
For more information, see
Controller object data binding on page 524 .
Bind Value to an Application
Variable binding data to a application variable.
For more information, see
Application variable data binding on page 525 .
Using Binding menu
1 On the design area, select the control.
2 In the Properties window, locate the row from the table for binding the value.
3 Select the property and click the list to display the Binding menu.
Click...
Remove actual binding
Bind to a Controller object
to...
removes the existing data binding.
select available data in the controller for binding.
For more information, see
Controller object data binding on page 524 .
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
523
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.3 Data binding
Continued
Click...
to...
Bind to an Application variable select available data in project temporary data store for binding.
For more information, see
Application variable data binding on page 525 .
Configuring data binding for different controls
Almost all the controls defined in the toolbox (except ComboBox and ListBox) have the following two options for binding values:
• Bind to a Controller Object
• Bind to an Application Variable
Binding to an array can be done with the following controls:
• DataEditor
• ComboBox
• ListBox
Control
DataEditor
Description
The default index value is 1. DataEditor is designed in such a way that the default value of the Rapid array starts with 1 and not 0.
ComboBox and ListBox The default index value is -1. You can enter the appropriate index value but cannot bind to a controller object or an application variable.
Note the following:
• You can limit the number of items to be displayed in the
ComboBox and ListBox of an array.
• While using a ComboBox, a RAPID index starts with 1 (1 specifies the first element) and the ComboBox index starts with 0( 0 specifies the first index).
For more information on RAPID array, see
What is RAPID array on page 530
.
Controller object data binding
Controller object data binding lets you to select the data in the controller for binding.
Use this procedure to set up a binding with controller objects:
1 Select Bind to a Controller Object either using smart tag or binding menu.
The Controller Object Binding dialog box appears.
2 In the Type of Object group, select either Rapid data or Signal data.
3 In the Shared group, select Built-in data only to access shared Rapid data.
When you select Built-in data only, the option Signal data and the text box
Module are disabled.
4 If you select Rapid data, from the Scope group, select a task and module from the list.
When you select Signal data, the Scope group is disabled.
5 In the See list, select the desired data.
Continues on next page
524
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.3 Data binding
Continued
Note
ScreenMaker supports binding to only constant and persistant variables. The variables must not be declared LOCAL. TASK PERS is supported
For example, the following binding is supported:
PERS num n1:=0;
TASK PERS num n2:=0;
CONST num n3:=0;
The following binding is not supported:
LOCAL PERS num n1:=0;
VAR num n1:=0
Application variable data binding
Application variables are used for data binding in the same way as controller data.
See
Controller object data binding on page 524
.
Use this procedure to set up a binding with application variables:
1 Select Bind to an Application Variable either using smart tag or binding menu.
The Application Variables Bind Form dialog box appears.
2 Select an application variable and the field to connect.
3 Click Setup Variables to manage the variables.
The Project Application Variables dialog box appears. See
Managing application variables on page 522 .
4 Click OK.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
525
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.4 ScreenMaker Doctor
15.3.4 ScreenMaker Doctor
Overview
ScreenMaker Doctor is a diagnostic solution to detect problems in the ScreenMaker project. It helps analyze the project and fix errors such as:
• Unused events
• Broken references, application variables, signals, modules, and Rapid data
• RunRoutine issue
Using ScreenMaker Doctor
Use this procedure to launch ScreenMaker Doctor, detect and report issues, and to view causes and solutions:
1 In the ScreenMaker ribbon, click ScreenMaker Doctor.
The ScreenMaker Doctor Wizard opens.
2 Click Next.
The wizard starts detecting issues and are reported as Completed Checks.
The detected issues are categorized as:
• Broken References
• Unused Events
• Broken ApplicationVariables
• Broken Signals
• Broken Modules
• Broken RapidData
• RunRoutine issue
• Broken Routine
• Other Dependencies
3 Click View Causes and Solutions to generate a report.
The left hand side of the report displays issues under each category and the right hand side of the report displays the Probable Causes and Solutions for the issues.
To check for issues again using the same instance, click Re-Detect Issues.
Note
In order to detect the signal data and RAPID, ScreenMaker project should be connected to the controller.
Errors fixed by ScreenMaker Doctor
The following sections show you how errors, which can be fixed by ScreenMaker
Doctor, may manifest.
Unused Events
The following sequence of actions will result in creating unused events.
1 Create a ScreenMaker project.
Continues on next page
526 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.4 ScreenMaker Doctor
Continued
2 Define events for the controls.
3 Define the events Button1_Click and Button2_Click for the controls
Button1and Button2 respectively.
4 Delete the control Button1. The event Button1_Click will still exist. An unused event is created.
You can run ScreenMaker Doctor to detect and fix this error.
Broken Reference
The following sequence of actions will result in creating broken references.
1 Create a ScreenMaker project.
2 Define events for the controls.
3 Define the events Button1_Click and Button2_Click for the controls
Button1and Button2 respectively.
4 Define action ScreenOpen - Screen2 for the event Button1_Click.
5 Delete or rename the screen. A broken reference is created.
You can run ScreenMaker Doctor to detect and fix this error.
Broken Application Variables
The following sequence of actions will result in creating broken application variables.
1 Create a ScreenMaker project.
2 Add an Application variable to the project.
3 Rename or delete the Application variable. No error is reported.
An error is reported during the run time due to the broken application variable.
You can run ScreenMaker Doctor to detect and fix this error.
Broken Rapid Data/Signals
If rapid data is bound but not found in the controller connected in the ScreenMaker project, then perform the following procedure:
1 Create a ScreenMaker project.
2 Connect to a controller.
3 Bind the properties of the controls with controller data.
4 Build the project and deploy it to the controller.
The application works.
5 Connect the ScreenMaker project to another controller and deploy the same project.
The application produces errors in the FlexPendant.
6 Run ScreenMaker Doctor. It detects that RapidData is not found in the controller, thereby suggesting to define the same.
Broken Modules
If modules are bound but not found in the controller connected in the ScreenMaker project, then perform the following procedure:
1 Create a ScreenMaker project.
2 Connect to a controller.
3 Bind the properties of the controls with controller data.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
527
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.3.4 ScreenMaker Doctor
Continued
4 Build the project and deploy to controller.
The application works.
5 Connect the ScreenMaker project to another controller and deploy the same.
The application produces errors in the FlexPendant.
6 Run ScreenMaker Doctor.
It detects that the module in which the rapid data was defined is not found in the controller, thereby suggesting to define the same. ScreenMaker doctor also detects Hidden modules.
RunRoutine Issue
A check is made whether ScreenMaker.sys file is loaded on the controller or not.
An issue is detected if the system module is not loaded.
You can run ScreenMaker Doctor to detect and fix this error.
528
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.4 Frequently asked questions
15.4 Frequently asked questions
How to deploy manually to a Virtual Controller
If for any reason you wish to manually by-pass the Deploy button in RobotStudio and the virtual controller, the following information describes what files are to be moved.
Actions
Location of output files
The files that contain the FlexPendant application from ScreenMaker are found
(for example) in the bin directory under the My ScreenMaker Projects located in the My documents directory of the user.
For example, My Documents\My ScreenMaker Projects\SCM_Example\bin where
SCM_Example is the example ScreenMaker project.
The files in the bin directory are to be copied to a location where the Virtual
FlexPendant can read them during the start of the FlexPendant.
Location where the Virtual FlexPendant reads the files
The recommended location for manually copying the ScreenMaker output files is the location of the virtual controller system.
If the system is created manually from System Builder, it is located in the My
Documents directory.
For example, My Documents\IRB4400_60_SCM_Example\HOME where
IRB4400_60_SCM_Example is the example controller system.
If the system is created by a Pack-and-Go and then restored, it is located in the
RobotStudio\Systems folder.
For example,
MyDocuments\RobotStudio\Systems\IRB4400_60_SCM_Example\HOME where
IRB4400_60_SCM_Example is the example controller system.
Copy files
Copy the files from the ScreenMaker output to the Home directory of the virtual controller system.
Restart the Virtual FlexPendant and the new application will be loaded.
Picture object and changing images due to I/O
The typical user objective is to have an image that changes when an I/O signal changes, this is common for a digital input to affect the state on the FlexPendant.
Actions
This is accomplished by adding an image and allowing the image to have multiple states.
Set AllowMultipleState to TRUE and set the Image state.
Create two states and add images for each state:
The Value property is extremely important. If binding to a digital input then there are two states for the input, 0 and 1. Set the Value property to the value of the
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Continues on next page
529
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.4 Frequently asked questions
Continued bound variable. 0 and 1 for digital input. It is also possible to bind to RAPID variables and have multiple states and values for the values in the RAPID variable.
Set the SelectedStateValue property to bind to a controller object:
How to get radio buttons to show state when entering
The objective is to have two radio buttons that controls one digital output. When the screen is loaded, the buttons should show the current state of the output.
Actions
Create a group or a panel and place the two radio buttons on the group or panel.
For button1, set the property default value to True and bind the property to the value of the controller digital output signal.
For button2, do not do any changes.
When the screen is loaded, the state of the two radio buttons is established correctly.
What is RAPID array
A RAPID array is a variable that contains more than one value. An index is used to indicate one of the values.
Sample RAPID array
Consider the following RAPID code.
VAR string part{3} := ["Shaft", "Pipe", "Cylinder"];
Here, ‘part’ is a RAPID array which consists of three values. The index of the array in part ranges from 1 to 3.
The index of a RAPID array should not be negative and should start with 1.
Screen navigation
Screen navigation in ScreenMaker follows a tree structure.
Consider the following example,
• To open screen A1, you first have to open Screen A
• To navigate from screen A1 to screen B1, you first have to close screen A1 and then Screen A and navigate from Main Screen through Screen B to screen B1.
• Similarly, to navigate from screen B1 to screen C1, you first have to close screen B1 and Screen B and then navigate from Main Screen through Screen
C to screen C1.
Continues on next page
530
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.4 Frequently asked questions
Continued en0900000645
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
531
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.1 Overview
15.5 Tutorial
15.5.1 Overview
About this chapter
This chapter is designed as a tutorial to take you through the steps involved in designing a FlexArc Operator Panel.
The FlexArc Operator Panel is a simple arc welding cell, where the robots can perform the following three different jobs.
Job
Produce
Service
Bull’s Eye
Description
Welding the part
Service the welding gun
Calibrate with bull’s eye
The FlexArc Operator Panel displays the following graphic elements:
• Controller Status (controller mode auto or manual and the RAPID execution status)
• Part Status (number of produced parts, the average cycle time per part, and a Reset button)
• Robot jobs (Produce, Service, and Bull’s Eye) and Robot locations (Robot at home position, service location, calibration location, and part location)
• Start and Stop buttons
532
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.2 Designing the FlexArc operator panel
15.5.2 Designing the FlexArc operator panel
Procedure
Use this procedure to design the FlexArc operator panel:
1
2
3
Action Info
Create a system for the FlexArc operator panel.
Select the following options,
• FlexPendant Interface
• PC Interface
For more information about creating a system, see
Creating a system from layout on page 208
.
Load EIO.cfg and MainModule.mod files.
For more information on loading these files, see
Loading a configuration file on page 375
and
Loading a RAPID module on page 423 .
By default:
• For Windows XP, the files can be found at C:\Documents and
Settings\<user name>\My Documents\RobotStudio\My
ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial
• For Windows 7, the files can be found at C:\Users\<user name>\Documents\RobotStudio\My ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial
The following signals are created after loading
EIO.cfg file en1000000464
4
5
6
Create an empty station in RobotStudio with the system created in the previous step.
For more information about creating a station, see
Launch ScreenMaker from RobotStudio.
For more information, see
Create a new ScreenMaker project.
For more informaton, see
Creating a new project on page 507
.
1 Enter the project name as Flex-
ArcGUI, and save it in the default location, C:\Users\<user name>\Documents\RobotStudio\My ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial.
2 A new tab MainScreenis added to the Design Surface.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
533
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.2 Designing the FlexArc operator panel
Continued
7
Action
Configure the Project properties.
8 Connect to the controller.
9 Create application variables (temporary variables) and configure them with the following data
Info
To customize how the GUI should appear on the FlexPendant, modify the Project properties. For more information, see
Modifying Project properties on page 516
.
For more information, see
Connecting to controller on page 517 .
The result appears in the output window.
en1000000360
Figure 15.1:
10
11
12
For more information, see
Managing application variables on page 522 .
Design the Main Screen.
For more information, see
Designing the screen on page 535 .
Build and Deploy the project.
Open virtual FlexPendant and test the GUI
For more information, see
Building and deploying the project on page 541 .
• In RobotStudio, press Ctrl+F5 to launch the virtual FlexPendant.
• Click FlexArc operator panel to launch the GUI.
Note
Ensure that you switch the controller to Auto mode and start the RAPID execution.
534
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.3 Designing the screen
15.5.3 Designing the screen
Introduction to designing the screen
A major effort in the GUI project development is designing screens. The Form designer in the ScreenMaker allows you to drag controls from the toolbox to the design surface. Using the Properties window, you can resize, position, label, color, and configure the controls.
Designing FlexArc Operator Panel screen
Use this procedure to design the FlexArc Operator Panel screen:
1 Drag a GroupBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window.
Property
Location
Size
Title
BackColor
Value
14,45
150,100
Controller Status
LightGray
2 Drag another GroupBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window.
Property
Location
Size
Title
BackColor
Value
14,170
150,204
Part Status
LightGray
3 Drag a ControllerModeStatus control from the Controller Data category; place it in the Controller Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
BackColor
Value
19,40
44,44
LightGray
4 Drag a RapidExecutionStatus control from the ControllerData category; place it in the Controller Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
BackColor
Value
80,40
44,44
LightGray
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
535
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.3 Designing the screen
Continued
5 Drag a TpsLabel control from the General category; place it in the Part Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Text
BackColor
Font
Value
16,30
131,20
Parts Produced
LightGray
TpsFont10
6 Drag a NumEditor control from the ControllerData category; place it in the
Parts Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Value
Value
16,56
116,23
Link to RAPID variable partsReady defined in the module
MainModule.
7 Drag another TpsLabel control from the General category; place it in the Part
Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Text
BackColor
Font
Value
16,89
131,20
Cycle time/part
LightGray
TpsFont10
8 Drag another NumEditor control from the General category; place it in the
Part Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Value
Value
16,115
116,23
Link to RAPID variable cycleTime defined in the module
MainModule.
9 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it in the Part Status group box created and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Text
Value
33,154
85,34
Reset
Continues on next page
536 3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.3 Designing the screen
Continued
Perform the following for the Reset button in the Part Status group:
Step Action
1
2
Double-click the button Reset. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.
In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data.
The Action Parameters dialog box appears; assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.
• T_ROB1.MainModule.partsReady to MyResetValue.Value
Similarly, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.
• T_ROB1.MainModule.cycleTime to MyResetValue.Value
Two actions of similar type are needed to perform the Reset action. One is to reset Rapid variable partsReady to 0, the other is to reset Rapid variable
cycleTime to 0.
10 Drag a PictureBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
SizeMode
Image
Value
177,28
284,359
StretchImage
FlexArcCell.GIF
Note
You can find the graphic (.GIF ) files at C:\MyDocuments\RobotStudio\My
ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial\Images.
11 Drag another PictureBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
SizeMode
Image
AllowMultipleStates
SlectedStateValue
States
Value
237,31
48,48
StretchImage
RobotAtHome.GIF
True
Select Image property from the StatesEditor dialog box.
DI_RobotAtHome
Link State{0} to RobotAtHome_gray.GIF
Link State{1} to RobotAtHome.GIF
Note
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Add AllowMultipleStates option to the PictureBox control. The objective is to have an image that changes when an I/O signal changes.
For more information on how to use AllowMultipleStates for PictureBox control, see
Picture object and changing images due to I/O on page 529
.
Continues on next page
537
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.3 Designing the screen
Continued
Continues on next page
538
12 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Text
Font
BackColor
Enabled
Value
486,66
116,105
Start
TpsFont20b
LimeGreen
Link to DI_RobotAtHome
Perform the following for the Start button:
Step Action
1
2
Double-click the button Start or click the Smart tag and select Define Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.
In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.
3 In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.
• T_ROB1.MainModule.JobProduce to JobProduce
13 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Text
Font
BackColor
Enabled
Value
486,226
116,105
Stop
TpsFont20b
LimeGreen
Link to DI_PRODUCE
Perform the following for the Stop button:
Step Action
1
2
3
Double-click the button Stop or click the Smart tag and select Define Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.
In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.
In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.
• T_ROB1.MainModule.JobIdle to JobIdle
14 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Value
274,246
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.3 Designing the screen
Continued
Property
Size
Text
Font
Enabled
AllowMultipleStates
SelectedStates
States
Value
111,47
Bull’s Eye
TpsFont14b
Link to DI_RobotAtHome
True
Select BackColor property from the StatesEditor dialog box
DI_RobotAtBull'sEye
Link State{0} to Red
Link State{1} to Green
Perform the following for the Bull’s Eye button:
Step
1
Action
Double-click the button Bull’s Eye or click the Smart tag and select Define
Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.
2
3
In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.
In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.
• T_ROB1.MainModule.JobBulls to JobBulls
15 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:
Property
Location
Size
Text
Font
Enabled
AllowMultipleStates
SelectedStates
States
Value
274,324
111,47
Service
TpsFont14b
Link to DI_RobotAtHome
True
Select BackColor property from the StatesEditor dialog box
DI_RobotAtService
Link State{0} to Red
Link State{1} to Green
Perform the following for the Service button:
Step Action
1
2
Double-click the button Service or click the Smart tag and select Define Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.
In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
539
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.3 Designing the screen
Continued
Step Action
3 In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.
• T_ROB1.MainModule.JobService to JobService
540
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
15 ScreenMaker tab
15.5.4 Building and deploying the project
15.5.4 Building and deploying the project
Procedure
1 From the ScreenMaker ribbon, click Build.
For more information on building the project, see
Building a project on page 518 .
2 From the ScreenMaker ribbon, click Deploy.
For more information on deploying the project, see
Deploying to controller on page 518
.
3 In RobotStudio, press Ctrl+F5 to launch the Virtual Flexpendant and click
FlexArc Operator Panel to open the GUI.
Note
Ensure that you start the RAPID execution and switch the controller into
Auto mode.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
541
This page is intentionally left blank
Index
Index
A
action instruction
Activate RobotStudio
alerts
Application Variables, 522 create,delete, rename application variables, 522
Login as a Different User, 385
B
Backup, 369 create backup, 369
Back up
browser
C
CAD file
CAD formats
collision
configuration
configuration monitoring
confJ
ConfL
Modify controller properties, 403
Read access to controller disks, 403
Write access to controller disks, 403
controller name, 59 controller state, 59
operating mode, 59 program execution state, 59 system name, 59
controller system
controller world coordinate system, 31
convert frame to workobject, 455
cycle tme
D
data binding
Controller object data binding, 524
Application variable data binding, 525
E
element
event
external axis
F
frame
converting to workobject, 106 crerating by points, 106
Frame
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
543
Index
G
geometry
H
date and time, 188 event category, 188 event code, 188 event description, 188
manage events, 189 retrieve controller events, 189
I
I/O
I/O signals, 180 input signals, 180 output signals, 180 simulated signals, 180 virtual signals, 180
item
J
jog
mechanism, 107 robot, 107 several mechanisms, 107
jointtarget
K
L
library
544
local coordinate system
local origin
M
Manage ScreenMaker project
ScreenMaker Doctor, 14, 503, 526
Manage ScreenMaker Project, 507
Managing ScreenMaker Projects
Modify project properties, 516
move instruction
Move instruction
MoveJ
MoveL
MultiMove
N
O
object
Offline and Online browser, 54
operator window, 61 enabling operator window, 61 show virtual operator window, 61
output window, 58 event types, 58
P
part
Password, change for user, 398
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Index
creating, 110 creating from curve, 110 reversing, 110
setting axis configuration, 110
process time
program
programming
View controller and system properties, 391
Properties Window
Graphical Component Name panel, 506
Properties window toolbar, 506
R
RAPID
reachability
robot
adding an existing system, 209 adding a template system, 209 conveyor setup, 209
create system from layout, 208
remove objects from conveyor, 210
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
S
signals
simulate
station
station world coordiante system, 29
synchronization, 136 station to VC, 136
system
about virtual and real systems, 160
create system from backup, 172
download a system to controller, 173
viewing system properties, 162
System Configuration, 410 controller values, 410
stored station values, 411 used current station values, 411
T
creating, 108 modifying, 108 modifying with ModPos, 108
TCP trace
ToolBox
545
Index
Tool Center Point coordinate system, 29
track
U
V
Virtual FlexPendant operator window, 61
W
workobject
546
© Copyright 2008-2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC032104-001 Revision: L
Contact us
ABB AB
Discrete Automation and Motion
Robotics
S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS, Sweden
Telephone +46 (0) 21 344 400
ABB AS, Robotics
Discrete Automation and Motion
Box 265
N-4349 BRYNE, Norway
Telephone: +47 51489000
ABB Engineering (Shanghai) Ltd.
5 Lane 369, ChuangYe Road
KangQiao Town, PuDong District
SHANGHAI 201319, China
Telephone: +86 21 6105 6666 www.abb.com/robotics
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Modeling robot cells
Offline programming
Simulation of robot cells
Create, program and simulate robot cells and stations
Explains the terms and concepts related to both offline and online programming
Frequently asked questions
It is a PC application for modeling, offline programming, and simulation of robot cells.
It can be used to create, program and simulate robot cells and stations. It also explains the terms and concepts related to both offline and online programming.
It is intended for RobotStudio users, proposal engineers, mechanical designers, offline programmers, robot technicians, service technicians, PLC programmers, Robot programmers, and Robot System integrators.